HomeMy WebLinkAboutSPECIFICATIONS - Cornell - Carpenter Hall Renovations MARKUP18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
00 0110 - 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 00 0110
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
1.01 DIVISION 00 -- PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
A.00 0110 - Table of Contents
B.00 0115 - List of Drawing Sheets
SPECIFICATIONS
2.01 DIVISION 01 -- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.01 4533 - Code-Required Special Inspections & Procedures
2.02 DIVISION 02 -- EXISTING CONDITIONS
A.02 0620 Selective Demolition
2.03 DIVISION 03 -- CONCRETE
A.03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing
B.03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
C.03 3511 - Concrete Floor Finishes
2.04 DIVISION 04 -- MASONRY
A.04 2000 - Unit Masonry
2.05 DIVISION 05 -- METALS
A.05 1000 - Structural Metal Framing
B.05 5113 - Metal Stairs
C.05 5305 - Metal Gratings and Floor Plates
2.06 DIVISION 06 -- WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
A.06 1000 - Rough Carpentry
B.06 2000 - Finish Carpentry
C.06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework
2.07 DIVISION 07 -- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
A.07 1300 - Sheet Waterproofing
B.07 4213 - Metal Wall Panels
C.07 8400 - Firestopping
D.07 9200 - Joint Sealants
2.08 DIVISION 08 -- OPENINGS
A.08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
B.08 7101 - Door Hardware Schedule
C.08 7102 - Door Hardware
D.08 8000 - Glazing
2.09 DIVISION 09 -- FINISHES
A.09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies
B.09 6500 - Resilient Flooring
C.09 9113 - Exterior Painting
D.09 9123 - Interior Painting
2.10 DIVISION 10 -- SPECIALTIES
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
00 0110 - 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS
A.10 2601 - Wall and Corner Guards
B.10 4400 - Fire Protection Specialties
2.11 DIVISION 11 -- EQUIPMENT
A.11 5213 - Projection Screens
2.12 DIVISION 12 -- FURNISHINGS (NOT USED)
2.13 DIVISION 13 -- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
A.13 2800 – Asbestos Removal
B.13 4313 - Integrated Prefabricated Interior Construction
2.14 DIVISION 14 -- CONVEYING EQUIPMENT (NOT USED)
2.15 DIVISION 21 -- FIRE SUPPRESSION (NOT USED)
2.16 DIVISION 22 -- PLUMBING
A.22 1005 - Plumbing Piping
B.22 1006 - Plumbing Piping Specialties
2.17 DIVISION 23 -- HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)
A.23 0513 - Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment
B.23 0519 - Meters and Gauges for HVAC Piping
C.23 0523 - General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping
D.23 0529 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment
E.23 0553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment
F.23 0593 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC
G.23 0713 - Duct Insulation
H.23 0716 - HVAC Equipment Insulation
I.23 0719 - HVAC Piping Insulation
J.23 0913 - Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC
K.23 0923 - Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC
L.23 2113 - Hydronic Piping
M.23 2123 - Hydronic Pumps
N.23 3100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings
O.23 3300 - Air Duct Accessories
P.23 3423 - HVAC Power Ventilators
Q.23 3514 - Dust Collection Equipment
R.23 3700 - Air Outlets and Inlets
S.23 7313 - Modular Indoor Central-Station Air-Handling Units
2.18 DIVISION 26 -- ELECTRICAL
A.26 0505 - Selective Demolition for Electrical
B.26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
C.26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
D.26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
E.26 0533.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems
F.26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
00 0110 - 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS
G.26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems
H.26 0583 - Wiring Connections
I.26 0923 - Lighting Control Devices
J.26 2416 - Panelboards
K.26 2726 - Wiring Devices
L.26 2813 - Fuses
M.26 2913 - Enclosed Controllers
N.26 2923 - Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers
O.26 5100 - Interior Lighting
P.26 5600 - Exterior Lighting
2.19 DIVISION 27 -- COMMUNICATIONS
A.27 1005 - Structured Cabling for Voice and Data - Inside-Plant
B.27 1501.23 - Audio-Visual Communications Horizontal Cabling
2.20 DIVISION 28 -- ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
A.28 1000 - Access Control
B.28 4600 - Fire Detection and Alarm
2.21 DIVISION 31 -- EARTHWORK
A.31 2000 - Excavations
2.22 DIVISION 32 -- EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS (NOT USED)
2.23 DIVISION 33 -- UTILITIES (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION 00 0110
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
014533
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE : 1/28/19 Page 1 of 8
014533
CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Special Inspections and Testing shall be in accordance with Chapter 17 of the
International Building Code, adopted 2015.
B. The program of Special Inspection and Testing is a Quality Assurance program intended to ensure
that the work is performed in accordance with the Contract Documents.
C. This Specification Section is intended to inform the Contractor of the Owner’s quality
assurance program and the extent of the Contractor’s responsibilities. This Specification Section
also serves to inform the Special Inspector and Inspection and Testing Agents of their
requirements and responsibilities.
1.03 SCHEDULE OF INSPECTIONS AND TESTS
A. Required inspections and tests are described in the Schedule at the end of this section.
1.04 QUALIFICATIONS
A. The Special Inspector shall have extensive experience in the building design and
construction industry, be professionally trained in engineering, and be approved by the Design
Professional in Responsible Charge and the Code Enforcement Official.
B. The Inspection and Testing Agents, including testing laboratories, shall be approved by the
Owner’s Representative and the Code Enforcement Official.
C. The following specific requirements for Inspection and Testing Agents may be waived by the
Code Enforcement Official.
1. Inspectors performing inspections of soils and foundations shall have an education and
background in geotechnical engineering.
2. The testing laboratories shall maintain a full time licensed Professional Engineer on staff
who shall certify all test reports. This Engineer shall be responsible for the training of the
testing technicians and shall be in responsible charge of the field and laboratory testing
operations.
3. Technicians performing sampling and testing of concrete shall be ACI certified Concrete
Field Testing Technicians - Grade 1.
4. Inspectors performing inspections of concrete work such as inspections of concrete
placement, batching, reinforcing placement, curing and protection, shall be ACI certified
Concrete Construction Inspectors or ICBO certified Reinforced Conc rete Special Inspector in
lieu of being a licensed P.E. or EIT.
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
014533
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE : 1/28/19 Page 2 of 8
5. Inspectors performing inspections of masonry shall be ICBO certified Structural
Masonry Special Inspectors.
6. Inspectors performing inspections of structural steel shall be individuals who are either
licensed Professional Engineers (P.E.) or Engineers-In-Training (EIT) with an education and
background in structural engineering, and ICBO certified as Structural Steel Special
Inspectors.
7. Technicians performing visual inspection of welding shall be AWS Certified Welding
Inspectors or ICBO certified Structural Steel and Welding Special Inspectors. Technicians
performing non-destructive testing such as ultrasonic testing, radiographic testing, magnetic
particle testing, or dye-penetrant testing shall be certified as an ASNT-TC Level II or Level
III Technician.
8. Inspectors performing inspections of spray fireproofing shall be ICBO certified Spray-
Applied Fireproofing Special Inspectors.
9. Technicians performing standard tests described by specific ASTM Standards shall have
training in the performance of such tests and must be able to demonstrate either by oral
or written examination competence for the test to be conducted. They shall be under the
supervision the Owner’s Representative and shall not be permitted to independently
evaluate test results.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. The Special Inspector and Inspection and Testing Agents shall submit to the Owner’s
Representative and the Code Enforcement Official for review a copy of their
qualifications which shall include the names and qualifications of each of the individual
inspectors and technicians who will be performing inspections or tests.
B. The Special Inspector and Inspection and Testing Agents shall disclose any past or present
business relationship or potential conflict of interest with the Contractor or any of the
Subcontractors whose work will be inspected or tested.
1.06 PAYMENT
A. The Owner will engage and pay for the services of the Special Inspector and Inspection and
Testing Agents.
B. If any materials which require Special Inspections are fabricated in a plant which is not located
within 100 miles of the project, the Contractor shall be responsible for the travel expenses of the
Special Inspector or Inspection and Testing Agents.
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of any retesting or reinspection of work which
fails to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.07 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Special Inspector and the Inspection and Testing
Agents so that the Special Inspections and Testing may be performed without hindrance.
B. The Contractor shall provide adequate OSHA-compliant access for the Special Inspector and the
Inspection and Testing Agents, for them to perform their work.
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
014533
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE : 1/28/19 Page 3 of 8
C. The Contractor shall review the Statement of Special Inspections and shall be
responsible for coordinating and scheduling inspections and tests. The Contractor shall notify
the Special Inspector or Inspection and Testing Agents at least 24 hours in advance of a
required test, and 3 working days in advance of a required inspection. Un- inspected work that
required inspection may be rejected solely on that basis.
D. The Contractor shall provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to the work to be
inspected or tested, to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested,
to facilitate tests and inspections, storage and curing of test samples.
E. The Contractor shall keep at the project site the latest set of construction drawings, field
sketches, approved shop drawings, and specifications for use by the Special Inspector and
Inspection and Testing Agents.
F. The Special Inspection program shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his obligation to perform
work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents or from implementing an
effective Quality Control program. All work that is to be subjected to Special Inspection and
Testing shall first be reviewed by the Contractor’s quality control personnel.
G. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for construction site safety.
1.08 LIMITS ON AUTHORITY
A. The Special Inspector or the Inspection and Testing Agents may not release, revoke, alter, or
enlarge on the requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. The Special Inspector and the Inspection and Testing Agents will not have control over the
Contractor’s means and methods of construction.
C. The Special Inspector or the Inspection and Testing Agents shall not be responsible for
construction site safety.
D. The Special Inspector or the Inspection and Testing Agents have no authority to stop the work.
1.09 STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
A. The Statement of Special Inspections will be prepared by the Owner’s Representative in
Responsible Charge.
B. The Statement of Special Inspections shall be submitted to the Code Enforcement
Official with the application for Building Permit.
1.10 RECORDS AND REPORTS
A. Inspection and Testing Agents shall prepare detailed daily reports of each inspection or test and
submit to the Special Inspector. Reports shall include:
1. Date of test or inspection.
2. Name of inspector or technician.
3. Location of specific areas tested or inspected.
4. Description of test or inspection and results.
5. Applicable ASTM standard.
6. Weather conditions (for site inspections or testing).
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
014533
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE : 1/28/19 Page 4 of 8
7. Signature of inspector, or of the individual overseeing the testing.
B. The Special Inspector shall report any discrepancies from the Contract Documents found
during an inspection. If the discrepancies are not corrected during the inspection, the Special
Inspector shall notify the Owner’s Representative and Code Enforcement Official. Reports
shall document all discrepancies identified and the corrective action taken.
C. The Testing Laboratory shall promptly notify the Special Inspector and the Owner’s
Representative by telephone, fax or email of any test results which fail to comply with the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
D. The Inspection and Testing Agents shall submit reports to the Special Inspector within 7 days of
the inspection or test. Handwritten reports may be submitted if final typed copies are not
available.
E. At the completion of the work requiring Special Inspections, each Inspection and Testing Agent,
including laboratories, shall provide a statement to the Special Inspector that all work was
completed in substantial conformance with the Contract Documents and that all appropriate
inspections and tests were performed.
1.11 FINAL REPORT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
A. The Final Report of Special Inspections shall be completed by the Special Inspector and submitted
to the Owner’s Representative and Code Enforcement Official prior to the issuance of a Certificate
of Use and Occupancy.
B. The Final Report of Special Inspections will certify that all required inspections have been
performed and will itemize any discrepancies that were not corrected or resolved.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3: EXECUTION
Not Used
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
014533
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Page 5 of 8
PART 4 – SCHEDULE
INSPECTION AND TESTING
(Continuous & Periodic is
as Defined by the BCNYS) CONTINUOUS PERIODIC REFERENCE STANDARD BCNYS REFERENCE CHECK IF REQUIRED
IDENTIFY SPEC
SECTION AND
PROVIDE
CLARIFYING NOTES
IF NECESSARY
A. Steel Construction
1. Material verification of
high-strength bolts,
nuts and washers.
X Applicable ASTM
material
specifications.
AISC ASD,
Section A3.4;
AISC LRFD,
Section A3.3
1704.3 √ Spec 051223
2. Inspection of high-
strength bolting.
X X AISC LRFD,
Section M2.5
1704.3,
1704.3.3 √ Spec 051223
3. Material verification of
structural steel.
ASTM A 6 or A
568
1704.3,
1708.4 √ Spec 051223
4. Material verification of
weld filler materials.
AISC, ASD,
Section A3.6;
AISC LRFD,
Section A3.5
1704.3
5. Inspection of welding:
a. Structural steel √ Spec 051223
(1) Groove Welds X AWS D1.1 1704.3.1
(2) MP Fillet Welds X AWS D1.1 1704.3.1
(3) SP Fillet >5/16” X AWS D1.1 1704.3.1
(4) SP Fillet <= 5/16” X AWS D1.1 1704.3.1 √ Spec 051223
(5) Flr & Deck W elds X AWS D1.3 -
b. Reinforcing steel X AWS D1.4
ACI 318: 3.5.2
1903.5.2
6. Inspection of steel
frame joint details.
X 1704.3.2 √ Spec 051223
B. Concrete
Construction
1. Inspection of
reinforcing steel,
including prestressing
tendons, and
placement.
X ACI 318: 3.5, 7.1-
7.7
1704.4,
1903.5,
1907.1,
1907.7,
1914.4
√ Spec 033100
2. Inspection of
reinforcing steel
welding.
AWS D1.4; ACI
318: 3.5.2
1704.4,
1903.5.2
3. Inspection of bolts to
be installed in concrete
prior to and during
placement.
X 1704.4,
1912.5 √ Spec 033100
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
014533
DAT E: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Page 6 of 8
INSPECTION AND TESTING
(Continuous & Periodic is
as Defined by the BCNYS) CONTINUOUS PERIODIC REFERENCE STANDARD BCNYS REFERENCE CHECK IF REQUIRED
IDENTIFY SPEC
SECTION AND
PROVIDE
CLARIFYING NOTES
IF NECESSARY
4. Verify use of required
design mix.
X ACI 318: Ch. 4,
5.2-5.4
1704.4,
1904,
1905.2-
1905.4,
1914.2,
1914.3
√ Spec 033100
5. Sampling fresh
concrete: slump, air
content, temperature,
strength test
specimens.
X ASTM C 172, C
31; ACI 318: 5.6,
5.8
1704.4,
1905.6,
1914.10
√ Spec 033100
6. Inspection of
placement for proper
application techniques.
X ACI, 318: 5.9, 5.10 1704.4,
1905.9,
1905.10,
1914.6,
1914.7,
1914.8
√ Spec 033100
7. Inspection for
maintenance of
specified curing
temperature and
techniques.
X ACI, 318: 5.11,
5.13
1704.4,
1905.11,
1905.13,
1914.9
√ Spec 033100
8. Inspection of
prestressed concrete.
X ACI 318: 18.18,
18.164
1704.4
9. Erection of precast
concrete members.
X ACI 318: Ch. 16 1704.4
10. Verification of in-situ
concrete strength prior
to stressing of tendons
and prior to removal of
shores and forms from
beams and slabs.
X SVI 318: 6.2 1704.4,
1906.2
C. Masonry
Construction
L1 = Level 1 Inspection
required for nonessential
facilities.
L2 = Level 2 Inspection
required for essential
facilities. In general,
schools are not considered
essential facilities unless
they are a designated
emergency shelter.
ACI
530/
ASCE
5/TMS
402,
Ch. 35
ACI
530.1/
ASCE
6/TMS
602,
Ch. 35
Masonry
Foundations
require Level 1
inspection.
1. Verify to ensure
compliance:
Spec 042200
a. Proportions of site
prepared mortar
X
L1
2.6A 1704.5 Spec 042200
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
014533
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Page 7 of 8
INSPECTION AND TESTING
(Continuous & Periodic is
as Defined by the BCNYS) CONTINUOUS PERIODIC REFERENCE STANDARD BCNYS REFERENCE CHECK IF REQUIRED
IDENTIFY SPEC
SECTION AND
PROVIDE
CLARIFYING NOTES
IF NECESSARY
and grout. L2
b. Placement of masonry
units and construction of
mortar joints.
X
L1
L2
3.3B 1704.5 Spec 042200
c. Location and placement
of reinforcement,
connectors, tendons,
anchorages.
X
L1
L2
3.4,
3.6A
1704.5 Spec 042200
d. Prestressing technique
and installation.
X
L1
L2
3.6A,
3.6B
1704.5
e. Grade and size of
tendons and anchorages.
X
L1
L2
2.4B,
2.4H
1704.5
f. Grout specs prior to
grouting.
X
L2
3.2D 1704.5
g. Placement of grout. X
L2
3.5 1704.5 Spec 042200
h. Grouting of tendons. X
L2
3.6C 1704.5
2. Inspection shall verify: 1704.5 Spec 042200
a. Size and location of
structural elements.
X
L1
L2
3.3G 1704.5 Spec 042200
b. Type, size, and location
of anchors.
X
L2
X
L1
1.15.4,
2.1.1
1704.5 Spec 042200
c. Specified size, grade,
and type of reinforcement.
X
L1
L2
1012 2.4, 3.4 1704.5 Spec 042200
d. Welding of reinforcing
bars.
X
L1
L2
2.1.8.6,
2.1.8.6
1704.5,
2108.9.2.11
e. Cold/hot weather
protection of masonry
construction.
X
L1
L2
108 1704.5,
2104.3,
2104.4
Spec 042200
f. Prestressing force
measurement and
application.
X
L2
X
L1
3.6B 1704.5
3. Inspection prior to
grouting.
X
L1
L2
1.12 3.2D,
3.4,
2.6B,
3.3B
1704.5 Spec 042200
4. Grout placement. X
L1
L2
3.5,
3.6C
1704.5 Spec 042200
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
014533
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Page 8 of 8
INSPECTION AND TESTING
(Continuous & Periodic is
as Defined by the BCNYS) CONTINUOUS PERIODIC REFERENCE STANDARD BCNYS REFERENCE CHECK IF REQUIRED
IDENTIFY SPEC
SECTION AND
PROVIDE
CLARIFYING NOTES
IF NECESS ARY
5. Preparation of grout
specimens, mortar
specimens, and/or
prisms.
X
L1
L2
1.4 1704.5 Spec 042200
6. Compliance with
documents and
submittals.
X
L1
L2
1.5 1704.5 Spec 042200
D. Wood Construction:
Fabrication of wood
structured elements and
assemblies.
X 1704.6,
1704.2
E. Soils
1. Site preparation. 1704.7.1 √
2. During fill placement. X 1704.7.2 √ Spec 312000
3. Evaluation of in-place
density.
X 1704.7.3 √ Spec 312000
F. Pile Foundations:
Installation and load tests.
X 1704.8 Spec 31 09 16
& 316216
G. Pier Foundations:
Seismic Design Category
C, D, E. F.
1704.9,
1616.3
H. Wall Panels and
Veneers: Seismic Design
Category E, F.
1704.10,
1616.3,
1704.5
I. Sprayed Fire Resistant
Materials
1. Structural member
surface conditions
X 1704.11.1 Spec 078100
2. Application
3. Thickness X ASTM E605 1704.11.3 Spec 078100
4. Density X ASTM E605 1704.11.4 Spec 078100
5. Bond Stength X ASTM E736 1704.11.5 Spec 078100
END OF SECTION 014533
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
02 0620 - 1 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
SECTION 02 0620
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.Extent of selective demolition work as indicated on drawings.
1.03 JOB CONDITIONS
A.Occupancy: Owner will be continuously occupying areas of the building immediately adjacent
to areas of selective demolition. Conduct selective demolition work in manner that will
minimize need for disruption of Owner's normal operations. Provide minimum of 72 hours
advance notice to Owner of demolition activities which will impact Owner's normal operations.
B.Condition of Structures: Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items or
structures to be demolished.
C.Conditions existing at time of commencement of Contract will be maintained by Owner insofar
as practicable. However, variations within structure may occur by Owner's removal and
salvage operations prior to start of selective demolition work.
D.Partial Demolition and Removal: Items indicated to be removed but of salvable value to
Contractor may be removed from structure as work progresses. Transport salvaged items from
site as they are removed.
1.Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted.
E.Protections: Provide and maintain temporary barricades and other forms of protection as
required to protect Owner's personnel and general public from injury due to selective
demolition work.
1.Provide and maintain protective measures as required to maintain free and safe passage
of Owner's personnel and general public to and from occupied portions of building.
2.Erect and maintain temporary covered passageways as required by authorities having
jurisdiction.
3.Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent
movement, settlement, or collapse of structure or element to be demolished, and adjacent
facilities or work to remain.
4.Protect from damage existing finish work that is to remain in place and becomes exposed
during demolition operations.
5.Protect floors with suitable coverings when necessary.
6.Construct and maintain temporary insulated solid dustproof partitions where required to
separate areas where noisy or extensive dirt or dust operations are performed. Equip
partitions with dustproof doors and security locks if required.
7.Provide and maintain temporary weather protection during interval between demolition
and removal of existing construction on exterior surfaces, and installation of new
construction to insure that no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior
areas of existing building.
8.Remove protections at completion of work
F.Damages: Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition work at no cost
to Owner.
G.Traffic: Conduct selective demolition operations and debris removal in a manner to ensure
minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
02 0620 - 2 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
1.Do not close, block or otherwise obstruct streets, walks or other occupied or used
facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate
routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations.
H.Explosives: Use of explosives will not be permitted.
I.Utility Services: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain, keep in service, and protect
against damage during demolition operations.
1.Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except when
authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during
interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to governing authorities.
J.Environmental Controls: Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable
methods to limit dust and dirt rising and scattering in air to lowest practical level. Comply with
governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection.
1.Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice,
flooding, or pollution.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A.Prior to commencement of selective demolition work, inspect areas in which work will be
performed. Photograph existing conditions of structure, surfaces, equipment, or of surrounding
properties which could be misconstrued as damage resulting from selective demolition work.
Submit copies of photographs to Architect/Engineer prior to starting work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement,
settlement or collapse of structures to be demolished and adjacent facilities to remain.
1.Cease operations and notify the Architect/Engineer immediately if safety of structure
appears to be endangered. Take precautions to support structure until determination is
made for continuing operations.
B.Cover and protect furniture, equipment and fixtures to remain from soiling or damage until
demolition work performed in rooms or areas from which such items have not been removed is
complete.
1.Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and closures as required to prevent spread of
dust or fumes to occupied portions of the building.
2.Where no asbestos abatement work is to follow selective demolitions and the work is
immediately adjacent to occupied portions of the building, construct and maintain
dustproof partitions of minimum 3-5/8 inch steel studs, 5/8 inch fire-rated drywall (joints
taped) on occupied side, and fill partition cavity with sound-deadening insulation.
3.Provide and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior openings resulting from
demolition work.
3.03 DEMOLITION
A.Perform selective demolition work in a systematic manner. Use such methods as required to
complete work indicated on Drawings in accordance with demolition schedule and governing
regulations.
B.Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry at junctures with
construction to remain using power-driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not use
power-driven impact tools.
C.Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and promptly remove debris to avoid
imposing excessive loads on supporting walls, floors or framing.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
02 0620 - 3 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
D.Provide and maintain services for effective air and water pollution controls as required by local
authorities having jurisdiction.
E.Demolish foundation walls to a depth of not less than 12 inches below existing ground surface.
Demolish and remove below-grade wood or metal construction. Break up below-grade
concrete slabs.
F.For interior slabs on grade, use removal methods that will not crack or structurally disturb
adjacent slabs or partitions. Use power saw where possible.
G.Completely fill below-grade areas and voids resulting from demolition work. Provide fill
consisting of approved earth, gravel or sand, free of trash and debris, stones over 6 inch
diameter, roots or other organic matter.
H.If unanticipated mechanical, electrical or structural elements which conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent of the
conflict. Submit report to Architect/Engineer in written, accurate detail. Pending receipt of
directive from Project Manager rearrange selective demolition schedule as necessary to
continue overall job progress without delay.
I.Lead contamination: If a disturbance of lead occurs, stop the work and immediately notify the
Architect/ Engineer.
J.Asbestos contamination: If a disturbance of ACM occurs, stop the work and immediately notify
the Architect/Engineer.
3.04 SALVAGE MATERIALS
A.Salvage Items: Where indicated on Drawings as "Salvage - Deliver to Owner", carefully
remove indicated items, clean, store, deliver to Owner designated storage areas, and obtain
receipt.
1.Historic artifacts, including cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and
tablets, antiques, and other articles of historic significance remain the property of the
Owner. Notify Architect/Engineer if such items are encountered and obtain acceptance
regarding method of removal and salvage for Owner.
3.05 HAZARDOUS WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL.
A.Manage and dispose of hazardous waste such as PCB ballasts, fluorescent light tubes, and
mercury thermostats in accordance with the requirements of Section 02 0860 - Hazardous
Waste Management.
B.Do not mix potentially hazardous waste streams. Where feasible, separate each type of
hazardous waste from other types of hazardous wastes, from asbestos waste and from
construction waste.
C.Segregate, package, label, transport and dispose of Hazardous Waste in accordance with
DOT, EPA, State and Local regulations.
3.06 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A.Remove debris, rubbish and other materials resulting from demolition operations from building
site. Transport and legally dispose of materials off site. All costs associated with the
transporting and disposal of all debris, rubbish, etc. shall be included in the Base Bid.
B.If hazardous non-asbestos containing materials are encountered during demolition operations,
comply with applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal, handling and
protection against exposure or environmental pollution.
C.Burning of removed materials is not permitted on project site.
3.07 CLEAN-UP AND REPAIR
A.Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment and demolished materials from
site.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
02 0620 - 4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
B.Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return structures and surfaces to
remain to condition existing prior to commencement of selective demolition work. Repair
adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by selective demolition work.
C.Perform all repair work in asbestos abatement Work Areas after completion of asbestos
abatement work.
END OF SECTION 02 0620
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC CONCRETE REINFORCING 032000
DAT E: 1/28/19 DAT E: 1/28/19 Page 1 of 2
032000
CONCRETE REINFORCING
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 CLEAR COVER AND TOLERANCES
A. Structura l dra wings shall indicate clear cover and allowable tolerances of steel
reinforcement and welded wire mesh when they are more restrictive than ACI
standards.
1.02 REINFORCEMENT SUPPORT SUBMITTALS
A. The size, spacing, and type of reinforcement supports/bolsters shall be included in
reinforcement submittals.
1.03 REBAR DETAILING
A. Structura l engineer shall provide a detail for additional bars placed at re-entrant
corners, slab penetrations, and embedded assemblies to restra in concrete cracking.
B. Structura l engineer shall provide negative reinforcement over girders in composite
floor systems for crack control. Bars shall extend 36 in. each side beyond beam
cent erline and shall be set on chairs 1 in. from the concrete surface. These bars can
be used to assist with proper welded wire fabric placement.
1.04 PRODUCTS
A. Bar Reinforcement: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed steel bars.
B. Fabric Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, welded wire fabric, fabricated into flat sheets
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Bar Supports; Either of the Following Types:
a. Galvanized steel or AISI Type 430 stainless steel, and without plastic tips.
b. Insoluble plastic, with minimum 1,500 psi tensile strength and capable of
retaining fabricated shape at temperatures between 5 degrees F and 170 degrees
F.
c. Solid concrete brick
D. Fabric Reinforcement Supports:
a. Uni Zag by Universal Form Clamp, 840 South 25th Avenue, Bellwood, IL
60104, (800)728-1958.
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC CONCRETE REINFORCING 032000
DAT E: 1/28/19 DAT E: 1/28/19 Page 2 of 2
b. Continuous Support, “CS” by Dayton Superior, 721 Richard Street,
Miamisburg, OH 45342, (800) 745-3700.
c. Solid concrete brick
E. Tie Wire: Black annealed wire, 16-1/2 gage or heavier.
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Pa ge 1 of
033000
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes Cast-in-place (CIP) structural concrete, including;
1. Concrete Formwork and Formwork Accessories
2. Concrete Mixtures and Admixtures
3. Steel Concrete Reinforcement and Accessories
4. Vapor Barrier under Slabs on Grade
5. Curing compounds
6. Grout
7. Crack repair and epoxy adhesives
8. Joint fillers and sealants
9. Waterstop
10. Handling, placing, and constructing
11. Lightweight Concrete composite deck fill.
12. Evaporation Reducer for Plastic Concrete for Elevated Slabs
B. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section:
1. Dovetail slot anchors, inserts and reinforcing steel required for the attachment of
masonry to concrete. Refer to Unit Masonry-Section 042000.
2. Anchor rods, leveling plates, railing sleeves, brackets, and other embedded items
of steel, vinyl, plastic, or other materials. Refer to Structural Steel-Section
051200, and Metal Fabrications –Section 055000 or other specification sections
where the embedded item is described.
3. Sleeves for pipe, conduit and other items passing through or embedded in
concrete. Refer to the specification section where the item is described.
C. Related Sections.
1. Code Required Special Inspections and Procedures – Section 014533
2. Unit Masonry – Section 042000
3. Steel Piles – Section 316216
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. ACI 301, Section 1.2 - Definitions:
1. Add the following definitions:
Cementitious Material: Cementitious materials include cement, ground blast
furnace slag and fly ash.
Corrosion Inhibitor Admixture: A liquid admixture, calcium nitrite that inhibits
corrosion of concrete-embedded steel in the presence of chloride ions.
Pumped Concrete: Concrete that is conveyed by pumping pressure through rigid
pipe or flexible hose.
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Pa ge 2 of
Water-to-Cementitious Ratio (w/c): An equational value representing quantity in
pounds of free moisture available for cement hydration divided by quantity of
cementitious materials in pounds per cubic yard concrete.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. Work on this project shall conform to all requirements of ACI 301-05 published by the
American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, Michigan, except as modified by these
Contract Documents.
B. Reference publications
1. ACI 301-10: Specifications for Structural Concrete.
2. ACI 302.1R-15: Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.
3. ACI 304.2R-96: Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods.
4. ACI 305.1R-06: Hot Weather Concreting.
5. ACI 306R-10: Cold Weather Concreting .
6. ACI 308.1-11: Standard Specification for Curing Concrete.
7. ACI 318-14 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
8. ASTM C 94/C 94M - 04: Standard Specification for Ready- Mixed Concrete.
9. ASTM C 494/C 494M - 04: Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for
Concrete.
10. ASTM C 311-77 Standard Methods of Sampling and Testing Fly Ash or Natural
Pozzolans For Use As A Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete.
11. Manual of Standard Practice, MSP-1-01 of the Concrete Reinforcing Steel
Institute.
1.04 STANDARDS PRODUCING ORGANIZATIONS
A. Refer to ACI 301-10
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals Package: Submit product data for design mix(es) and materials for concrete
specified below at the same time as a package.
B. Product Data:
1. Mix Design: Submit proposed concrete design mix(es) together with name and
location of batching plant at least 28 days prior to the start of concrete work.
a. Include test results of proposed concrete proportions based on previous
field experience or laboratory trial batches in accordance with ACI 301,
Section 4.
b. Pumped Concrete: Include test results of proposed design mix(es) tested
under actual field conditions with the maximum horizontal run and vertical
lift required for this project.
2. Portland Cement: Brand and manufacturer’s name.
3. Fly Ash: Name and location of source, and DOT test numbers.
4. Air-entraining Admixture: Brand and manufacturer’s name.
5. Water-reducing Admixture: Brand and manufacturer’s name.
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Pa ge 3 of
6. High Range Water-reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer): Brand and
manufacturer’s name.
7. Accelerating Admixture (if used): Brand and manufacturer’s name.
8. Aggregates: Name and location of source, and DOT test numbers.
9. Light Weight Aggregate: Name and location of supplier and DOT test numbers.
10. Bonding Agent (Adhesive): Brand and manufacturer’s name, and preparation and
application instructions.
11. Contraction Joint Fillers: Brand and manufacturer’s name.
12. Waterstop: Brand and manufacturer’s name, and installation instructions.
13. Vapor Barrier: Brand and manufacturer’s name.
C. Reinforcing Steel
1. Shop Drawings: Placing drawings for bar reinforcement.
2. Affidavit by the bar reinforcement manufacturer certifying that bar material meets
the contract requirements.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 014533-Code Required Special Inspections and Procedures, for Concrete
Construction inspection and testing to be performed by the Owner’s Inspection and
Testing Agency.
B. Qualifications of Crew Pumping Concrete: Workers pumping concrete shall have had at
least one year of experience pumping concrete.
C. Concrete batching plants shall be currently approved as concrete suppliers by the New
York State Department of Transportation.
D. Truck mixers for concrete shall be currently approved by the New York State Department
of Transportation.
E. Pumping equipment for pumped concrete shall be subject to the approval of the Architect.
F. Fly ash supplier shall be on the New York State Department of Transportation’s current
“Approved List of Suppliers of Fly Ash”.
G. Source Quality Control: The Owner reserves the right to inspect and approve the
following items, at his own discretion, either with his own forces or with a designated
inspection agency:
1. Batching and mixing facilities and equipment.
2. Sources of materials.
H. Pre-Construction Conference: Attend a Pre-Construction Conference at the job site
conducted by the Architect’s Representative prior to the start of concrete placement for
the purpose of reviewing the requirements and procedures of the Contract Documents.
I. Field Quality Control
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Pa ge 4 of
1. ACI 301, Section 1.6.4.2 - Testing Services:
a. Add the following paragraph:
1.6.4.2.e Strength Tests for Pumped Concrete: Prepare strength test
specimens and make strength tests from concrete samples obtained at the
truck discharge chute and at the end of the pump delivery line in
accordance with paragraph 16.3.4.4.
2. ACI 301, Section 1.6.3.3.
a. Add the following paragraph:
1.6.3.3.c Make available to the Owner’s Inspections and Testing Agency
whatever test samples are required to make tests. Furnish shipping boxes
for compression test cylinders.
3. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by the
Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results,
or other circumstances warrant, at no additional cost to the Owner and as accepted
by the Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results
must be submitted to and accepted by the Architect’s Representative before using
in the work.
4. Test results will be reported by the Owner’s Testing Agency in writing to the
Architect’s Representative and Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of
compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and
number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete
type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength
at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking
strength, and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests.
5. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, Windsor probe, or other nondestructive
device may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or
rejection.
6. Additional Tests: The Architect shall require additional tests of in-place concrete
when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics
have not been attained in the structure, as directed by the Architect’s
Representative. The Owner’s Testing Agency may conduct tests to determine
adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other
methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests when unacceptable
concrete is verified, including all inspection and Engineering fees when non-
conforming work is verified.
1.07 DELIVERY
A. ASTM C 94/C 94M - 04, Article 13.1 - Batch Ticket Information: In addition to the
information required by Paragraph 16.1, also include the following:
1. Type and brand, and amount of cement.
2. Weights of fine and coarse aggregates.
3. Class and brand, and amount of fly ash (if any).
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Pa ge 5 of
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II Portland cement.
B. Water: Potable
C. Air-entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, and on the New York State Department of
Transportation’s current “Approved List”.
D. Water-reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M - 04, Type A, and on the New York
State Department of Transportation’s current “Approved List”.
E. High Range Water-reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer): ASTM C 494/C 494M - 04,
Type F, and on the New York State Department of Transportation’s current “Approved
List”.
F. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D, Water-reducing and retarding, for use in
hot weather concreting, and on the New York State Department of Transportation’s
current “Approved List”.
G. Accelerating Admixture: Non-corrosive admixture, containing no chloride, complying
with ASTM C 494, Type C or E, and on the New York State Department of
Transportation’s current “Approved List”.
H. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, including Table 1 (except for footnote A), Class F except that
loss on ignition shall not exceed 4.0 percent.
I. ACI 301, Section 4.2.1.2 - Aggregates:
1. Add the following paragraph:
Fine aggregate for pumped concrete shall meet the requirements of ASTM
C 33, except 15 to 30 percent shall pass the No. 50 sieve and 5 to 10
percent shall pass the No. 100 sieve. The fineness modulus of the fine
aggregate for pumped concrete shall not vary more than 0.20 from the
average value used in proportioning.
2. Add the following paragraph:
Aggregates shall be taken from storage silos or other approved locations
that have been tested and approved by the New York State Department of
Transportation, unless otherwise approved in writing by the Architect.
3. Add the following paragraph:
Aggregates shall be listed on the NYS DOT web site as not being
susceptible to Alkali Silica Reaction (ASR).
https://www.dot.ny.gov/divisions/engineering/technical-services/materials-
bureau/fine-coarse-aggregates
4. Lightweight Aggregate: Lightweight aggregate shall comply with ASTM C330.
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Pa ge 6 of
J. Moisture-Retaining Cover: Waterproof paper, polyethylene film, or polyethylene-coated
burlap complying with ASTM C 171.
K. Chemical Curing and Anti-Spalling Compound: ASTM C-309, Type 1D, Class B, with a
minimum 18 percent total solids content. No thinning of material allowed.
1. SureCure Emulsion, Kaufman Products, Inc. 3811 Curtis Avenue, Baltimore, MD
21226, (800) 637-6372.
2. Cure & Seal by Symons Corp., 200 East Touhy Ave., PO Box 5018, Des Plaines,
IL 60017-5018, (847) 298-3200.
3. Kure-N-Seal by Sonneborn/ BASF Building Systems, 889 Valley Park Dr.,
Shakopee, MN 55379, (800) 433-9517.
4. Day-Chem Cure & Seal UV 26 percent (J-22 UV) by Dayton Superior Corp., 721
Richard St., Miamisburg, OH 45342, (800) 745-3700.
5. Acrylseal HS by Master Builders/ BASF Building Systems, 23700 Chagrin Blvd.,
Cleveland, OH 44122, (800) 628-9990.
L. Joint Fillers and Sealants (Contraction Joints within the building and in the concrete entry
slabs):
1. Elastomeric Polyurethane Joint Sealant
a). Sikaflex-1cSL by Sika Corporation, 201 Polito Avenue, Lyndhurst, NJ
07071
b). Sonolastic® SL 2 by BASF Building Systems
c). Eucolastic II, as manufactured by the Euclid Chemical Company, 19218
Redwood Road, Cleveland, OH 44110
M. Epoxy Bonding Agent (Adhesive): 100 percent solids epoxy-resin-base bonding
compound, complying with ASTM C 881, Types I, II, IV and V, Grade 2 (horizontal
areas) or Grade 3 (overhead/vertical areas), and Class B (40-60 degrees Fahrenheit) or
Class C (60 degree Fahrenheit and above).
1. SurePoxy HM Series by Kaufman Products, Inc., 3811 Curtis Avenue, Baltimore,
MD 21226, (800) 637-6372.
2. Sikadur Hi-Mod 32 by Sika Corporation, 201 1682 Williamsport Road, Marion,
OH, 43302
3. Epogrip by Sonneborn/-BASF Building Systems, 889 Valley Park Drive,
Shakopee, MN 55379, (800) 433-9517.
N. Waterstop: Water swelling sealant; minimum 3/4 inch wide by 3/8 inch thick, unless
otherwise indicated; minimum tensile strength (ASTM D 412) 100 psi minimum ultimate
elongation (ASTM D 412) 500 percent.
1. MC-2010M by Adeka Ultra Seal Corporation, PO Box 459, Spearfish, SD 57783,
(605) 642-3959.
2. Volclay Waterstop RX-101 by Colloid Environmental Technologies Company,
Building Materials Division, 1350 W. Shure Drive, Arlington Heights, IL 60004,
(708) 392-5800.
O. Reinforcing Steel
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Pa ge 7 of
1. Bar Reinforcement: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed steel bars.
2. Fabric Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, welded wire fabric, fabricated into flat
sheets unless otherwise indicated.
3. Bar Supports; Either of the Following Types:
a. Galvanized steel or AISI Type 430 stainless steel, and without plastic tips.
b. Insoluble plastic, with minimum 1,500 psi tensile strength and capable of
retaining fabricated shape at temperatures between 5 degrees F and 170
degrees F.
c. Solid concrete brick
4. Fabric Reinforcement Supports:
a. Uni Zag by Universal Form Clamp, 840 South 25th Avenue, Bellwood, IL
60104, (800)728-1958.
b. Continuous Support, “CS” by Dayton Superior, 721 Richard Street,
Miamisburg, OH 45342, (800) 745-3700.
c. Solid concrete brick
5. Tie Wire: Black annealed wire, 16-1/2 gage or heavier.
P. Under–Slab Vapor Retarder – 10 mil thick cross laminated polyethylene sheet vapor
barrier complying with ASTM 1745, Standard Specification for Water Vapor Retarders
used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs, Class A.
Q. Evaporation Reducer for Plastic Concrete – to be used on all Elevated Composite Slabs.
1. E-CON by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc., Omaha, NE.
2.02 PROPORTIONING OF MIXES
A. Normal weight concrete for concrete foundation pile caps, grade beams, piers and walls,
and for all other concrete unless otherwise specified, shall have a minimum compressive
strength of 4000 psi. Slump: Maximum 4 inches; minimum 2 inches before the addition
of any water-reducing admixtures or high-range water-reducing admixtures
(superplasticizers) at the Site. This concrete does not require air-entrainment.
B. Normal weight concrete for interior slabs, ramps, stairs and footings shall have a
minimum compressive strength of 3500 psi. Slump: Maximum 3 inches; minimum 2
inches before the addition of any water-reducing admixtures or high-range water-reducing
admixtures (superplasticizers) at the Site. This concrete does not require air-entrainment.
C. Normal weight concrete for exterior slabs, ramps and stairs shall have a minimum
compressive strength of 4500 psi. Slump: Maximum 3 inches; minimum 2 inches before
the addition of any water-reducing admixtures or high-range water-reducing admixtures
(superplasticizers) at the Site. This concrete shall be air-entrained.
D. Light weight concrete for the elevated composite floor slabs shall have a minimum
compressive strength of 3500 psi, and a maximum slump of 5 inches. This concrete does
not require air-entrainment. Light weight concrete density shall not exceed 110 pcf.
E. Fly ash shall be substituted for (Portland) cement in normal weight and lightweight
concrete. Fly ash content shall be 30% percent by weight of the required minimum
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Pa ge 8 of
(Portland) cement. Design mix shall be properly adjusted to compensate for the use of
fly ash as a partial replacement for (Portland) cement.
1. Adjustments shall include the required increase in air-entraining admixture to
provide the specified air content.
2. Lower early strength of the concrete shall be considered in deciding when to
remove formwork.
E. Slump for Pumped Concrete: When a water-reducing admixture is not used, maximum
slump shall be 4 inches. When a water-reducing admixture is used, maximum slump
shall be 6 inches and when a high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizers) is
used, maximum slump shall be 8 inches.
F. Design Air Content: Design air content for concrete required to be air entrained (exterior
concrete) shall be 6 percent by volume, with an allowable tolerance of plus or minus 1.5
percent for total air content, except as otherwise specified. Use air-entraining admixture,
not air-entrained cement. Concrete to be air-entrained shall be exterior foundation walls
and piers, and exterior slabs, ramps, and stairs.
G. Water-Cement Ratio: Cast-in-place concrete shall have a maximum water-cement ratio of
0.45. Interior slabs shall have a maximum water-cement ratio of 0.50.
H. ACI 301, Section 4.2.2.3: Change article to read as follows:
4.2.2.3 - Size of Coarse Aggregates:
4.2.2.3.a Normal Weight Concrete: Coarse aggregates shall conform to
graduation requirements for various sizes as tabulated in Table No. 2 of
ASTM C 33. The sizes of coarse aggregates for various classes of Work
shall be as follows with all percentages being determined by weight.
4.2.2.3.d For concrete Work having a minimum cross-sectional dimension
of not more than 6 inches, the coarse aggregate shall be a well graded
mixture of No. 67 (3/4” to No. 4) and No. 57 (1” to No. 4), provided that
not more than 50 percent nor less than 30 percent shall be Size No. 67 and
not more than 70 percent nor less than 50 percent shall be Size No. 57.
4.2.2.3.e For concrete Work having a minimum cross-sectional dimension
greater than 6 inches and not more than 12 inches, excluding filling ICF
walls, the coarse aggregate shall consist of a mixture of No. 67, No. 57 and
No. 467 (1 ½” to No. 4), providing that not more than 25 percent nor less
than 10 percent shall be Size No. 67 and not more than 40 percent shall be
Size No. 467.
4.2.2.3.f For concrete Work having a minimum cross-sectional dimension
of more than 12 inches, the coarse aggregate shall consist of a mixture of
No. 67, No. 57 and No. 357 (2” to No. 4), providing not more than 25
percent nor less than 10 percent shall be Size No. 67 and not more than 40
percent shall be Size No. 357.
4.2.2.3.g. For Lightweight Concrete (1.5” concrete over 9/16” non-
composite steel deck), maximum course aggregate shall be Size No. 8
(1/2”).
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Pa ge 9 of
I. Admixtures: Do not use admixtures in concrete unless specified or approved in writing
by the Architect.
J. ACI 301, Section 4.1.2.1 - Mixture Proportions:
1. Add the following to paragraph 4.1.2.1:
Proposed design mix(es) for pumped concrete and the pumping equipment
shall have been tested under actual field conditions with the maximum
horizontal run and vertical lift required for this project.
2.03 JOINTS
A. ACI 301, Section 5.3.2.6 - Construction joints and other bonded joints:
1. Delete the following subparagraphs:
Use an acceptable surface retarder in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations;
Roughen the surface in an acceptable manner that exposes the aggregate
uniformly and does not leave laitance, loosened particles of aggregate, or
damaged concrete at the surface; or
B. ACI 301, Section 10.2.5 – Isolation-joint filler materials:
1. Add the following paragraphs:
Except as otherwise shown on the Drawings, expansion joints shall be as
follows:
In joints required to receive a sealant, the joint filler shall be 1/2 inch thick
and recessed as required to form a caulking slot.
In joints not required to receive a sealant, the joint filler shall be 1/2 inch
thick and extend through the full cross-section of the concrete.
Tool edges of concrete with 1/8 inch radius edging tool.
2.04 PRODUCTION OF CONCRETE
A. Provide ready-mixed concrete, either central-mixed or truck-mixed, unless otherwise
approved in writing by the Architect.
B. ACI 301, Section 5.3.2.1 Weather considerations
1. Delete paragraph under 5.3.2.1.c - Hot Weather, and add the following:
5.3.2.1.c Provide adequate controls to insure that the temperature of the
concrete when placed does not exceed 90 degrees F., and make every
effort to place it at a lower temperature. The temperature of the concrete
as placed shall not be so high as to cause difficulty from loss of slump,
flash set or cold joints. Ingredients may be cooled before mixing by
shading the aggregates, fog spraying the coarse aggregate, chilling the
mixing water or other approved means. Mixing water may be chilled with
flake ice or well-crushed ice of a size that will melt completely during
mixing, providing the water equivalent of the ice is calculated into the total
amount of mixing water.
C. Protect concrete from physical damage or reduced strength due to weather extremes
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Pa ge 10 of
during mixing, placement and curing.
1. In cold weather, comply with ACI 306R.
a. When air temperature is below 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) heat the mixing
water and, if necessary, the aggregates to obtain a concrete mixture
temperature of not less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) and not more than
80 degrees F (27 degrees C) at point of placement. If the mixing water is
heated, do not exceed a temperature of 140 degrees F at the time it is
added to the cement and aggregates.
2. In hot weather, comply with ACI 305R.
a. When air temperature is between 85 degrees F (30 degrees C ) and 90
degrees F (32 degrees C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1 1/2
hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90 degrees F (32
degrees C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Do not use items of aluminum for mixing, chuting, conveying, forming or finishing
concrete, except magnesium alloy tools may be used for finishing.
B. Check items of aluminum required to be embedded in the concrete and insure that they
are coated, painted or otherwise isolated in an approved manner.
C. Install waterstops in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.
D. Hardened concrete, reinforcement, forms, and earth which will be in contact with fresh
concrete shall be free from frost at the time of concrete placement.
E. Do not deposit concrete in water. Keep excavations free of water by pumping or by other
approved methods.
F. Prior to placement of concrete, remove all hardened concrete spillage and foreign
materials from the space to be occupied by the concrete.
3.02 ADMIXTURE ADDITIONS AT THE SITE
A. Site additions shall be limited to high-range water-reducers, non-chloride accelerators,
and corrosion inhibitors. Comply with manufacturers’ printed instructions for discharge
of admixtures shall be furnished.
B. High-Range Water-Reducers:
1. Concrete shall arrive at a slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm). Water additions
at the Site shall be limited to comply with water-to-cementitious ratio
requirements.
2. Following addition of high-range water-reduced concrete, a minimum of 70
revolutions or 5 minutes of mixing shall be completed to assure a consistent
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Pa ge 11 of
mixture.
C. All concrete with other admixture additions shall mix a minimum of 70 revolutions or 5
minutes to assure a consistent mixture.
3.03 PLACING
A. ACI 301, Section 5.3.2.3 Conveying equipment:
1. Add the following paragraphs:
5.3.2.3.d When pumping concrete, the lubricating mortar for the delivery
line shall not be discharged into an area of concrete placement.
5.3.2.3.e The inside diameter of the delivery lines for pumped concrete
shall be the greater of either a minimum of 5 inches or 3 times the
maximum size of coarse aggregate.
B. ACI 301, Section 5.3.2.2 - Conveying:
1. Add the following paragraph:
Operation of truck mixers and agitators and discharge limitations shall
conform to the requirements of ASTM C 94.
C. ACI 301, Section 5.3.2.4 - Depositing:
1. Add the following paragraph:
Do not allow concrete to free fall more than 4 feet.
3.04 REPAIRING SURFACE DEFECTS
A. ACI 301, Section 5.3,7 – Repair of surface defects:
1. Add the following paragraph:
5.3.7.1.a Finish patched areas to match the texture of the surrounding
surface.
B. ACI 301, Section 5.3.7.2 - Repair of tie holes:
1. Delete last paragraph in 5.3.7.2 and replace with the following:
The patch mixture shall consist of a mixture of dry-pack mortar, consisting
of one part Portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16
mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for placing and handling.
For surfaces exposed to view, blend white Portland cement and standard
Portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding
color. Provide test areas at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and
color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place
and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface.
3.05 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Finish Schedule: Except where indicated otherwise on the Drawings, provide the finishes
below:
1. Rough Form Finish for concrete surfaces not exposed to view.
2. Smooth Form Finish for exterior concrete surfaces exposed to view.
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Pa ge 12 of
3. Grout Cleaned Finish for interior concrete surfaces exposed to view.
B. ACI 301, Section 5.3.3.3 - As-cast Finishes:
1. Add the following to paragraph 5.3.3.3:
Fins shall be completely removed on surfaces to receive waterproofing.
3.06 SLABS
A. Slabs On Grade: Provide saw-cut type joints unless otherwise shown, using the early
entry dry saw-cut method. Saw-cut slabs within 4 hours of completion of final finish
work. Cut slabs to ¼ of their depth.
B. ACI 301, Section 5.3.4 – Finishing unformed surfaces:
1. Add the following paragraph to section 5.3.4.1 Placement:
Provide monolithic finishes on concrete floors and slabs without the
addition of mortar or other filler material. Finish surfaces in true planes,
true to line, with particular care taken during screeding to maintain an
excess of concrete in front of the screed so as to prevent low spots. Screed
and darby concrete to true planes while plastic and before free water rises
to the surface. Do not perform finishing operations during the time free
water (bleeding) is on the surface.
C. Finish Schedule: Except where indicated otherwise on the Drawings, provide the finishes
below:
1. Floated Finish for:
a. Slabs and fill over which waterproofing, roofing, vapor barrier, insulation,
terrazzo, or resin bound flooring is required.
2. Troweled Finish for:
a. Interior slabs that are to be exposed to view.
b. Slabs and fill over which resilient wood flooring, resilient tile or sheet
flooring, carpet, or thin-film coating system is required.
c. Slabs and fill over which thin-set ceramic tile is required, except fine-
broom finished surface.
d. Treads and platforms of interior steps and stairs.
3. Broom or Belt Finish for:
a. Exterior slabs.
b. Treads and platforms of exterior steps and stairs.
Texture as approved by the Architect’s Representative.
D. ACI 302 Chapter 8.2.8.2 - Tools for jointing; Saw-cutting.
1. Add the following paragraph:
Early-entry dry-cut saws are preferred in place of conventional wet-cut
saws.
E. Floor flatness and levelness tolerances: For flatness and levelness tolerances of floor
slabs refer to ACI 302 Chapter 8.15. Floor surface tolerances shall be 1/8 inch over a
horizontal distance of 10 feet in any direction, unless otherwise specified by floor profile
quality classifications in ACI 302.
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Pa ge 13 of
1. When flatness or levelness tolerances are not met then the floor shall be ground or
scarified and repoured to meet specifications.
F. Elevated composite slabs are to receive an evaporation reducer equal to E-Con by L&M
Construction Chemicals to reduce surface crusting and plastic phase shrinkage cracks.
Install E-Con at the proper dilution rate by spraying on the slab immediately after bull
floating and during finishing operations. Do not puddle. E-Con is not a curing
compound and does not replace proper slab curing.
3.07 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. Cure all exposed concrete using supervised wet cure or an approved curing compound.
B. Hot Weather Concreting: Comply with ACI 305R whenever the atmospheric temperature
or the form surface temperature is at or above 90 degrees F., or climatic conditions of
wind and/or low humidity will cause premature drying of the concrete.
C. Curing Temperature: Maintain the temperature of the concrete at 50 degrees F. or above
during the curing period. Keep the concrete temperature as uniform as possible and
protect from rapid atmospheric temperature changes. Avoid temperature changes in
concrete which exceeds 5 degrees F. in any one hour and 50 degrees F. in any 24-hour
period.
D. Curing of Slabs to Receive Moisture-Sensitive Finish Flooring, including vinyl
composition tile (VCT), rubber flooring, sheet vinyl, resilient tile, carpet, ceramic tile,
wood flooring, and laminates:
- Cure the slab by covering with a moisture retaining cover as defined above for a period
of 7 days.
- Do not add water (ponding or wet burlap)
- Do not use curing compounds or cure-and-seal materials unless approved in writing by
the Architect. Architect will require written approval from the adhesive and floor
covering manufacturer that the curing compound or cure-and-seal material will
not compromise the adhesion of the floor covering to the concrete slab, and will
not require removal of the curing compound or cure-and-seal material prior to
placement of the finish floor covering.
END OF SECTION 033100
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
03 3511 - 1 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES
SECTION 03 3511
CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Surface treatments for concrete floors and slabs.
1.02 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Coordinate the work with concrete floor painting.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Manufacturer's published data on each finishing product, including information
on compatibility of different products and limitations.
C.Maintenance Data: Provide data on maintenance and renewal of applied finishes.
1.04 MOCK-UP
A.For coatings, construct mock-up area under conditions similar to those that will exist during
application, with coatings applied.
B.Mock-Up Size: 10 feet square.
C.Locate where directed.
D.Mock-up may remain as part of the work.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Deliver materials in manufacturer's sealed packaging, including application instructions.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.Maintain light level equivalent to a minimum 200 W light source at 8 feet above the floor
surface over each 20 foot square area of floor being finished.
B.Maintain ambient temperature of 50 degrees F minimum.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 COATINGS
A.Low Gloss Clear Coating: Transparent, non-yellowing, water- or solvent-based coating.
1.Composition: Acrylic polymer-based.
2.Nonvolatile Content: 25 percent, minimum, when measured by volume.
3.Products:
a.Concrete Sealers USA; TS210: www.concretesealersusa.com/#sle.
b.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify that floor surfaces are acceptable to receive the work of this section.
B.Verify that flaws in concrete have been patched and joints filled with methods and materials
suitable for further finishes.
3.02 GENERAL
A.Apply materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 COATING APPLICATION
A.Verify that surface is free of previous coatings, sealers, curing compounds, water repellents,
laitance, efflorescence, fats, oils, grease, wax, soluble salts, residues from cleaning agents,
and other impediments to adhesion.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
03 3511 - 2 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES
B.Verify that water vapor emission from concrete and relative humidity in concrete are within
limits established by coating manufacturer.
C.Protect adjacent non-coated areas from drips, overflow, and overspray; immediately remove
excess material.
D.Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, matching approved mock-ups
for color, special effects, sealing and workmanship.
E.Clean and Prepare existing concrete surfaces according to manufacturer's recommendation(s).
1.Concrete surfaces must be roughened and made absorptive, preferably by mechanical
means, and then thoroughly cleaned of all dust and debris. If the surface was prepared by
chemical means (acid etching), a water/baking soda or water/ammonia mixture, followed
by a clean water rinse, must be used for cleaning, in order to neutralize the substrate.
2.Prepare existing slab to achieve Concrete Surface Profile (CSP): typically CSP-1 (min) to
CSP-3 (max) depending upon existing slab coatings and coating product(s) used.
F.Protect existing materials to remain that are not recommended to come in contact with coating
product(s). Example: metals. Refer to coating manufacturer directions and recommendations.
END OF SECTION 03 3511
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
04 2000 - 1 UNIT MASONRY
SECTION 04 2000
UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Concrete block.
B.Mortar and grout.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ACI 530/530.1/ERTA - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures
and Related Commentaries; 2011.
B.ASTM C129 - Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2011.
C.ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry; 2010.
D.TMS 402/602 - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures; 2016.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide data for masonry units and mortar.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and
with at least three years of documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and
contamination by other materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A.Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows:
1.Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 by 8 inches and nominal depths
as indicated on drawings for specific locations.
2.Non-Loadbearing Units: ASTM C129.
a.Hollow block, as indicated.
b.Normal weight.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry.
B.Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located.
C.Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other
sections.
B.Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building
structure provides permanent bracing.
3.03 COLD AND HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS
A.Comply with requirements of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA or applicable building code, whichever is
more stringent.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
04 2000 - 2 UNIT MASONRY
3.04 COURSING
A.Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.
B.Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform
thickness.
C.Concrete Masonry Units:
1.Bond: Running.
2.Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches.
3.Mortar Joints: Flush.
3.05 PLACING AND BONDING
A.Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other
work.
B.Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.
C.Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted.
D.Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.
E.Remove excess mortar with water repellent admixture promptly. Do not use acids,
sandblasting or high pressure cleaning methods.
F.Interlock intersections and external corners, except for units laid in stack bond.
G.Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must
be made, remove mortar and replace.
H.Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped
edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.
I.Cut mortar joints flush where wall tile is scheduled or resilient base is scheduled.
J.Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control joint.
K.Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or
decks with compressible joint filler.
3.06 GROUTED COMPONENTS
A.Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.
B.At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum 12 inches either side of
opening.
3.07 TOLERANCES
A.Maximum Variation from Alignment of Columns: 1/4 inch.
B.Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch.
C.Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft and 1/2 inch in 20 ft or more.
D.Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or
more.
E.Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft and 1/4 inch in 10 ft; 1/2 inch in 30 ft.
F.Maximum Variation of Mortar Joint Thickness: Head joint, minus 1/4 inch, plus 3/8 inch.
G.Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch.
3.08 CLEANING
A.Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings.
B.Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.
C.Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
04 2000 - 3 UNIT MASONRY
3.09 PROTECTION
A.Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that
are subject to damage by construction activities.
3.10 SCHEDULES
A.Interior Partitions: Single wythe concrete block units.
END OF SECTION 04 2000
REVIEWED BY:
JEC
REVISED BY:
JEC
STRUCTURAL MET AL FRAMING 051000
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Page 1 of 9
051000
STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Structural shapes.
2. Channels and angles.
3. Hollow structural sections.
4. Structural pipe.
5. Structural plates and bars.
6. Floor plates.
7. Bolts, connectors, and anchors.
8. Grout.
9. Connection Design
1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Structural Steel Connections shall be selected, completed or
designed by the fabricator to withstand the design loads indicated.
B. Delegated Engineering Responsibility. Structural Steel Connection Des ign is
delegated by the Engineer of Record to a qualified licensed professional engineer
retained by the structural steel fabricator. The connection design engineer retained by
the fabricator shall prepare calculations, shop drawings, and other structural design
details for submission to the Engineer of Record with the fabricator’s structural steel
shop drawings.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Code Required Special Inspections and Procedures – Section 014533
B. Cast-In -Place Concrete – Section 033100
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American Institute of Steel Construction:
1. AISC 303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.
2. AISC 341 - Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings.
3. AISC 360 - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.
B. American Society of Civil Engineers:
1. ASCE 19 - Standard Applications of Steel Cables for Buildings.
C. ASTM International:
REVIEWED BY:
JEC
REVISED BY:
JEC
STRUCTURAL MET AL FRAMING 051000
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Page 2 of 9
1. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
2. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -
Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.
3. ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold -
Finished.
4. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)
Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
5. ASTM A193/A193M - Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel
Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service.
6. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000
PSI Tensile Strength.
7. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated,
120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.
8. ASTM A354 - Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel
Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally Threaded Fasteners.
9. ASTM A449 - Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Steel Bolts
and Studs.
10. ASTM A490 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat
Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.
11. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and
Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
12. ASTM A501 - Standard Specification for Hot -Formed Welded and Seamless
Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.
13. ASTM A514/A514M - Standard Specification for High-Yield-Strength,
Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate, Suitable for Welding.
14. ASTM A529/A529M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Carbon-
Manganese Steel of Structural Quality.
15. ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.
16. ASTM A572/A572M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy
Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel.
17. ASTM A588/A588M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy
Structural Steel with 50 ksi (345 MPa) Minimum Yield Point to 4 -in. (100-mm)
Thick.
18. ASTM A618/A618M - Standard Specification for Hot -Formed Welded and
Seamless High -Strength Low-Alloy Structural Tubing.
19. ASTM A786/A786M - Standard Specification for Hot -Rolled Carbon, Low-
Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates.
20. ASTM A847/A847M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and
Seamless High Strength, Low Alloy Structural Tubing with Improved
Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance.
21. ASTM A852/A852M - Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Low -
Alloy Structural Steel Plate with 70 ksi (485 MPa) Minimum Yield Strength to 4
in. (100 mm) Thick.
22. ASTM A913/A913M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy
Steel Shapes of Structural Quality, Produced by Quenching and Self -Tempering
Process (QST).
23. ASTM A992/A992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes.
REVIEWED BY:
JEC
REVISED BY:
JEC
STRUCTURAL MET AL FRAMING 051000
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Page 3 of 9
24. ASTM B695 - Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanicall y
Deposited on Iron and Steel.
25. ASTM E94 - Standard Guide for Radiographic Examination.
26. ASTM E119 – Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction
and Materials.
27. ASTM E164 - Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Contact Examination of
Weldments.
28. ASTM E165 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination.
29. ASTM E709 - Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination.
30. ASTM F436 - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers.
31. ASTM F959 - Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct
Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners.
32. ASTM F1554 - Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-
ksi Yield Strength.
33. ASTM F1852 - Standard Specification for Twist -Off Type Tension Control
Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi
Minimum Tensile Strength.
34. ASTM F2329 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating, Hot -Dip, Requirements
for Application to Carbon and Alloy Steel Bolts, Screws, Washers, Nuts, and
Special Threaded Fasteners.
D. American Welding Society:
1. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive
Examination.
2. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
E. California Department of Health Services:
1. CA/DHS/EHLB/R-174 - Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental
Chambers, including 2004 Addenda.
F. Green Seal:
1. GC -03-2nd Edition, January 7, 1997 - Anti-Corrosive Paints.
G. Research Council on Structural Connections:
1. RCSC - Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or ASTM
A490 Bolts.
H. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings:
1. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Manual.
2. SSPC Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Paint.
3. SSPC Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I - Inorganic and Type II -
Organic).
4. SSPC SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning.
5. SSPC SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning.
6. SSPC SP 10 - Near-White Blast Cleaning.
REVIEWED BY:
JEC
REVISED BY:
JEC
STRUCTURAL MET AL FRAMING 051000
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Page 4 of 9
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 012500 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, and locations of structural members,
openings, attachments, and bolts.
2. Connections. Connections not detailed.
3. Cambers and loads.
4. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net
weld lengths.
C. Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed s pecified
requirements.
D. Mill Test Reports: Submit indicating structural strength, destructive and non -
destructive test analysis, and.
E. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS
qualification within previous 12 months.
F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the Qualifications section
documenting compliance with the specified requirements.
G. Connection design calculations, stamped by a licensed NYS Professional Engineer.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with the following:
1. Structural Steel: AISC 303, ASIC 341 and AISC 360.
2. High Strength Bolted Connections: RCSC Specification for Structural Joints
Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.
B. Perform Work in accordance with 2010 Building Code of New York State.
C. Maintain one copy of document on site.
1.07 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum
5 years documented experience with any of the following current AISC
Certification:
1. Standard Steel Building Structures (STD).
2. Conventional Steel Building Structures (SBD).
3. Complex Steel Building Structures (CBD).
B. Erector: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 5
years documented experience with any of the following current AISC Certification:
REVIEWED BY:
JEC
REVISED BY:
JEC
STRUCTURAL MET AL FRAMING 051000
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Page 5 of 9
1. Certified Steel Erector (CSE).
2. Advanced Certified Steel Erector (ACSE).
C. Shop Painter: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with
minimum 5 years documented experience with any the following current AISC
Certification:
1. Sophisticated Paint Endorsement - Enclosed (P1).
2. Sophisticated Paint Endorsement - Covered (P2).
3. Sophisticated Paint Endorsement - Outside (P3).
D. Welders and Welding Procedures: AWS D1.1 qualified within previous 12 months.
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: Current active registration in New York State
with experience with structural steel framing connection design similar to that
indicated and shown in the contract drawings.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 STRUCTURAL STEEL
A. Structural W-Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M. ASTM A572/A572M; Grade 50.
ASTM A913/A913M; Grade 50.
B. Structural T-Shapes: Cut from structural W-shapes.
C. Channels and Angles: ASTM A36/A36M.
D. Round Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B.
E. Rectangular Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B.
F. Structural Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B.
G. Structural Plates and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M.
H. Floor Plates: ASTM A786/A786M raised pattern.
I. Sliding Bearing Plates: Teflon coated.
2.02 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS
A. Bolts: Heavy hex, structural type.
1. ASTM A325; Type 1, plain, or hot dipped.
B. Nuts: ASTM A563; heavy hex type.
1. Finish: Plain or Hot dipped galvanized.
REVIEWED BY:
JEC
REVISED BY:
JEC
STRUCTURAL MET AL FRAMING 051000
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Page 6 of 9
C. Washers: ASTM F436; Type 1, beveled. Furnish clipped washers where space
limitations require.
1. Finish: Plain or Hot dipped galvanized.
D. Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators: ASTM F959; Type 325.
1. Finish: Mechanically galvanized.
E. Tension Control Assemblies: ASTM F1852; Type 1, heavy hex head, twist off type;
complete with washers and heavy hex nuts.
1. Finish: Finish: Unfinished.
F. Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554; Grade 36.
1. Shape: Hooked or Straight.
2. Plate Washers: ASTM A36/A36M.
G. Threaded Rods: ASTM A36/A36M.
1. Finish: Hot dipped galvanized.
H. Forged Structural Steel Hardware:
1. Clevises and Turnbuckles: ASTM A108; Grade 1085.
2. Eye Nuts and Eye Bolts: ASTM A108; Grade 1030.
3. Sleeve Nuts: ASTM A108; Grade 1018.
4. Rod Ends, Yoke Ends and Pins, Cotter Pins, and Coupling Nuts: Carbon
steel.
I. Shear Connectors. ASTM A108; headed, unfinished and in accordance with AWS
D1.1; Type B
2.03 WELDING MATERIALS
A. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Continuously seal joined members by intermittent welds and plastic filler.
Continuous welds. Grind exposed welds smooth.
B. Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors.
C. Develop required camber for members.
2.05 FINISHES
A. Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 3.
B. Shop prime structural steel members to a dry film thickness not less than 1.5 mils.
Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed, field welded, in cont act with concrete,
or high strength bolted.
REVIEWED BY:
JEC
REVISED BY:
JEC
STRUCTURAL MET AL FRAMING 051000
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Page 7 of 9
1. Primer: Fabricator’s standard lead, chromate, and asphalt free, rust
inhibiting primer compatible with architectural finishes.
C. Galvanizing: ASTM A123/A123M; hot dip galvanize after fabrication.
D. Galvanizing for Bolts, Connectors, and Anchors:
1. Hot -Dipped Galvanizing:
a. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F2329.
b. Connectors and Anchors: ASTM A153/A153M.
2. Mechanical Galvanizing: ASTM B695; Class 50 minimum.
2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. Grout: Non-shrink type, pre-mixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate,
cement, water reducing and plasticizing additives, capable of developing minimum
compressive strength of 7,000 psi at 28 days.
B. Shop Primer: SSPC Paint 15, Type 1, red oxide.
C. Touch-Up Primer: Match shop primer.
2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Testing, inspection and analysis
requirements.
B. Shop test bolted and welded connections as specified for field quality control tests.
C. When fabricator is approved by authority having jurisdiction, submit certificate of
compliance indicating Work performed at fabricator's facility conforms to Contract
Documents.
1. Specified shop tests are not required for Work performed by approved
fabricator.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 73 00 - Execution: Requirements for installation examination.
B. Verify bearing surfaces are at correct elevation.
C. Verify anchors rods are set in correct locations and arrangements with correct
exposure for steel attachment.
REVIEWED BY:
JEC
REVISED BY:
JEC
STRUCTURAL MET AL FRAMING 051000
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Page 8 of 9
3.02 PREPARATION
D. Section 01 73 00 - Execution: Requirements for installation preparation.
E. Furnish templates for installation of anchor rods and embedment in concrete and
masonry work.
3.03 ERECTION
A. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure
safe, plumb, and in alignment until completion of erection and installation of
permanent bracing.
B. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings.
C. Field connect members with threaded fasteners; tighten to snug tight for bear ing type
connections.
D. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect/Engineer.
E. After erection, touch up welds and abrasions to match shop finishes.
3.04 GROUT INSTALLATION
A. Remove defective concrete, laitance, dirt, oil, grease and other foreign material from
concrete surfaces by brushing, hammering, chipping or other similar means until
sound, clean concrete surface is achieved.
B. Rough concrete lightly, but not enough to interfere with placement of grout.
C. Remove foreign materials from metal surfaces in contact with grout.
D. Align, level and maintain final positioning of components to be grouted.
E. Saturate concrete surfaces with clean water; remove excess water, leave none
standing.
F. Shim bearing plates and equipment supports to proper elevation as shown on drawings,
snug tighten anchor bolts.
G. Fill void under bearing surface with grout. Install and pack grout to remove air
pockets.
H. Moist cure grout.
I. Remove forms after grout is set. Trim grout edges to from smooth surface, splayed
45 degrees.
J. Tighten anchor bolts after grout has cured for a minimum of 3 days.
REVIEWED BY:
JEC
REVISED BY:
JEC
STRUCTURAL MET AL FRAMING 051000
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Page 9 of 9
3.05 TOLERANCES
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.
B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative.
C. Maximum Offset From Alignment: 1/4 inch.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for inspecting, testing.
B. Section 01 73 00 - Execution: Requirements for testing, adjusting, and balancing.
C. Bolted Connections: Inspect in accordance with AISC 303.
1. Visually inspect all bolted connections.
2. For Direct Tension Indicators, comply with requirements of ASTM F959.
Verify that gaps are less than gaps specified in Table 2.
D. Welding: Inspect welds in accordance with AWS D1.1.
1. Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests a s required. Record types
and locations of defects found in work. Record work required and performed
to correct deficiencies.
2. Visually inspect all welds.
3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164; perform on all full penetration welds.
4. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165.
5. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709.
6. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E94.
E. Correct defective bolted connections and welds.
END OF SECTION 05 12 00
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC
METAL PAN STAIRS
0551300
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Page 1 of 7
055113
METAL STAIRS
PART 1: GE NERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Preassembled steel stairs with metal bar grating treads and landing.
2. Steel pipe railings attached to metal stairs.
3. Steel pipe handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs.
4. Railing gates at the level of exit discharge.
10.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint
and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are
compatible with one another.
B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with
integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site
in time for installation.
C. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they do not encroach on
required stair width and are within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.
1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation
indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.
Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For stairs and railings, including analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC
METAL PAN STAIRS
0551300
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Page 2 of 7
A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
PART 2: PRODUCT S
2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000
"Quality Requirements," to design stairs and railings.
B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the
following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft..
2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in..
3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to
loads specified above.
5. Li mit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360 or 1/4 inch,
whichever is less.
C. Structural Performance of Railings: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the
following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:
a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction.
b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction.
c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
2. Infill of Guards:
a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.
b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
2.02 METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks,
roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
C. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC
METAL PAN STAIRS
0551300
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Page 3 of 7
E. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M,
unless otherwise indicated.
F. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, either commercial steel, Type B, or
structural steel, Grade 25, unless another grade is required by design loads; exposed.
G. Metal Grating: Conform to requirements of NAAMM MBG 531.
2.03 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide zinc -plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or
ASTM F1941, Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior
walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563;
and, where indicated, flat washers.
C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563;
and, where indicated, flat washers.
D. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchorscapable of
sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit
masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing
according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply
with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer
complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D1187M.
C. Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, 6 by 6 inches, W1.4 by W1.4, unless
otherwise indicated.
2.05 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips,
brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and
platforms on supporting structure.
1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated.
2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
B. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as
necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC
METAL PAN STAIRS
0551300
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Page 4 of 7
installation.
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed
surfaces.
D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
E. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight Edges.
F. Weld connections to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated.
5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "VoluntaryJoint Finish
Standards" for Type 3 welds: partially dressed weld with spatter removed.
G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where
possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or
bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
2.06 STEEL-FR AMED STAIRS
A. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed
Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," Commercial Class, unless more
stringent requirements are indicated.
B. Stair Framing:
1. Fabricate stringers of steel plates or channels.
a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel stringers.
2. Construct platforms of steel plate or channel headers and miscellaneous framing
members as needed to comply with performance requirements.
3. Weld or bolt stringers to headers; weld or bolt framing members to stringers and headers.
If using bolts, fabricate and join so bolts are not exposed on finished surfaces.
4. Where stairs are enclosed by gypsum board assemblies, provide hanger rods or struts to
support landings from floor construction above or below. Locate hanger rods and struts
where they do not encroach on required stair width and are within the
fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.
5. Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts designed for
erecting steel stair components before installing masonry.
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC
METAL PAN STAIRS
0551300
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Page 5 of 7
2.07 STAIR RAILINGS
A. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 055213 "Pipe and Tube Railings."
1. Rails may be bent at corners, rail returns, and wall returns, instead of using
prefabricated fittings.
2. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated.
B. Steel Tube Railings: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design,
dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post spacings, and
anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads.
1. Gates: Fo rm gates from steel tube of same size and shape as top rails, with infill to match
guards. Provide with cam-type, self-closing hinges for fastening to wall and overlapping stop
with rubber bumper to prevent gate from opening in direction opposite egress.
C. Welded Connections: Fa bricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at
connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at
connections, including at fittings.
1. Finish welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1
welds: no evidence of a welded joint as shown in NAAMM AMP 521.
D. Form changes in direction of railings as follows:
1. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.
E. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive
configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without
buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.
F. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
G. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of
returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inchor less.
H. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated.
I. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges,
miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other work.
Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or masonry work.
1. For nongalvanized railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets,
fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors embedded in exterior masonry and
concrete construction.
2. Provide type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage and that provides
1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall surface.
J. Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant material, where
needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit
wall finish thicknesses and to produce adequate bearing area to prevent bracket rotation and
overstressing of substrate.
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC
METAL PAN STAIRS
0551300
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Page 6 of 7
2.08 FINISHES
A. Finish metal stairs after assembly.
B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with galvanized
finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply
with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting
of Steel," for shop painting.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLING METAL PAN STAIRS
A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for
securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry
inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.
B. Cutting, Fi tting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal
stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines
and levels and free of rack.
C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,
masonry, or similar construction.
D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to
be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not
weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and
are for bolted or screwed field connections.
E. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article.
3.02 INSTALLING RAILINGS
A. Adjust railing systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.
Space posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loads. Plumb posts in
each direction. Secure posts and rail ends to building construction as follows:
1. Anchor posts to steel by welding to steel supporting members.
2. Anchor handrail ends to concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail ends
and anchored with post installed anchors and bolts.
B. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at
spacing required to support structural loads. Secure wall brackets to building construction as
required to comply with performance requirements.
3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC
METAL PAN STAIRS
0551300
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Page 7 of 7
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.
END OF SECTION 055113
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
05 5305 - 1 GRATINGS AND FLOOR
PLATES
SECTION 05 5305
GRATINGS AND FLOOR PLATES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Formed metal HVAC Areaway gratings.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.
B.ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products; 2015.
C.ASTM A786/A786M - Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon, Low-Alloy, High-Strength
Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates; 2015.
D.NAAMM MBG 531 - Metal Bar Grating Manual; 2009.
E.SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); 2002 (Ed.
2004).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide span and deflection tables.
C.Shop Drawings: Indicate details of component supports, openings, perimeter construction
details, and tolerances.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.Comply with applicable code for loading requirements.
B.Maximum Allowable Deflection Under Live Load: 1/240 of span; size components by single
support design.
C.Maximum Spacing Between Bars: To restrict pedestrian shoe heels.
2.02 MATERIALS
A.Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A786/A786M; manufacturer's standard pattern.
B.Steel Framing: ASTM A36/A36M shapes, galvanized per ASTM A123/A123M.
C.Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with
VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A.Perimeter Closure: Of same material as grating.
2.04 FABRICATION
A.Grating Type: NAAMM MBG 531, Pressure Locked Type.
2.05 FINISHES
A.Galvanizing for Steel Shapes: ASTM A123/A123M.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings.
B.Verify that opening sizes and dimensional tolerances are acceptable.
C.Verify that supports are correctly positioned.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
05 5305 - 2 GRATINGS AND FLOOR
PLATES
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.Place frames in correct position, plumb and level.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.Comply with NAAMM MBG 531.
END OF SECTION 05 5305
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
06 1000 - 1 ROUGH CARPENTRY
SECTION 06 1000
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Subflooring.
B.Preservative treated wood materials.
C.Fire retardant treated wood materials.
D.Miscellaneous framing and sheathing.
E.Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports.
F.Wall Finish Sheathing
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2009.
B.ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2015a.
C.AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; 2012.
D.PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.
E.PS 2 - Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels; 2010.
F.PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; 2010.
G.SPIB (GR) - Grading Rules; 2014.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials.
C.Samples: For sanded plywood (wall/ceiling) that will be exposed to view, submit two samples,
12by12 inch in size illustrating wood grain, color, and general appearance.
D.Shop drawing: Dimensioned aluminum reveal pattern. (walls, and ceiling).
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to
prevent deformation and to allow air circulation.
B.Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, or
installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies.
1.Species: Southern Pine, unless otherwise indicated.
2.If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no
grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the
specified requirements.
3.Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review,
American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service
for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless
otherwise indicated.
4.Lumber of other species or grades is acceptable provided structural and appearance
characteristics are equivalent to or better than products specified.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
06 1000 - 2 ROUGH CARPENTRY
B.Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS
A.Grading Agency: Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc; SPIB (GR).
B.Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S.
C.Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19.
D.Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring:
1.Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade.
2.Boards: Standard or No. 3.
2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A.Subflooring, For Mechanical platform: Any PS 2 type, rated Sheathing.
1.Bond Classification: Exposure 1.
2.Span Rating: 24.
3.Performance Category: 3/4 PERF CAT.
4.Fire Resistant Treated (FRT) type.
B.Wall Sheathing, For concealed applications: Plywood Sheathing, PS 1, Grade C-D, Exposure
I.
1.Fire Resistant Treated (FRT) type.
C.Wall/Ceiling Finish, For applications exposed to view: Sanded Plywood, PS 1, Grade A-C,
Exposure I.
1.Fire Resistant Treated (FRT) type.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.Fasteners and Anchors:
1.Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel complying with ASTM A153/A153M for
high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.
2.Anchors: Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete.
2.05 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT
A.Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System
for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific
applications.
1.Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp indicating
compliance with specified requirements.
2.Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an
ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with
AWPA standards.
B.Fire Retardant Treatment:
1.Manufacturers:
a.Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc; PyroGuard: www.frtw.com/#sle.
b.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.Interior Type A: AWPA U1, Use Category UCFA, Commodity Specification H, low
temperature (low hygroscopic) type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated;
capable of providing a maximum flame spread index of 25 when tested in accordance with
ASTM E84, with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for an
additional 20 minutes.
a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for
lumber and 15 percent for plywood.
b. All interior rough carpentry items are to be fire retardant treated.
1) Re-sand sanded plywood faces exposed to view, after treatment.
C. Preservative Treatment:
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
06 1000 - 3 ROUGH CARPENTRY
1. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category
UC3B, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative.
a. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
b. Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections.
3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Select material sizes to minimize waste.
B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as
accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking.
C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately
after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants.
3.03 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures,
specialty items, and trim.
B. In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces, provide solid wood fireblocking as required
by applicable local code, to close concealed draft openings between floors and between top
story and roof/attic space; other material acceptable to code authorities may be used in lieu of
solid wood blocking.
C. In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window openings for
anchorage of frames, securely attached to stud framing.
D. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items,
unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is
explicitly indicated.
E. Where ceiling-mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports above
ceiling, unless other method of support is explicitly indicated.
F. Provide the following specific non-structural framing and blocking:
1. Cabinets and shelf supports.
2. Wall brackets.
3. Wall-mounted door stops.
4. Display boards.
5. Wall paneling and trim.
6. Joints of rigid wall coverings that occur between studs.
7. Owner supplied equipment and accessories.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A. Subflooring: Screw to framing; staples are not permitted.
B. Wall Sheathing: Secure with long dimension perpendicular or as indicated on Drawings to wall
studs, with ends over firm bearing and staggered, using screws.
C. Wall/Ceiling Finish: Secure with panel orientation as indicated on Drawings to framing, with
ends over firm bearing, using screws.
3.05 TOLERANCES
A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum.
B. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet
maximum.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
06 1000 - 4 ROUGH CARPENTRY
3.06 CLEANING
A. Waste Disposal: Comply with the requirements of Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste
Management and Disposal.
1. Comply with applicable regulations.
2. Do not burn scrap on project site.
3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated.
4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co-generation
facilities or “waste-to-energy” facilities.
B. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill.
C. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.
END OF SECTION 06 1000
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
06 2000 - 1 FINISH CARPENTRY
SECTION 06 2000
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Accessories
1.Aluminum reveals.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Coordinate the work with electrical rough-in and installation of associated and adjacent
components.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data:
1.Provide data on fire retardant treatment materials and application instructions.
C.Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details,
and accessories.
1.Scale of Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot, minimum.
D.Samples: Submit two samples of finish plywood, 12x12 inch in size illustrating wood grain and
specified finish.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this
section with minimum five years of documented experience.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Protect work from moisture damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS
A.Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide materials having fire and smoke properties as
required by applicable code.
B.Interior Woodwork Items:
1.Aluminum reveals.
2.02 FASTENINGS
A.Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.
B.Exposed Fasteners: Stainless.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A.Aluminum Reveal: Fry Reglet, Millwork Trims.
1.Color: Clear Anodized.
2.Shapes:
a.Millwork Reveal, 1/2" x 1/2". Part Number: MWR5050.
b.Millwork Reveal "F", 1/2". Part Number MWRF5050.
2.04 FABRICATION
A.Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
06 2000 - 2 FINISH CARPENTRY
B.When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting.
Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
B.Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and
ready to receive this work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.
B.Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use
additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch.
B.Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch.
END OF SECTION 06 2000
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
06 4100 - 1 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD
CASEWORK
SECTION 06 4100
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Specially fabricated cabinet units.
B.Countertops.
C.Cabinet hardware.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014.
B.AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) - North American Architectural Woodwork Standards, U.S. Version 3.0;
2016.
C.BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; 2010.
D.NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Shop Drawings: Casework layout based upon actual field dimensions.
C.Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details,
and accessories.
D.Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories.
E.Samples: Submit samples from Manufacturer for color/pattern selection.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this
section with minimum five years of documented experience.
1.Accredited participant in the specified certification program prior to the commencement of
fabrication and throughout the duration of the project.
B.Quality Certification:
1.Provide labels or certificates indicating that the installed work complies with
AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) requirements for grade or grades
specified.
2.Provide designated labels on shop drawings as required by certification program.
3.Provide designated labels on installed products as required by certification program.
4.Submit certifications upon completion of installation that verifies this work is in
compliance with specified requirements.
5.Replace, repair, or rework all work for which certification is refused.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Protect units from moisture damage.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions
in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
06 4100 - 2 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD
CASEWORK
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CABINETS
A.Quality Standard: Custom Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI
(NAAWS), unless noted otherwise.
1.Exposed Exterior Surfaces: MDF, MDO, close grain hardwood plywood, or solid stock.
HPDL of specified color or pattern.
2.Exposed Interior Surfaces: MDF, MDO, close grain hardwood plywood, or solid stock of
manufacturer’s choice. HPDL or LPDL compatible to exposed exterior surface in color,
grain, or pattern of manufacturer’s choice.
3.Semi-Exposed Surfaces: LPDL of the manufacturer’s choice of color.
B.Plastic Laminate Faced Cabinets: Custom grade.
C.Cabinets:
1.Finish - Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Decorative laminate.
2.Finish - Exposed Interior Surfaces: Decorative laminate.
3.Finish - Concealed Surfaces: Manufacturer's option.
4.Door and Drawer Front Edge Profiles: Radius edge with thick applied band.
5.Door and Drawer Front Retention Profiles: Fixed panel.
6.Casework Construction Type: Type A - Frameless.
7.Interface Style for Cabinet and Door: Style 2 - Finish Inset; reveal overlay.
8.Grained Face Layout for Cabinet and Door Fronts: Flush panel.
a.Custom Grade: Doors, drawer fronts and false fronts wood grain to run and match
vertically within each cabinet unit.
9.Adjustable Shelf Loading: 50 lbs. per sq. ft.
a.Deflection: L/144.
10.Cabinet Style: Flush overlay.
11.Cabinet Doors and Drawer Fronts: Flush style.
12.Drawer Side Construction: Multiple-dovetailed.
13.Drawer Construction Technique: Dovetail joints.
2.02 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS
A.Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
2.03 LAMINATE MATERIALS
A.Manufacturers:
1.Formica Corporation; ____: www.formica.com/#sle.
2.Wilsonart LLC; ____: www.wilsonart.com/#sle.
3.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): NEMA LD 3, types as recommended for specific
applications.
C.Color: Select from the manufacture full line of colors/pattern.
2.04 COUNTERTOPS
A.Plastic Laminate Countertops: Medium density fiberboard substrate covered with HPDL,
post-formed, with coved integral backsplash.
B.Color: Select from the manufacturer's full line of colors/pattern.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A.Adhesive: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application.
B.Plastic Edge Banding: Extruded PVC, convex shaped; smooth finish; self locking serrated
tongue; of width to match component thickness.
C.Fasteners: Size and type to suit application.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
06 4100 - 3 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD
CASEWORK
D.Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; galvanized
or chrome-plated finish in concealed locations and stainless steel or chrome-plated finish in
exposed locations.
E.Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.
F.Grommets: Standard plastic grommets for cut-outs, in color to match adjacent surface.
2.06 HARDWARE
A.Hardware: BHMA A156.9, types as recommended by fabricator for quality grade specified.
B.Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side-mounted system using recessed metal shelf
standards or multiple holes for pin supports and coordinated self rests, polished chrome finish,
for nominal 1 inch spacing adjustments.
C.Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped wire pull, steel with chrome finish, 4 inch centers.
D.Cabinet Locks: Keyed cylinder, two keys per lock, master keyed,steel with chrome finish.
E.Catches: Magnetic.
F.Drawer Slides:
1.Type: Full extension.
2.Static Load Capacity: Commercial grade.
3.Mounting: Side mounted.
4.Stops: Integral type.
5.Features: Provide self closing/stay closed type.
6.Manufacturers:
a.Accuride International, Inc: www.accuride.com.
b.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
G.Hinges: European style concealed self-closing type,steel with polished finish.
1.Manufacturers:
a.Blum, Inc: www.blum.com.
b.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.07 FABRICATION
A.Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit
passage through building openings.
B.Edging: Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more than
one piece for any single length.
C.Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for
cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting.
D.Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with
manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly
bevel arises.Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs.
E.Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops as recommended by laminate manufacturer at
16 inches on center.
F.Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions.
Prime paint cut edges.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
B.Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) requirements for grade indicated.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
06 4100 - 4 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD
CASEWORK
B.Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level.
C.Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units.
D.Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not
use additional overlay trim for this purpose.
E.Secure cabinets to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A.Adjust installed work.
B.Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.
3.04 CLEANING
A.Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures.
END OF SECTION 06 4100
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
07 1300 - 1 SHEET WATERPROOFING
SECTION 07 1300
SHEET WATERPROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Sheet Waterproofing:
1.Self-adhered modified bituminous sheet membrane.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete substrate.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic
Elastomers--Tension; 2006a (Reapproved 2013).
B.ASTM D570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics; 1998 (Reapproved
2010).
C.ASTM D903 - Standard Test Method for Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive Bonds; 1998
(Reapproved 2010).
D.ASTM D1876 - Standard Test Method for Peel Resistance of Adhesives (T-Peel Test); 2008
(Reapproved 2015).
E.ASTM D1970/D1970M - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous
Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection; 2013.
F.ASTM D5295/D5295M - Standard Guide for Preparation of Concrete Surfaces for Adhered
(Bonded) Membrane Waterproofing Systems; 2014.
G.ASTM D5385/D5385M - Standard Test Method for Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance of
Waterproofing Membranes; 1993 (Reapproved 2014).
H.ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2014.
I.ASTM E154/E154M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with
Earth Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover; 2008a (Reapproved 2013).
J.ICC-ES AC380 - Acceptance Criteria for Termite Physical Barrier Systems; 2014, with Editorial
Revision (2017).
K.NRCA (WM) - The NRCA Waterproofing Manual; 2005.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide data for membrane.
C.Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Membrane Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products
specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
B.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and
with at least three years of documented experience.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F for 24 hours before and during application
and until liquid or mastic accessories have cured.
1.07 WARRANTY
A.See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
07 1300 - 2 SHEET WATERPROOFING
B.Contractor shall correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial
Completion; remove and replace materials concealing waterproofing at no extra cost to Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WATERPROOFING APPLICATIONS
A.Self-Adhered Modified Bituminous Sheet Membrane:
1.Location: New foundation walls, below grade, exterior face..
2.Cover with drainage panel.
2.02 MEMBRANE MATERIALS
A.Self-Adhered Modified Bituminous Sheet Membrane:
1.Thickness: 60 mil, 0.060 inch, minimum.
2.Sheet Width: 36 inch, minimum.
3.Termite Resistance: 100 percent when tested in accordance with ICC-ES AC380.
4.Tensile Strength:
a.Membrane: 325 pounds per square inch, minimum, measured according to ASTM
D412 Method A, using die C and at spindle-separation rate of 2 inches per minute.
5. Elongation at Break: 300 percent, minimum, measured according to ASTM D412.
6. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perm, maximum, measured in accordance with ASTM
E96/E96M.
7. Low Temperature Flexibility: Unaffected when tested according to ASTM D1970/D1970M
at minus 20 degrees F, 180 degree bend on 1 inch mandrel.
8.Peel Strength: 7 pounds per inch, minimum, when tested according to ASTM D903.
9.Lap Adhesion Strength: 5 pounds per inch, minimum, when tested according to ASTM
D1876.
10. Puncture Resistance: 50 pounds, minimum, measured in accordance with ASTM
E154/E154M.
11. Water Absorption: 0.1 percent increase in weight, maximum, measured in accordance
with ASTM D570, 24 hour immersion.
12. Hydrostatic Resistance: Resists the weight of 200 feet when tested according to ASTM
D5385/D5385M.
13. Adhesives, Sealants, Tapes, and Accessories: As recommended by membrane
manufacturer.
14. Manufacturers:
a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc; MiraDRI 860/861: www.carlisleccw.com/#sle.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Sealant for Cracks and Joints In Substrates: Resilient elastomeric joint sealant compatible
with substrates and waterproofing materials.
B. Drainage Panel: Drainage layer with geotextile filter fabric on earth side.
1. Composition: Dimpled polystyrene core; polypropylene filter fabric.
2. Products:
a. Mar-flex Waterproofing & Building Products; ArmorDrain 110:
www.mar-flex.com/#sle.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
C. Flexible Flashings: Type recommended by membrane manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions are acceptable prior to starting this work.
B. Verify substrate surfaces are durable; free of matter detrimental to adhesion or application of
waterproofing system.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
07 1300 - 3 SHEET WATERPROOFING
C. Verify items that penetrate surfaces to receive waterproofing are securely installed.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage not designated to receive waterproofing.
B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions; vacuum substrate clean.
C. Do not apply waterproofing to surfaces unacceptable to membrane manufacturer.
D. Fill non-moving joints and cracks with a filler compatible with waterproofing materials.
E. Seal moving cracks with sealant and non-rigid filler, using procedures recommended by
sealant and waterproofing manufacturers.
F. Prepare building expansion joints at locations as indicated on drawings.
G. Surfaces for Adhesive Bonding: Apply surface conditioner at a rate recommended by
manufacturer, and protect conditioner from rain or frost until dry.
H. Concrete Surfaces for Adhesive Bonding: Prepare concrete substrate according to ASTM
D5295/D5295M.
1. Remove substances that inhibit adhesion including form release agents, curing
compounds admixtures, laitance, moisture, dust, dirt, grease and oil.
2. Repair surface defects including honeycombs, fins, tie holes, bug holes, sharp offsets,
rutted cracks, ragged corners, deviations in surface plane, spalling and delaminations, as
described in the reference standard.
3. Remove and replace areas of defective concrete as specified in Section 03 3000.
4. Prepare concrete for adhesive bonded waterproofing using mechanical or chemical
methods described in the referenced standard.
5. Test concrete surfaces as described in the referenced standards. Verify surfaces are
ready to receive adhesive bonded waterproofing membrane system.
3.03 INSTALLATION - MEMBRANE
A. Install membrane waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NRCA
(WM) applicable requirements.
B. Roll out membrane, and minimize wrinkles and bubbles.
C. Self-Adhering Membrane: Remove release paper layer, and roll out onto substrate with a
mechanical roller to provide full contact bond.
D. Overlap edges and ends, minimum 3 inches, seal permanently waterproof by method
recommended by manufacturer, and apply uniform bead of sealant to joint edge.
E. Reinforce membrane with multiple thickness of membrane material over joints, whether joints
are static or dynamic.
F. Weather lap joints on sloped substrate in direction of drainage, and seal joints and seams.
G. Flexible Flashings: Seal items watertight that penetrate through waterproofing membrane with
flexible flashings.
H. Seal membrane and flashings to adjoining surfaces.
3.04 INSTALLATION - DRAINAGE PANEL
A. Place drainage panel directly against membrane, butt joints, place to encourage drainage
downward. Scribe and cut boards around projections, penetrations, and interruptions.
B. Adhere drainage panel to substrate with compatible adhesive.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected or uncovered membrane.
END OF SECTION 07 1300
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
07 1300 - 4 SHEET WATERPROOFING
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
07 4213 - 1 METAL WALL PANELS
SECTION 07 4213
METAL WALL PANELS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Manufactured metal panels for exterior wall panels, soffit panels, and interior wall finish, with
accessory components.
B.Preformed, prefinished metal wall panels.
C.Miscellaneous trim, flashing, closures and accessories
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wall panel substrate.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.
B.ASTM A792/A792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc
Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process; 2010 (Reapproved 2015).
C.ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.Product Data: indicate panel size (legth x width), thickness (gauge), rib demensions (profile),
and finish (color).
B.Installer's Qualification Statement.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing products of the type specified in this
section with minimum three years of documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Protect panels from accelerated weathering by removing or venting sheet plastic shipping
wrap.
B.Store prefinished material off the ground and protected from weather; prevent twisting,
bending, or abrasion; provide ventilation; slope metal sheets to ensure proper drainage.
C.Prevent contact with materials that may cause discoloration or staining of products.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.Basis of Design:
1.Metal Wall Panels - Exposed Fasteners: Sinewave: Corrugated metal panels designed
for horizontal and vertical applications manufactured by Corrugated Metals Inc.; 6550
Revlon Dr,, Belvidere, IL 61008. ASD. Tel. Toll Free: 800-621-5617. Fax: 815-323-1317.
Web: www.corrugated-metals.com. Email: info@corrugated-metals.com..
2.02 MANUFACTURED METAL PANELS
A.Wall Panel System: Factory fabricated prefinished metal panel system, site assembled.
1.Provide exterior wall panels and soffit panels.
2.Maximum Allowable Deflection of Panel: L/180 for length(L) of span.
3.Movement: Accommodate movement within system without damage to components or
deterioration of seals, movement between system and perimeter components when
subject to seasonal temperature cycling; dynamic loading and release of loads; and
deflection of structural support framing.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
07 4213 - 2 METAL WALL PANELS
4.Fabrication: Formed true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or
defects; pieces of longest practical lengths.
5.Corners: Factory-fabricated in one continuous piece with minimum 2 inch returns.
B.Exterior Wall Panels:
1.Profile: Vertical; Sinewave 3.00 by 1 inch. style.
a.Corrugated profile: 3.00 inches on center.
b.Depth: 1 inch.
2.Side Seams: Double-interlocked, tight-fitting, sealed with continuous gaskets.
3.Material: Precoated aluminum sheet, 20 gage, 0.032 inch minimum thickness.
4.Panel Width: 48 inches.
5.Panel Length: 10 feet.
6.Color: Gavalume.
C.Soffit Panels:
1.Profile: Style as indicated.
2.Material: Precoated aluminum sheet, 20 gage, 0.032 inch minimum thickness.
3.Color: Gavalume.
D.Internal and External Corners: Same material, thickness, and finish as exterior sheets; profile
to suit system; shop cut and factory mitered to required angles.
E.Trim: Same material, thickness and finish as exterior sheets; brake formed to required profiles.
F.Anchors: Stainless steel.
2.03 MATERIALS
A.Galvalume: ASTM A 792/A792M, AZ50, aluminum-zinc alloy coating.
1.Base metal: Commercial quality.
2.Thickness: 20 gauge.
3.Material Finish: Bare mill finish.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard type suitable for use with system, permanently resilient;
ultraviolet and ozone resistant.
B.Concealed Sealants: Non-curing butyl sealant or tape sealant.
C.Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard type to suit application;stainless steel. Exposed
fasteners same finish as panel system.
1.Metal-to-Metal Fasteners: Self-drilling, self-tapping screws.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify that building framing members are ready to receive panels.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.Install panels on walls and soffits in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.Fasten panels to structural supports; aligned, level, and plumb.
C.Locate joints over supports.
D.Lap panel ends minimum 2 inches.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.Maximum Offset From True Alignment Between Adjacent Members Butting or In Line: 1/16
inch.
B.Maximum Variation from Plane or Location Indicated on Drawings: 1/4 inch.
3.04 CLEANING
A.Remove site cuttings from finish surfaces.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
07 4213 - 3 METAL WALL PANELS
B.Remove protective material from wall panel surfaces.
C.Clean and wash prefinished surfaces with mild soap and water; rinse with clean water.
END OF SECTION 07 4213
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
07 8400 - 1 FIRESTOPPING
SECTION 07 8400
FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Firestopping systems.
B.Firestopping of all joints and penetrations in fire resistance rated and smoke resistant
assemblies, whether indicated on drawings or not, and other openings indicated.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Cutting and patching.
B.Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum wallboard fireproofing.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials;
2015.
B.ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops; 2013a.
C.ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire Resistive Joint Systems; 2007 (Reapproved
2011).
D.ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to
Fungi; 2015.
E.ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; current edition.
F.FM (AG) - FM Approval Guide; current edition.
G.SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition.
H.UL 2079 - Standard for Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
I.UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; current edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance ratings, and limitations.
C.Sustainable Design Submittal: Submit VOC content documentation for all non-preformed
materials.
D.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions.
E.Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the scheduled fire
ratings when tested in accordance with methods indicated.
1.Listing in UL (FRD), FM (AG), or ITS (DIR) will be considered as constituting an
acceptable test report.
B.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
C.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and:
1.Licensed by local authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ).
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions
during and after installation; maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for three days
after installation of materials.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
07 8400 - 2 FIRESTOPPING
B.Provide ventilation in areas where solvent-cured materials are being installed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.Firestopping Manufacturers:
1.3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop.
2.A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc: www.adfire.com.
3.Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com/#sle.
4.Nelson FireStop Products: www.nelsonfirestop.com.
5.Specified Technologies Inc: www.stifirestop.com/#sle.
6.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 MATERIALS
A.Firestopping Materials: Any materials meeting requirements.
B.Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: Provide products having VOC content lower than
that required by SCAQMD 1168.
C.Mold and Mildew Resistance: Provide firestoppping materials with mold and mildew resistance
rating of zero(0) in accordance with ASTM G21.
D.Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Provide type of
materials as required for tested firestopping assembly.
E.Fire Ratings: Refer to drawings for required systems and ratings.
2.03 FIRESTOPPING ASSEMBLY REQUIREMENTS
A.Through Penetration Firestopping: Use system that has been tested according to ASTM E814
to have fire resistance F Rating equal to required fire rating of penetrated assembly.
2.04 FIRESTOPPING PENETRATIONS THROUGH CONCRETE AND CONCRETE MASONRY
CONSTRUCTION
A.Penetrations Through Floors or Walls By:
1.Multiple Penetrations in Large Openings:
a.2 Hour Construction: UL System C-AJ-8143; Hilti FS-ONE MAX Intumescent
Firestop Sealant.
2.Uninsulated Metallic Pipe, Conduit, and Tubing:
a.2 Hour Construction: UL System C-AJ-1226; Hilti FS-ONE MAX Intumescent
Firestop Sealant.
3.Uninsulated Non-Metallic Pipe, Conduit, and Tubing:
a.2 Hour Construction: UL System C-AJ-2109; Hilti CP 643N/644 Firestop Collar.
4.Electrical Cables Not In Conduit:
a.2 Hour Construction: UL System W-J-3198; Hilti CFS-SL RK Retrofit Sleeve Kit for
existing cables.
b.2 Hour Construction: UL System W-J-3199; Hilti CFS-SL SK Firestop Sleeve Kit.
5.Cable Trays with Electrical Cables:
a.2 Hour Construction: UL System C-AJ-4094; Hilti CFS-BL Firestop Block.
6.Insulated Pipes:
a.2 Hour Construction: UL System C-AJ-5048; Hilti FS-ONE MAX Intumescent
Firestop Sealant, CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant, CP 601S Elastomeric Firestop
Sealant, CP 604 Self-Leveling Firestop Sealant or CFS-S SIL GG Firestop Silicone
Sealant Gun-Grade.
7.HVAC Ducts, Uninsulated:
a.2 Hour Construction: UL System C-AJ-7111; Hilti FS-ONE MAX Intumescent
Firestop Sealant.
B.Penetrations Through Floors By:
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
07 8400 - 3 FIRESTOPPING
1.Uninsulated Metallic Pipe, Conduit, and Tubing:
a.2 Hour Construction: UL System F-A-1016; Hilti CP 680-P/M Cast-In Device.
2.Uninsulated Non-Metallic Pipe, Conduit, and Tubing:
a.2 Hour Construction: UL System F-A-2053; Hilti CP 680-P Cast-In Device.
3.Electrical Cables Not In Conduit:
a.2 Hour Construction: UL System F-A-3033; Hilti CP 680-P/M Cast-In Device.
4.Insulated Pipes:
a.2 Hour Construction: UL System F-A-5015; Hilti CP 680-P/M Cast-In Device.
C.Penetrations Through Walls By:
1.Uninsulated Metallic Pipe, Conduit, and Tubing:
a.2 Hour Construction: UL System W-J-1067; Hilti FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop
Sealant.
b.1 Hour Construction: UL System W-J-1067; Hilti FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop
Sealant.
2.Electrical Cables Not In Conduit:
a.2 Hour Construction: UL System C-AJ-3095; Hilti FS-ONE MAX Intumescent
Firestop Sealant.
3.Insulated Pipes:
a.2 Hour Construction: UL System C-AJ-5090; Hilti FS-ONE MAX Intumescent
Firestop Sealant.
b.1 Hour Construction: UL System C-AJ-5090; Hilti FS-ONE MAX Intumescent
Firestop Sealant.
4.HVAC Ducts, Uninsulated:
a.2 Hour Construction: UL System W-J-7109; Hilti FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop
Sealant or CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant.
5.HVAC Ducts, Insulated:
a.2 Hour Construction: UL System W-J-7112; Hilti FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop
Sealant.
2.05 FIRESTOPPING PENETRATIONS THROUGH GYPSUM BOARD WALLS
A.Penetrations By:
1.Multiple Penetrations in Large Openings:
a.2 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-8013; Hilti CFS-BL Firestop Block.
b.1 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-8013; Hilti CFS-BL Firestop Block.
2.Uninsulated Metallic Pipe, Conduit, and Tubing:
a.2 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-1054; Hilti FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop
Sealant.
b.1 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-1054; Hilti FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop
Sealant.
3.Uninsulated Non-Metallic Pipe, Conduit, and Tubing:
a.2 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-2128; Hilti FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop
Sealant.
b.1 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-2128; Hilti FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop
Sealant.
4.Electrical Cables Not In Conduit:
a.2 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-3065; Hilti FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop
Sealant, CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant, CD 601S Elastomeric Firestop Sealant,
or CP 618 Firestop Putty Stick.
b.1 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-3065; Hilti FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop
Sealant, CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant, CD 601S Elastomeric Firestop Sealant,
or CP 618 Firestop Putty Stick.
5.Cable Trays with Electrical Cables:
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
07 8400 - 4 FIRESTOPPING
a.2 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-4060; Hilti FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop
Sealant.
b.1 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-4060; Hilti FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop
Sealant.
6.Insulated Pipes:
a.2 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-5028; Hilti FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop
Sealant.
b.1 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-5028; Hilti FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop
Sealant.
7.HVAC Ducts, Insulated:
a.2 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-7156; Hilti FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop
Sealant.
b.1 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-7156; Hilti FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop
Sealant.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other materials that could
adversely affect bond of firestopping material.
B.Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions, completely closing openings.
B.Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authorities having jurisdiction.
C.Install labeling required by code.
3.04 CLEANING
A.Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
END OF SECTION 07 8400
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
07 9200 - 1 JOINT SEALANTS
SECTION 07 9200
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Nonsag gunnable joint sealants.
B.Joint backings and accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 07 8400 - Firestopping: Firestopping sealants.
B.Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Setting exterior door thresholds in sealant.
C.Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glazing sealants and accessories.
D.Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Sealing acoustical and sound-rated walls and
ceilings.
E.Section 09 2216 - Non-Structural Metal Framing: Sealing between framing and adjacent
construction in acoustical and sound-rated walls and ceilings.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2014.
B.ASTM C919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications; 2012.
C.ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014.
D.ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013.
E.ASTM C1248 - Standard Test Method for Staining of Porous Substrate by Joint Sealants; 2008
(Reapproved 2012).
F.ASTM C1330 - Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold
Liquid-Applied Sealants; 2002 (Reapproved 2013).
G.SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data for Sealants: Submit manufacturer's technical data sheets for each product to be
used, that includes the following.
1.Physical characteristics, including movement capability, VOC content, hardness, cure
time, and color availability.
2.List of backing materials approved for use with the specific product.
3.Substrates that product is known to satisfactorily adhere to and with which it is
compatible.
4.Substrates the product should not be used on.
5.Substrates for which use of primer is required.
C.Color Cards for Selection: Where sealant color is not specified, submit manufacturer's color
cards showing standard colors available for selection.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.06 WARRANTY
A.See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
07 9200 - 2 JOINT SEALANTS
C.Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories that fail to achieve
watertight seal , exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.Non-Sag Sealants: Permits application in joints on vertical surfaces without sagging or
slumping.
1.Bostik Inc; _____: www.bostik-us.com/#sle.
2.Dow Chemical Company; _____:
consumer.dow.com/en-us/industry/ind-building-construction.html/#sle.
3.Pecora Corporation; _____: www.pecora.com/#sle.
4.Sherwin-Williams Company; _____: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle.
5.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 JOINT SEALANT APPLICATIONS
A.Scope:
1.Exterior Joints: Seal open joints, whether or not the joint is indicated on drawings, unless
specifically indicated not to be sealed. Exterior joints to be sealed include, but are not
limited to, the following items.
a.Wall expansion and control joints.
b.Joints between door, window, and other frames and adjacent construction.
c.Joints between different exposed materials.
d.Openings below ledge angles in masonry.
e.Other joints indicated below.
2.Interior Joints: Do not seal interior joints unless specifically indicated to be sealed.
Interior joints to be sealed include, but are not limited to, the following items.
a.Joints between door, window, and other frames and adjacent construction.
b.In sound-rated wall and ceiling assemblies, gaps at electrical outlets, wiring devices,
piping, and other openings; between wall/ceiling and other construction; and other
flanking sound paths.
1)Exception: Through-penetrations in sound-rated assemblies that are also
fire-rated assemblies.
c.Other joints indicated below.
3.Do not seal the following types of joints.
a.Intentional weepholes in masonry.
b.Joints indicated to be treated with manufactured expansion joint cover or some other
type of sealing device.
c.Joints where sealant is specified to be provided by manufacturer of product to be
sealed.
d.Joints where installation of sealant is specified in another section.
e.Joints between suspended panel ceilings/grid and walls.
B.Exterior Joints: Use nonsag non-staining silicone sealant, Type S-3, unless otherwise
indicated.
C.Interior Joints: Use nonsag polyurethane sealant, Type S-1, unless otherwise indicated.
1.Wall and Ceiling Joints in Non-Wet Areas: Acrylic emulsion latex sealant; Type S-2.
2.In Fire-Rated and/or Sound-Rated Assemblies: Acrylic emulsion latex sealant; Type S-2.
D.Sound-Rated Assemblies: Walls and ceilings identified as "STC-rated", "sound-rated", or
"acoustical".
2.03 JOINT SEALANTS - GENERAL
A.Sealants and Primers: Provide products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC)
content than indicated in SCAQMD 1168.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
07 9200 - 3 JOINT SEALANTS
B.Colors: To be selected from Contractor's Submittals.
2.04 NONSAG JOINT SEALANTS
A.Type S-3 - Non-Staining Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; not
expected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic.
1.Movement Capability: ______, minimum.
2.Non-Staining To Porous Stone: Non-staining to light-colored natural stone when tested in
accordance with ASTM C1248.
3.Dirt Pick-Up: Reduced dirt pick-up compared to other silicone sealants.
4.Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
5.Cure Type: Single-component, neutral moisture curing.
6.Manufacturers:
a.Dow Chemical Company; 795 Silicone Building Sealant:
consumer.dow.com/en-us/industry/ind-building-construction.html/#sle.
b.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.Type S-1 - Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; single or
multicomponent; not expected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic.
1.Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent, minimum.
2.Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
3.Manufacturers:
a.Pecora Corporation; Pecora DynaTrol® II: www.pecora.com.
b.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
C.Type S-2 - Acrylic Emulsion Latex: Water-based; ASTM C834, single component,
non-staining, non-bleeding, non-sagging; not intended for exterior use.
1.Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
2.Manufacturers:
a.Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR: www.pecora.com.
b.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A.Backer Rod: Cylindrical cellular foam rod with surface that sealant will not adhere to,
compatible with specific sealant used, and recommended by backing and sealant
manufacturers for specific application.
1.Type for Joints Not Subject to Pedestrian or Vehicular Traffic: ASTM C1330; Type O -
Open Cell Polyurethane.
2.Type for Joints Subject to Pedestrian or Vehicular Traffic: ASTM C1330; Type B -
Bi-Cellular Polyethylene.
3.Open Cell: 40 to 50 percent larger in diameter than joint width.
4.Closed Cell and Bi-Cellular: 25 to 33 percent larger in diameter than joint width.
B.Backing Tape: Self-adhesive polyethylene tape with surface that sealant will not adhere to
and recommended by tape and sealant manufacturers for specific application.
C.Masking Tape: Self-adhesive, nonabsorbent, non-staining, removable without adhesive
residue, and compatible with surfaces adjacent to joints and sealants.
D.Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, type recommended by sealant
manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.
E.Primers: Type recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application; non-staining.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify that joints are ready to receive work.
B.Verify that backing materials are compatible with sealants.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
07 9200 - 4 JOINT SEALANTS
C.Verify that backer rods are of the correct size.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.
B.Clean joints, and prime as necessary, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193.
D.Mask elements and surfaces adjacent to joints from damage and disfigurement due to sealant
work; be aware that sealant drips and smears may not be completely removable.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of
surfaces and material installation instructions.
B.Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.
C.Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919.
D.Install bond breaker backing tape where backer rod cannot be used.
E.Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags, and without
getting sealant on adjacent surfaces.
F.Do not install sealant when ambient temperature is outside manufacturer's recommended
temperature range, or will be outside that range during the entire curing period, unless
manufacturer's approval is obtained and instructions are followed.
G.Nonsag Sealants: Tool surface concave, unless otherwise indicated; remove masking tape
immediately after tooling sealant surface.
3.04 POST-OCCUPANCY
A.Post-Occupancy Inspection: Perform visual inspection of entire length of project sealant joints
at a time that joints have opened to their greatest width; i.e. at low temperature in thermal
cycle. Report failures immediately and repair.
END OF SECTION 07 9200
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 1113 - 1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND
FRAMES
SECTION 08 1113
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Non-fire-rated hollow metal doors and frames.
B.Hollow metal frames for wood doors.
C.Fire-rated hollow metal doors and frames.
D.Thermally insulated hollow metal doors with frames.
E.Sound-rated hollow metal doors and frames.
F.Hollow metal borrowed lites glazing frames.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.
B.Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites.
C.Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting: Field painting.
D.Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting: Field painting.
1.03 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A.ANSI - American National Standards Institute.
B.HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association.
C.NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.
D.NFPA - National Fire Protection Association.
E.SDI - Steel Door Institute.
F.UL - Underwriters Laboratories.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design;
2010.
B.ANSI/SDI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel
Doors, Frames and Frame Anchors; 2011.
C.ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames (SDI-100); 2014.
D.ANSI/SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces
for Steel Doors and Frames; 2011.
E.ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.
F.ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,
Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,
Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2015.
G.ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,
Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and
Ultra-High Strength; 2014.
H.ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound
Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009.
I.ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2010.
J.BHMA A156.115 - American National Standard for Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and
Steel Frames; 2014.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 1113 - 2 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND
FRAMES
K.ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2009.
L.ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; current edition.
M.NAAMM HMMA 830 - Hardware Selection for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2002.
N.NAAMM HMMA 831 - Hardware Locations for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2011.
O.NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors
and Frames; 2007.
P.NAAMM HMMA 861 - Guide Specifications for Commercial Hollow Metal Doors and Frames;
2006.
Q.NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2016.
R.NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; 2012.
S.SDI 117 - Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2013.
T.UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.
U.UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations,
reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one
copy of referenced standards/guidelines.
C.Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and any
indicated finish requirements.
D.Manufacturer's Certificate: Certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.Certify sound-rated frames/glazing meet or exceed stated Sound Transmission Class
(STC) criteria.
E.Manufacturer's Qualification Statement.
F.Installer's Qualification Statement.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section, with not less than three years documented experience.
B.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and
with at least three years of documented experience.
C.Maintain at project site copies of reference standards relating to installation of products
specified.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Comply with NAAMM HMMA 840 or ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100) in accordance with specified
requirements.
B.Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion
and adverse effects on factory applied painted finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.Hollow Metal Doors and Frames:
1.Ceco Door, an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com.
2.Curries, an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com.
3.Steelcraft, an Allegion brand: www.allegion.com/#sle.
4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 1113 - 3 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND
FRAMES
B.Sound-Rated Hollow Metal Doors and Frames:
1.Megamet Industries, Inc; MegaSonic 2A-B - Series Flush Doors:
www.megametusa.com/#sle.
2.Overly Door Company; Model 4895161 Metal Door: www.overly.com/#sle.
3.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 DESIGN CRITERIA
A.Requirements for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames:
1.Steel used for fabrication of doors and frames shall comply with one or more of the
following requirements; Galvannealed steel conforming to ASTM A653/A653M,
cold-rolled steel conforming to ASTM A1008/A1008M, or hot-rolled pickled and oiled
(HRPO) steel conforming to ASTM A1011/A1011M, Commercial Steel (CS) Type B for
each.
2.Accessibility: Comply with ICC A117.1 and ADA Standards.
3.Door Edge Profile: Manufacturers standard for application indicated.
4.Typical Door Face Sheets: Flush.
5.Glazed Lights: Non-removable stops on non-secure side; sizes and configurations as
indicated on drawings. Style: Manufacturers standard.
6.Hardware Preparations, Selections and Locations: Comply with NAAMM HMMA 830 and
NAAMM HMMA 831 or BHMA A156.115 and ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100) in accordance
with specified requirements.
7. Zinc Coating for Typical Exterior Locations: Provide metal components zinc-coated
(galvanized) and/or zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) by the hot-dip process in
accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness,
unless noted otherwise for specific hollow metal doors and frames.
a. Based on SDI Standards: Provide at least A40/ZF120 (galvannealed) when
necessary, coating not required for typical interior door applications, and at least
A60/ZF180 (galvannealed) for corrosive locations.
B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more
than one type of requirement, comply with the specified requirements for each type; for
instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the
requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements
conflict, comply with the most stringent.
2.03 HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. Door Finish: Factory primed and field finished.
B. Exterior Doors: Thermally insulated.
1. Grade: ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100); Level 2 - Heavy-Duty, Physical Performance Level
B, Model 1 - Full Flush.
a. Physical Performance Level C, 250,000 cycles; in accordance with ANSI/SDI
A250.4.
b. Model 1 - Full Flush.
c. Door Face Metal Thickness: 14 gage, 0.067 inch, minimum.
d. Zinc Coating: A60/ZF180 galvannealed coating; ASTM A653/A653M.
1) Exterior frames and doors shall be galvanized, factory “bonderized” and prime
coat baked on.
2. Door Thermal Resistance: R-Value of 6.0 minimum, for installed thickness of
polystyrene.
a. Exterior hollow metal doors shall conform to the New York State Energy Code
andhave closed tops
3. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inch, nominal.
4. Weatherstripping: Refer to Section 08 7100.
5.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 1113 - 4 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND
FRAMES
C. Interior Doors, Non-Fire Rated:
1. Grade: ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100); Level 2 - Heavy-Duty, Physical Performance Level
B, Model 1 - Full Flush.
a. Door Face Metal Thickness: 16 gage, 0.053 inch, minimum.
2. Door Core Material: Manufacturers standard core material/construction and in
compliance with requirements.
3. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inch, nominal.
D. Fire-Rated Doors:
1. Based on SDI Standards: ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100).
a. Level 3 - Extra Heavy-duty.
b. Physical Performance Level A, 1,000,000 cycles; in accordance with ANSI/SDI
A250.4.
c. Model 1 - Full Flush.
d. Door Face Metal Thickness: 16 gage, 0.053 inch, minimum.
2. Fire Rating: As indicated on Door Schedule, tested in accordance with UL 10C and
NFPA 252 ("positive pressure fire tests").
a. Provide units listed and labeled by UL (DIR) or ITS (DIR).
b. Attach fire rating label to each fire rated unit.
3. Door Core Material: Manufacturers standard core material/construction in compliance
with requirements.
4. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inch, nominal.
E. Sound-Rated Interior Doors:
1. Based on SDI Standards: ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100).
a. Level 3 - Extra Heavy-duty.
b. Physical Performance Level A, 1,000,000 cycles; in accordance with ANSI/SDI
A250.4.
c. Model 1 - Full Flush.
d. Door Face Metal Thickness: 16 gage, 0.053 inch, minimum.
2. Sound Transmission Class (STC) Rating of Door and Frame Assembly: STC of 42,
minimum, calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, and tested in accordance with
ASTM E90.
3. Door Thickness: As required to meet acoustic requirements indicated.
4. Sound Seals: Integral, in door and/or frame.
5. Opening Force of Sound-Rated Doors, Non-Fire Rated: 5 lbs, maximum, in compliance
with ADA Standards.
2.04 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. Comply with standards and/or custom guidelines as indicated for corresponding door in
accordance with applicable door frame requirements.
B. General:
1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door.
2. Frames in Masonry Walls: Size to suit masonry coursing with head member to fill
opening without cutting masonry units.
C. Exterior Door Frames: Full profile/continuously welded type.
1. Galvanizing: Components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in
accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with A40/ZF120 coating.
2. Frame Metal Thickness: 14 gage, 0.067 inch, minimum.
3. Frame Finish: Factory primed and field finished.
4. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 7100.
5. Frames must be grouted or filled with 10 or 12lb mineral wool.
D. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire Rated: Knock-down type.
1. Frame Metal Thickness: 16 gage, 0.053 inch, minimum.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 1113 - 5 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND
FRAMES
2. Frame Finish: Factory primed and field finished.
E. Door Frames, Fire-Rated: Knock-down type.
1. Fire Rating: Same as door, labeled.
2. Frame Metal Thickness: 14 gage, 0.067 inch, minimum.
3. Frame Finish: Factory primed and field finished.
F. Sound-Rated Door Frames: Full profile/continuously welded type.
1. Sound Transmission Class (STC rating): 40.
2. Frame Metal Thickness: 14 gage, 0.067 inch, minimum.
3. Frame Finish: Factory primed and field finished.
4. Frames must be grouted or filled with 10 or 12lb mineral wool.
G. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements in accordance with corresponding
door.
H. Mullions for Pairs of Doors: Removable type, with profile similar to jambs.
I. Borrowed Lites Glazing Frames: Construction and face dimensions to match door frames, and
as indicated on drawings.
1. Where located adjacent to sound-rated doors/frames; Match sound rated door frame
specification.
J. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be installed in masonry or to be
grouted.
K. Frames in Masonry Walls: Size to suit masonry coursing with head member field verify inch
high to fill opening without cutting masonry units.
L. Frames Wider than 48 inches: Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame head, flush
with top.
M. Frames Installed Back-to-Back: Reinforce with steel channels anchored to floor and overhead
structure.
2.05 FINISHES
A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard.
B. Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high-build, water-resistant, resilient coating.
2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 8000, factory installed.
B. Astragals for Double Doors: Specified in Section 08 7100.
C. Grout for Frames: Portland cement grout with maximum 4 inch slump for hand troweling;
thinner pumpable grout is prohibited.
D. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; provide three on strike side of single door,
three on center mullion of pairs, and two on head of pairs without center mullions.
E. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for factory- or shop-assembled frames.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
C. Verify that finished walls are in plane to ensure proper door alignment.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior
to installation.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 1113 - 6 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND
FRAMES
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and related
requirements of specified door and frame standards or custom guidelines indicated.
B. Install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80.
C. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.
D. Grout frames in masonry construction, using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that
pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames.
E. Install door hardware as specified in Section 08 7102.
F. Comply with glazing installation requirements of Section 08 8000.
G. Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: Comply with related requirements of specified frame
standards or custom guidelines indicated in accordance with SDI 117 or NAAMM HMMA 861.
B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.
B. Adjust sound control doors so that seals are fully engaged when door is closed.
3.06 SCHEDULE
A. Refer to Door and Frame Schedule on the drawings.
END OF SECTION 08 1113
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 4123 - 1 FIRE RATED GLASS AND
FRAMING SYSTEMS
SECTION 08 4123
FIRE RATED GLASS AND FRAMING SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A.Section Includes:
1.Fire rated door and framing systems for installation as: full vision fire rated doors,
sidelights, borrowed lights, transoms in interior openings.
2.Related Sections include the following:
3.Related Sections:
a.Section 07 84 00 “Firestopping:” Firestops between work of this section and other
fire resistive assemblies.
b.Section 08 71 00 “Door Hardware:” Door hardware other than that provided by the
work of this section
B.REFERENCES
1.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
a.Material related
1)ASTM A 1008/A 1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled,
Carbon, Structural, High-Strength, Low Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy with
Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2007.
2)ASTM A 1011/A 1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip,
Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength
Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength; 2006b.
b.Sound related:
1)ASTM E 90-04: Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound
Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements
2)ASTM E 413-04: Standard Classification for Rating Sound Insulation
2.American Welding Society (AWS)
a.AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel; 2007
3.Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.
a.BHMA A156 - American National Standards for door hardware; 2006 (ANSI/BHMA
A156).
4.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a.NFPA 80: Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows.
b.NFPA 251: Standard Methods of Tests of Fire Endurance of Building Construction
and Materials.
c.NFPA 252: Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
d.NFPA 257: Standard on Fire Test for Window and Glass Block Assemblies.
5.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
a.UL 9: Fire Tests of Window Assemblies.
b.UL 10B: Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
c.UL 10C: Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
6.American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
a.ANSI Z97.1: Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings.
7.Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC):
a.CPSC 16 CFR 1201 Categories I and II: Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing
Materials.
C.DEFINITIONS
1.Manufacturer: A firm that produces primary glass, fabricated glass or framing as defined
in referenced glazing publications.
D.SUBMITTALS
1.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 4123 - 2 FIRE RATED GLASS AND
FRAMING SYSTEMS
2.Product Data:
a.Technical Information: Submit latest edition of manufacturer’s product data providing
product descriptions, technical data, Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listings and
installation instructions.
3.Shop Drawings:
a.Include plans, elevations and details of product showing component dimensions;
framed opening requirements, dimensions, tolerances, and attachment to structure
E.Hardware schedule: list of manufacture supplied hardware and verification of cylinder size
complying with Section 08 71 00
F.Samples: For following products:
1.Glass sample-as provided by manufacturer
2.Sample of frame
3.Verification of sample of selected finish
G.Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on drawings for glazed openings in
preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.
H.Warranties: Submit manufacturer’s warranty.
I.Certificates of compliance from glass and glazing materials manufacturers attesting that glass
and glazing materials furnished for project comply with requirements.
1.Separate certification will not be required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer’s
permanent label designating type and thickness of glass, provided labels represent a
quality control program involving a recognized certification agency or independent testing
laboratory acceptable to authority having jurisdiction.
J.QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in
glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs
glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association
Glazier Certification Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers) or Level 3 (Master Glaziers).
2.Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project and whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
3.Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain framing system, glazing and glazing
accessories from one source for each product and installation method indicated.
4.Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are classified and
labeled by UL, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.
Assemblies must be factory-welded or come complete with factory-installed mechanical
joints and must not require job site fabrication.
5.Fire-Rated Window Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are classified
and labeled by UL, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257.
Assemblies must be factory-welded or come complete with factory-installed mechanical
joints and must not require job site fabrication.
6.Listings and Labels - Fire Rated Assemblies: Under current follow-up service by
Underwriters Laboratories® maintaining a current listing or certification. Label assemblies
accordance with limits of manufacturer’s listing.
7.Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following:
a.Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with Americans
with Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities
(ADAAG),", ANSI A117.1, as follows:
1)Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape that is
easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching,
or twisting of the wrist.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 4123 - 3 FIRE RATED GLASS AND
FRAMING SYSTEMS
2)Door Closers: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements
indicated:
(a)Accessible doors no more than 5 lbf (22.2 N) push or pull force
(b)Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having
jurisdiction
b.IBC 2012 Chapter 10 Means of Egress: Comply with the following for means of
egress doors:
1)Latches, Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the
latch. Locks shall not require the use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for
operation.
2)Door Closers: Not more than 30 lbf (133 N) to set door in motion and not more
than 15 lbf (67 N) to open door to minimum required width.
K.DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.Deliver, store and handle under provisions specified by manufacturer.
L.PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.Obtain field measurements prior to fabrication of frame units. If field measurements will
not be available in a timely manner coordinate planned measurements with the work of
other sections.
a.Note whether field or planned dimensions were used in the creation of the shop
drawings.
2.Coordinate the work of this section with others effected including but not limited to: other
interior and/or exterior envelope components and door hardware beyond that provided by
this section
M.WARRANTY
1.Provide the Fireframes® Designer Series standard five-year manufacturer warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS - FIRE RATED [DOOR ASSEMBLY] [WINDOW]
A.Glass Material: Pilkington Pyrostop® fire-rated glazing as fabricated and distributed by
Technical Glass Products, 8107 Bracken Place SE, Snoqualmie, WA 98065 phone
(800.426.0279) fax (425.396.8300) e-mail sales@fireglass.com, web site
http://www.fireglass.com.
B. Frame System: “Fireframes® Designer Series by TGP” fire-rated steel frame system as
manufactured and supplied by Technical Glass Products, 8107 Bracken Place SE,
Snoqualmie, WA 98065 phone (800.426.0279) fax (425.396.8300) e-mail
sales@fireglass.com web site http://www.fireglass.com.
C. Substitutions: Substitutions for Glazing Material and Frame System not permitted.
D. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1. Fire Rating Requirements
a. Duration -- Doors: Capable of providing a fire rating for 45 minutes.
1) When glazed with Pilkington Pyrostop (60-90 minutes) glazing products, doors
meet the maximum transmitted temperature rise of not more than 450 degrees
Fahrenheit (250 degrees Celsius) at the end of 30 minutes of the standard fire
test exposure.
b. Duration-- Window Assembly: Capable of providing a fire rating for 45 minutes.
c. Duration--Opening Applications in fire partitions or area separation walls and
corridors where opening protection is specified: Capable of providing 45 minute
rating.
2. Delegated design: For the performance requirements listed below requiring structural
design provide data, calculations and drawings signed and sealed by an engineer
licensed in the state of New York where the project is located.
3. Design Requirements:
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 4123 - 4 FIRE RATED GLASS AND
FRAMING SYSTEMS
a. Dimensions - Door and Framing:
1) Door framing face dimension: 1 15/16-inch.
2) Depth of door framing: 1 15/16-inch.
3) Door style face dimension: 3 1/8-inch.
4) Door cross rail (if applicable) face: 3 9/16-inch.
5) Depth of stile, header, sill and cross rail: 1 15/16-inch
b. Dimensions -- Window Assembly:
1) Perimeter framing face dimension: 2 3/4-inch at head, sill and jamb.
2) Horizontal and/or vertical mullions: 3 9/16-inch on the face.
3) Depth of perimeter and mullion: 1 15/16-inch.
c. Construction: Narrow-profile, roll-formed steel architectural grade specialty fire
doors. Conventional break-shape type hollow metal steel fire-rated doors will not be
considered an acceptable substitute for the Fireframes Designer Series doors
specified in this section as they do not conform to the project design intent and/or
aesthetic and quality standards.
1) Knock down frames are not permitted.
E. MATERIALS - GLASS
1. Fire Rated Glazing: ASTM C 1036 and ASTM C 1048; composed of laminated glass with
intumescent interlayers glazing material.
2. Thickness of Glazing Material:
a. 3/4” - 1-9/16”Pilkington Pyrostop®
3. Approximate Visible Transmission: Varies with thickness (approximate range 88
percent).
4. Logo: Each piece of fire-rated glazing shall be labeled with a permanent logo including
name of product, manufacturer, testing laboratory (UL® only), fire rating period, safety
glazing standards, and date of manufacture.
5. Performance: Glass must be rated to stop fire from either direction and must meet all
testing requirements including the required hose-stream test (where fire-rating exceeds
20 minutes).
F. MATERIALS - STEEL FRAMES AND DOORS
1. Steel Framing System including 45-minute rated doors, 45-minute rated windows.
a. Frame: Steel profiled formed tubing.
b. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer
c. Glazing Accessories: calcium silicate setting blocks.
d. Glazing Compounds:
1) FireLite®, FireLite Plus®, FireLite® NT, FireLite® IGU, Fireglass®20, or
Pilkington Pyrostop®: Approved closed cell PVC tape, or pure silicone sealant.
(a) When glazed with Pilkington Pyrostop (60-90 minutes) glazing products,
doors meet the maximum transmitted temperature rise of not more than
450 degrees Fahrenheit (250 degrees Celsius) at the end of 30 minutes of
the standard fire test exposure.
G. FABRICATION
1. Furnish interior frame assemblies “K-D” (or welded upon request).
a. When necessary, splice frames too large for shop fabrication or shipping or to fit in
available building openings.
b. Fit with suitable fasteners.
c. Knock-down door perimeter frames are not permitted
2. Field glaze door and frame assemblies.
3. Factory prepare steel door assemblies and install all hardware.
4. Fabrication Dimensions: Fabricate to fire-rated field dimensions.
5. Obtain approved shop drawings prior to fabrication.
H. FINISHES, GENERAL
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 4123 - 5 FIRE RATED GLASS AND
FRAMING SYSTEMS
1. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
2. Finish frames after assembly.
3. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces
are acceptable. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable.
I. POWDERCOAT FINISHES
1. Finish after fabrication.
2. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces
are acceptable. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable.
3. Interior and Exterior Steel Finishes (Note: this finish is suitable for exterior exposed
portions of the wall systems, including extruded aluminum covers).
a. Powder-Coat Finish: Polyester Super Durable powder coating which meets AAMA
2604 for chalking and fading. Apply manufacturer's standard powder coating finish
system applied to factory-assembled frames before shipping, complying with
manufacturer's recommended instructions for surface preparation including
pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness.
b. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
c. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Tiger Drylac
2) Additional manufacturers as approved by TGP
J. DOOR HARDWARE
1. Furnish hardware with 45 minute fire door by the manufacturer.
2. Select hardware from door manufacturer's standard recommended and approved
hardware groups as specified in Division 8 Section - Door Hardware.
3. Provide power assisted hardware for use at any door that cannot meet the opening
force(s) required by code noted in Part I above.
a. High energy, power-operated doors must meet the requirements of ANSI/BHMA
A156.10 and power-assisted low energy doors must comply with ANSI/BHMA 156.19
4. Operating hardware for Fireframes® Designer Series Single Outswing Doors with Exit
Device. Each to have the following.
Item Description Manufacturer Fin.*
3 Hanging Devices Weld on Pivots Technical Glass
Products
PTM
1 Exit Device 35A-F Rim Von Duprin 626
1 Lever Trim 360 L Lever Handle Von Duprin 626
1 Cylinder ANSI Mortise Schlage C
Keyway
Technical Glass
Products
626
1 Closing Devices TS 93 Surface Applied
Closer
Dorma 689
1 Auto door Bottom 420APKL Smoke Seal Pemko MA
1 Weather Seal Perimeter Gasket Technical Glass
Products
Balance of hardware by others
5. * FINISH LEGEND:
a. Painted to match frame
b. Mill Finish Aluminum
c. Aluminum Paint
d. Satin Stainless Steel
e. Satin Chrome Plated
K. ACCESSORY MATERIALS
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 4123 - 6 FIRE RATED GLASS AND
FRAMING SYSTEMS
1. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12
requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for [30-mil] [0.762-mm] thickness
per coat.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and members to which the work of this section attaches or adjoins prior to
frame installation.
B. Provide openings plumb, square and within allowable tolerances.
1. Provide 3/8 inch shim space at all walls
2. Notify Architect of any conditions which jeopardize the integrity of the proposed fire wall /
door system.
3. Do not proceed until such conditions are corrected.
C. INSTALLATION
1. See Fireframes Designer Series Installation Manual
D. REPAIR AND TOUCH UP
1. Limited to minor repair of small scratches. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
products.
a. Such repairs shall match original finish for quality or material and view.
2. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged.
E. ADJUSTING
1. Adjust door function and hardware for smooth operation. Coordinate with other hardware
suppliers for function and use of any other attached hardware.
F. PROTECTION AND CLEANING
1. Protect glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers
to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove
nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.
a. Do not clean with astringent cleaners. Use a clean “grit free” cloth and a small
amount of mild soap and water or mild detergent.
b. Do not use any of the following:
1) Steam jets
2) Abrasives
3) Strong acidic or alkaline detergents, or surface-reactive agents
4) Detergents not recommended in writing by the manufacturer
5) Do not use any detergent above 77 degrees F
6) Organic solvents including but not limited to those containing ester, ketones,
alcohols, aromatic compounds, glycol ether, or halogenated hydrocarbons.
7) Metal or hard parts of cleaning equipment must not touch the glass surface
2. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances
do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass
manufacturer.
3. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days
before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion.
Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 08 4123
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 7101 - 1 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
SECTION 08 7101
DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Preliminary schedule of door hardware sets for swinging doors as indicated on drawings.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Requirements to comply with in coordination with this
section.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.BHMA (CPD) - Certified Products Directory; 2016.
B.BHMA A156.3 - American National Standard for Exit Devices; 2014.
C.BHMA A156.5 - American National Standard for Cylinders and Input Devices for Locks; 2014.
D.BHMA A156.13 - American National Standard for Mortise Locks & Latches Series 1000; 2012.
E.BHMA A156.18 - American National Standard for Materials and Finishes; 2012.
F.DHI (H&S) - Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule; 1996.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Comply with submittal requirements as indicated in Section 08 7102.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.Only manufacturers listed in Door Hardware Schedule or Section 08 7100 are considered
acceptable, unless noted otherwise.
B.Obtain each type of door hardware as indicated from a single manufacturer and single
supplier.
C.Products are listed and certified compliant with specified standards by BHMA (CPD).
D.Manufacturer's Abbreviations: Coordinate with manufacturers listed in Section 08 7100.
1.AS - Altronix Corp.
2.BE - Best Access Systems.
3.BO - Bommer Industries.
4.BU - Burns Manufacturing
5.DC - Door Controls International.
6.GJ - Glynn Johnson.
7.HA - Hager.
8.HS - HES.
9.HID - HID Global.
10.LC - LCN.
11.MK - McKinney.
12.NG - National Guard Products.
13.NO - Norton.
14.OVY - Overly
15.PE - Pemko.
16.RS - Reese Enterprises.
17.RF - Rixson.
18.RO - Rockwood.
19.SA - Sargent.
20.SU - Securitron.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 7101 - 2 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
21.SO - Sonitrol
22.PR - Stanley Precision.
23.TC- Trimco.
24.VD - Von Duprin.
2.02 DESCRIPTION
A.Door hardware sets provided represent the design intent, they are only a guideline and should
not be considered a detailed or complete hardware schedule.
1.Provide door hardware item(s) as required for similar purposes, even when item is not
listed for a door in Door Hardware Schedule.
2.Necessary items that are not included in a Hardware Set should be added and have the
appropriate additional hardware as required for proper application and functionality.
3.Door hardware supplier is responsible for providing proper size and hand of door for
products required in accordance with Door Hardware Schedule and as indicated on
drawings.
4.Quantities listed are for each Pair (PR) of doors, or for each Single (SGL) door, as
indicated in hardware sets.
2.03 LOCK FUNCTION CODES
A.Function Codes for Cylindrical Locks: Complying with BHMA A156.5.
1.Code F75; Passage: Latch retracted by knobs/levers at all times.
2.Code F76; Privacy Lock: Outside knob/lever locked by pushbutton on inside knob/lever.
Rotating inside knob/lever or closing door releases/unlocks button. Emergency release in
outside knob/lever.
3.Code F78; Communicating Lock: Deadlocking latch bolt by knobs. Either knob is locked
by turn button in opposite knob.
4.Code F80; Communicating Lock: Deadlocking latch bolt by levers except when either
lever is locked by key in its own cylinder.
5.Code F81; Office Lock: Turn button locking. Turning button on inside locks outside
knob/lever until unlocked by key or by rotating the inside knob/lever. Inside knob/lever
always free. Deadlocking latch bolt.
6.Code F82; Entry Lock: Push button locking. Button on inside locks outside knob/lever
until unlocked by key or by rotating the inside knob/lever. Inside knob/lever always free.
Deadlocking latch bolt.
7.Code F83; Exit Lock: Deadlocking latch bolt by levers except when outside lever is
locked by turn button inside. Turn button must be manually unlocked to operate outside
lever. Inside lever always free.
8.Code F84; Classroom Lock: Outside knob/lever locked/unlocked by key in outside
knob/lever. Inside knob/lever always free. Deadlocking latchbolt.
9.Code F86; Storeroom Lock: Outside knob/lever always locked/rigid. Latchbolt retracted
by key in outside knob/lever or by rotating inside knob/lever. Inside knob/lever always
free. Deadlocking latchbolt.
10.Code F109; Entry/Office Lock: Turn/Push button locking. Pushing and turning button on
inside locks outside knob/lever requiring use of a key until button is manually unlocked.
Push button locking. Pushing button locks the outside knob/lever until unlocked by key or
by turning the inside knob/lever. Inside knob/lever always free.
B.Function Codes for Mortise Locks: Complying with BHMA A156.13.
1.Code F01; Passage/Closet Latchset: Latch bolt by knobs at all times.
2.Code F02; Privacy Lock: Latch bolt by knobs, deadbolt by turn inside or emergency key
outside.
3.Code F04: Entry/Office Lock: Deadlocking latch bolt by knobs except when outside knob
is locked by buttons in face (edge), then by key outside.
4.Code F05; Classroom Lock: Deadlocking latch bolt by knobs. Outside knob locked by
key outside. Inside knob always free.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 7101 - 3 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
5.Code F07; Storeroom/Exit Lock: Deadlocking latch bolt by inside knob or key outside.
Outside knob rigid.
6.Code F09; Entry/Restroom Lock: Deadlocking latch bolt by knobs except when outside
knob is locked by key inside, then by key outside.
7.Codes F10, F12, and F20; Entry/Office Lock: Latch bolt by knobs except when outside
knob is made inoperative by buttons in face. Deadbolt by key outside and turn inside.
Rotating inside knob retracts both bolts. Deadlocking latch.
8.Code F11; Exit Lock: Latch bolt operated by knob from either side except when outside
knob is made inoperative by buttons in lock face. Deadbolt projected by key from either
side. Deadbolt retracted by key from outside. Both bolts retracted by inside knob.
Deadlocking latch.
9.Code F14; Store Door Lock: Latch bolt by knobs. Deadbolt by key from either side.
C.Function Codes for Exit Devices: Complying with BHMA A156.3.
1.Code 01; Exit Device: Exit only/no trim.
2.Code 03; Exit Device: Entrance by trim when latchbolt is retracted by key (pullside). Unit
is locked when the key is removed.
3.Code 04; Exit Device: Entrance by trim when latchbolt is retracted by key (pullside) or set
in a retracted position by key.
2.04 FINISHES
A.Finishes: Complying with BHMA A156.18.
1.Code 626: Satin chromium plated over nickel, with brass or bronze base material (former
US equivalent US26D).
2.Code 630: Satin stainless steel, with stainless steel 300 series base material (former US
equivalent US32D).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A.Organize listing of door hardware components within each hardware set in compliance with
10-Part scheduling sequence indicated in DHI (H&S), unless otherwise indicated.
3.02 HARDWARE SET # 01: "ENTRY, SINGLE ACCESS CONTROL"
A.For use on Door Number(s): 001.
B.Provide for the Pair (PR) door(s).
UNITS ITEM DESCRIPTION FINISH MFR
2 Each CONTINUOUS HINGE FM-PT PE
1 Each HARDWARE MULLION
1 Each EXIT DEVICE 70 LD 43 56 M1 8904
814 PSB
SA
2 Each OVERHEAD STOP 1-X36 RF
2 Each CLOSER 351 UO SA
1 Each FLUSH BOLTS, MANUAL ROC
1 Each THRESHOLD 253x3AFG MSES25SS PE
1 Each SWEEP 3452*NB TKSP8 PE
1 Each ELECTRIC POWER TRANSFER EL-CEPT SU
1 Each ELECTROLYNX HARNESS QC-C MK
1 Each ELECTROLYNX HARNESS QC-C006P MK
2 Each POSITION SWITCH DPS-M SU
1 Each POWER SUPPLY AS
C.Notes:
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 7101 - 4 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
1.Emergency egress, only. (36" leaf)
2.Outside door closed & locked at all times.
3.Presenting valid credential outside shunts door position switches, activated electric latch
retraction in exit device & allows for authorized entrance.
4.Inside free at all time for immediate egress. (36" leaf)
5.Operating inside trim activates request to exit switch in exit device shunting door position
switch and allowing authorized egress.
6.With loss of power or activation of building fire system door remains locked.
3.03 HARDWARE SET # 02: "OFFICE, NON-RATED (INTEGRATED INTERIOR ASSEMBLY) STC42"
A.For use on Door Number(s): 002, 003, 004, 005, 010.
B.Provide for each Single (SGL) door(s).
UNITS ITEM DESCRIPTION FINISH MFR
3 Each HINGE ByOthers
1 Each LOCKSET 70-8205 XLNL SA
1 Each CLOSER 351 UO SA
1 Each KICK PLATE K1050 6" high RO
1 Each WALL STOP 406 RO
1 Each SOUND GASKETING STC42 By Others
C.Notes:
1.Classroom function lockset.
2.Hinges provided by Integrated Interior Assembly supplier.
3.Sound-Rated STC42 (minimum). Integrated Interior Assembly supplier to provide
remaining hardware components required to achieve sound rating.
4.Insure door rail is sized to properly accept specified lockset installation.
3.04 HARDWARE SET # 03: "INTERIOR EXIT INTEGRATED ACCESS CONTROL FIRE RATED"
A.For use on Door Number(s): 008.
B.Provide for each Single (SGL) door(s).
UNITS ITEM DESCRIPTION FINISH MFR
2 Each HINGE TA2714NRP MK
1 Each HINGE TA2714XQC12 MK
1 Each ACCESS CONTROL DEVICE 12-70-LD-43-56-
M1X-8975-X3T2
SA
1 Each CLOSER 351 UO SA
1 Each KICK PLATE K1060 6" high RO
1 Each WALL STOP 406 RO
1 Each GASKETING S773BL PE
1 Each ELECTRIC POWER TRANSFER EL-CEPT SU
1 Each ELECTROLYNX HARNESS QC-C MK
1 Each ELECTROLYNX HARNESS QC-C006P MK
1 Each SMART PAC 2205M3 HE
C.Notes:
1.Door closed & locked at all times.
2.Presenting valid credential outside shunts door position switches, activated electric latch
retraction in exit device & allows for authorized entrance.
3.Inside free at all time for immediate egress.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 7101 - 5 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
4.Operating inside trim activates request to exit switch in exit device shunting door position
switch and allowing authorized egress.
5.With loss of power or activation of building fire system door to be unlocked.
6.Smart Pac connected to ETL.
3.05 HARDWARE SET # 04: "PAIR STOREROOM RATED"
A.For use on Door Number(s): 007, 012.
B.Provide for each Pair (PR) door(s).
UNITS ITEM DESCRIPTION FINISH MFR
6 Each HINGE TA-2714 MK
2 Each LOCKSET 8204 LNL SA
2 Each CLOSER 351 UO SA
2 Each WALL STOP 406 RO
2 Each GASKETING S773BL PE
1 Each REMOVEABLE FRAME
MULLION
ByOthers
C.Notes:
1.Storeroom function lockset.
2.Removable Frame Mullion to be supplied by the HM Frame Manufacturer.
3.06 HARDWARE SET # 05: "MECHANICAL/STORAGE ROOMS FIRE RATED"
A.For use on Door Number(s): 009.
B.Provide for each Single (SGL) door(s).
UNITS ITEM DESCRIPTION FINISH MFR
3 Each HINGE MK
1 Each LOCKSET 8204 LNL SA
1 Each CLOSER 351 UO SA
1 Each KICK PLATE K1050 6"high RO
1 Each WALL STOP 406 RO
1 Each GASKETING S773BL PE
C.Notes:
1.Storeroom function lockset.
3.07 HARDWARE SET # 06: "INTERIOR DOUBLE DOOR, NON-RATED"
A.For use on Door Number(s): 006.
B.Provide for each Pair (PR) door(s).
C.8204 LNL
UNITS ITEM DESCRIPTION FINISH MFR
4 Each HINGE, CAM LIFT MCL-500 OVY
2 Each CLOSER 351 UO SA
1 Each ASTRAGAL
1 Each COORDINATOR ROC
2 Each FLUSH BOLTS,
AUTOMATIC
ROC
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 7101 - 6 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
1 Each LOCKSET 70-8237 LNL SA
1 Each DUMMY TRIM
1 Each STRIKE, DUST PROOF
2 Each KICK PLATE K1060 6" high ROC
2 Each MOP PLATE Kl050 X 4BE X 6" X 35"ROC
2 Each WALL BUMPER 1298 26D TRIM
1 Each SOUND GASKETING NGP
D.Notes:.
1.Sound rated door. STC42 minimum. Provide gasketing/seals necessary to achieve the
desired sound rating.
2.Door bottom sound-rating seal direct to concrete floor - no threshold.
3.Both door leafs always active.
4.Classroom function lockset.
3.08 HARDWARE SET # 07: "INTERIOR ENTRY, RATED (FIRE RATED GLASS & FRAMING
SYSTEM)"
A.For use on Door Number(s): 011.
B.Provide for each Single (SGL) door(s).
UNITS ITEM DESCRIPTION
1 WALL STOP 1298
C.Notes:
1.Fire Rating: 45min..
2.See Section 08 4123 Fire Rated Glass and Framings Systems for more information about
additional hardware components supplied with the door.
END OF SECTION 08 7101
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 7102 - 1 DOOR HARDWARE
SECTION 08 7102
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Hardware for wood and hollow metal doors.
B.Hardware for fire-rated doors.
C.Electrically operated and controlled hardware.
D.Thresholds.
E.Weatherstripping and gasketing.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealants for setting exterior door thresholds.
B.Section 08 7101 - Door Hardware Schedule: Schedule of door hardware sets.
C.Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
D.Section 08 4123 - Fire Rated Glass and Framing Systems.
E.Section __________: Power supply to electric hardware devices.
F.Section 28 1000 - Access Control: Electronic access control devices.
G.Section 13 4313 - Integrated Prefabricated Interior Construction.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design;
2010.
B.BHMA (CPD) - Certified Products Directory; 2016.
C.BHMA A156.1 - American National Standard for Butts and Hinges; 2013.
D.BHMA A156.3 - American National Standard for Exit Devices; 2014.
E.BHMA A156.4 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Closers; 2013.
F.BHMA A156.6 - American National Standard for Architectural Door Trim; 2010.
G.BHMA A156.7 - American National Standard for Template Hinge Dimensions; 2014.
H.BHMA A156.13 - American National Standard for Mortise Locks & Latches Series 1000; 2012.
I.BHMA A156.16 - American National Standard for Auxiliary Hardware; 2013.
J.BHMA A156.21 - American National Standard for Thresholds; 2014.
K.BHMA A156.22 - American National Standard for Door Gasketing and Edge Seal Systems,
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2012.
L.BHMA A156.23 - American National Standard for Electromagnetic Locks; 2010.
M.BHMA A156.25 - American National Standard for Electrified Locking Devices; 2013.
N.BHMA A156.31 - American National Standard for Electric Strikes and Frame Mounted
Actuators; 2013.
O.BHMA A156.115 - American National Standard for Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and
Steel Frames; 2014.
P.BHMA A156.115W - Hardware Preparation in Wood Doors with Wood or Steel Frames; 2006.
Q.DHI (H&S) - Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule; 1996.
R.DHI (LOCS) - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors
and Frames; 2004.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 7102 - 2 DOOR HARDWARE
S.DHI WDHS.3 - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Flush Wood Doors;
1993; also in WDHS-1/WDHS-5 Series, 1996.
T.ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2009.
U.ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; current edition.
V.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
W.NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2016.
X.NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; 2015.
Y.NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; 2012.
Z.UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.
AA.UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Coordinate the manufacture, fabrication, and installation of products that door hardware is
installed on.
B.Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious
manner.
C.Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week prior to commencing
work of this section; attendance is required by affected installers and the following:
1.Architect.
2.Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC).
3.Hardware Installer.
4.Owner's Security Consultant.
D.Furnish templates for door and frame preparation to manufacturers and fabricators of products
requiring internal reinforcement for door hardware.
E.Keying Requirements Meeting:
1.Attendance Required:
a.Contractor.
b.Owner.
c.Architect.
d.Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC).
e.Hardware Installer.
f.Owner's Security Consultant.
2.Agenda:
a.Establish keying requirements.
b.Verify locksets and locking hardware are functionally correct for project
requirements.
c.Verify that keying and programming complies with project requirements.
d.Establish keying submittal schedule and update requirements.
e.Define Owner-supplied hardware components, and coordinate with hardware
submittal.
3.Incorporate "Keying Requirements Meeting" decisions into keying submittal upon review
of door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following:
a.Access control requirements.
b.Key control system requirements.
c.Schematic diagram of preliminary key system.
d.Flow of traffic and extent of security required.
4.Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with
two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 7102 - 3 DOOR HARDWARE
5.Deliver established keying requirements to manufacturers.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog literature for each type of hardware, marked to clearly
show products to be furnished for this project, and includes construction details, material
descriptions, finishes, and dimensions and profiles of individual components.
C.Shop Drawings - Door Hardware Schedule: Submit detailed listing that includes each item of
hardware to be installed on each door. Use door numbering scheme as included in Contract
Documents.
1.Prepared by or under supervision of Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC).
2.Conform to DHI (H&S) using door numbers and hardware set numbers as indicated in
construction documents.
a.Submit in vertical format.
3.List groups and suffixes in proper sequence.
4.Provide complete description for each door listed.
5.Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating
complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door
hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3.
Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will
be rejected and subject to resubmission.
6.Content: Include the following information:
a.Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item.
b.Manufacturer of each item.
c.Fastenings and other pertinent information.
d.Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and
in door and frame schedule.
e.Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
f.Mounting locations for door hardware.
g.Door and frame sizes and materials.
h.Warranty information for each product.
7.Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date,
particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of
other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data,
Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information
essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule.
D.Shop Drawings - Electrified Door Hardware: Submit diagrams for power, signal, and control
wiring for electrified door hardware that include details of interface with building safety and
security systems. Provide elevations and diagrams for each electrified door opening as follows:
1.Prepared by or under supervision of Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) and
Electrified Hardware Consultant (EHC).
2.Elevations: Submit front and back elevations of each door opening showing electrified
devices with connections installed and an operations narrative describing how opening
operates from either side at any given time.
3.Diagrams: Submit point-to-point wiring diagram that shows each device in door opening
system with related colored wire connections to each device.
4.Wiring instructions for each electronic component scheduled herein.
5.Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related sections the voltages and wiring details
required at electrically controlled and operated hardware openings.
6.For every hardware set that includes electronic hardware a “Theory of Operation” shall be
provided.
E.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions
requiring special attention.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 7102 - 4 DOOR HARDWARE
F.Keying Schedule:
1.Submit three (3) copies of Keying Schedule in compliance with requirements established
during Keying Requirements Meeting unless otherwise indicated.
G.Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
H.Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of concealed equipment, services, and
conduit.
I.Maintenance Materials and Tools: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of
project.
1.See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2.Lock Cylinders: Ten for each master keyed group.
3.Tools: One set of each special wrench or tool applicable for each different or special
hardware component, whether supplied by hardware component manufacturer or not.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Standards for Fire-Rated Doors: Maintain one copy of each referenced standard on site, for
use by Architect and Contractor.
B.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section with minimum three years of documented experience.
C.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified for
commercial door hardware with at least three years of documented experience.
D.Supplier Qualifications: Company with certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) and
Electrified Hardware Consultant (EHC) to assist in work of this section.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code
to match door hardware schedule.
1.08 WARRANTY
A.General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties
specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other
provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with,
other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B.Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace
components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are
not limited to, the following:
1.Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.
2.Faulty operation of the hardware.
3.Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
4.Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation.
C.Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise
indicated.
D.Special Warranty Periods:
1.Ten years for mortise locks and latches.
2.Five years for exit hardware.
3.Ten years for manual surface door closers.
4.Two years for electromechanical door hardware.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 7102 - 5 DOOR HARDWARE
1.09 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A.Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and
removal and replacement of door hardware.
B.Continuing Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, and running concurrent with the
specified warranty period, provide continuous (6) months full maintenance including repair
and replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as
required for proper door opening operation. Provide parts and supplies as used in the
manufacture and installation of original products.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A.Provide specified door hardware as required to make doors fully functional, compliant with
applicable codes, and secure to extent indicated.
B.Provide individual items of single type, of same model, and by same manufacturer.
C.Provide door hardware products that comply with the following requirements:
1.Applicable provisions of federal, state, and local codes.
2.Accessibility: ADA Standards and ICC A117.1.
3.Applicable provisions of NFPA 101.
4.Fire-Rated Doors: NFPA 80, listed and labeled by qualified testing agency for fire
protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure in accordance with
NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
5. Hardware on Fire-Rated Doors: Listed and classified by UL (DIR), ITS (DIR), or testing
firm acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as suitable for application indicated.
6. Listed and certified compliant with specified standards by BHMA (CPD).
7. Hardware Preparation for Steel Doors and Steel Frames: BHMA A156.115.
8. Hardware Preparation for Wood Doors with Wood or Steel Frames: BHMA A156.115W .
9. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL (DIR) as suitable
for the purpose specified.
D. Electrically Operated and/or Controlled Hardware: Provide necessary power supplies, power
transfer hinges, relays, and interfaces as required for proper operation; provide wiring between
hardware and control components and to building power connection in compliance with NFPA
70.
1. Refer to Section 28 1000 for additional access control system requirements.
E. Lock Function: Provide lock and latch function numbers and descriptions of manufacturer's
series. Refer to Section 08 0671 for listing of hardware sets.
F. Fasteners:
1. Provide fasteners of proper type, size, quantity, and finish that comply with commercially
recognized standards for proposed applications.
a. Aluminum fasteners are not permitted.
b. Provide phillips flat-head screws with heads finished to match door surface hardware
unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide machine screws for attachment to reinforced hollow metal and aluminum frames.
a. Self-drilling (Tek) type screws are not permitted.
3. Provide stainless steel machine screws and lead expansion shields for concrete and
masonry substrates.
4. Provide wall grip inserts for hollow wall construction.
5. Provide spacers or sex bolts with sleeves for through bolting of hollow metal doors and
frames.
6. Fire-Rated Applications: Comply with NFPA 80.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 7102 - 6 DOOR HARDWARE
a. Provide wood or machine screws for hinges mortised to doors or frames, strike
plates to frames, and closers to doors and frames.
b. Provide steel through bolts for attachment of surface mounted closers, hinges, or exit
devices to door panels unless proper door blocking is provided.
7. Concealed Fasteners: Do not use through or sex bolt type fasteners on door panel sides
indicated as concealed fastener locations, unless otherwise indicated.
2.02 HINGES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Basis of Design: McKinney.
2. McKinney; an Assa Abloy Group company; _____: www.assaabloydss.com/#sle.
3. Bommer Industries, Inc; _____: www.bommer.com/#sle.
4. Hager Companies; _____: www.hagerco.com/#sle.
5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B. Butt Hinges: Complying with BHMA A156.1, Grade 1.
1. Butt Hinges: Complying with BHMA A156.1 and BHMA A156.7 for templated hinges.
a. Provide hinge width required to clear surrounding trim.
2. Provide hinges on every swinging door.
3. Provide five-knuckle full mortise butt hinges unless otherwise indicated.
4. Provide power transfer hinges where electrified hardware is mounted in door leaf.
5. Provide following quantity of butt hinges for each door:
a. Doors From 60 inches High up to 90 inches High: Three hinges.
b. Doors over 90 inches High: One additional hinge per each additional 30 inches in
height.
6. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for
door thickness and clearances required:
a. Widths up to 3’0”: 4-1/2” standard or heavy weight as specified.
b. Widths from 3’1” to 4’0”: 5” standard or heavy weight as specified.
7. Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Hardware Sets or on
Drawings:
a. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a
groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed for all out-swinging
lockable doors.
C. Continuous Hinges: Complying with BHMA A156.26.
1. Continuous geared hinge with minimum 0.120-inch thick extruded 6060 T6 aluminum
alloy hinge leaves and a minimum overall width of 4 inches. Hinges are non-handed,
reversible and fabricated to template screw locations. Provide concealed flush mount
(with or without inset), full surface, or half surface, in standard and heavy-duty models, as
specified in the Hardware Sets. Concealed continuous hinges to be U.L. listed for use on
up to and including 90 minute rated door installations and U.L. listed for windstorm
components where applicable. Factory cut hinges for door size and provide with
removable service power transfer panel where indicated at electrified openings.
2.03 FLUSH BOLTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Basis of Design: Rockwood; an Assa Abloy Group company.
2. Trimco: www.trimcohardware.com/#sle.
3. Rockwood; an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com..
4. Burns Manufacturing.
5. Door Controls International.
6. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B. Flush Bolts: Complying with BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.
1. Flush Bolt Throw: 3/4 inch, minimum.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 7102 - 7 DOOR HARDWARE
2. Provides extension bolts in leading edge of door, one bolt into floor, one bolt into top of
frame.
a. Pairs of Swing Doors: At inactive leaves, provide flush bolts of type as required to
comply with code.
3. Provide dustproof floor strike for bolt into floor, except at metal thresholds.
4. Manual Flush Bolts: Provide lever extensions for top bolt at over-sized doors.
5. Self-Latching Flush Bolts: Automatically latch upon closing of door; manually retracted;
located on inactive leaf of pair of doors.
6. Automatic Flush Bolts: Automatically latch upon closing of door; automatic retraction of
bolts when active leaf is opened; located on inactive leaf of pair of doors.
7. Provide related accessories (mounting brackets, strikes, coordinators, etc.) as required
for appropriate installation and operation.
2.04 EXIT DEVICES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Basis of Design: Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 80 Series.
2. Precision, dormakaba Group; Apex 2000 Series. : www.precisionhardware.com/#sle.
3. Von Duprin, an Allegion brand; 35A/98 XP Series.: www.allegion.com/us.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B. General Requirements: All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following
criteria:
1. At doors not requiring a fire rating, provide devices complying with NFPA 101 and listed
and labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper fasteners as
required by manufacturer including sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the
Hardware Sets.
2. Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices complying with
NFPA 80 and with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide devices with the
proper fasteners for installation as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturer’s
catalog and template book for specific requirements.
3. Except on fire rated doors and doors with access control, provide exit devices keyed
cylinder dogging.
4. Flush End Caps: Provide heavy weight impact resistant flush end caps made of
architectural metal in the same finish as the devices as in the Hardware Sets. Plastic end
caps will not be acceptable.
5. Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish manufacturer's
heavy-duty trim with cold forged escutcheons, beveled edges, and threaded studs for
through bolts.
a. Lock Trim Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide finishes and designs to
match that of the specified locksets.
b. Where function of exit device requires a cylinder, provide keyed cylinder (Rim or
Mortise) as required.
6. Vertical Rod Exit Devices: Provide and install interior surface and concealed vertical rod
exit devices as Less Bottom Rod (LBR) unless otherwise indicated.
7. Narrow Stile Applications: At doors constructed with narrow stiles, or as specified in
Hardware Sets, provide devices designed for maximum 2” wide stiles.
8. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar.
C. Exit Devices: Complying with BHMA A156.3, Grade 1.
1. Lever design to match lockset trim.
2. Provide cylinder with cylinder dogging or locking trim.
3. Provide exit devices properly sized for door width and height.
4. Provide strike as recommended by manufacturer for application indicated.
5. Provide UL (DIR) listed exit device assemblies for fire-rated doors and panic device
assemblies for non-fire-rated doors.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 7102 - 8 DOOR HARDWARE
6. For electrical options, provide quick connect plug-in pre-wired connectors.
D. Tube Steel Removable Mullions: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 removable steel mullions with
malleable-iron top and bottom retainers and a primed paint finish. Provide keyed removable
feature, stabilizers, and mounting brackets as required.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 980S Series.
b. Stanley Precision (PR) - 822 Series.
c. Von Duprin (VD) - 9954 Series.
2.05 INTEGRATED WIEGAND OUTPUT EXIT DEVICES – MULTI-CLASS READER
A. Integrated Wiegand Output Multi-Class Exit Hardware: Wiegand output ANSI 156.3 Grade 1
rim, mortise, and vertical rod exit device hardware with integrated proximity card reader,
latchbolt and touchbar monitoring, and request-to-exit signaling, in one complete unit. Hard
wired, solenoid driven locking/unlocking control of the lever handle exit trim with 3/4" throw
latch bolt. U.L listed and labeled for either panic or "fire exit hardware" for use on up to 3 hour
fire rated openings. Available with or without keyed high security cylinder override.
1. Open architecture, hard wired platform supports centralized control of locking units with
new or existing Wiegand compatible access control systems. Inside push bar
(request-to-exit) signaling and door position (open/closed status) monitoring (via
separately connected DPS).
2. Integrated reader supports the following credentials:
a. 125kHz proximity credentials: HID, AWID, Indala, and EM4102.
b. 13.56 MHz proximity credentials: HID iClass, HID iClass SE, SE for MIFARE Classic,
DESFire EV1.
3. 12VDC external power supply required for reader. 24VDC required for solenoid operated
exit trim. Fail safe or fail secure options.
4. Installation requires only one cable run from the exit hardware to the access control panel
without requirements for additional proprietary lock panel interface boards or modules.
5. Competitor Alternates Allowed Option: Installation to include manufacturer's access
control panel interface board or module where required for Wiegand output protocol.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – M1 80 Series.
2.06 CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years’ experience designing secured
master key systems and have on record a published ecurity keying system policy.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source
manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Best (BE).
b. No Substitution – Facility Standard.
C. Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following:
1. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight- or clover -type cam.
2. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised
trim ring.
3. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks.
4. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be
flush and be free spinning with matching finishes.
5. Keyway: Match Facility Restricted Keyway.
D. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed. Conduct specified "Keying
Conference" to define and document keying system instructions and requirements. Furnish
factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control number as
directed by Owner. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference, and as follows:
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 7102 - 9 DOOR HARDWARE
1. Existing System: Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system.
E. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys:
1. Top Master Key: One (1).
2. Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2).
3. Master Keys (per Master Key Group): Two (2).
4. Grand Master Keys (per Grand Master Key Group): Two (2).
5. Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10).
F. Construction Keying: Provide construction master keyed cylinders or temporary keyed
construction cores where specified. (Typically exterior doors, doors in construction barriers,
office suite doors to corridor, etc.) Provide construction master keys in quantity as required by
project Contractor. Replace construction cores with permanent cores. Furnish permanent cores
for installation as directed under specified "Keying Conference".
G. Key Registration List: Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper
format for importing into key control software.
2.07 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Basis of Design: Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – 8200 Series.
2. Substitutions: Not permitted.
B. Mortise Locks: Complying with BHMA A156.13, Grade 1, Security, 1000 Series.
1. Latchbolt Throw: 3/4 inch, minimum.
a. Anti-friction stainless steel.
2. Deadbolt Throw: 1 inch, minimum.
a. Stainless steel.
3. Backset: 2-3/4 inch unless otherwise indicated.
4. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each latchset or lockset with strike
box and curved lip extending to protect frame in compliance with indicated requirements.
a. Finish: To match lock or latch.
5. Locksets to be manufactured with a corrosion resistant, stamped 12 gauge minimum
formed steel case and be field-reversible for handing without disassembly of the lock
body.
6. Lockset trim (including knobs, levers, escutcheons, roses) to be the product of a single
manufacturer.
a. Lock Trim Design: Sargent LNL.
7. Furnish in the functions as specified in the Hardware Sets.
2.08 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES
A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with
curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise
indicated, and as follows:
1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by
manufacturer.
2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim.
3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for
aluminum framing.
B. Standards: Comply with the following:
1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13.
2. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2.
3. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.5.
4. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16.
2.09 DOOR PULLS AND PUSH PLATES
A. Manufacturers:
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 7102 - 10 DOOR HARDWARE
1. Rockwood; an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B. Door Pulls and Push Plates: Complying with BHMA A156.6.
1. Pull Type: Straight, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Push Plate Type: Flat, with square corners, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Edges: Beveled, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Material: Stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated.
2.10 COORDINATORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Rockwood; an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B. Coordinators: Provide on doors having closers and self-latching or automatic flush bolts to
ensure that inactive door leaf closes before active door leaf.
1. Type: Bar, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Material: steel, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Ensure that coordination of other door hardware affected by placement of coordinators
and carry bar is applied properly for completely operable installation.
2.11 CLOSERS
A. Manufacturers; Surface Mounted:
1. Basis of Design: Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 351 Series..
2. LCN, an Allegion brand; 4040XP Series: www.allegion.com/us.
3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B. Closers: Complying with BHMA A156.4, Grade 1.
1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with
the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size.
Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers including installation and adjusting
information on inside of cover.
2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C and UBC 7-2 for Positive Pressure Fire Test
and be U.L. listed for use of fire rated doors.
3. Cycle Testing: Provide closers which have surpassed 15 million cycles in a test witnessed
and verified by UL.
4. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door
closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of
use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically
handicapped, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1.
5. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special
mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates, and through-bolt or security type fasteners
as required.
6. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 surface
mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6;
and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening
force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body
construction, with adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for closing
sweep and latch speed control. Provide non-handed units standard.
7. Type: Surface mounted to door.
8. Provide door closer on each exterior door.
9. Provide door closer on each fire-rated and smoke-rated door.
a. Spring hinges are not an acceptable self-closing device, unless otherwise indicated.
10. Where an overlapping astragal is included on pairs of swinging doors, provide
coordinator to ensure door leaves close in proper order.
11. At corridor entry doors, mount closer on room side of door.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 7102 - 11 DOOR HARDWARE
12. At outswinging exterior doors, mount closer on interior side of door.
2.12 PROTECTION PLATES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Trimco: www.trimcohardware.com.
2. Rockwood; an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com.
3. Burns Manufacturing.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B. Metal Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified metal protection plate, beveled on four
edges (B4E), fabricated from the following:
1. Stainless Steel: 300 series, 050-inch thick Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated
fastener type as specified in the Hardware Sets.
C. Kick Plates: Provide along bottom edge of push side of every door with closer, except
aluminum storefront and glass entry doors, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Size: 6 inch high by 2 inch less door width (LDW) on push side of door.
D. Mop Plates: Provide along bottom edge of push side of doors to provide protection from
cleaning liquids and equipment damage to door surface.
1. Size: 6 inch high by 1-1/2 inch less door width (LDW) on pull side and 2 inch LDW on
push side of door.
2.13 DOOR HOLDERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Rixson Door Controls.
2. Sargent Manufacturing.
3. Glynn Johnson.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B. Door Holders: Complying with BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.
1. Provide surface mounted door holders when wall or floor stop is not applicable and
hold-open device is mounted on door.
2. Type: Lever, or kick down stop, with rubber bumper at bottom end.
3. Material: Bronze.
4. Provide non-handed design with mounting brackets as required for proper operation and
function.
2.14 FLOOR STOPS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Rockwood; an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com.
2. Trimco: www.trimcohardware.com.
3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B. Floor Stops: Complying with BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 and Resilient Material Retention Test
as described in this standard.
1. Type: Manual hold-open, with bumper floor stop.
2. Material: Aluminum housing with rubber insert.
2.15 WALL STOPS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Rockwood; an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com.
2. Trimco: www.trimcohardware.com.
3. Rockwood Manufacturing.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B. Wall Stops: Complying with BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 and Resilient Material Retention Test as
described in this standard.
1. Provide wall stops to prevent damage to wall surface upon opening door.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 7102 - 12 DOOR HARDWARE
2. Type: Bumper, concave, wall stop.
3. Material: Aluminum housing with rubber insert.
2.16 ASTRAGALS
A. Astragals: Complying with BHMA A156.22.
1. Provide surface mounted astragal to cover or fill space for full door height between pair of
doors or door and adjacent jamb.
2. Type: Split, two parts, and with sealing gasket.
3. Material: Steel, with neoprene weatherstripping.
4. Provide non-corroding fasteners at exterior locations.
2.17 THRESHOLDS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Pemko; an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com/#sle.
2. National Guard Products, Inc: www.ngpinc.com.
3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B. Thresholds: Complying with BHMA A156.21.
1. Provide threshold at each exterior door, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Type: Flat surface. Barrier-free.
3. Material: Aluminum.
4. Threshold Surface: Thermally broken.
5. Field cut threshold to profile of frame and width of door sill for tight fit.
6. Provide non-corroding fasteners at exterior locations.
2.18 WEATHERSTRIPPING AND GASKETING
A. Manufacturers:
1. Pemko; an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com.
2. National Guard Products, Inc: www.ngpinc.com.
3. Reese Enterprises, Inc: www.reeseusa.com/#sle.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B. Weatherstripping and Gasketing: Complying with BHMA A156.22.
1. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as
specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on
exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where
indicated. At exterior applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where
indicated.
2. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA105 that are listed and
labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
for smoke control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL1784.
a. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings.
3. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA80 that are listed and labeled
by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire
ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C.
a. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive
Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and UBC 7-2, Fire Tests of Door
Assemblies.
4. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and
inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E
1408.
5. Provide weatherstripping on each exterior door at head, jambs, and meeting stiles of door
pairs, unless otherwise indicated; .
6. Provide door bottom sweep on each exterior door, unless otherwise indicated.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 7102 - 13 DOOR HARDWARE
7. Provide sound-rated gasketing and automatic door bottom on doors indicated as
"Sound-Rated", "Acoustical", or with "Sound Transmission Class (STC) rating"; fabricate
as continuous gasketing, do not cut or notch gasketing material.
8. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips
are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
2.19 SILENCERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Rockwood; an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B. Silencers: Provide at equal locations on door frame to mute sound of door's impact upon
closing.
1. Single Door: Provide three on strike jamb of frame.
2. Pair of Doors: Provide two on head of frame, one for each door at latch side.
3. Material: Rubber, gray color.
2.20 FINISHES
A. Finishes: Identified in Section 08 0671 - Door Hardware Schedule.
B. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes
complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes
indicated by certain manufacturers for their products.
C. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition,
hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less
than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.
D. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive this work; labeled, fire-rated doors and
frames are properly installed, and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.
B. Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of correct characteristics.
C. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and
other conditions affecting performance.
D. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types,
drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have
been resolved in writing.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series.
B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes.
B. Install hardware on fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with applicable codes and NFPA
80.
C. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.
D. Do not install surface mounted items until application of finishes to substrate are fully
completed.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 7102 - 14 DOOR HARDWARE
E. Door Hardware Mounting Heights: Distance from finished floor to center line of hardware
item. As indicated in following list; unless noted otherwise in Door Hardware Schedule or on
drawings.
1. For Steel Doors and Frames: Install in compliance with DHI (LOCS) recommendations.
2. For Wood Doors: Install in compliance with DHI WDHS.3 recommendations.
3. Mounting heights in compliance with ADA Standards:
a. Locksets: 40-5/16 inch.
b. Push Plates/Pull Bars: 42 inch.
c. Deadlocks (Deadbolts): 48 inch.
d. Exit Devices: 40-5/16 inch.
e. Door Viewer: 43 inch; standard height 60 inch.
F. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is
located.
G. Set exterior door thresholds with full-width bead of elastomeric sealant at each point of contact
with floor providing a continuous weather seal; anchor thresholds with stainless steel
countersunk screws.
1. Refer to Section 07 9200 for additional requirements.
H. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and
written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into
surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage,
and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9
Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on
substrates involved.
I. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed.
Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will
not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform field inspection and testing under provisions of Section 01 4000 - Quality
Requirements.
B. Provide an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to inspect installation and certify that
hardware and installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and as specified.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements.
B. Adjust hardware for smooth operation.
C. Adjust gasketing for complete, continuous seal; replace if unable to make complete seal.
D. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended.
E. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating
equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean finished hardware in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions after final
adjustments have been made.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.
C. Replace items that cannot be cleaned to manufacturer's level of finish quality at no additional
cost.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 7102 - 15 DOOR HARDWARE
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout
Requirements.
B. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish.
C. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place.
3.08 DEMONSTRATION
A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and
electromechanical door hardware.
END OF SECTION 08 7102
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 8000 - 1 GLAZING
SECTION 08 8000
GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Glazing units.
1.Sound-rated glass.
2.Fire resistance rated glass.
B.Glazing compounds and accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealants for other than glazing purposes.
B.Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Glazed lites in doors and borrowed lites.
C.Section 08 1416 - Flush Wood Doors: Glazed lites in doors.
D.Section 08 4123 - Sound Rated Glass and Framing Systems
E.Section 13 4313 - Integrated Prefabricated Interior Construction
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition.
B.ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings,
Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test; 2010.
C.ASTM C864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets,
Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 2005 (Reapproved 2011).
D.ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014.
E.ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011.
F.ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass;
2012.
G.ASTM C1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass; 2014.
H.ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013.
I.ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound
Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009.
J.ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2010.
K.GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; 2009.
L.GANA (SM) - GANA Sealant Manual; 2008.
M.GANA (LGRM) - Laminated Glazing Reference Manual; 2009.
N.ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; 2015.
O.IGMA TM-3000 - North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for
Commercial & Residential Use; 1990 (2004).
P.ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; current edition.
Q.NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; 2012.
R.UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.
S.UL 9 - Standard for Fire Tests of Window Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of
this section; require attendance by each of the affected installers.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 8000 - 2 GLAZING
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data on Glazing Unit Glazing Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental
characteristics, size limitations, special handling and installation requirements.
C.Product Data on Glazing Compounds and Accessories: Provide chemical, functional, and
environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements, and identify
available colors.
D.Samples: Submit two samples 12 by 12 inch in size indicating translucency, coloration, and
design..
E.Certificate: Certify that products of this section meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.Certify sound-rated glazing meets or exceeds stated Sound Transmission Class (STC)
criteria.
2.Certify glazing located in "Hazardous locations" meet or exceed performance criteria
stated in Section 2406 SAFETY GLAZING of the 2015 IBC - International Building Code.
3.Certify glazing meet or exceed performance criteria stated in PART 47 TRANSPARENT
GLASS DOORS of the New York State Department of Labor Industrial Code.
F.Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been
completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Perform Work in accordance with GANA (GM), GANA (SM), GANA (LGRM), and IGMA
TM-3000 for glazing installation methods.
B.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years of documented experience.
C.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and
with at least three years documented experience.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F.
B.Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of
glazing compounds.
1.08 WARRANTY
A.See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.Insulating Glass Units: Provide a five (5) year manufacturer warranty to include coverage for
seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, including providing products to replace failed units.
C.Laminated Glass: Provide a five (5) year manufacturer warranty to include coverage for
delamination, including providing products to replace failed units.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.Glass Manufacturers:
1.AGC Glass North America, Inc: www.agc-yourglass.com/#sle.
2.Cardinal Glass Industries: www.cardinalcorp.com.
3.Guardian Glass, LLC: www.guardianglass.com.
4.Pilkington North America Inc: www.pilkington.com/na/#sle.
5.Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.Fire-Resistance-Rated Glass: Provide products as required to achieve indicated fire-rating
period.
1.Manufacturers:
a.Technical Glass Products; Pilkington Pyrostop: www.fireglass.com/#sle.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 8000 - 3 GLAZING
b.Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 GLASS MATERIALS
A.Float Glass: Provide float glass based glazing unless noted otherwise.
1.Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM C1048, Kind HS and FT.
2.Fully Tempered Safety Glass: Complies with ANSI Z97.1 and 16 CFR 1201 criteria.
B.Laminated Glass: Float glass laminated in accordance with ASTM C1172.
1.Laminated Safety Glass: Complies with ANSI Z97.1 and 16 CFR 1201 test requirements
for Category II.
2.03 GLAZING UNITS
A.Type FG-1 - Fire-Resistance-Rated Glazing: Type, thickness, and configuration of glazing that
contains flame, smoke, and blocks radiant heat, as required to achieve indicated fire-rating
period exceeding 45 minutes.
1.Applications:
a.Glazing in sidelites, borrowed lites, and other glazed openings in fire-rated wall
assemblies.
2.Provide products listed by ITS (DIR) or UL (DIR) and approved by authorities having
jurisdiction.
3.Safety Glazing Certification: 16 CFR 1201 Category II.
4.Glazing Method: As required for fire rating.
5.Fire-Rating Period: As scheduled.
6.Type FG-1:
a.Clear.
b.Approximate Visible Transmission: 88 percent.
7.Manufacturers:
a.Technical Glass Products; Pilkington Pyrostop 45-200: www.fireglass.com/#sle.
b.Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.Type SG-1 - Sound Control Glazing: Laminated double insulating glass.
1.Applications: Locations as indicated on drawings. Sound control doors & borrowed lites.
2.Tint: Clear.
3.Sound Transmission Class (STC) Rating: Provide at least STC 42 rating, conforming to
ASTM E90 and ASTM E413.
4. Overall Thickness: 1 inch.
5. Laminated Double Insulating Glass:
a. Outer Layer, Outboard Side: Tempered glass.
1) Thickness: 1/4 inch.
b. Interlayer: Acoustic polyvinyl butyral (PVB), thickness as required to meet
performance criteria.
c. Outer Layer, Inboard Side: Tempered glass.
1) Thickness: 1/4 inch.
d. Air Space: 1/2 inch, filled with air.
6. Glazing Method: As required to meet STC rating as indicated.
2.04 GLAZING COMPOUNDS
A. Type GC-5 - Silicone Sealant: Single component; neutral curing; capable of water immersion
without loss of properties; non-bleeding, non-staining; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class
25, Uses M, A, and G; with cured Shore A hardness range of 15 to 25; color as selected.
B. Manufacturers:
1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.
2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
3. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 8000 - 4 GLAZING
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Setting Blocks: Silicone, with 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness; ASTM C864 Option II.
Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch by width of glazing rabbet
space minus 1/16 inch by height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area.
B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness; ASTM C864 Option II.
Minimum 3 inch long by one half the height of the glazing stop by thickness to suit application,
self adhesive on one face.
C. Glazing Tape, Back Bedding Mastic Type: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids
compound with integral resilient spacer rod applicable to application indicated; 5 to 30 cured
Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; black color.
1. Width: As required for application.
2. Thickness: As required for application.
3. Spacer Rod Diameter: As required for application.
4. Manufacturers:
a. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
b. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com/#sle.
c. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
D. Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot;
ASTM C864 Option II; color as selected.
E. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS
A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerances, including those for
size, squareness, and offsets at corners.
B. Verify that the minimum required face and edge clearances are being provided.
C. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may
impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and support framing is ready to receive glazing
system.
D. Verify that sealing between joints of glass framing members has been completed effectively.
E. Proceed with glazing system installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean contact surfaces with appropriate solvent and wipe dry within maximum of 24 hours
before glazing. Remove coatings that are not tightly bonded to substrates.
B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.
C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant where required for proper sealant adhesion.
3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install glazing in compliance with written instructions of glass, gaskets, and other glazing
material manufacturers, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
glazing referenced standards.
B. Install glazing sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193, GANA (SM), and manufacturer's
instructions.
C. Do not exceed edge pressures around perimeter of glass lites as stipulated by glass
manufacturer.
D. Set glass lites in proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as indicated.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
08 8000 - 5 GLAZING
E. Prevent glass from contact with any contaminating substances that may be the result of
construction operations such as, and not limited to the following; weld splatter, fire-safing,
plastering, mortar droppings, etc.
3.04 INSTALLATION - WET GLAZING METHOD (COMPOUND AND COMPOUND)
A. Application - Interior Glazed: Set glazing infills from the interior of the building.
B. Install glazing resting on setting blocks. Install applied stop and center pane by use of spacer
shims at 24 inch centers, kept 1/4 inch below sight line.
C. Locate and secure glazing pane using glazers' clips.
D. Fill gaps between glazing and stops with glazing compound until flush with sight line. Tool
surface to straight line.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Remove excess glazing materials from finish surfaces immediately after application using
solvents or cleaners recommended by manufacturers.
B. Remove non-permanent labels immediately after glazing installation is complete.
C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces after sealants are fully cured.
D. Clean glass on both exposed surfaces not more than 4 days prior to Date of Substantial
Completion in accordance with glass manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark
heat absorbing or reflective glass units.
B. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period prior to Date of
Substantial Completion.
3.07 SCHEDULES
A. Hollow Metal Steel Frames, Interior Glazing: Glass Type SG-1, install glass using wet method
with Type GC-5 glazing compound.
B. Steel Door Glazing:
1. Interior: Glass Type SG-1, 1/4 inch thick, install glass using wet method with Type GC-5
glazing compound.
C. Flush Wood Door Glazing:
1. Interior: Glass Type SG-1, 1/4 inch thick, install glass using wet method with Type GC-5
glazing compound.
D. Interior Borrowed Lite Glazing (Stair Vestibule):
1. Fire-Rated: Glass Type FG-1, 3/4 inch thick, clear. Install glass using wet method with
Type GC-5 glazing compound.
END OF SECTION 08 8000
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
09 2116 - 1 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
SECTION 09 2116
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies.
B.Metal stud wall framing.
C.Metal channel ceiling framing.
D.Acoustic insulation.
E.Gypsum wallboard.
F.Joint treatment and accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements.
B.Section 07 8400 - Firestopping: Top-of-wall assemblies at fire rated walls.
C.Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing acoustical gaps in construction other than gypsum
board or plaster work.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing
Gypsum Board; 2015.
B.ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2014.
C.ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light
Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012.
D.ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive
Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2015.
E.ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2013.
F.ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum
Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in.
(2.84 mm) in Thickness; 2015.
G.ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for Application
of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2014.
H.ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories For Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum
Veneer Base; 2014a.
I.ASTM C1280 - Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing Board; 2013.
J.ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2014.
K.ASTM C1629/C1629M - Standard Classification for Abuse-Resistant Nondecorated Interior
Gypsum Panel Products and Fiber-Reinforced Cement Panels; 2015.
L.ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of
Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2012.
M.ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound
Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009.
N.ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2010.
O.GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2013.
P.UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; current edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
09 2116 - 2 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
B.Product Data: Provide data on metal framing and gypsum board.
C.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on partition head to structure connectors, showing
compliance with requirements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board installation and
finishing, with minimum 5 years of experience.
B.Single-Source Responsibility for Steel Framing: Obtain steel framing members for gypsum
board assemblies from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
C.Single-Source Responsibility for Panel Products: Obtain each type of gypsum board and other
panel products from a single manufacturer.
D.Single-Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing materials from either the
same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a
manufacturer acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer.
E.Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-resistance-rated gypsum board assemblies
are indicated, provide gypsum board assemblies that comply with the following requirements:
1.Fire-Resistance Ratings: As indicated by GA File Numbers in GA-600 "Fire Resistance
Design Manual" or design designations in UL "Fire Resistance Directory."
2.Gypsum board assemblies indicated are identical to assemblies tested for fire resistance
according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and
identification of manufacturer or supplier.
B.Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other
causes. Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for
applying and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum
board manufacturer's recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B.Room Temperatures: For non adhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not
less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 48 hours before application and continuously after until dry.
Do not exceed 95 deg F (35 deg C) when using temporary heat sources.
C.Ventilate building spaces as required to dry joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during hot,
dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A.Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216.
1.See PART 3 for finishing requirements.
B.Interior Partitions, Indicated as Acoustic: Provide completed assemblies with the following
characteristics:
1.Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 50-54 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on
tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90.
C.Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics:
1.Fire Rated Partitions: UL Assembly as indicated on the Drawings..
2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS
A.Manufacturers - Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories:
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
09 2116 - 3 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
1.Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC: www.clarkdietrich.com.
2.Marino: www.marinoware.com.
3.National Gypsum Company,: www.nationalgypsum.com..
4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size
and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum
deflection of wall framing of L/120 at 5 psf.
1.Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces.
a.Sizes: Refer to the Drawings for sizes.
2.Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs.
3.Ceiling Channels: C-shaped. (structural)
4.Guages:
a.Walls and other miscellaneous vertical framing = 20ga. minimum.
b.Ceilings = 18ga. minimum. Sized based upon span rating.
c.Miscellaneous horizontal framing = 25ga. minimum.
d."EQ" framing gauges less than specified minimums are not acceptable.
C.Partition Head To Structure Connections: Provide track fastened to structure with legs of
sufficient length to accommodate deflection, for friction fit of studs cut short and screwed to
secondary deflection channel set inside but unattached to top track.
D.Preformed Top Track Firestop Seal:
1.Provide components UL-listed for use in UL-listed fire-rated head of partition joint
systems indicated on drawings.
2.Products:
a.Hilti, Inc; Top Track Seal CFS TTS: www.us.hilti.com/#sle.
b.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.03 BOARD MATERIALS
A.Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board:
1.American Gypsum Company; ____: www.americangypsum.com/#sle.
2.CertainTeed Corporation; ____: www.certainteed.com/#sle.
3.Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ____: www.gpgypsum.com/#sle.
4.National Gypsum Company; ____: www.nationalgypsum.com/#sle.
5.USG Corporation; ____: www.usg.com/#sle.
6.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to
minimize joints in place; ends square cut.
1.Application: Use for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
2.Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.
a.Mold resistant board is required at all locations.
3.At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested
assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed.
4.Thickness:
a.Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch.
5.Mold Resistant Paper Faced Products:
a.American Gypsum Company; M-Bloc.
b.American Gypsum Company; M-Bloc Type X.
c.Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Mold-Guard.
d.Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Fireguard X Mold-Guard.
e.National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond XP Gypsum Board.
f.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
09 2116 - 4 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed mineral wool batts, friction fit type, unfaced.
Thickness to match framing depth.
1.Product: Owens-Corning: Thermafiber SAFB.
B.Acoustic Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex or water-based elastomeric sealant; do not use
solvent-based non-curing butyl sealant.
1.Products:
a.Franklin International, Inc; Titebond GREENchoice Professional Acoustical Smoke
and Sound Sealant: www.titebond.com/#sle.
b.Liquid Nails, a brand of PPG Architectural Coatings; AS-825 Acoustical Sound
Sealant: www.liquidnails.com/#sle.
c.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
C.Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless noted otherwise.
1.Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance.
2.Special Shapes: In addition to conventional corner bead and control joints, provide
U-bead at exposed panel edges.
3.Products:
a.Same manufacturer as framing materials.
D.Joint Materials: ASTM C475/C475M and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for
project conditions.
1.Tape: 2 inch wide, creased paper tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise
indicated.
2.Ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound.
3.Chemical hardening type compound.
E.Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Cold-Formed Steel Studs Less than 0.033
inch in Thickness and Wood Members: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping screws, corrosion
resistant.
F.Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Steel Members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch in
Thickness: ASTM C954; steel drill screws, corrosion resistant.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.
3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION
A.Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions.
B.Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated.
1.Level soffit system to a tolerance of 1/600.
2.Laterally brace entire suspension system.
C.Studs: Space studs at 16 inches on center.
1.Extend partition framing to underside of structure above.
2.Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach extended leg top runner to structure, maintain
clearance between top of studs and structure, and brace both flanges of studs with
continuous bridging.
3.Partitions acoustically sealed and/or fire-resistance-rated: extend to the underside of
floor/roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid structural surfaces to obtain ratings,
install framing around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and
decks, as needed, to support gypsum board closures needed to make partitions
continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. Firestop or seal in accordance with
Division 7 Sections.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
09 2116 - 5 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
D.Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not
less than double studs at jambs.
E.Standard Wall Furring: Install at concrete and masonry walls scheduled to receive gypsum
board, not more than 4 inches from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls. Secure in place
on alternate channel flanges at maximum 16 inches on center.
1.Orientation: Vertical.
2.Spacing: At 16 inches on center.
F.Blocking: Install mechanically fastened wood blocking and/or steel strapping for support of:
1.Framed openings.
2.Wall mounted cabinets.
3.Wall mounted door hardware.
4.Owner provided fixtures, furnishings, and/or equipment
5.Finish plywood substrates and aluminum reveals
3.03 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
A.Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around
electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions.
B.Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1.Place one bead continuously on substrate before installation of perimeter framing
members.
2.Place continuous bead at perimeter of each layer of gypsum board.
3.Seal around all penetrations by conduit, pipe, ducts, and rough-in boxes, except where
firestopping is provided.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES
A.Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated.
1.Not more than 30 feet apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet long.
B.Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths.
C.Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials.
3.05 JOINT TREATMENT
A.Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use paper joint tape, bedded with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint
compound and finished with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound.
B.Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows:
1.Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise
indicated.
2.Level 2: In utility areas, behind cabinetry, and on backing board to receive tile finish.
3.Level 1: fire rated and/or acoustical wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not
accessible in the completed construction.
4.Level 0: Temporary partitions.
C.Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to
receive finishes.
1.Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.
2.Taping, filling and sanding is not required at base layer of double layer applications.
3.06 TOLERANCES
A.Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet
in any direction.
END OF SECTION 09 2116
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
09 6500 - 1 RESILIENT FLOORING
SECTION 09 6500
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Resilient tile flooring.
B.Resilient base.
C.Installation accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: Grounding and bonding of
static control flooring to building grounding system.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ASTM E648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using
a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2014c.
B.ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring;
2011.
C.ASTM F1700 - Standard Specification for Solid Vinyl Tile; 2013a.
D.ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2008 (Reapproved 2012).
E.NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems
Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2015.
F.RFCI (RWP) - Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings;
Resilient Floor Covering Institute; October 2011.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance
characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.
C.Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for Architect's initial
selection.
D.Concrete Testing Standard: Submit a copy of ASTM F710.
E.Concrete Sub-floor Test Report: Submit a copy of the moisture and alkalinity (pH) test reports.
F.Certification: Prior to installation of flooring, submit written certification by flooring
manufacturer and adhesive manufacturer that condition of sub-floor is acceptable.
G.Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials,
and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing.
H.Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1.See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2.Extra Flooring Material: 10 square feet of each type and color.
3.Extra Wall Base: 10 linear feet of each type and color.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified flooring with
minimum three years documented experience.
B.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing specified flooring with minimum
three years documented experience.
C.Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing concrete slab
moisture testing and inspections of the type specified in this section.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
09 6500 - 2 RESILIENT FLOORING
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Upon receipt, immediately remove any shrink-wrap and check materials for damage and the
correct style, color, quantity and run numbers.
B.Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F.
C.Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F.
B.Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a
temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions
above 55 degrees F.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TILE FLOORING
A.Luxury Vinyl Tile (LVT): Printed film type, with transparent or translucent wear layer, and:
1.Minimum Requirements: ASTM F 1700, 'Standard Specification for Solid Vinyl Tile",
Class III, Type B - Embossed Surface.
a.Stain/Chemical-resistant type.
2.Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253.
3.Plank Size: 7 by 48 inch.
4.Wear Layer Thickness: 0.020 inch.
5.Total Thickness: 0.100 inch.
6.Pattern: To be selected by the Architect from the Manufacturer's full catalogue.
7.Manufacturers:
a.Patcraft, Crossover, Click System - Resilient Plank Flooring: www.patcraft.com
b.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 RESILIENT BASE
A.Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TV, vinyl, thermoplastic; top set Style B, Cove.
1.Manufacturers:
a.Johnsonite, a Tarkett Company: www.johnsonite.com.
b.Roppe Corp: www.roppe.com/#sle.
c.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253.
3.Height: 4 inch.
4.Thickness: 0.125 inch thick.
5.Finish: Satin.
6.Length: Roll.
7.Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
8.Accessories: Premolded external corners and internal corners.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A.Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer.
B.Primers, Adhesives, and Seam Sealer: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring
manufacturer.
C.Moldings, Transition and Edge Strips: Same material as flooring.
D.Filler for Coved Base: Plastic.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
09 6500 - 3 RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks
that might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface
hardeners, and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate.
B.Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of
work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base.
C.Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for resilient
flooring installation by testing for moisture and pH.
1.Test in accordance with ASTM F710.
2.Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring
manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.
D.Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.Remove existing resilient flooring and flooring adhesives; follow the recommendations of RFCI
(RWP).
B. Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers.
C. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other
defects with sub-floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface.
D. Prohibit traffic until filler is fully cured.
E. Clean substrate.
F. Apply primer as required to prevent "bleed-through" or interference with adhesion by
substances that cannot be removed.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.
B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Adhesive-Applied Installation:
1. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.
2. Place copper grounding strip in conductive adhesive and apply additional adhesive to top
side of strip before installing static control flooring. Allow strip to extend beyond flooring
in accordance with static control flooring manufacturer's instructions. Refer to Section 26
0526 for grounding and bonding to building grounding system.
3. Fit joints and butt seams tightly.
4. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.
D. Loose-Laid Installation: Set flooring in place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color are different on opposite sides of door, terminate
flooring under centerline of door.
F. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where
indicated.
1. Metal Strips: Attach to substrate before installation of flooring using stainless steel
screws.
G. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce
tight joints.
3.04 TILE FLOORING
A. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed, unless
otherwise indicated in manufacturer's installation instructions.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
09 6500 - 4 RESILIENT FLOORING
B. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern.
C. Install plank tile with a random offset of at least 6 inches from adjacent rows.
3.05 RESILIENT BASE
A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints.
B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends, use
premolded units.
C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.
D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.
B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation.
END OF SECTION 09 6500
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
09 8000 - 1 ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT
SECTION 09 8000
ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Sound absorptive ceiling panels.
B.Miscellaneous accessories.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A.Section 16510 - Interior Luminaires.
1.03 REFERENCES
A.ASTM C 423 - Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients
by the Reverberation Room Method; 2000.
B.ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2000.
C.ASTM E 795 - Standard Practices for Mounting Test Specimens during Sound Absorption
Tests; 2000.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.Product Data : Submit manufacturer's recommended installation instructions and
documentation certifying conformance with specified performance requirements.
B.Shop Drawings: Submit drawings indicating layout for all areas to receive work of this section,
including locations of light fixtures, ceiling diffusers, and grilles. Indicate pattern of units, cut
units, details, and coordination requirements for work of other sections.
1.Insure that panel placement will not interfere with ceiling suspension/mounting
requirements of work by other trades.
C.Samples: Submit for approval two samples of sound absorptive panel and suspension
systems, not less than 12 inches (305 mm) by 18 inches (457 mm) in size and demonstrating
colors, textures, and finishes that will be provided in the finished work.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Installer Qualifications: Installers shall have demonstrated experience in assembly and
installation of products similar to those specified in this section.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Deliver materials in manufacturer's original unopened and undamaged packages with labels
legible and intact.
B.Store materials in unopened packages in a manner that will avoid damage from the
environment and from construction operations.
C.Handle in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.Do not begin installation of acoustic panels until building has been enclosed and
environmental conditions approximate interior conditions that will prevail when building is
occupied.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.Acceptable Manufacturer: Eckel Industries, Inc., Acoustic Div., which is located at: 100 Groton
Shirley Road ; Ayer, MA 01432; Tel: 617-491-3221; Fax: 978-772-0362; Email:
eckel@eckelUSA.com; Web: www.eckelUSA.com
B.Requests for substitutions will be considered.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
09 8000 - 2 ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT
2.02 ACOUSTIC PANELS
A.Acoustic Panels: Eckel Eckoustic Functional Panels.
1.Panel Thickness: 2.75 inches (70 mm) "V" ridged facing.
2.Width: 30 inches (760 mm).
B.Panel Performance:
1.Sound Absorption: Provide panels that are certified to meet the following minimum sound
absorption for a 30 inch by 120 inch (760 by 3050 mm) panel, encapsulated in a 2.0 mil
(0.05 mm) flame guard polyethylene, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 423 and E
795:
a.125 Hz: 6.2 sabins.
b.250 Hz: 20.5 sabins.
c.500 Hz: 35.2 sabins.
d.1000 Hz: 34.5 sabins.
e.2000 Hz: 31.5 sabins.
f.4000 Hz: 33.1 sabins.
g.NRC: 0.99, minimum.
2.Fire: Provide panels that demonstrate the following performance when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 84:
a.Flame Spread: 10 maximum.
b.Smoke Density: 10 maximum.
C.Panel Construction: Steel.
1.Facings: 22 gage (0.76 mm) electrogalvanized steel sheet, perforated with 3/32 inch (2
mm) holes on 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) staggered centers; V-ridged on 6 inch (150 mm) centers
to a depth of 2-3/4 inches (70 mm).
2.Framing: 20 gage (0.9 mm) electrogalvanized steel, channel shaped; supply two 1/4-20
inch threaded inserts for each framing member for attachment of panel mounting
brackets.
3.Brackets: Provide four 11 gage (3 mm) steel brackets per unit for attachment to walls and
ceilings, providing 4 inches (100 mm) of clearance between back of panel and mounting
surface.
4.Finish: Polyurethane enamel paint; factory applied.
5.Color: White.
D.Acoustical Insulation: 2 inch (50 mm) thick, fine fibered, fibrous glass, having a density of not
less than 1.5 pounds per cubic foot (24 kg/cubic m), encapsulated in a 1.5 to 2 mil (0.04 to
0.05 mm) flame guard polyethylene.
E.Anchors and Fasteners: 1/4 inch (6 mm)-20 by 1 inch (25 mm) long bolts to attach mounting
brackets to the panels, cadmium plated for steel panels, stainless steel for aluminum panels;
corrosion-resistant anchors for fastening brackets to substrate, as recommended by panel
manufacturer and approved by Architect.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Examine surfaces to receive work of this section. Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.Install panels on ceilings in locations and in patterns indicated on the drawings.
B.Install each unit as indicated on Architect's drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's
printed instructions, using approved anchors and fasteners.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
09 8000 - 3 ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT
3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A.After installation of acoustic panels, clean all dirty or discolored surfaces, using cleaning
materials and methods acceptable to manufacturer. Replace damaged components as
directed by the Architect.
B.Remove debris caused by work of this section on a daily basis. At completion of acoustic
panel installation, remove all crates, cartons, packages, and debris from the project site.
END OF SECTION 09 8000
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
09 9113 - 1 EXTERIOR PAINTING
SECTION 09 9113
EXTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Surface preparation.
B.Field application of paints.
C.Scope: Finish exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless
otherwise indicated.
D.Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:
1.Items factory-finished unless otherwise indicated; materials and products having
factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished.
2.Items indicated to receive other finishes.
3.Items indicated to remain unfinished.
4.Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of
equipment.
5.Non-metallic roofing and flashing.
6.Stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, terne coated stainless steel, zinc, and lead.
7.Marble, granite, slate, and other natural stones.
8.Floors, unless specifically indicated.
9.Brick, glass unit masonry, architectural concrete, cast stone, integrally colored plaster
and stucco.
10.Exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS).
11.Glass.
12.Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.
B.Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Shop-primed items.
C.Section 05 5100 - Metal Stairs: Shop-primed items.
D.Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.MPI (APSM) - Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual; Current
Edition, www.paintinfo.com.
B.SSPC V2 (PM2) - Systems and Specifications: Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volume 2;
Fourth Edition.
C.SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning; 2015.
D.SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; 1982 (Ed. 2004).
E.SSPC-SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning; 2007.
F.SSPC-SP 13 - Surface Preparation of Concrete; (Reaffirmed 2015); 2003.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide complete list of products to be used, with the following information for
each:
1.Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product
category (e.g. "alkyd enamel").
2.MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47).
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
09 9113 - 2 EXTERIOR PAINTING
3.Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description
of each system.
C.Certification: By manufacturer that paints and finishes comply with VOC limits specified.
D.Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures.
E.Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1.See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2.Extra Paint and Finish Materials: 1 gallon of each color and type; from the same product
run, store where directed.
3.Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified,
with minimum three years documented experience.
1.06 MOCK-UP
A.See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up.
B.Partially paint steel railing & stair to illuistrate color(s) and finish.
C.Locate where directed by Architect.
D.Mock-up may remain as part of the work.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
B.Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand
code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation,
and instructions for mixing and reducing.
C.Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90
degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature
ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
B.Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing
of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.
C.Do not apply exterior paint and finishes during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is
outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
D.Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 50 degrees F for exterior; unless
required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
E.Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.Provide paints and finishes used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no
exceptions.
B.Paints:
1.Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle.
2.02 PAINTS AND FINISHES - GENERAL
A.Paints and Finishes: Ready mixed, unless required to be a field-catalyzed paint.
1.Provide paints and finishes of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and
uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties,
and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
09 9113 - 3 EXTERIOR PAINTING
2.Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated
under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on
testing and field experience.
3.Supply each paint material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a
single production run.
4.Do not reduce, thin, or dilute paint or finishes or add materials unless such procedure is
specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.
B.Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: Comply with Section 01 6116.
C.Flammability: Comply with applicable code for surface burning characteristics.
D.Sheens: Provide the sheens specified; where sheen is not specified, sheen will be selected
later by Architect from the manufacturer's full line.
E.Colors: To be selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors.
1.Selection to be made by Architect after award of contract.
2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR
A.Paint E-OP - Exterior Surfaces to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including primed
metal.
1.Two top coats and one coat primer.
2.Top Coat(s): Exterior Alkyd Enamel; MPI #94 or 96.
a.Products:
1)PPG Paints Interior/Exterior Industrial Enamel, Gloss, 7-282. (MPI #96)
2)Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.Paint ME-OP-3A - Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Alkyd, 3 Coat:
1.One coat of alkyd primer.
2.Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel; ____.
C.Paint ME-OP-2A - Ferrous Metals, Primed, Alkyd, 2 Coat:
1.Touch-up with rust-inhibitive primer recommended by top coat manufacturer.
2.Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.
D.Paint MgE-OP-3A - Galvanized Metals, Alkyd, 3 Coat:
1.One coat galvanize primer.
2.Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.
2.04 PRIMERS
A.Primers: Provide the following unless other primer is required or recommended by
manufacturer of top coats.
1.Anti-Corrosive Alkyd Primer for Metal; MPI #79.
a.Products:
1)PPG Paints Speedhide Interior/Exterior Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer, 6-212
Series. (MPI #79)
2)Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.Alkyd Primer for Galvanized Metal.
a.Products:
1)PPG Paints Speedhide Interior/Exterior Galvanized Steel Primer, 6-209 Series.
2)Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.Accessory Materials: Provide primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding
materials, and clean-up materials as required for final completion of painted surfaces.
B.Patching Material: Latex filler.
C.Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
09 9113 - 4 EXTERIOR PAINTING
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
B.Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any
condition that may potentially effect proper application.
C.If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
D.Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
E.Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply
finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:
3.02 PREPARATION
A.Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to application.
B.Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
C.Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture
trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces for finishing.
D.Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.
E.Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium
phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
F.Galvanized Surfaces:
1.Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent according to SSPC-SP 1.
2.Prepare surface according to SSPC-SP 2.
G.Ferrous Metal:
1.Solvent clean according to SSPC-SP 1.
2.Shop-Primed Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather
edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime
bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.
3.Remove rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances using using methods
recommended in writing by paint manufacturer and blast cleaning according to SSPC-SP
6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning". Protect from corrosion until coated.
3.03 APPLICATION
A.Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical
components and paint separately.
B.Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in
"MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual".
C.Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied.
D.Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat
is applied.
E.Apply each coat to uniform appearance.
F.Dark Colors and Deep Clear Colors: Regardless of number of coats specified, apply additional
coats until complete hide is achieved.
G.Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just
prior to applying next coat.
H.Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed
prior to finishing.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
09 9113 - 5 EXTERIOR PAINTING
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection.
3.05 CLEANING
A.Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and
remove daily from site.
3.06 PROTECTION
A.Protect finishes until completion of project.
B.Touch-up damaged finishes after Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09 9113
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
09 9123 - 1 INTERIOR PAINTING
SECTION 09 9123
INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Surface preparation.
B.Field application of paints.
C.Scope: Finish interior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless
otherwise indicated, including the following:
1.Both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telecom equipment before
installing equipment.
2.Mechanical and Electrical:
a.In finished areas, paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and
exposed ducts, and hangers, brackets, collars and supports, unless otherwise
indicated.
b.In finished areas, paint shop-primed items.
c.Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard
cabinets to match face panels.
D.Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:
1.Items factory-finished unless otherwise indicated; materials and products having
factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished.
2.Items indicated to receive other finishes.
3.Items indicated to remain unfinished.
4.Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, bar code labels, and
operating parts of equipment.
5.Stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, terne coated stainless steel, and lead items.
6.Marble, granite, slate, and other natural stones.
7.Floors, unless specifically indicated.
8.Ceramic and other tiles.
9.Brick, architectural concrete, cast stone, integrally colored plaster and stucco.
10.Glass.
11.Concrete masonry units in utility, mechanical, and electrical spaces.
12.Acoustical materials, unless specifically indicated.
13.Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting.
B.Section 22 0553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Painted identification.
C.Section 23 0553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Painted identification.
D.Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Painted identification.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.
B.ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications;
2014.
C.ASTM D4258 - Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating; 2005
(Reapproved 2012).
D.ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and
Wood-Base Materials; 2007.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
09 9123 - 2 INTERIOR PAINTING
E.MPI (APSM) - Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual; Current
Edition, www.paintinfo.com.
F.SSPC V1 (PM1) - Good Painting Practice: Painting Manual, Volume 1; Fourth Edition.
G.SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning; 2015.
H.SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; 1982 (Ed. 2004).
I.SSPC-SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning; 2007.
J.SSPC-SP 13 - Surface Preparation of Concrete; (Reaffirmed 2015); 2003.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide complete list of products to be used, with the following information for
each:
1.Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product
category (e.g. "alkyd enamel").
2.MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47).
3.Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description
of each system.
C.Certification: By manufacturer that paints and finishes comply with VOC limits specified.
D.Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1.See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2.Extra Paint and Finish Materials: 1 gallon of each color; from the same product run, store
where directed.
3.Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified,
with minimum three years documented experience.
1.06 MOCK-UP
A.See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up.
B.Provide panel, 8 feet long by 8 feet wide, illustrating paint color, texture, and finish.
C.Locate where directed by Architect.
1.Feature Wall color in Meeting Rooms (West wall).
2.Wall mural in Systems Engineering Lab (South wall).
3.Wall mural in Lounge (North wall).
4.Clear area pathway on Systems Engineering Lab floor.
D.Mock-up may remain as part of the work.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
B.Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand
code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation,
and instructions for mixing and reducing.
C.Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90
degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature
ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
B.Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing
of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
09 9123 - 3 INTERIOR PAINTING
C.Do not apply materials when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5
degrees F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
D.Minimum Application Temperatures for Paints: 50 degrees F for interiors unless required
otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
E.Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior, unless
required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
F.Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.Provide paints and finishes used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no
exceptions.
B.Paints:
1.Base Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams Company.
C.Primer Sealers: Same manufacturer as top coats.
D.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 PAINTS AND FINISHES - GENERAL
A.Paints and Finishes: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed paint.
1.Provide paints and finishes of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and
uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties,
and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
2.Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated
under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on
testing and field experience.
3.For opaque finishes, tint each coat including primer coat and intermediate coats, one-half
shade lighter than succeeding coat, with final finish coat as base color.
4.Supply each paint material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a
single production run.
5.Do not reduce, thin, or dilute paint or finishes or add materials unless such procedure is
specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.
B.Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content:
1.Provide paints and finishes that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in
the following:
a.40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
Architectural Coatings.
b.Architectural coatings VOC limits of The State of New York.
2.Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added
at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Flammability: Comply with applicable code for surface burning characteristics.
D. Sheens: Provide the sheens specified; where sheen is not specified, sheen will be selected
later by Architect from the manufacturer's full line.
E. Colors: To be selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors.
1. Selection to be made by Architect after award of contract.
2. Allow for minimum of colors indicated on the paint plan/schedule on the Drawings; without
additional cost to the Owner.
3. Extend colors to surface edges; colors may change at any edge as directed by Architect.
4. In finished areas, finish pipes, ducts, conduit, and equipment the same color as the
wall/ceiling they are mounted on/under; unless identifying color is dictated in other
sections.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
09 9123 - 4 INTERIOR PAINTING
5. In utility areas, finish equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed duct work in colors
according to the color coding scheme indicated.
2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR
A. Paint I-OP - Interior Surfaces to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including gypsum
board.
1. Two top coats and one coat primer.
2. Top Coat(s): Institutional Low Odor/VOC Interior Latex; MPI #143, 144, 145, 146, 147, or
148.
a. Products:
1) Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex, Flat.
2) Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex, Low Sheen. (MPI #144)
3) Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
3. Top Coat Sheen:
a. Flat: MPI gloss level 1; use this sheen for ceilings and other overhead surfaces.
b. Eggshell: MPI gloss level 3; use this sheen at Walls and other vertical surfaces..
c. Satin: MPI gloss level 4; use this sheen for items subject to frequent touching by
occupants, including door frames and railings.
4. Primer: As recommended by top coat manufacturer for specific substrate.
B. Paint I-OP-MD-DT - Medium Duty Door/Trim: For surfaces subject to frequent contact by
occupants, including metals:
1. Medium duty applications include doors and door frames.
2. Two top coats and one coat primer.
3. Top Coat(s): Interior Epoxy-Modified Latex; MPI #115 or 215.
a. Products:
1) Sherwin-Williams Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy, Semi-Gloss.
2) Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
4. Top Coat Sheen:
a. Satin: MPI gloss level 4; use this sheen at all locations.
5. Primer: As recommended by top coat manufacturer for specific substrate.
C. Paint I-OP-MD-WC - Medium Duty Vertical and Overhead: Including concrete, concrete
masonry units, uncoated steel, shop primed steel, and galvanized steel.
1. Two top coats and one coat primer.
2. Top Coat(s): Interior Epoxy-Modified Latex; MPI #115 or 215.
a. Products:
1) Sherwin-Williams Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy.
2) Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
3. Top Coat Sheen:
a. Semi-Gloss: MPI gloss level 5; use this sheen at concrete masonry units.
b. Gloss: MPI gloss level 6; use this sheen at exposed steel.
4. Primer: As recommended by top coat manufacturer for specific substrate.
D. Paint I-OP-FL - Concrete Floors to be Painted.
1. One top coat and one coat primer.
2. Top Coat(s): Alkyd Floor Enamel, Satin.
a. Products:
1) Sherwin Williams, Armorseal 8100.
(a) Custom colors required.
(b) Satin finish.
2) Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
3. Primer: Sherwin Williams - Armorseal 8100.
a. Prepare existing concrete surface following manufacturer's requirements and
recommendations.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
09 9123 - 5 INTERIOR PAINTING
b. Peparation may include: scrubbing, sandblasting, powerwashing, diamond griding,
etc as necessary to achieve the proper surface characteristics for new coating(s).
E. Paint I-TR -W - Transparent Finish on Wood.
1. 2 top coats over sanding sealer, no stain.
2. Sealer: Alkyd, Sanding Sealer, Clear; MPI #102.
3. Top Coat(s): Polyurethane Varnish, Oil Modified; MPI #56 or 57.
4. Top Coat Sheen:
a. Satin: MPI gloss level 4; use this sheen at all locations.
F. Paint I-TR-C - Transparent Finish on Concrete Masonry Units.
1. 2 coats sealer.
2. Sealer: Water Based Sealer for Concrete Floors; MPI #99.
3. Sealer Sheen:
a. Eggshell: MPI gloss level 3; use this sheen at all locations.
2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Accessory Materials: Provide primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding
materials, and clean-up materials as required for final completion of painted surfaces.
B. Patching Material: Latex filler.
C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin application of paints and finishes until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any
condition that may potentially effect proper application.
D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
E. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
F. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply
finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:
1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.
2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Masonry Units : 12 percent.
3. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.
4. Concrete Floors and Traffic Surfaces: 8 percent.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to application.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
C. Remove or repair existing paints or finishes that exhibit surface defects.
D. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture
trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
E. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.
F. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium
phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
G. Concrete:
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
09 9123 - 6 INTERIOR PAINTING
1. Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not coat
surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted
in manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Clean concrete according to ASTM D4258. Allow to dry.
3. Prepare surface as recommended by top coat manufacturer and according to SSPC-SP
13.
H. Masonry:
1. Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of
surfaces or if alkalinity of mortar joints exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written
instructions. Allow to dry.
2. Prepare surface as recommended by top coat manufacturer.
I. Concrete Floors and Traffic Surfaces: Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse floors with
clear water. Verify required acid-alkali balance is achieved. Allow to dry.
J. Gypsum Board: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair.
K. Galvanized Surfaces:
1. Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent according to SSPC-SP 1.
2. Prepare surface according to SSPC-SP 2.
L. Ferrous Metal:
1. Solvent clean according to SSPC-SP 1.
2. Shop-Primed Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather
edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime
bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.
3. Remove rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances using using methods
recommended in writing by paint manufacturer and blast cleaning according to SSPC-SP
6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning". Protect from corrosion until coated.
M. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical
components and paint separately.
B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in
"MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual".
C. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied.
D. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat
is applied.
E. Apply each coat to uniform appearance in thicknesses specified by manufacturer.
F. Dark Colors and Deep Clear Colors: Regardless of number of coats specified, apply as many
coats as necessary for complete hide.
G. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
H. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just
prior to applying next coat.
I. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed
prior to finishing.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and
remove daily from site.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
09 9123 - 7 INTERIOR PAINTING
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes until completion of project.
B. Touch-up damaged finishes after Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09 9123
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
10 2601 - 1 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
SECTION 10 2601
WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Corner guards.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking for wall and corner guard anchors.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Indicate physical dimensions, features, anchorage details, and rough-in
measurements.
C.Samples: Submit two sections of corner guard, 24 inch long, illustrating component design,
configuration, color and finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.Wall and Corner Guards:
1.Babcock-Davis: www.babcockdavis.com/sle.
2.Construction Specialties, Inc: www.c-sgroup.com.
3.Inpro: www.inprocorp.com/#sle.
4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 COMPONENTS
A.Corner Guards - Surface Mounted:
1.Material: Type 430 stainless steel, No. 4 finish, 16 gage, _____ inch thick.
2.Performance: Resist lateral impact force of 100 lbs at any point without damage or
permanent set.
3.Width of Wings: 3 inches.
4.Corner: Square.
5.Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
6.Length: 4 feet, one piece.
2.03 FABRICATION
A.Fabricate components with tight joints, corners and seams.
B.Form end trim closure by capping and finishing smooth.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify that rough openings, concealed blocking, and anchors are correctly sized and located.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, level and plumb, secured
rigidly in position to wall framing members only.
B.Position corner guard 4 inches above finished floor to 52 inches high.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.Maximum Variation From Required Height: 1/4 inch.
B.Maximum Variation From Level or Plane For Visible Length: 1/8 inch.
END OF SECTION 10 2601
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
10 4400 - 1 FIRE PROTECTION
SPECIALTIES
SECTION 10 4400
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Fire extinguishers.
B.Fire extinguisher cabinets.
C.Accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.FM (AG) - FM Approval Guide; current edition.
B.NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; 2013.
C.UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Shop Drawings: Indicate locations of cabinets and cabinet physical dimensions.
C.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination
requirements.
D.Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
E.Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements.
1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher
ingredients.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.Fire Extinguishers:
1.Ansul, a Tyco Business; Cleanguard: www.ansul.com/#sle.
2.Kidde, a unit of United Technologies Corp: www.kidde.com.
3.Pyro-Chem, a Tyco Business: www.pyrochem.com.
4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.Fire Extinguisher Cabinets and Accessories:
1.Ansul, a Tyco Business: www.ansul.com.
2.Kidde, a unit of United Technologies Corp: www.kidde.com.
3.Larsen's Manufacturing Co: www.larsensmfg.com.
4.Pyro-Chem, a Tyco Business: www.pyrochem.com.
5.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A.Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable
codes, whichever is more stringent.
1.Provide extinguishers labeled by UL (DIR) or FM (AG) for purpose specified and as
indicated.
B.Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type Fire Extinguishers: Carbon steel tank, with pressure gauge.
1.Class: A:B:C type.
2.Size: 10 pound.
3.Finish: Baked polyester powder coat, color as selected.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
10 4400 - 2 FIRE PROTECTION
SPECIALTIES
4.Temperature range: Minus 40 degrees F to ___ degrees F.
2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
A.Cabinet Construction: Non-fire rated.
B.Cabinet Configuration: Semi-recessed type.
1.Size to accommodate accessories.
2.Projected Trim: Returned to wall surface, with ____ inch projection, and ____ inch wide
face.
3.Provide cabinet enclosure with right angle inside corners and seams, and with formed
perimeter trim and door stiles.
C.Door: 0.036 inch metal thickness, reinforced for flatness and rigidity with nylon catch. Hinge
doors for 180 degree opening with two butt hinge.
D.Door Glazing: Acrylic plastic, clear, 1/8 inch thick, flat shape and set in resilient channel
glazing gasket.
E.Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet, with pre-drilled holes for placement of
anchors.
F.Weld, fill, and grind components smooth.
G.Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: No. 4 - Brushed stainless steel.
H.Finish of Cabinet Interior: White colored enamel.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, chrome-plated.
B.Cabinet Signage: Model No. 13895 manufactured by Seton Identification Products, or
equivalent approved by the Architect..
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, 48 inches from finished floor to top of
cabinet.
C.Secure rigidly in place.
D.Place extinguishers in cabinets.
E.Position cabinet signage at each extinguisher cabinet, on the wall above. Height as
determined by the Architect..
3.03 SCHEDULES
A.Fire Extinguisher location(s) are indicate on the Drawings:
1.FEC = Fire extinguisher and cabinet (semi-recessed).
2.FE = Fire Extinguisher (wall surface mounted on brackets).
END OF SECTION 10 4400
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
11 5213 - 1 PROJECTION SCREENS
SECTION 11 5213
PROJECTION SCREENS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Front projection screen assemblies.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking in walls and ceilings.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog cuts and descriptive information on each product to be
used, including:
1.Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2.Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3.Installation methods.
4.Wiring diagrams for motor operators and actuators, and controls and switches.
C.Samples: For screen fabrics, submit two samples 6 x 6 inch in size.
D.Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide manufacturer's operation and maintenance
instructions.
E.Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section, with not less than five years of documented experience.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Deliver projection screens to project site in manufacturer's original unopened packaging, and
inspect for damage and proper size before accepting delivery.
B.Store in a protected, clean, dry area with temperature maintained above 50 degrees F, and
stack in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
C.Acclimate screens to building temperatures for 24 hours prior to installation, in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.Maintain interior of building between 60 degrees F and 80 degrees F during and after
installation of projection screens.
1.07 WARRANTY
A.See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.Provide 5 year manufacturer warranty for projection screen assembly.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.Da-Lite Screen Company: www.da-lite.com.
B.Draper, Inc: www.draperinc.com/#sle.
C.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 FRONT PROJECTION SCREENS
A.Manufacturers:
1.Da-Lite Screen Company: www.da-lite.com/#sle.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
11 5213 - 2 PROJECTION SCREENS
2.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.Front Projection Screens: Factory assembled unless otherwise indicated.
1.In Classrooms: Manual, matte light diffusing fabric screen, horizontally tensioned, wall
mounted.
a.Screen Dimensions: 60 inch high x 96 inch wide.
b.Products: Model C w/ CSR 34730 manufactured by Da-Lite Screen Company.
C.Matte Light Diffusing Fabric: Light diffusing screen fabric; washable, flame retardant and
mildew resistant.
1.Material: Matte white vinyl on fiberglass backing, with nominal gain of 1.0 over viewing
angle not less than 70 degrees from axis, horizontally and vertically.
2.Seams: No seams permitted in fabric up to 96 inch high by 72 inch wide.
D.Exposed Screen Cases: Steel, with integral roller brackets.
1.Finish: Baked enamel.
2.Color: White.
3.End Caps: Steel; finished to match case.
4.Mounting: Wall.
E.Manually-Operated Screens:
1.Roller: 1-3/4 inch aluminum; spring loaded with locking device.
2.Screen Pull: Ring on bottom bar.
3.Vertical Tensioning: Screen fabric weighted at bottom with steel bar and plastic end
caps.
4.Horizontal Tensioning: Tensioning bar.
F.Provide mounting hardware, brackets, supports, fasteners, and other mounting accessories
required for a complete installation, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for
specified substrates and mountings.
1.Da-Lite 40932 wall brackets.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify that substrate is finished and ready to accept screen installation.
B.If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
C.Do not install projection screens until climate control systems are in place and interior painting
and other finishes are completed.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.Coordinate screen installation with installation of projection systems.
B.Coordinate installation with adjacent construction and fixtures, including ceilings, walls,
lighting, fire suppression, and registers and grilles.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using manufacturer's recommended
hardware for relevant substrates.
B.Do not field cut screens.
C.Install screens in mountings as specified and as indicated on drawings.
D.Install plumb and level.
E.Adjust projection screens and related hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
for proper placement and operation.
3.04 PROTECTION
A.Protect installed products until completion of project.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
11 5213 - 3 PROJECTION SCREENS
B.Touch up, repair, or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 11 5213
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
CARPENTER HALL B05 – BUILDING CODE COMPLIANCE
313 CAMPUS ROAD, ITHACA, NY 14850
ABATEMENT
ASBESTOS REMOVAL 13280 - 1
SECTION 13280 – ASBESTOS REMOVAL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This asbestos abatement Project will consist of the removal and disposal of asbestos
containing materials from Cornell University, Carpenter Hall located at 313 Campus
Road, Ithaca, New York 14850.
Materials to be removed consist of:
• Asbestos containing ceiling plaster skim coat from concrete deck in
Room B05
• Asbestos containing black tar coating on exterior foundation wall
B. The quantities listed below and identification of work areas are approximate and for
informational purposes ONLY. The contractor shall be responsible for ALL
scheduled removal, organization of work areas and proper disposal of asbestos
containing and contaminated materials within the work area as indicated on drawing
AB101. The asbestos abatement contractor shall be responsible for removal of the
following materials:
Work Area #1 Basement – Room B05:
• Remove approximately 710 square feet of ceiling plaster skim coat.
Work Area #2 Exterior – South East Foundation Wall:
• Remove approximately 340 square feet of black tar coating from foundation
wall.
C. The Contractor shall familiarize themselves with all conditions of the Project site and
is responsible for verifying quantities and locations of all Work to be performed.
Failure to do so shall not relieve the Contractor of its obligation to furnish all labor
and materials necessary to perform the Work.
D. All Work shall be performed in strict accordance with the Project Documents and all
governing codes, rules, and regulations. Where conflicts occur between the Project
Drawings, Documents and applicable codes, rules, and regulations, the more
stringent shall apply.
E. Working hours shall be as required and approved by the Owner. Asbestos abatement
activities including, but not limited to, work area preparation, gross removal
activities, cleaning activities, waste removal, etc. may be performed during ‘off-
hours’(including nights and weekends) if approved by the Owner. The Contractor
shall coordinate and schedule all Work with the facility and Owner’s representative.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
CARPENTER HALL B05 – BUILDING CODE COMPLIANCE
313 CAMPUS ROAD, ITHACA, NY 14850
ABATEMENT
ASBESTOS REMOVAL 13280 - 2
F. The Contractor while on site is expected to perform in a competent and professional
manner.
1.02 SPECIAL JOB CONDITIONS
Special job conditions are described below:
A. All systems shall be isolated from the regulated abatement work area.
1.03 PERMITS AND COMPLIANCE
A. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility and liability for compliance with all
applicable Federal, State, and local laws, rules, and regulations pertaining to Work
practices, protection of Workers, authorized visitors to the site, persons, and property
adjacent to the Work.
B. Perform asbestos related Work in accordance with New York State Industrial Code
Rule 56 (as amended January 11, 2006 and herein referred to as Code Rule 56), 40
CFR 61 (NESHAPS), and 29 CFR 1926 (Construction Standard), as specified herein.
Where more stringent requirements are specified, adhere to the more stringent
requirements.
C. The Contractor must maintain current licenses pursuant to New York State
Department of Labor and Department of Environmental Conservation for all Work
related to this Project, including the removal, handling, transport, and disposal of
asbestos containing materials.
D. The Contractor must have and submit proof upon request that any persons employed
by the Contractor to engage in or supervise Work on any asbestos Project have a
valid NYS asbestos handling certificate pursuant to Code Rule 56 with a minimum of
five years experience.
E. The Contractor shall comply fully with any variances secured from regulatory
agencies by the Owner in the performance of the Work. Should the Contractor
choose to apply for any variance, approval of the Owner is first required.
F. Failure to adhere to the Project Documents or to proceed in a timely or professional
manner shall constitute a breach of the Contract and the Owner shall have the right to
and may terminate the Contract provided, however, the failure of the Owner to
terminate shall not relieve the Contractor from future compliance.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Pre-Work Submittals: Within 7 days prior to the pre-construction conference, the
Contractor shall submit 3 copies of the documents listed below, with all copies going
directly to the Owner for review and approval prior to the commencement of asbestos
abatement activities:
1. Contractor license issued by New York State Department of Labor.
2. Progress Schedule:
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
CARPENTER HALL B05 – BUILDING CODE COMPLIANCE
313 CAMPUS ROAD, ITHACA, NY 14850
ABATEMENT
ASBESTOS REMOVAL 13280 - 3
a. Show the complete sequence of abatement activities and the
sequencing of the Work plan.
b. Show the dates for the beginning and completion of each major
element of Work.
3. Project Notifications: As required by Federal and State regulatory
agencies together with proof of transmittal (i.e.: certified mail return
receipt).
4. Building Occupant Notification: As required by regulatory agencies.
5. Abatement Work Plan: Provide plans that clearly indicate the following:
a. Work Area/containment.
b. Locations and type of all decontamination enclosures.
c. Entrances and exits to the Work Area containments.
d. Type of abatement activity/technique for each Work
Area/containment.
e. Number and location of negative air units and exhaust. Also
provide calculations for determining number of negative air
pressure units.
f. Proposed location and construction of storage facilities and field
office.
g. Location of water and electrical connections to building services.
h. Waste transport routes through the building to the waste storage
container.
6. Temporary Heat Plan: Provide written plan that clearly indicates how
heat will be distributed and maintained. Include emergency power back
up plans.
7. Disposal Site/Landfill Permit from applicable regulatory agency.
8. NYS Department of Environmental Conservation Waste Transporter
Permit.
B. On-Site Submittals: Refer to Part 3.01 for all submittals, documentation, and postings
required to be maintained on-site during abatement activities.
C. Project Close-out Submittals: Within 30 days of project completion, the Contractor
shall submit 3 copies of the documents listed below. All sets of the documents shall
be forwarded to the Owner for review and approval prior to the Contractor’s final
payment. Close-out packages must be complete prior to the Contractors final
payment.
1. Originals of all waste disposal manifests and disposal logs.
2. OSHA compliance air monitoring records conducted during Work.
3. Daily progress log, including the entry/exit log.
4. A list of all Workers used in the performance of the Project, including
name, social security number, NYS DOL certification number and type
of certification (i.e. supervisor, asbestos handler, etc.).
5. For each Worker used in the performance of the Project, submit the
Worker’s Acknowledgment Statement.
6. Disposal Site/Landfill Permit from applicable regulatory agency.
7. Final project notifications and variances, if applicable.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
CARPENTER HALL B05 – BUILDING CODE COMPLIANCE
313 CAMPUS ROAD, ITHACA, NY 14850
ABATEMENT
ASBESTOS REMOVAL 13280 - 4
1.05 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A. Prior to start of preparatory Work under this Contract, the Contractor shall attend a
pre- construction conference attended by Owner, and Environmental Consultant.
B. Agenda for this conference shall include but not necessarily be limited to:
1. Contractor’s scope of Work, Work plan, and schedule to include number
of workers and shifts.
2. Location of decontamination waste enclosures.
3. Contractor’s safety and health precautions including protective clothing
and equipment and decontamination Procedures.
4. Environmental Consultant’s duties, functions, and authority.
5. Contractor’s Work procedures including:
a. Methods of job site preparation and removal methods.
b. Respiratory protection.
c. Disposal procedures.
d. Cleanup procedures.
e. Fire exits and emergency procedures.
6. Contractor’s required pre-work and on-site submittals, documentation,
and postings.
7. Contractor’s plan for twenty-four (24) hour Project security both for
prevention of theft and for barring entry of unauthorized personnel into
Work Areas.
8. Handling of furniture and other moveable objects.
9. Storage of removed asbestos containing materials.
10. Waste disposal requirements and procedures, including use of the Owner
supplied waste manifest and container seals (if applicable).
C. In conjunction with the conference the Contractor shall accompany the Owner and
Environmental Consultant on a pre- construction walk-through documenting existing
condition of finishes and furnishings, reviewing overall Work plan, location of fire
exits, fire protection equipment, water supply and temporary electric tie-in.
1.06 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS
The Contractor shall comply with the following codes and standards, except where more
stringent requirements are shown or specified:
A. Federal Regulations:
1. 29 CFR 1910.1001, “Asbestos” (OSHA)
2. 29 CFR 1910.1200, “Hazard Communication” (OSHA)
3. 29 CFR 1910.134, “Respiratory Protection” (OSHA)
4. CFR 19 10.145, “Specification for Accident”
5. 29 CFR 1926.1101, “Asbestos, Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and Actinolite”
(OSHA)
6. 29 CFR 1926.500 “Guardrails, Handrails and Covers” (OSHA)
7. 40 CFR 61, Subpart A, “General Provisions” (EPA)
8. 40 CFR 61, Subpart M, “National Emission Standard for Asbestos”
(EPA)
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
CARPENTER HALL B05 – BUILDING CODE COMPLIANCE
313 CAMPUS ROAD, ITHACA, NY 14850
ABATEMENT
ASBESTOS REMOVAL 13280 - 5
9. 10.49 CFR 171-172, Transportation Standards (DOT)
B. New York State Regulations:
1. 12 NYCRR, Part 56, “Asbestos”, Industrial Code Rule 56 (DOL)
(amended January 11, 2006).
2. 6 NYCRR, Parts 360, 364, Disposal and Transportation (DEC)
3. 10 NYCRR, Part 73, “Asbestos Safety Program Requirements” (DOH)
C. Local Regulations:
D. Standards and Guidance Documents:
1. American National Standard Institute (ANSI) Z88.2-80, Practices for
Respiratory Protection
2. ANSI Z9.2-79, Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of
Local Exhaust Systems
3. EPA 560/585-024, Guidance for Controlling Asbestos Containing
Materials in Buildings (Purple Book)
4. EPA 530-S W-85-007, Asbestos Waste Management Guidance
5. ASTM Standard E1368 “Standard Practice for Visual Inspection of
Asbestos Abatement Projects.”
1.07 NOTICES
A. The Contractor shall provide notification of intent to commence asbestos abatement
activities as indicated below.
1. At least ten (10) Working days prior to beginning abatement activities,
send written notification to:
U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency National Emissions Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants
(NESHAPS)Coordinator
26 Federal Plaza
New York, NY 10007.
2. At least ten (10) days prior to beginning abatement activities send written
notification to:
New York State Department of Labor
Division of Safety and Health, Asbestos Control Program.
State Office Campus
Building 12 - Room 454
Albany, NY 1224
B. The Contractor is required to send notifications to regulatory agencies via mail or
package delivery service that will provide proof of delivery and receipt.
C. The Contractor shall post and/or provide Building Occupant Notification at least 10
days prior to beginning abatement activities as required by Code Rule 56.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
CARPENTER HALL B05 – BUILDING CODE COMPLIANCE
313 CAMPUS ROAD, ITHACA, NY 14850
ABATEMENT
ASBESTOS REMOVAL 13280 - 6
1.08 PROJECT MONITORING AND AIR SAMPLING
A. The Owner shall engage the services of an Environmental Consultant (the
Consultant) who has current certification and licensing as a Project Monitor shall
serve as the Owner’s Representative in regard to the performance of the asbestos
abatement Project and provide direction as required throughout the entire abatement
Project period.
B. The Contractor is required to ensure cooperation of its personnel with the Consultant
for the air sampling and Project monitoring functions described in this section. The
Contractor shall comply with all direction given by the Consultant during the course
of the Project.
C. The Consultant shall provide the following administrative services:
1. Review and approve or disapprove all submittals, shop drawings,
schedules, and samples.
2. Assure that all notifications to governmental agencies by the Contractor
are submitted in a timely manner and are correct in content.
3. Review and approve the Contractor’s OSHA compliance testing
laboratory.
D. The Consultant shall staff the Project with a trained and certified person(s) to act on
the Owner’s behalf at the job site. This individual shall be designated as the
Abatement Project Monitor (APM).
1. The APM shall be on-site at all times the contractor is on-site. The
Contractor shall not be permitted to conduct any Work unless the APM is
on-site (except for inspection of barriers and negative air system during
non-working days).
2. The APM shall have the authority to direct the actions of the contractor
verbally and in writing to ensure compliance with the Project documents
and all regulations. The APM shall have the authority to Stop Work when
gross work practice deficiencies or unsafe practices are observed, or when
ambient fiber concentrations outside the removal area exceeed .01 f/cc or
background level.
a. Such Stop Work order shall be effective immediately and remain
in effect until corrective measures have been taken and the
situation has been corrected.
b. Standby time required to resolve the situation shall be at the
Contractor’s expense.
3. The APM shall provide the following services:
a. Inspection of the Contractor’s Work, practices, and procedures,
including temporary protection requirements, for compliance
with all regulations and project specifications.
b. Provide abatement Project air sampling as required by applicable
regulations (NYS, AHERA) and the Owner. Sampling will
include background, work area preparations, asbestos handling,
and final cleaning and clearance air sampling.
c. Verify daily that all Workers used in the performance of the
Project are certified by the appropriate regulatory agency.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
CARPENTER HALL B05 – BUILDING CODE COMPLIANCE
313 CAMPUS ROAD, ITHACA, NY 14850
ABATEMENT
ASBESTOS REMOVAL 13280 - 7
d. Monitor the progress of the Contractor’s Work, and reports any
deviations from the schedule to the Owner.
e. Monitor, verify, and document all waste load-out operations
f. Verify that the Contractor is performing personal air monitoring
daily, and that results are being returned and posted at the site as
required.
g. The APM shall maintain a log on site that documents all project
related and Consultant and Contractor actions, activities, and
occurrences.
4. The following minimum inspections shall be conducted by the APM.
Additional inspections shall be conducted as required by Project
conditions. Progression from one phase of Work to the next by the
Contractor is only permitted with the written approval of the APM (as
recorded in the APMs project log).
a. Pre-Construction Inspection: The purpose of this inspection is to
verify the existing conditions of the Work Areas and to
document these conditions.
b. Pre-Commencement Inspection: The purpose of this inspection
is to verify the integrity of each containment system prior to
disturbance of any asbestos containing material. This inspection
shall take place only after the Work Area is completely prepped
for removal.
c. Work Inspections: The purpose of this inspection is to monitor
the Work practices and procedures employed on the Project and
to monitor the continued integrity of the containment system.
Inspections within the removal areas shall be conducted by the
APM during all preparation, removal, and cleaning activities.
Inspections shall be conducted as warranted.
d. Pre-Encapsulation Inspection: The purpose of this inspection is
to ensure the complete removal of Asbestos Containing Material
(ACM), from all surfaces in the Work Area prior to
encapsulation.
e. Visual Clearance Inspection: The purpose of this inspection is to
verify that: all materials in the scope of work have been properly
removed; no visible asbestos debris/residue remains; no pools of
liquid or condensation remains; and all required cleanings are
complete. This inspection shall be conducted before final air
clearance testing.
f. Post-Clearance Inspection: The purpose of this inspection is to
ensure the complete removal of ACM, including debris, from the
Work Area after satisfactory final clearance sampling and
removal of all isolation and critical barriers and equipment from
the Work Area.
g. Punch List Inspection: The purpose of this action is to verify the
Contractor’s certification that all Work has been completed as
contracted and the existing condition of the area prior to its
release to the Owner.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
CARPENTER HALL B05 – BUILDING CODE COMPLIANCE
313 CAMPUS ROAD, ITHACA, NY 14850
ABATEMENT
ASBESTOS REMOVAL 13280 - 8
E. The Consultant shall provide abatement Project air sampling and analysis as required
by applicable regulations (New York State and/or AHERA). Sampling will include
background, work area preparation, asbestos handling, and final cleaning and
clearance air sampling.
1. Unless otherwise required by applicable regulations, the Consultant shall
have samples analyzed by Phase Contrast Microscopy (PCM). Results
shall be available within 48 hours of completion of sampling. Samples
shall be collected as required by applicable regulations (New York State
and/or AHERA) and these specifications. If Transmission Electron
Microscopy TEM clearance air sampling is utilized by the owner, the
clearance criteria and sampling protocols must be in compliance with
AHERA. If PCM air sample analysis results exceed the satisfactory
clearance criteria, then TEM analysis of the entire set of clearance air
samples may be used, provided that a standard NIOSH or ELAP
accepted laboratory analysis method is utilized.
2. If the air sampling during any phase of the abatement project reveals
airborne fiber levels at or above .01 fibers/cc or the established
background level, whichever is greater, outside the regulated Work Area,
Work shall stop.
3. The Environmental Consultant shall submit copies of all elevated air
sampling results collected during abatement and all final air clearance
results to the Commissioner of Labor.
1.09 CONTRACTOR AIR SAMPLING
A. In addition to the requirements of OSHA 1926.1101, the Contractor shall be required
to perform personal air monitoring every Work shift in each Work Area during which
abatement activities occur in order to determine that appropriate respiratory
protection is being worn and utilized.
B. The Contractor shall conduct air sampling that is representative of both the 8-hour
time weighted average and 30-minute short-term exposures to indicate compliance
with the permissible exposure and excursion limits.
C. The Contractor’s laboratory analysis of air samples shall be conducted by an NYS
DOH ELAP approved laboratory, subject to approval of the Environmental
Consultant.
D. Results of personnel air sample analyses shall be available, verbally, within seventy-
two (72) hours of sampling and shall be posted upon receipt. Written laboratory
reports shall be delivered and posted at the Work site within three (3) days. Failure to
comply with these requirements may result in all work being stopped until
compliance is achieved.
1.10 PROJECT SUPERVISOR
A. The Contractor shall designate a full-time Project Supervisor who shall meet the
following qualifications:
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
CARPENTER HALL B05 – BUILDING CODE COMPLIANCE
313 CAMPUS ROAD, ITHACA, NY 14850
ABATEMENT
ASBESTOS REMOVAL 13280 - 9
1. The Project Supervisor shall hold New York State certification as an
Asbestos Supervisor.
2. The Project Supervisor shall meet the requirements of a Competent
Person” as defined by OSHA 1926.1101 and shall have a minimum of
two (2) years experience as a supervisor.
3. The Project Supervisor must be able to read and write English fluently,
as well as communicate in the primary language of the Workers.
B. If the Project Supervisor is not on-site at any time whatsoever, all Work shall be
stopped. The Project Supervisor shall remain on-site until the Project is complete.
The Project Supervisor cannot be removed from the Project without the written
consent of the Owner and the Environmental Consultant. The Project Supervisor
shall be removed from the Project if so requested by the Owner.
C. The Project Supervisor shall maintain the bound Daily Project Log that also includes
the entry/exit logs as required by New York State Department of Labor and section
2.03 of the Specifications and the Waste Disposal Log required by section 4.04 of the
specifications.
D. The Project Supervisor shall be responsible for the performance of the Work and
shall represent the Contractor in all respects at the Project site. The Supervisor shall
be the primary point of contact for the Asbestos Project Monitor.
1.11 MEDICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Before exposure to airborne asbestos fibers, provide Workers with a comprehensive
medical examination as required by 29 CFR 1910.1001, and 29 CFR 1926.1101.
1. This examination is not required if adequate records show the employee
has been examined as required by 29 CFR 1910.1001, and 29 CFR
1926.1101 within the past year.
2. The same medical examination shall be given on an annual basis to
employees engaged in an occupation involving asbestos fibers and within
thirty (30) calendar days before or after the termination of employment
in such occupations.
1.12 TRAINING
A. As required by applicable regulations, prior to assignment to asbestos Work instruct
each employee with regard to the hazards of asbestos, safety and health precautions,
and the use and requirements of protective clothing and equipment.
B. Establish a respirator program as required by ANSI Z88.2 and 29 CFR 1910.134, and
29 CFR 1926.1101. Provide respirator training and fit testing.
1.13 RESPIRATORY PROTECTION
A. Select respirators from those approved by the Mine Safety and Health Administration
(MSHA), and the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH),
Department of Health and Human Services.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
CARPENTER HALL B05 – BUILDING CODE COMPLIANCE
313 CAMPUS ROAD, ITHACA, NY 14850
ABATEMENT
ASBESTOS REMOVAL 13280 - 10
B. Respirators shall be individually fit-tested to personnel under the direction of an
Industrial Hygienist on a yearly basis. Fit-tested respirators shall be permanently
marked to identify the individual fitted, and use shall be limited to that individual.
Fit-test and physical records shall be maintained on site for each employee.
C. Where fiber levels permit, and in compliance with regulatory requirements, Powered
Air Purifying Respirators (PAPR) are the minimum allowable respiratory protection
permitted to be utilized during gross removal operations of OSHA Class I or OSHA
Class II friable ACM.
D. Respirators shall not be issued to personnel without such personnel participating
in a respirator training program.
E. High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) respirator filters shall be approved by
NIOSH and shall conform to the OSHA requirements in 29 CFR 1910.134 and 29
CFR 1926.1101.
F. A storage area for respirators shall be provided by the Contractor in the clean room
side of the personnel decontamination enclosure where they will be kept in a clean
environment.
G. The Contractor shall provide and make available a sufficient quantity of respirator
filters so that filter changes can be made as necessary during the work day. Filters
will be removed and discarded during the decontamination process. Filters cannot be
reused. Filters must be changed if breathing becomes difficult.
H. Filters used with negative pressure air purifying respirators shall not be used any
longer than one eight (8) hour work day.
I. Any authorized visitor, Worker, or supervisor found in the Work Area not wearing the
required respiratory protection shall be removed from the Project site and not be
permitted to return.
J. Any authorized visitor, Worker, or supervisor found in the Work Area not wearing the
required respiratory protection shall be removed from the Project site and not be
permitted to return.
K. Appropriate respirator filters for authorized visitors shall be made available by the
Contractor.
1.14 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver all materials to the job site in original packages with containers bearing
manufacturer’s name and label.
B. Store all materials at the job site in a suitable and designated area approved by the
Owner.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
CARPENTER HALL B05 – BUILDING CODE COMPLIANCE
313 CAMPUS ROAD, ITHACA, NY 14850
ABATEMENT
ASBESTOS REMOVAL 13280 - 11
1. Store materials subject to deterioration or damage away from wet or
damp surfaces and under cover.
2. Protect materials from unintended contamination and theft.
3. Storage areas shall be kept clean and organized.
C. Remove damaged or deteriorated materials from the job site. Materials contaminated
with asbestos shall be disposed of as asbestos debris as herein specified.
1.15 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A. Shut down and lock out all electrical power to the asbestos Work Areas.
B. Provide temporary 120-240 volt, single phase, three wire, 100 amp electric service
with Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCI) for all electric requirements within the
asbestos Work Area.
1. Where available, obtain from Owner’s existing system. Otherwise
provide power from other sources (i.e. generator).
2. Provide temporary wiring and “weatherproof’ receptacles in sufficient
quantity and location to serve all HEPA equipment and tools.
3. Provide wiring and receptacles as required by the Environmental
Consultant for air sampling equipment.
4. All power to the Work Area shall be brought in from outside the area
through GFCI’s at the source. The contractor shall supply a power board
on site designed to handle the expected electrical load during the project.
The power board shall be installed, tested and activated prior to any other
site work for the execution of this contract. This work shall be
accomplished by a properly trained and experienced electrician.
C. Provide temporary lighting with “weatherproof’ fixtures for all Work Areas including
decontamination chambers.
1. The entire Work Area shall be kept illuminated at all times.
2. Provide lighting as required by the Environmental Consultant for the
purposes of performing required inspections.
D. All temporary devices and wiring used in the Work Area shall be capable of
decontamination procedures including HEPA vacuuming and wet-wiping.
E. Utilize domestic water service, if available, from Owner’s existing system. Provide
hot water heaters with sufficient capacity to meet Project demands.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
CARPENTER HALL B05 – BUILDING CODE COMPLIANCE
313 CAMPUS ROAD, ITHACA, NY 14850
ABATEMENT
ASBESTOS REMOVAL 13280 - 12
A. Provide personnel utilized during the Project with disposable protective whole body
clothing, head coverings, gloves and foot coverings. Provide disposable plastic or
rubber gloves to protect hands. Make sleeves secure at the wrists and make foot
coverings secure at the ankles by the use of tape, or provide disposable coverings
with elastic wrists or tops.
B. Provide sufficient quantities of protective clothing to assure a minimum of four (4)
complete disposable outfits per day for each individual performing abatement Work.
C. Eye protection and hard hats shall be provided and made available for all personnel
entering any Work Area.
D. Authorized visitors shall be provided with suitable protective clothing, headgear, eye
protection, and footwear whenever they enter the Work Area.
2.02 SIGNS AND LABELS
A. Provide warning signs and barrier tapes at all approaches to asbestos Work Areas.
Locate signs at such distance that personnel may read the sign and take the necessary
protective steps required before entering the area.
1. Provide danger signs in vertical format conforming to 29 CFR
1926.1101, minimum 20” x 14” displaying the following legend:
DANGER
ASBESTOS CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE
HAZARD
AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY
RESPIRATORS AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
ARE REQUIRED IN AREA
2. Provide 3” wide yellow barrier tape printed with black lettered,
“DANGER ASBESTOS REMOVAL”. Locate barrier tape across all
corridors, entrances and access routes to the asbestos Work Area.
B. Provide asbestos danger labels affixed to all asbestos materials, scrap, waste, debris and
other products contaminated with asbestos.
1. Provide asbestos danger labels of sufficient size to be clearly legible,
displaying the following legend:
DANGER
CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS
AVOID CREATING DUST
CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD
2. Provide the following asbestos labels, of sufficient size to be clearly
legible, for display on waste containers (bags or drums) which will be
used to transport asbestos contaminated material in accordance with
United States Department of Transportation 49 CFR Parts 171 and 172:
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
CARPENTER HALL B05 – BUILDING CODE COMPLIANCE
313 CAMPUS ROAD, ITHACA, NY 14850
ABATEMENT
ASBESTOS REMOVAL 13280 - 13
RQ HAZARDOUS
SUBSTANCE
SOLID, NOS
ORM-E, NA 9188
ASBESTOS
3. Generator identification information shall be affixed to each waste
container indicating the following printed in indelible ink:
Generator Name
Facility Name
Facility Address
2.03 DAILY PROJECT LOG
A. Provide a Daily Project Log. The log shall contain on title page the Project name,
name, address and phone number of Owner; name, address and phone number of
Environmental Consultant; name, address and phone number of Abatement
Contractor; emergency numbers including, but not limited to local Fire/Rescue
department and all other New York State Department of Labor requirements.
B. All entries into the log shall be made in non-washable, permanent ink and such pen
shall be strung to or otherwise attached to the log to prevent removal from the log-in
area.
C. All persons entering and exiting the Work Area shall sign the log and include name,
social security number, and time.
D. The Project Supervisor shall document all Work performed daily and note all
inspections required by Code Rule 56, i.e. testing and inspection of barriers and
enclosures.
2.04 SCAFFOLDING AND LADDERS
A. Provide all scaffolding and/or staging as necessary to accomplish the Work of this
Contract. The type, erection and use of all scaffolding and ladders shall comply with
all applicable OSHA construction industry standards.
B. Provide scaffolding and ladders as required by the Environmental Consultant for the
purposes of performing required inspections.
2.05 SURFACTANT (AMENDED WATER)
A. Wet all asbestos-containing materials prior to removal with surfactant mixed and
applied in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
CARPENTER HALL B05 – BUILDING CODE COMPLIANCE
313 CAMPUS ROAD, ITHACA, NY 14850
ABATEMENT
ASBESTOS REMOVAL 13280 - 14
2.06 ENCAPSULANT
A. Encapsulant shall be tinted or pigmented so that application when dry is readily
discernible.
2.07 DISPOSAL BAGS, DRUMS, AND CONTAINERS
A. Provide 6 mil clear polyethylene disposal bags printed with asbestos caution labels.
Bags shall also be imprinted with U.S. Department of Transportation required
markings.
B. Provide 30 or 55 gallon capacity fiber, plastic, or metal drums capable of being
sealed air and water tight if asbestos waste has the potential to damage or puncture
disposal bags. Affix asbestos caution labels on lids and at one-third points around
drum circumference to assure identification.
C. Containers and bags must be labeled in accordance with 40 CFR Part 61 NESHAPS
and Code Rule 56. When the bags/containers are moved to the lockable hardtop
dumpster from the waste decontamination system washroom, the bags must also be
appropriately labeled with the date they are moved on the bag/container in
waterproof markings.
D. Labeled ACM waste containers or bags shall not be used for non-ACM waste or
trash. Any material placed in labeled containers or bags, whether turned inside out or
not shall be handled and disposed of as ACM waste.
2.08 HEPA VACUUM EQUIPMENT
A. All dry vacuuming performed under this contract shall be performed with High
Efficiency Particulate Absolute (HEPA) filter equipped industrial vacuums
conforming to ANSI Z9.2.
B. All power tools and specialized equipment including scraping nozzles with integral
vacuum hoods connected to a manufacturer equipped HEPA vacuum with flexible
hose.
2.09 POWER TOOLS
A. Any power tools used to drill, cut into, or otherwise disturb asbestos material shall be
manufacturer equipped with HEPA filtered local exhaust ventilation.
2.10 POLYETHYLENE SHEETING
A. All polyethylene (plastic) sheeting used on the Project (including but not limited to
sheeting used for critical and isolation barriers, fixed objects, walls, floors, ceilings,
waste container) shall be at least 6 mil fire retardant sheeting.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
CARPENTER HALL B05 – BUILDING CODE COMPLIANCE
313 CAMPUS ROAD, ITHACA, NY 14850
ABATEMENT
ASBESTOS REMOVAL 13280 - 15
B. Decontamination enclosure systems shall utilize at least 6 mil opaque fire retardant
plastic sheeting. At least 2 layers of 6 mil reinforced fire retardant plastic sheeting
shall be used for the flooring.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Should visible emissions or water leaks be observed outside the Work Area,
immediately stop Work and institute emergency procedures per Code Rule 56.
Should there be elevated fiber levels outside the Work Area, immediately stop Work,
institute emergency procedures per Code Rule 56, and notify all employers and
occupants in adjacent areas. All costs incurred in decontaminating such non-Work
Areas and the contents thereof shall be borne by the Contractor, at no additional cost
to the Owner.
B. Medical approval, fit test reports, Worker Acknowledgments, and NYS DOL
certificates shall be on site prior to admittance of any Contractor’s employees to the
asbestos Work Area.
C. The following submittals, documentation, and postings shall be maintained on-site by
the Contractor during abatement activities at a location approved by the Abatement
Project Monitor:
1. Contractor license issued by New York State Department of labor.
2. Certification, Worker Training, Medical Surveillance,
Acknowledgments:
a. New York State Asbestos Handler certification cards for each
person employed in the removal, handling, or disturbance of
asbestos.
b. Evidence that Workers have received proper training required by
the regulations and the medical examinations required by OSHA
CFR 1926.1101.
c. Documentation that Workers have been fit tested specifically for
respirators used on the Project.
d. Worker’s Acknowledgments: Statements signed by each
employee that the employee has received training in the proper
handling of asbestos containing materials; understands the health
implications and risks involved; and understands the use and
limitations of the respiratory equipment to be used.
3. Daily OSHA personal air monitoring results.
4. NYS Department of Health ELAP certification for the laboratory that
will be analyzing the OSH personnel air samples.
5. NYS Department of Environmental Conservation Waste Transporter
Permit.
6. Project documents (specifications and drawings.)
7. Notifications and variances (site specific and applicable.) Ensure that the
most up-to-date notifications and variances are on-site.
8. Applicable regulations.
9. Material Safety Data Sheets of supplies/chemicals used on the Project.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
CARPENTER HALL B05 – BUILDING CODE COMPLIANCE
313 CAMPUS ROAD, ITHACA, NY 14850
ABATEMENT
ASBESTOS REMOVAL 13280 - 16
10. Approved Abatement Work Plan.
11. List of emergency telephone numbers.
12. Magnahelic manometer semi-annual calibration certification.
13. Waste Disposal Log.
14. Daily Project Log.
15. Emergency Escape Plan
D. The following documentation shall be maintained on-site by the Abatement Project
Monitor during abatement activities:
1. Contractor license issued by New York State DOL.
2. Air Sample Log.
3. Air sample results.
4. Project Monitor Daily Log
5. Asbestos Survey Report.
6. A copy of ASTM Standard E1368 “Standard Practice for Visual
Inspection of Asbestos Abatement Projects”.
E. The Work Area must be vacated by building occupants prior to decontamination
enclosure construction and Work Area preparation.
F. All demolition necessary to access asbestos containing materials for removal must be
conducted within negative pressure enclosures by licensed asbestos handlers.
Demolition debris may be disposed of as construction and demolition debris provided
the Abatement Project Monitor determines that it is not contaminated with asbestos
and there has been no disturbance of ACM within the enclosure. If the demolition
debris is determined to be contaminated or ACM has been disturbed, it must be
disposed of as asbestos waste.
3.02 PERSONNEL DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURE
A. Provide personnel decontamination enclosure contiguous to the Work Area. The
decontamination enclosure shall be attached to the Work Area and not located within
it unless isolation barriers are installed. If the decontamination chamber is accessible
to the public it shall be fully framed and sheathed to prevent unauthorized entry. The
location of the decontamination enclosure shall be placed at the discretion of the
Owner.
B. Access to the Work Area will be from the clean room through an air-lock to the
shower and through an air lock to the equipment room. Each airlock shall be a
minimum of three feet from door to door. Additional air locks shall be provided as
required by Code Rule 56 for remote decontamination enclosures.
C. The decontamination enclosure ceiling and walls shall be covered with one layer of
opaque 6 mil polyethylene sheeting. Two layers of reinforced polyethylene sheeting
shall be used to cover the floor.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
CARPENTER HALL B05 – BUILDING CODE COMPLIANCE
313 CAMPUS ROAD, ITHACA, NY 14850
ABATEMENT
ASBESTOS REMOVAL 13280 - 17
D. The entrance to the clean room shall have a lockable door. Provide suitable lockers
for storage of Worker’s street clothes. Storage for respirators along with replacement
filters and disposable towels shall also be provided.
E. Provide a temporary shower with individual hot and cold water supplies and faucets.
Provide a sufficient supply of soap and shampoo. There shall be one shower for every
six Workers. The shower room shall be constructed in such a way so that travel
through the shower chamber shall be through the shower. The shower shall not be
able to be bypassed.
F. Shower water shall be drained, collected and filtered through a system with at least a
5.0 micron particle size collection capability containing a series of several filters with
progressively smaller pore sizes to avoid rapid clogging of the system. The filtered
waste water shall then be discharged to a sanitary sewer in accordance with
applicable codes and the contaminated filters disposed of as asbestos waste.
G. The equipment room shall be used for the storage of tools and equipment. A walk-off
pan filled with water shall be located in the Work Area outside the equipment room
for Workers to clean foot coverings when leaving the Work Area. A labeled 6 mil
plastic ACM waste bag for collection of contaminated clothing shall be located in
this room.
H. The personal decontamination enclosure shall be cleaned and disinfected minimally
at the end of each Work shift and as otherwise directed by the Asbestos Project
Monitor.
3.03 WASTE DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURE
A. Provide a waste decontamination enclosure contiguous to the Work area. The
decontamination enclosure shall be attached to the Work Area and not located within
it unless isolation barriers are installed. If the decontamination chamber is accessible
to the public it shall be fully framed and sheathed to prevent unauthorized entry.
B. The waste decontamination enclosure system shall consist of a holding area, air lock
and washroom. The airlock shall be a minimum of three feet from door to door. The
entrance to the holding area shall have a lockable door.
C. The decontamination enclosure ceiling and walls shall be covered with one layer of
flame retardant 6 mil polyethylene sheeting on walls and ceiling. Two layers of flame
retardant reinforced polyethylene sheeting shall be used to cover the floor.
D. Where there is only one egress from the Work Area, the holding area of the waste
decontamination enclosure system may branch off from the personnel
decontamination enclosure equipment room, which then serves as the waste wash
room.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
CARPENTER HALL B05 – BUILDING CODE COMPLIANCE
313 CAMPUS ROAD, ITHACA, NY 14850
ABATEMENT
ASBESTOS REMOVAL 13280 - 18
E. The waste wash room water shall be drained, collected, and filtered through a system
with at least a 5.0 micron particle size collection capability containing a series of
several filters with progressively smaller pore sizes. The filtered waste water shall
then be discharged to a sanitary sewer in accordance with applicable codes and the
contaminated filters disposed of as asbestos waste.
3.04 WORK AREA ENTRY AND EXIT PROCEDURES
A. Access to and from the asbestos Work Area is permitted only through the personnel
decontamination enclosure unless otherwise stipulated in a Site Specific Variance.
B. Workers shall sign the entry/exit log upon every entry and exit.
C. The following procedures shall be followed when entering the Work Area:
1. Before entering the Work Area, Workers shall proceed to the clean room,
remove all street clothes, and don protective clothing; equipment, and
respirators.
2. Workers shall proceed from the clean room through the shower room and
the equipment room and into the Work Area.
D. The following procedures shall be followed when exiting the Work Area:
1. Before leaving the Work Area, gross asbestos contamination will be
removed by brushing, wet cleaning and/or HEPA vacuuming.
2. In the equipment room, Workers shall remove disposable clothing, but
not respirators, and shall place clothing in plastic disposal bags for
disposal as contaminated debris prior to entering the shower room.
3. Workers shall shower thoroughly while wearing respirators then wash
respirator with soap and water prior to removal.
4. Upon exiting the shower, Workers shall don new disposable clothing if
the Work shift is to continue or street clothes to exit area. Under no
circumstances shall Workers enter public non-Work Areas in disposable
protective clothing.
E. If remote decontamination enclosures are permitted by Code Rule 56 or a Site
Specific Variance, workers shall wear two disposable suits for all phases of Work.
Workers exiting the work area shall HEPA vacuum the outer suit, enter the airlock,
remove the outer suit and then place it back into the Work Area. A clean second suit
shall be donned before exiting the airlock and proceeding to the decontamination
enclosure or another work area via the designated pathway required by Code Rule 56.
3.05 WORK AREA PREPARATION
A. Asbestos danger signs shall be posted at all approaches to the asbestos Work Area.
Post all emergency exits as emergency exits only on the Work Area side, post with
asbestos caution signs on the non-Work Area side. Provide all non-Work Area stairs
and corridors accessible to the asbestos Work Area with warning tapes at the base of
stairs and beginning of corridors. Warning tapes shall be in addition to caution signs.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
CARPENTER HALL B05 – BUILDING CODE COMPLIANCE
313 CAMPUS ROAD, ITHACA, NY 14850
ABATEMENT
ASBESTOS REMOVAL 13280 - 19
B. Shut down and lock out the building heating, ventilating, and air conditioning
systems. Electrical systems and circuits shall also be shut down unless permitted to
remain active per Code Rule 56 and appropriately protected and labeled. Provide
temporary electric power and lighting as specified herein.
C. All surfaces and objects within the Work Area shall be pre-cleaned using HEPA
vacuuming and/or wet-wiping methods. Dry sweeping and any other methods that
raise dust shall be prohibited. ACM shall not be disturbed during pre-cleaning.
D. Movable objects within the Work Area shall be HEPA vacuumed and/or wet-wiped
and removed from the Work Area.
E. All non-movable equipment in the Work Area shall be completely covered with 2
layers of polyethylene sheeting, at least 6 mil in thickness and secured in place with
duct tape and/or spray adhesive.
F. Provide enclosure of the asbestos Work Area necessary to isolate it from unsealed
areas of the building in accordance with the approved asbestos Work plan and as
specified herein.
G. Provide critical barriers by sealing off all openings including but not limited to
windows, diffusers, grills, electrical outlets and boxes, doors, floor drains, and any
other penetrations of the Work Area enclosure, using 2 layers of at least 6 mil
polyethylene sheeting.
H. Provide isolation barriers by installing temporary framing and sheathing at openings
larger than 32 square feet forming the limits of the asbestos Work Area. Sheathing
thickness must be a minimum of 3/8 inch and all sheathing shall be caulked and the
Work Area side sealed with two layers of 6 mil flame retardant polyethylene
sheeting.
I. Provide two layers of 6 mil polyethylene sheeting over all floor, wall, and ceiling
surfaces. Isolation barriers shall also be covered with two layers (for a total of four
layers). Sheeting shall be secured with spray adhesive and then sealed with duct tape.
All joints in polyethylene sheeting shall overlap 12” minimum.
J. Unless otherwise specified for removal, the Contractor shall either protect all fiberglass
insulation on piping, ductwork, tanks, etc. in the Work Area using two layers of six mil
polyethylene or remove the insulation as asbestos containing waste. If the Contractor
elects to remove the fiberglass insulation, he shall be responsible for reinsulation if
reinsulation of removed ACM is part of the Contract or Project.
K. Frame out emergency exits. Provide double layer 6 mil poly sheeting and tape seal
opening. Post as emergency exits only. Within the Work Area, mark the locations
and directions of emergency exits throughout the Work Area using exit signs and/or
duct tape with a plan showing the same posted and maintained on the
decontamination unit for the duration of the project.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
CARPENTER HALL B05 – BUILDING CODE COMPLIANCE
313 CAMPUS ROAD, ITHACA, NY 14850
ABATEMENT
ASBESTOS REMOVAL 13280 - 20
L. Remove all items attached to or in contact with ACM only after the Work Area
enclosure is in place. HEPA vacuum and wet wipe with amended water all removed
items prior to their removal from the Work Area and before the start of asbestos
removal operations.
M. Suspended ceiling tiles shall only be removed after Work Area preparation is
complete. All ceiling tiles shall be removed as asbestos contaminated debris and
removed from the Work Area before asbestos removals begin. Contaminated ceiling
tiles shall be disposed of as asbestos waste.
N. All smoke and fire detection equipment and emergency exits shall be maintained in
accordance with the applicable state building code.
3.06 NEGATIVE AIR PRESSURE FILTRATION SYSTEM
A. Provide a portable asbestos filtration system that develops a minimum pressure
differential of negative 0.02 in. of water column-in within all full enclosure areas
relative to adjacent unsealed areas and that provides a minimum of 8 air changes per
hour in the Work Area for friable abatement.
B. Such filtration systems must be made operational after critical and isolation barriers
are installed but before wall, floor, and ceilings are plasticized and shall be operated
24 hours per day during the entire Project until the final cleanup is completed and
satisfactory results of the final air samples are received from the laboratory.
C. The system shall include a series of pre-filters and filters to provide High Efficiency
Particulate Air (HEPA) filtration of particles down to 0.3 microns at 100% efficiency
and below 0.3 microns at 99.9% efficiency. Provide sufficient replacement filters to
replace pre-filters every 4 hours, secondary pre-filters every 24 hours, and primary
HEPA filters every 600 hours of operation.
D. A minimum of one additional filtration unit of at least the same capacity as the
primary unit(s)shall be installed and fully functional to be used during primary unit
(s) filter changing and in case of primary failure.
E. At no time will the unit exhaust indoors, within 15 feet of a receptor, including but
not limited to windows and doors, or adversely affect the air intake of the building.
Exhaust ducting shall not exceed 25’ in length. Provide construction fencing at
ground level exhaust termination locations per Code Rule 56.
F. Upon electric power failure or shut-down of any filtration unit, all abatement
activities shall stop immediately and only resume after power is restored and all
filtration units are fully operating. For shut-downs longer than one hour, all openings
into the Work Area, including the decontamination enclosures, shall be sealed.
G. The Contractor shall provide a manometer to verify negative air pressure.
Manometers shall be read twice daily and recorded within the Daily Project Log.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
CARPENTER HALL B05 – BUILDING CODE COMPLIANCE
313 CAMPUS ROAD, ITHACA, NY 14850
ABATEMENT
ASBESTOS REMOVAL 13280 - 21
H. There shall be at least a 4 hour settling period after the Work Area is fully prepared
and the negative filtration units have been started to ensure integrity of the barriers
prior to commencement of Phase IIB asbestos abatement.
I. Once installed and operational, the Contractor’s Supervisor shall conduct daily
inspections of the Work Area to insure the airtight integrity of the enclosure and
operation of the negative air system. Findings shall be recorded within the Daily
Project Log. Inspections shall also be conducted on days when no abatement
activities are in progress per Code Rule 56 (i.e. weekends).
3.07 REMOVAL OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS
A. Asbestos-containing materials shall be removed in accordance with the Contract
Documents and the approved Asbestos Work Plan. Only one type of ACM shall be
abated at a time within a Work Area. Where there are multiple types of ACM
requiring abatement, Code Rule 56 procedures for sequential abatement shall be
followed.
B. Sufficiently wet asbestos materials with a low pressure, airless fine spray of
surfactant to ensure full penetration prior to material removal. Re-wet material that
does not display evidence of saturation.
C. One Worker shall continuously apply amended water while ACM is being removed.
D. Perform cutting, drilling, abrading, or any penetration or disturbance of asbestos
containing material in a manner to minimize the dispersal of asbestos fibers into the
air. Use equipment and methods specifically designed to limit generation of airborne
asbestos particles. All power operated tools used shall be provided with HEPA
equipped filtered local exhaust ventilation.
E. Upon removal of ACM from the substrate, the newly exposed surfaces shall be
HEPA vacuumed and/or wet cleaned. Surfaces must be thoroughly cleaned using
necessary methods and any required solvents to completely remove any adhesive,
mastic, etc.
F. All removed material shall be placed into 6 mil clear plastic disposal bags or other
suitable containers upon detachment from the substrate. Cleanup of accumulations of
loose debris or waste shall be performed whenever there is enough accumulation to
fill a single bag or container.
G. Large components shall be wrapped in two layers of 6 mil polyethylene sheeting.
Sharp components likely to tear disposal bags shall be placed in fiber drums or boxes
and then wrapped with sheeting.
H. Power or pressure washers are not permitted for asbestos removal or clean-up
procedures unless approved in a Site Specific Variance.
I. All open ends of pipe and duct insulation not scheduled for removal shall be
encapsulated using lag cloth.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
CARPENTER HALL B05 – BUILDING CODE COMPLIANCE
313 CAMPUS ROAD, ITHACA, NY 14850
ABATEMENT
ASBESTOS REMOVAL 13280 - 22
J. All construction and demolition debris determined by the Environmental Consultant
to be contaminated with asbestos shall be handled and disposed of as asbestos waste.
K. The use of metal shovels, metal dust pans, etc. are not permitted inside the work area.
3.08 EQUIPMENT AND WASTE CONTAINER DECONTAMINATION AND
REMOVAL PROCEDURES
A. External surfaces of contaminated containers and equipment shall be cleaned by wet
cleaning and/or HEPA vacuuming in the Work Area before moving such items into
the waste decontamination enclosure system airlock by persons assigned to this duty.
The persons in the Work Area shall not enter the airlock. No gross removal
operations are permitted when waste Transfer is in progress.
B. The containers and equipment shall be removed from the airlock by persons stationed
in the washroom during waste removal operations. The external surfaces of
containers and equipment shall be cleaned a second time by wet cleaning.
C. The cleaned containers of asbestos material and equipment are to be dried of any
excessive pooled or beaded liquid, placed in uncontaminated 6 mil plastic bags or
sheeting, as the item’s physical characteristics demand, and sealed airtight.
D. The clean recontainerized items shall be moved into the airlock that leads to the
holding area. Workers in the washroom shall not enter this airlock.
E. Containers and equipment shall be moved from the airlock and into the holding area
by persons dressed in clean personal protective equipment, who have entered from
the holding area.
F. The cleaned containers of asbestos material and equipment shall be placed in water
tight carts with doors or tops that shall be closed and secured. These carts shall be
held in the holding area pending removal. The carts shall be wet cleaned and/or
HEPA vacuumed at least once each day.
G. The exit from the decontamination enclosure system shall be secured to prevent
unauthorized entry.
H. Where the waste removal enclosure is part of the personnel decontamination
enclosure, waste removal shall not occur during shift changes or when otherwise
occupied. Precautions shall be taken to prevent short circuiting and cycling of air
outward through the shower and clean room.
3.09 WORK AREA DECONTAMINATION, CLEANING, AND CLEARANCE
PROCEDURES
A. Following completion of gross abatement and after all accumulations of asbestos
waste materials have been containerized, the following decontamination procedures
shall be followed unless modified by a Site Specific Variance or procedures outlined
in12 NYCRR, Part 56.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
CARPENTER HALL B05 – BUILDING CODE COMPLIANCE
313 CAMPUS ROAD, ITHACA, NY 14850
ABATEMENT
ASBESTOS REMOVAL 13280 - 23
B. First Cleaning:
1. All bagged asbestos waste and unnecessary equipment shall be
decontaminated and removed from the Work Area.
2. All surfaces in the Work Area shall be wet cleaned. A wet-purpose shop
vacuum may be used to pick up excess liquid, and may either be
decontaminated prior to removal from the Work Area or disposed of as
asbestos waste.
3. The Abatement Project Monitor shall conduct a visual inspection of the
Work Area for cleanliness and completion of abatement.
4. The Contractor shall then apply a thin coat of encapsulant to all surfaces
in the Work Area that were not the subject of removal. In no event shall
encapsulant be applied to any surface that was the subject of removal
prior to obtaining satisfactory air monitoring results. Encapsulants shall
be pigmented or tinted to provide an indication for completeness of
coverage.
5. After the encapsulant has been applied and the required waiting/settling
and drying time has elapsed, the first layer of polyethylene sheeting shall
then be removed and bagged.
C. Second Cleaning
1. All surfaces in the Work Area shall be HEPA vacuumed and then wet
cleaned.
2. The Abatement Project Monitor shall conduct a second visual inspection
of the Work Area for cleanliness.
3. After the required waiting/settling and drying time has elapsed, the
second layer of polyethylene sheeting shall be removed and bagged.
D. Third Cleaning
1. All surfaces in the Work Area shall be HEPA vacuumed and then wet
cleaned.
2. The Abatement Project Monitor shall conduct a third visual inspection of
the Work Area for cleanliness.
3. After the required waiting/settling and drying time has elapsed,
aggressive final clearance air sampling shall then be conducted by the
Environmental Consultant provided no visible asbestos debris/residue;
poo1s of liquid, or condensation remains.
4. Upon receipt of satisfactory final clearance air sampling results, the
negative air pressure equipment can then be shut down and the isolation
and critical barriers removed. Following this, the decontamination
enclosures shall be removed.
E. After isolation and critical barriers are removed, the Abatement Project Monitor and
Contractor’s Supervisor shall inspect the Work Area for cleanliness. If necessary,
additional cleaning shall be performed by the Contractor as directed by the
Abatement Project Monitor.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
CARPENTER HALL B05 – BUILDING CODE COMPLIANCE
313 CAMPUS ROAD, ITHACA, NY 14850
ABATEMENT
ASBESTOS REMOVAL 13280 - 24
F. As a result of any visual inspection by the Asbestos Project Monitor or should air
sampling results indicate high fiber levels, the Contractor will clean or reclean the
affected areas at no additional expense to the Owner.
3.10 TENT ENCLOSURES
A. Tent enclosures may only be used where specifically permitted by Code Rule 56 or a
Site Specific Variance issued by the NYS Department of Labor.
B. The Contractor shall restrict access to the immediate area where tent removal
procedures are taking place using barrier and/or construction barriers. Caution signs
shall be posted.
C. Remote personnel and waste decontamination enclosures may be constructed if
allowed by Code Rule 56. Configuration shall be as required by Project size. For tent
enclosures with gross abatement of friable materials, a contiguous decontamination
system shall be constructed, maintained and utilized, except for minor size tent
enclosure work areas where a remote decontamination enclosure is permitted by
Code Rule 56.
D. The Work Area shall be precleaned. All objects and equipment that will remain in
the restricted area during abatement shall be sealed with two layers of six mil
polyethylene and tape.
E. The tent shall be a single use barrier constructed with a rigid frame and at least two
layers of six mil polyethylene unless one layer of six mil polyethylene is otherwise
permitted by Code Rule 56. Tents with twenty (20) square feet or less of floor
space or no gross removal of friable ACM shall be constructed of one (1) layer of
six mil polyethylene and shall include walls, ceilings and a floor (except portions of
walls, floors and ceilings that are the removal surface) with double folded seams.
All seams shall be sealed airtight using duct tape and/or spray adhesive.
F. The tent shall be constructed with at least one airlock for worker/waste egress.
G. A monometer per floor shall be used for all large OSHA Class I abatement. The
manometer used shall be calibrated in accordance with manufacturer’s equipment
standards and recalibrated in accordance with the NYS Code Rule 56.
H. Negative air shall be maintained at four (4) air changes per hour for non-friable and
glovebag abatement tent enclosure work areas. Eight (8) air changes shall be
maintained for friable gross removal tent enclosure work areas. In a Minor size
abatement tent enclosure work area a HEPA vacuum may be used to maintain the
required air changes.
I. OSHA compliance air monitoring is required per section 1.09.
J. ACM removal shall follow procedures defined in section 3.07.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
CARPENTER HALL B05 – BUILDING CODE COMPLIANCE
313 CAMPUS ROAD, ITHACA, NY 14850
ABATEMENT
ASBESTOS REMOVAL 13280 - 25
K. Waste material shall be placed in properly labeled 6 mil plastic bags or other
appropriate containers. The outside of the bags or containers shall be wet wiped
and/or HEPA vacuumed and shall then be placed in a second bag/container before
being transported to the waste storage container. All transportation of waste bags and
containers outside the Work Area shall be in watertight carts. These carts shall be
held in the holding area pending removal. The carts shall be wet cleaned and/or
HEPA vacuumed at least once each day.
L. Following completion of gross abatement and after all accumulations of asbestos
waste materials have been containerized, the following decontamination procedures
shall be followed.
1. All bagged asbestos waste and unnecessary equipment shall be
decontaminated and removed from the Work Area.
2. All surfaces in the Work Area shall be wet cleaned. A wet-purpose shop
vacuum may be used to pick up excess liquid, and shall be
decontaminated prior to removal from the Work Area.
3. The Asbestos Project Monitor shall conduct a visual inspection of the
Work Area for cleanliness and completion of abatement.
4. After the waiting/settling and drying time requirements have elapsed,
aggressive final clearance air sampling shall then be conducted by the
Environmental Consultant.
5. Upon receipt of satisfactory final clearance air sampling results, the tent
shall be collapsed into itself, placed in suitable disposal bags, and
transported to the waste decontamination enclosure. Isolation and
critical barriers shall then be removed.
3.11 GLOVEBAG REMOVAL
A. Glovebag removals may only be used as specifically permitted by Code Rule 56 or a
Site Specific Variance issued by the NYS Department of Labor. Glovebags may only
be used on piping.
B. In addition to conformance with applicable regulations and variances, glovebag
removals are only permitted to be conducted within tent enclosures complying with
these specifications.
C. The Contractor shall restrict access to the immediate area where tent/glovebag
removal procedures are taking place using barrier tape and/or construction barriers.
Caution signs shall be posted.
D. Remote personnel and waste decontamination enclosures shall be constructed.
Configuration shall be as required by Project size.
E. Glovebag removals shall utilize commercially available glovebags of at least six mil
thickness. Use shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and the
following minimum requirements:
1. The sides of the glovebag shall be cut to fit the size pipe being removed.
Tools shall be inserted into the attached tool pocket.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
CARPENTER HALL B05 – BUILDING CODE COMPLIANCE
313 CAMPUS ROAD, ITHACA, NY 14850
ABATEMENT
ASBESTOS REMOVAL 13280 - 26
2. The glovebag shall be placed around the pipe and the open edges shall be
folded and sealed with glue and duct tape. The glovebag shall also be
sealed at the pipe to form a tight seal.
3. Openings shall be made in the glovebag for the wetting tube and HEPA
vacuum hose. The opening shall be sealed to form a tight seal.
4. All glovebags shall be smoke tested by contactor supervisor and the
Asbestos Project Monitor under negative pressure using the HEPA
vacuum before removal operations commence. Glovebags that do not
pass the smoke test shall be resealed and then retested.
5. After first wetting the materials to be removed, removal may commence.
ACM shall be continuously wetted. After removal of the ACM, the
piping shall be scrubbed or brushed so that no visible ACM remains.
Open ends of pipe insulation shall be encapsulated.
6. After the piping is cleaned, the inside of the glovebag shall be washed
down and the wetting tube removed. Using the HEPA vacuum, the
glovebag shall be collapsed and then twisted and sealed with tape with
the ACM at the bottom of the bag.
7. A disposal bag shall be placed around the glovebag that is then detached
from the pipe. The disposal bag is then sealed and transported to the
decontamination enclosure.
F. After glovebag removals are complete, tent decontamination procedures shall be
followed.
3.14 RESTORATION OF UTILITIES, FIRESTOPPING, AND FINISHES
A. After final clearance, remove locks and restore electrical and HVAC systems. All
temporary power shall be disconnected, power lockouts removed and power restored.
All temporary plumbing shall be removed.
B. Finishes damaged by asbestos abatement activities including, but not limited to,
plaster/paint damage due to duct tape and spray adhesives, and floor tile lifted due to
wet or humid conditions shall be restored prior to final payment.
1. Finishes unable to be restored shall be replaced under this Contract.
2. All foam and expandable foam products and materials used to seal Work
Area openings shall be completely removed upon completion of
abatement activities.
C. All penetrations (including, but not limited to, pipes, ducts, etc.) through fire rated
construction shall be fire stopped using materials and systems tested in accordance
with ASTM E814 on Projects where reinsulation is part of the required work.
PART 4 DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS WASTE
4.01 TRANSPORTATION AND DISPOSAL SITE
A. The Contractor’s Hauler and Disposal Site shall be approved by the Owner.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
CARPENTER HALL B05 – BUILDING CODE COMPLIANCE
313 CAMPUS ROAD, ITHACA, NY 14850
ABATEMENT
ASBESTOS REMOVAL 13280 - 27
B. The Contractor shall give twenty-four (24) hour notification prior to removing any
waste from the site. Waste shall be removed from the site only during normal
working hours unless otherwise specified. No waste may be taken from the site
unless the Contractor and Environmental Consultant are present and the
Environmental Consultant authorizes the release of the waste as described herein.
C. All waste generated as part of the asbestos project shall be removed from the site
within ten (10) calendar days after successful completion of all asbestos abatement
work in accordance with Code Rule 56.
D. Upon arrival at the Project Site, the Hauler must possess and present to the
Environmental Consultant/Project Monitor or owner’s designated representative a
valid New York State Department of Environmental Conservation Part 364 Asbestos
Hauler’s Permit. The Environmental Consultant may verify the authenticity of the
hauler’s permit with the proper authority.
E. The Hauler, with the Contractor and the Environmental Consultant, shall inspect all
material in the transport container prior to taking possession and signing the Asbestos
Waste Manifests.
F. Unless specifically approved by the Owner, the Contractor shall not permit any off-
site transfers of the waste or allow the waste to be transported or combined with any
other off-site asbestos material. The Hauler must travel directly to the disposal site as
identified on the notifications with no unauthorized stops.
4.02 WASTE STORAGE CONTAINERS
A. All waste containers shall be fully enclosed and lockable (i.e. enclosed dumpster,
trailer, etc.). No open containers will be permitted on-site (i.e. open dumpster with
canvas cover, etc.) unless specifically permitted by a Site Specific Variance.
B. The Environmental Consultant shall verify that the waste storage container and/or
truck tags (license plates) match that listed on the New York State Department of
Environmental Conservation Part 364 permit. Any container not listed on the permit
shall be removed from the site immediately.
C. The container shall be plasticized and sealed with two (2) layers of 6 mil polyethylene.
Once on site, it shall be kept locked at all times, except during load out. The waste
container shall not be used for storage of equipment or contractor supplies.
D. While on-site, the container shall be labeled with EPA Danger signage:
DANGER
CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS
AVOID CREATING DUST
CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD
E. The New York State Department of Environmental Conservation Asbestos Hauler’s
Permit number shall be stenciled on both sides and back of the container.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
CARPENTER HALL B05 – BUILDING CODE COMPLIANCE
313 CAMPUS ROAD, ITHACA, NY 14850
ABATEMENT
ASBESTOS REMOVAL 13280 - 28
F. The container is not permitted to be loaded unless it is properly plasticized, has the
appropriate danger signage affixed, and has the permit number appropriately
stenciled on the container.
G. Before an enclosed container is removed from the Project Site for transportation to
the Disposal Site. The door(s) shall be locked.
H. The Owner may initiate random checks at the Disposal Site to insure that the
procedures outlined herein are complied with.
4.03 OWNER’S AND HAULER’S ASBESTOS WASTE MANIFESTS
A. An Asbestos Waste Manifest shall be provided by the Contractor and shall be utilized
in conjunction with the Asbestos Hauler’s Manifest.
B. The Contractor’s Manifest and the Hauler’s Manifest shall be completed by the
Contractor and verified by the Environmental Consultant that all the information and
amounts are accurate and the proper signatures are in place.
C. The Manifests shall have the appropriate signatures of the Environmental Consultant,
the Contractor, and the Hauler representatives prior to any waste being removed from
the site.
D. Copies of the completed Owner’s Manifest and the Hauler’s Manifest shall be
retained by the Environmental Consultant and the Contractor and shall remain on site
for inspection.
E. Upon arrival at the Disposal Site, the Owner’s Manifest and the Hauler’s Manifest
shall be signed by the Disposal Facility operator to certify receipt of ACM covered
by the manifest.
F. The Disposal Facility operator shall return the original Owner’s Manifest and the
Hauler’s Manifest to the Contractor.
G. The Contractor shall forward copies of the Contractor’s Manifest and the Hauler’s
Manifest to the Owner within 14 days of the waste container being removed from the
site. Failure to do so may result in payment being withheld from the Contractor.
H. The Contractor shall utilize the Waste Disposal Log. This log shall be maintained by
the Project Supervisor and shall be kept on site at all times.
I. Originals of all waste disposal manifests and disposal logs shall be submitted by the
Contractor to the Owner with the final close-out documentation.
END OF SECTION 13280
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
13 4313 - 1 INTEGRATED PREFABRICATED
INTERIOR CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 13 4313
INTEGRATED PREFABRICATED INTERIOR CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A.Section includes:
1.Manufactured partition framing assemblies.
2.Face and center-mounted tiles.
3.Glass and glazing.
4.Doors, frames, and door hardware.
5.Accessories.
6.Finishes.
7.Integrated architectural woodwork.
B.Related Requirements:
1.Section 061053 “Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry” for wood blocking required for
site-installed items, such as handrails, signage, etc.
2.Division 06 “Wood” for cabinetry and millwork not specified in this section.
3.Division 08 “Openings” for doors and windows not specified in this section.
4.Division 09 “Finishes” for finish materials not specified in this section.
1.02 REFERENCES
A.American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):
1.AAMA 61198 Voluntary Standards for Anodized Architectural Aluminum.
B.ASTM International:
1.ASTM E 72 Method for Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction.
2.ASTM E 84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
3.ASTM E 90 Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of
Building Partitions and Elements.
4.ASTM E 413 Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.
C.Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS): a joint effort of US Architectural Woodwork Institute
(AWI), Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada (AWMAC) and
Woodwork Institute (WI).
1.American Woodworking Standards (AWS) Manual.
D.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, 2008 Edition.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A.Integrated Prefabricated Interior Construction: A construction process that includes an
integrated “design assist” approach to design by using a software that allows for the designing,
pricing, engineering and manufacturing of the assemblies and integration of other’s
components for a prefabricated construction method for the interior construction of a facility.
The entity has the ability to use prefabricated method of construction, i.e. offsite construction,
using software for the manufacturing of the assemblies. Through the use of parametric design,
framing assemblies have the ability to embed different components while also allowing for
integration.
B.Tiles: Panel-like materials face-mounted on wall framing to provide a finished surface; or
center-mounted within a frame to fill and opening. Finishes and material can vary between
MDF substrate or Glass.
C.ICE: DIRTT’s proprietary ICE software (“ICE”) allows for an automated manufacturing process
which integrates numerous work processes involved in conventional construction including
design, sales, ordering, engineering, manufacturing specifications, delivery and installation
using a single underlying real-time engineering and manufacturing data set.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
13 4313 - 2 INTEGRATED PREFABRICATED
INTERIOR CONSTRUCTION
D.Mass Customization: ICE allows for individual customization, manufacture and deliver custom
DIRTT Solutions to satisfy a specific customer’s needs. Mass customization is a
manufacturing technique that combines the flexibility and personalization of custom-made
solutions with the low unit costs associated with mass production.
E.Customer’s Own Materials (COM): Owner (customer) or Distribution Partner furnished
materials or components provided to manufacturer for factory application or installation. Items
provided in accordance with production schedule indicated in the Shop Drawings.
F.Distribution Partner: Qualified entities that partner with DIRTT Environmental Solutions
throughout North America and whom provide design assist using the ICE software. DIRTT
Distribution partners act as the subcontractor and hold all contractual agreements. Local
Distribution Partners are used for projects. The Distribution will be responsible to procure all
material, certified labor and cover all costs for the project scope along with all design and site
coordination with other trades.
1.04 COORDINATION
A.Comply with Division 01 project management and procedures.
B.Project Scheduling and Lead Times: Manufacturing production time of all standard solutions
and finishes shall not exceed 4-6 weeks, inclusive of shipping within US and Canada, from
manufacturers receipt of complete order information (including shop drawing approval, deposit
cost, and notice to proceed).
1.Maximum delivery time on solutions included on GSA contracts shall not exceed 45 days.
Coordinate adjacent work, including other work by others to be installed within or next to
Work of this section.
C.Project Scheduling and Lead Times: Manufacturing production time of all standard solutions
and finishes for International projects, inclusive of International shipping, to be confirmed by
Construction Schedule.
D.Schedule: Coordinate delivery with construction schedule to avoid storage or double handling
of the integrated prefabricated interior construction partition assemblies and solutions.
E.Install integrated prefabricated interior construction partition assemblies and solutions after the
building is enclosed and conditioned including completion of HVAC equipment, fire
suppression system, lighting, adjacent ceilings and base building finishes in a sequence that
allows final electrical connection, voice data/communications to be completed during or after
installation of the partition systems.
1.Coordinate integrated prefabricated interior construction partition assembly installation
with ceiling, floor finish, and specified wall base (partition framing standard base, applied
base, or integral base installation).
F.Floor and base finishes may be completed before installation of integrated interior partition
system framing unless coordinated with the manufacturer ahead of time through the Shop
Drawing process.
1.05 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site a minimum of one week prior to
Shop Drawing approval and prior to beginning installation.
1.Meeting participants include authorized representatives of the Owner, Architect, base
building contractor, and all trades whose work will interface with installed systems.
1.06 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.Product Data: For each type of product.
1.Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for integrated prefabricated interior partitions.
2.Provide product data sheets for all types of Hardware and Accessories.
3.Provide product data sheets for equipment to be installed or connected by others.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
13 4313 - 3 INTEGRATED PREFABRICATED
INTERIOR CONSTRUCTION
B.Sustainable Design Submittals:
1.CI-v4-MRc1, Long Term Commitment: Provide lease or proof of ownership
documentation.
2.CI-v4-MRc2/NC-v4-MRc1, Interiors Lifecycle Impact Reduction: Document use of interior
solutions that increase project space flexibility, ease of adaptive use, and recycling of
building materials while considering differential durability and premature obsolescence
over building design life and individual component service lives.
3.CI-v4-MRc3/NC-v4-MRc2, Building Product Disclosure and Optimization: Provide Type III
EPDs for building products used.
4.CI-v4-MRc4/NC-v4-MRc3, Sourcing Raw Materials:
a.Option 1, Corporate Sustainability Reports (CSR): Provide third-party verified CSR
reports for major suppliers, using the GRI format
b.Option 2, Leadership Extraction Practices:
1)FSC manufacturer certificates
2)Recycled content: Product data and costs indicating percentages by weight of
post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content
3)Regional content: Product data and costs indicating percentages by weight of
regional materials
5.CI-v4-MRc5, Opt. 1/NC-v4-MRc4, Material Ingredients: Provide published HPDs which
provide full disclosure of known hazards.
6.CI-v4-MRc6, Opt. 2/NC-v4-MRc5, Reducing Waste on Jobsite: Calculate total of all
construction and demolition waste by weight; divide by gross floor area and multiply by
100 to determine final performance.
7.CI-v4-EQc2/NC-v4-EQc2, Low Emitting Materials:
a.Product data for adhesives and sealants used on project, with printed statement of
VOC content.
b.Product data for paints and coatings used on project, with printed statement of VOC
content.
c.Product data for each composite wood product and adhesive used indicating
bonding agents and adhesives contain no added urea formaldehyde.
d.Manufacturer certificates or SCS Indoor Advantage™ Gold certification.
8.CI-v4-EQc9/NC-v4-EQc9, Acoustic Performance: Provide documentation required by
LEED.
C.Shop Drawings:
1.Provide structural analysis data and calculations for installed products to demonstrate
compliance with design loads, signed and sealed by licensed professional engineer
registered in the jurisdiction of the project.
a.Include engineering calculations for grid connections, bulkhead connections, and
seismic conditions.
2.Provide manufacturer’s architectural plans, elevations, sections, connection and
attachment details, finish schedule, reflected ceiling plans, doors and hardware schedule,
schedules, and locations.
3.Include field measurements of existing construction, future construction, finished width
and height of partitions and associated components.
a.Manufacturer’s authorized representative shall undertake field measurements to
show relevant adjacencies in Shop Drawings. Site conditions, base building
construction, and required clearances are to be reviewed and approved by the
Architect, including exiting, life safety, location of building service devices, and other
affected trades through Shop Drawings to identify and prevent potential conflicts.
b.Where field measurements are not possible, hold-to and control dimensions must be
coordinated and agreed upon by all parties through the Shop Drawing process
before manufacturing begins.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
13 4313 - 4 INTEGRATED PREFABRICATED
INTERIOR CONSTRUCTION
D.Samples: Provide manufactures standard size samples for verification of support system and
each type, color, and texture of exposed finish, full thickness and the following minimum sizes:
1.Extrusion Components.
2.Linear Trim and Base.
3.Door Face Finishes.
1.07 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.Coordination Drawings:
1.Provide shop drawings for coordination between trades upon request.
2.Provide architectural plans locating integrated interior partitions within the base building,
including finishes and construction of surfaces the partition system will interface with or
connect to.
3.Provide reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, to show penetrations and ceiling mounted
items to be coordinated with partitions and associated system components.
4.Structural: coordinate structural connections to base building and generate engineering
calculations where required by the local building authority.
B.Qualification Data: For Installer
C.Product Test Reports, Solid Partitions: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed
by a independent qualified testing agency:
D.Evaluation/Certification Reports:
1.ICC ESR (Evaluation Service Report), ESR1947 (reissued 2007): Provide evidence of
compliance with structural performance requirements and relevant building codes.
2.OSHPD Preapproval of Manufacturers Certification (OPM-0044-13).
3.CCRR 1012 - Code Compliance Research Report for Solid Wall / Tile Faced Wall.
4.Flame Spread Reports for finishes (ASTM E84 or CAN |ULC S102) provide relevant
testing reports for finish type specified on the project.
E.Source quality-control reports.
F.Field quality-control reports.
G.Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.
1.08 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.Maintenance Data: Provide maintenance data for incorporation into operation and
maintenance manuals.
1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall specialize in designing and manufacturing
integrated interior construction systems of the quality and complexity required for this project
with a minimum of 10 years documented successful experience. Manufacturer shall have
production facilities capable of meeting contract requirements for single-source responsibilities
and warranty.
B.Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and certified by
manufacturer
C.Certifications:
1.Sound Transmission Characteristics: Testing to be performed by a qualified independent
testing agency in accordance with performance requirements.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Do not deliver or install integrated interior construction system partitions and millwork
components until spaces are enclosed and weather-tight, wet work is complete and dry, work
above ceilings is substantially complete, and HVAC system is operational and able to maintain
ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels for the remainder of the
construction period.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
13 4313 - 5 INTEGRATED PREFABRICATED
INTERIOR CONSTRUCTION
B.Ship system components in manufacturers standard packaging. Maintain air circulation during
shipment. Do not allow packaging to get wet or develop condensation.
C.Deliver materials to project site or offsite warehouse as directed by the Contractor or Owner as
applicable, and in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions in original unopened and
undamaged packages. All elements and components shall be labeled with manufacturers
name, brand names, size, finishes, and placement locations to be coherent with drawings.
D.Store in a clean, dry, secure space to protect from damage during construction activities.
Minimize or eliminate storage period by coordinating with construction schedule.
E.Handle in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install system and components until building is
enclosed and finishing operations are complete
B.Temperature and humidity shall be maintained to final occupancy standards. Installation areas
shall be climate controlled between 60 and 90 degrees F (15.5 and 32.2 C) with Relative
Humidity maintained between 25 and 55 percent.
1.12 WARRANTY
A.Manufacturer's Standard Limited Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components of integrated prefabricated interior construction systems that fail(s) in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.Warranty Period: 10 year(s) limited warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide DIRTT
Environmental Systems (or comparable system).
B.Source Limitations: Obtain manufactured partitions, integrated components, and accessories
from single source from single manufacturer.
2.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.Factory sub-assembled, site installed, integrated prefabricated interior glazed partition
assemblies, including structure, metal framing and doors to accept a variety of finishes, and
accessories.
B.System is floor-supported, floor-to-ceiling site constructed in configurations shown on the Shop
Drawings. Top channels hold partition systems in place and accommodate height adjustments
to suit floor-to-ceiling dimensional variations and similar site specific requirements.
1.Where partition systems are not clipped to ceilings or other overhead construction,
additional structural review and system engineering will be required by the manufacturer.
C.Partially Unitized Solid Wall system shall be comprised of components which can be
disassembled, relocated / field cut and substantially reused.
D.Materials manufactured by others shall not exceed the integrated interior construction system
manufacturer’s limitations or tested performance.
E.Integrated prefabricated interior construction system manufacture shall allow for adaptability
and retrofitting of hardware for future division of partitions, or supports to the greatest extent
practical.
2.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.Structural Performance: Integrated interior construction system partitions shall be capable of
withstanding the effects of gravity loads, dead loads, and the following loads and stresses
within limits and under conditions indicated:
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
13 4313 - 6 INTEGRATED PREFABRICATED
INTERIOR CONSTRUCTION
1.Transverse Load: Lateral deflection of the overall span when tested under a uniformly
distributed load of 5 psf (0.24 kN/m2) in accordance with ASTM E 72 where L equals
partition wall height:
a.Glass Walls: not more than L/175 or 3/4 inch (19 mm) whichever is more stringent.
B.Acoustical Performance: Where STC ratings are indicated, provide partitions with STC rating
determined by testing an identical system to ASTM E 90 and classified in accordance with
ASTM E 413.
1.Sound Transmission Coefficient (STC) range shall be determined in accordance with
Sound Transmission Test by Two-Room Method and reported in accordance with ASTM
E 90 and ASTM E 413 for frequency data. Tested assembly shall have been assembled
in the same manner the partitions to be installed on the project.
2.Test results vary based on glass or solid wall configuration, and implementation of
perimeter enhancements at base building connections.
a.Double glazed glass wall performance to achieve minimum of 42 STC rating.
C.Fire Resistance:
1.Surface-Burning Characteristics: Tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 by a qualified
independent testing agency.
D.Sustainable Design Requirements:
1.CI-v4-MRc1, Long-Term Commitment: Minimum 10 years for interior.
2.CI-v4-MRc2, Opt. 3/NC-v4-MRc1, Interiors Lifecycle Impact Reduction (design for
flexibility):
a.Install accessible systems (floor or ceiling) for at least 50 percent of project floor
area: DIRTT Floor.
b.Design at least 50 percent of interior non-structural walls, ceilings and floors to be
moveable or demountable: DIRTT assembly is designed for disassembly and
adaptive reuse.
c.Ensure that at least 50 percent of non-structural materials, by cost, are reusable or
recyclable: DIRTT solutions can be reused and repurposed.
d.Implement flexible power and data network distribution (plug-and-play) systems for at
least 50 percent of the project floor area.
3.CI-v4-MRc3/NC-v4-MRc2, Building Product Disclosure, Environmental Product
Declarations (EPDs):
a.DIRTT Aluminum-Glass Wall - Savannah.
b.DIRTT NAF MDF Veneer Wrapped Door - Calgary
4.CI-v4-MRc4, Opt. 1/NC-v4-MRc3, Sourcing of Raw Materials (Supplier CSR Reports).
a.Option 1: Third-party verified corporate sustainability reports (CSR) using GRI format
for aluminum, glass, and gaskets
b.Option 2: Leadership Extraction Practices:
1)Recycled content: Recycled content is the sum of post-consumer recycled
content plus one-half the pre-consumer recycled content, based on cost.
Products meeting recycled content criteria are valued at 100 percent of their
cost for the purposes of credit achievement calculation.
(a)Solid Door Core Assemblies: 100 percent pre-consumer recycled content.
(b)Aluminum: Confirm recycled content with manufacturing plant location.
2)Regional content (100 mile or 160 km limit):
5.CI-v4-MRc5, Opt. 1/NC-v4-MRc4, Material Ingredients, Health Product Declarations
(HPDs).
a.Provide published HPDs providing full disclosure of known hazards (aluminum and
float glass), and that are complete to at least 1000 ppm level or more.
6.CI-v4-MRc6, Opt. 2/NC-v4-MRc5, Construction waste management source reduction.
a.No more than 2.5 lbs./sq. ft. 12.2 kg/m2 of waste. Use prefabricated construction.
7.CI-v4-EQc2/NC-v4-EQc2, Low emitting materials.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
13 4313 - 7 INTEGRATED PREFABRICATED
INTERIOR CONSTRUCTION
a.Use inherently non-emitting sources: finishes that do no off gas, e.g. aluminum
b.Adhesives and sealants that meet SCAQMD Rule 1168: Document for VOC content.
c.Paints and coatings that meet SCAQMD Rule 1113. Document for VOC content.
d.Composite wood: meet CARB ATCM for ultra-low-emitting resins or no added
formaldehyde resins (NAF MDF).
e.Tested and certified furniture assemblies (SCS Indoor Advantage ™ Gold), meeting
ANSI/BIFMA furniture emission standards (7.6.1, 7.6.2) and CA 01350.
1)SCS-IAQ-02433-NAF MDF
2)SCS-IAQ-02873-Glass and Aluminum Wall.
8.CI-v4-EQc9/NC-v4-EQc9 - Acoustic performance.
a.Document how the assembly meets AHRI, STCC, reverberation time and masking
systems criteria, and equivalent local codes.
1)Measure background noise levels from HVAC systems per the LEEDv4
requirements.
2)Meet STCC ratings per LEEDv4 requirements.
3)Meet reverberation time requirements per LEEDv4.
4)If using sound masking systems, meet STI, dBA and sound level coverage
requirements per LEEDv4.
2.04 INTEGRATED PREFABRICATED INTERIOR CONSTRUCTION SYSTEM FRAMING
A.Framing for Glazed Partitions:
1.Material: Aluminum extrusions, 6063T6 aluminum alloy, thickness engineered to meet
performance requirements specified above.
2.Vertical Support Spacing: 6 inch (150 mm) minimum to maximum spacing 60 inches
(1524 mm).
3.Ceiling Track: Continuous, with intermittent breaks for pass through of building services
or structural components.
4.Floor Track: Modular with wall frames inclusive of carpet grippers or floor tape
(non-seismic) or continuous with floor anchor attachment (seismic) stopped at doorways
and pass-throughs.
5.Bracing: as required to meet structural performance.
6.Fasteners: Zinc Plated Steel Type F Screws unless otherwise indicated on engineered
shop drawings.
B.Frame Bases:
1.Provide frame bases with provisions for 1-1/2 inch (38.1 mm) height adjustment to
accommodate floor slab variances.
2.Provide a leveling mechanism for making fine adjustment in height over adjustment range
of the product.
2.05 GLASS AND GLAZING
A.Typical: Tempered glass minimum thickness 1/2 inch (10 mm) to ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully
tempered), Condition A uncoated, Type 1, Class 1 transparent, Quality q3.
B.Glass Types:
1.Glass Type GLS-1: as specified above
2.06 DOORS AND DOOR HARDWARE
A.General:
1.Coordinate security system components to be provided by others with partitions
manufacturer through the Shop Drawing process.
B.Flush Wood Doors: Manufacturer's standard solid core door, butt hinge operation, with
glazing.
1.Door Thickness: 1-15/32 inches (43 mm) thick.
2.Pressed high density fiberboard on both sides of door on particleboard core.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
13 4313 - 8 INTEGRATED PREFABRICATED
INTERIOR CONSTRUCTION
3.Stain grade veneer, “Clear Maple” species, 5-ply, minimum. Clear finish.
4.Edging: Solid edging.
5.Stile Width: 6 inches (152 mm)
6.Top Rail Height: 6 inches (152 mm)
7.Bottom Rail Height: 10 inches (254 mm) AFF
a.Provisions for ADA bottom rails as determined by the design professional of record.
8.Adjustability: Provide door skirt to accommodate varying floor levels.
9.Door Height: As noted on shop drawings. Maximum height 10 feet (3 meters).
10.Glazing: Tempered glass, 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick,.
11.Glazing: Type GLS-2, as specified in Division 08 “Glazing”.
12.Hardware Reinforcement: Factory milled by partition manufacturer to suit glass and
hardware supplied by others as shown on show drawings.
2.07 DOOR FRAMES
A.Butt Hinge Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum frame single door, factory milled to
receive hardware, for 1-11/16 inch (43 mm) [+/ 1/16 inch (1.5 mm)] doors. Door frames capable
of reconfiguration without part replacement or damage to wall components.
1.Door Module Size: 3’-3”
a.Finished door width is equal to module width less 3 inches (76 mm).
2.Hardware Reinforcement: milled, reinforce, drill and tap frames at factory to receive
specified hardware in accordance with the contract hardware schedule and templates.
3.Frame Height: Jambs over length 50 mm (2 inches), for field cutting to suit opening
height for proper alignment with adjacent frames.
4.Frame Preparation: Factory milled frame with hinge locations and sizes as determined
and set by manufacturer; including factory installed steel backer plates for four (4) hinges
(2 pair):
a.Hinges: 4-1/2 x 4 Stanley BB1409 fastened with 10-24 flat head machine screws.
b.Door and frame to be prepped to conform with hardware specified.
5.Factory notched and drilled jambs for ceiling track and manufacturer’s standard header
attachment.
6.Extrusion Profile: Rectilinear profile
7.Seals: Manufacturer's standard.
B.Hardware: Manufacturer's standard butt hinge hardware, with lever style locksets.
C.Hardware: As specified in Division 08 “Door Hardware”.
2.08 ASSEMBLY COMPONENTS
A.Connections and Supports: Manufacturer's standard connections and supports that connect
and release from floor and ceiling without damage using carpet grippers and ceiling track clips,
with exception of the following conditions: bulkhead (drywall ceiling), seismic conditions,
electrical or service feeds, physical connections to base building where required.
B.Tile Joint Closure: Manufacturer's standard, capable of closing up to a 1-inch (25 mm) gap
between prefabricated partitions and base building elements.
C.Trim: Continuous and modular, factory finished, snap on type; field cuttable for variations in
floor and ceiling levels.
1.Base Trim Profiles: Recessed; removable to access leveling mechanisms.
2.Ceiling Trim Profile: Recessed; adjustable to accommodate up to a 1/2 inch (13 mm) gap
between demountable partitions and base building elements.
3.Wall Trim Profile: Recessed; adjustable to accommodate up to a 1/2 inch (13 mm) up to 1
inch (25 mm) gap between demountable partitions and base building elements.
4.Tile to Tile Profile: As detailed.
5.Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
13 4313 - 9 INTEGRATED PREFABRICATED
INTERIOR CONSTRUCTION
2.09 FABRICATION
A.Glazing:
1.Segmented Glass Framed Solutions: Factory installed/assembled.
B.Components:
1.Fabricate components for installation with concealed fastening devices and pressure-fit
members that will not damage ceiling or floor coverings.
2.Fabricate for installation with manufacturer’s standard seals at floor and other locations
where partition assemblies abut fixed construction and for installation of sound
attenuation insulation in partition cavities.
2.10 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A.Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage during shipping.
B.Appearance of Finished Work:
1.Finishes shall match approved samples.
2.Variations in natural finishes such as stone and wood shall be reviewed and accepted in
accordance with industry standards.
C.Frame Finishes:
1.Clear Anodized Aluminum: AAMA 611, AAM12C22A31, Class I.
D.Door Finishes:
1.Veneer wrapped MDF; veneer finish to be selected from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify field or hold-to control dimensions before fabrication of integrated interior construction
system partitions. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction schedule and progress to
avoid delay in the work.
B.Examine all adjoining work including work by others.
C.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.Locations to receive partitions shall be inspected for compliance with manufacturers
requirements.
B.Site floor conditions must be surveyed to determine the nature of floor level and determine
where special conditions exist beyond manufacturer’s standard leveling capabilities of 1-1/2
inch in 4 feet (38.1 mm in 1219 mm).
C.Field conditions and pre-existing installations by others which may adversely affect installation
or exceed the manufacturers limitations shall be corrected before installing partitions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.Installation of integrated interior construction system shall be completed by a manufacturer
certified installer.
B.Install system level, plumb, and aligned.
C.All building services shall be installed and connected to the base building systems by licensed
subtrades. All building services shall be inspected by authorized trade representatives and
Authority Having Jurisdiction in the presence of a manufacturer representative. Coordinate
with all affected parties as required.
D.Installation sequence as determined by the certified installer and coordinated with the General
Contractor based on project conditions.
18.007 / Carpenter Hall B05 -
Building Code Compliance
13 4313 - 10 INTEGRATED PREFABRICATED
INTERIOR CONSTRUCTION
3.04 CLEANING
A.Upon completion of installation, integrated interior construction system components and
finishes shall be cleaned in accordance with the finish manufacturer’s instructions. Alkaline or
abrasive agents shall not be used. Avoid scratching or marring finishes.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.Protect from damage through the duration of construction activities.
3.06 DEMONSTRATION
A.Refer to Division 01 “Demonstration and Training”.
B.Manufacturer’s Distribution Partner will be responsible to provide general product training to
the Owner or their outsourced operations team at time of installation as well as conduct a
comprehensive training session(s) to convey the methodology, and assembly of the partitions
to sustain general operational maintenance by the Owner’s personnel with clearance over the
facilities lifetime.
C.Reconfiguration and modifications shall comply with manufacturer’s warranty requirements.
Extensive or unusual changes will require additional Shop Drawings and manufactured
components.
END OF SECTION 13 4313
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
221005 - 1 PLUMBING PIPING
SECTION 221005
PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Pipe, pipe fittings, specialties, and connections for piping systems.
1.Storm water.
2.Manufactured sleeve-seal systems.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 312316 - Excavation.
B.Section 312323 - Fill.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ASTM D2235 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene
(ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings; 2004 (Reapproved 2016).
B.ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Plastic Piping Systems; 2012.
C.ASTM D2665 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and
Vent Pipe and Fittings; 2014.
D.ASTM D2680 - Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) and Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Composite Sewer Piping; 2001 (Reapproved 2014).
E.ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for the Two-Step (Primer & Solvent Cement) Method of
Joining Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) or Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Pipe and
Piping Components with Tapered Sockets; 2015.
F.ASTM D3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe
and Fittings; 2016.
G.ASTM F477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe;
2014.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide
manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Perform work in accordance with applicable codes.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing
sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2.02 STORM WATER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING
A.PVC Pipe: ASTM D3034 DR 35.
1.Fittings: PVC.
2.Joints: Push-on, using ASTM F477 elastomeric gaskets.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
221005 - 2 PLUMBING PIPING
2.03 STORM WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING
A.ABS Pipe: ASTM D2680.
1.Fittings: ABS.
2.Joints: Solvent welded with ASTM D2235 cement.
B.PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034.
1.Fittings: PVC.
2.Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.
2.04 MANUFACTURED SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A.Modular/Mechanical Seal:
1.Synthetic rubber interlocking links continuously fill annular space between pipe and
wall/casing opening.
2.Provide watertight seal between pipe and wall/casing opening.
3.Elastomer element size and material in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
4.Glass reinforced plastic pressure end plates.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to
walls.
C.Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of
insulation and access to valves and fittings.
D.Excavate in accordance with Section 312316.
E.Backfill in accordance with Section 312323.
F.PVC Pipe: Make solvent-welded joints in accordance with ASTM D2855.
G.Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors.
H.Manufactured Sleeve-Seal Systems:
1.Install manufactured sleeve-seal systems in sleeves located in grade slabs and exterior
concrete walls at piping entrances into building.
2.Provide sealing elements of the size, quantity, and type required for the piping and sleeve
inner diameter or penetration diameter.
3.Locate piping in center of sleeve or penetration.
4.Install field assembled sleeve-seal system components in annular space between sleeve
and piping.
5.Tighten bolting for a water-tight seal.
6.Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
221006 - 1 PLUMBING PIPING
SPECIALTIES
SECTION 221006
PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Drains.
B.Cleanouts.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ASME A112.6.3 - Floor and Trench Drains; 2016.
B.ASME A112.6.4 - Roof, Deck, and Balcony Drains; 2008 (Reaffirmed 2012).
C.NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2017.
D.NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2016.
E.PDI-WH 201 - Water Hammer Arresters; 2010.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.
C.Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes.
D.Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate
assembly and support requirements.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in
this section with not less than three years documented experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.Specialties in Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide products that comply with NSF 61 and
NSF 372 for maximum lead content.
2.02 DRAINS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company; ______: www.jayrsmith.com/#sle.
2. Noble Company: www.noblecompany.com/#sle.
3. Zurn Industries, LLC: www.zurn.com/#sle.
B. Area Drains:
1. Assembly: ASME A112.6.4.
2. Body: Galvanized cast iron with sump.
3. Strainer: Round nickel-bronze.
C. Floor Drain (FD):
1. ASME A112.6.3; lacquered cast iron or stainless steel, two piece body with double
drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, and round, adjustable
nickel-bronze strainer, 8" body with 4" piping connection.
2.03 CLEANOUTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com/#sle.
2. Josam Company: www.josam.com/#sle.
3. Zurn Industries, LLC: www.zurn.com/#sle.
B. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Floor Areas (CO):
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
221006 - 2 PLUMBING PIPING
SPECIALTIES
1. Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange, reversible clamping collar, threaded top
assembly, and round gasketed scored cover in service areas and round gasketed
depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with
mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage
system.
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230513 - 1 COMMON MOTOR
REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC
EQUIPMENT
SECTION 230513
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; 2017.
B.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide wiring diagrams with electrical characteristics and connection
requirements.
C.Operation Data: Include instructions for safe operating procedures.
D.Maintenance Data: Include assembly drawings, bearing data including replacement sizes, and
lubrication instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND REQUIREMENTS
A.Motors shall comply with ASHRAE 90.1 and the requirements of the Energy Policy Act of 1992
where applicable.
B.Motors shall be of the premium efficiency, high power factor type for minimum life cycle costs.
Nominal efficiencies shall be established in accordance with NEMA Standard MG 1.
C.Motors for use with variable frequency drives shall be rated for inverter duty, and shall be
furnished with AEGIS bearing protection rings.
D.Electrical Service:
1.Motors 1/2 HP and Smaller: 120 volts, single phase, 60 Hz.
2.Motors Larger than 1/2 Horsepower:
a.208/3/60 systems: 200 volts, three phase, 60 Hz.
b.240/3/60 systems: 230 volts, three phase, 60 Hz.
c.480/3/60 systems: 460 volts, three phase, 60 Hz.
3.208/230 volt dual range motors are not preferred.
E.Construction:
1.Open drip-proof type except where specifically noted otherwise.
2.Design for continuous operation in 104 degrees F environment.
3.Design for temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation class,
service factor, and motor enclosure type.
F.Visible Nameplate: Indicating motor horsepower, voltage, phase, cycles, RPM, full load amps,
locked rotor amps, frame size, manufacturer's name and model number, service factor, power
factor, efficiency.
G.Wiring Terminations:
1.Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials
indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70, threaded for conduit.
2.For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, provide threaded
conduit connection in end frame.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.Install securely on firm foundation. Mount ball bearing motors with shaft in any position.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230513 - 2 COMMON MOTOR
REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC
EQUIPMENT
C.Check line voltage and phase and ensure agreement with nameplate.
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230519 - 1 METERS AND GAUGES FOR
HVAC PIPING
SECTION 230519
METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Pressure gauges and pressure gauge taps.
B.Thermometers and thermometer wells.
C.Static pressure gauges.
D.Filter gauges.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ASME B40.100 - Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments; 2013.
B.ASTM E77 - Standard Test Method for Inspection and Verification of Thermometers; 2014, with
Editorial Revision (2017).
C.AWWA M6 - Water Meters -- Selection, Installation, Testing, and Maintenance; 2012.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide list that indicates use, operating range, total range and location for
manufactured components.
C.Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and instrumentation.
D.Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1.See Section 016000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.Do not install instrumentation when areas are under construction, except for required rough-in,
taps, supports and test plugs.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PRESSURE GAUGES
A.Pressure gauges shall be stainless steel case, non-repairable, silicone filled with minimum
3-1/2 inch diameter case. Gauges shall have 3% accuracy over the appropriate range of 0-30
psi, 0-100, or 0-160; and shall include a shut-off ball valve (gauge cocks are not permitted).
Include a pigtail cooling loop on all steam gauges. Scale should be selected to provide a
reading at mid-scale during normal operation. No snubbers.
2.02 STEM TYPE THERMOMETERS
A.Thermowells: All thermowells for steam service shall be stainless steel and for water service
shall be brass. Thermowell length shall be in accordance with ISA standards and shall include
the appropriate extension to allow for pipe installation. Extension neck shall be included when
required to match thermowell and insulation thickness.
B.Thermometers: Provide one of the following:
1.Industrial stick type, mercury free, 9-inch case, with locking adjustable angle body and a
case of aluminum or non-metallic material. Thermometer shall be secured to well by
tapered bushing and not by set screws. Provide the following characteristics:
a.Scale Graduations: 2 degrees F.
b.Range: Select to provide a mid-scale reading at normal operating temperature.
c.Accuracy: 1%.
2.Industrial light-powered digital thermometer with adjustable-angle stem and a case of
aluminum or high impact ABS plastic. Thermometer shall be secured to thermowell by
tapered bushing and not by set screws. Installation shall insure that thermometer is
accessible and has been adjusted to be readable from a 5-foot level as viewed from the
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230519 - 2 METERS AND GAUGES FOR
HVAC PIPING
floor. Display shall be LCD with digits a minimum of 0.5-inch high with the following
characteristics:
a.Resolution: 0.1 degrees F.
b.b. Range: -40 to 300 degrees F.
c.c. Sensor: Glass passivated thermistor.
d.d. Accuracy: 1%.
C.Acceptable Manufacturers:
1.Trerice
2.Weiss Instruments
3.Weksler
2.03 PIPING ACCESSORIES
A.Pressure/temperature test ports shall be provided on each coil bank, heat exchanger, fan coil,
and at all permanent pressure gauge locations. Use extended body style to allow for insulation
thickness. Seals shall be appropriate for operating water temperature and pressure as follows:
1.Hot Water, Glycol - Nordel Seat
2.Cold Water, Chilled Water - Neoprene Seat
2.04 STATIC PRESSURE GAUGES
A.3-1/2 inch diameter dial in metal case, diaphragm actuated, black figures on white background,
front recalibration adjustment, 2 percent of full scale accuracy.
B.Inclined manometer, red liquid on white background with black figures, front recalibration
adjustment, 3 percent of full scale accuracy.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.Install positive displacement meters with isolating valves on inlet and outlet to AWWA M6.
Provide full line size valved bypass with globe valve for liquid service meters.
C.Provide one pressure gauge per pump, installing taps before strainers and on suction and
discharge of pump. Pipe to gauge.
D.Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge pipes smaller
than 2-1/2 inch for installation of thermometer sockets. Ensure sockets allow clearance from
insulation.
E.Install thermometer sockets adjacent to controls system thermostat, transmitter, or sensor
sockets. Refer to Section 230943. Where thermometers are provided on local panels, duct or
pipe mounted thermometers are not required.
F.Install gauges and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal operating
level. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical.
G.Adjust gauges and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrate to
zero.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230523 - 1 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR
HVAC PIPING
SECTION 230523
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Applications.
B.General requirements.
C.Angle valves.
D.Ball valves.
E.Butterfly valves.
F.Check valves.
G.Gate valves.
1.02 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A.CWP: Cold working pressure.
B.EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.
C.NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.
D.NRS: Nonrising stem.
E.OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.
F.RS: Rising stem.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ASME B1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch); 2013.
B.ASME B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250; 2015.
C.ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; 2012.
D.ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; 2014.
E.ASTM A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe
Fittings; 2004 (Reapproved 2014).
F.ASTM B62 - Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings; 2017.
G.MSS SP-71 - Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; 2011, with Errata
(2013).
H.MSS SP-80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves; 2013.
I.MSS SP-125 - Gray Iron and Ductile Iron In-Line, Spring-Loaded, Center-Guided Check
Valves; 2010.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide data on valves including manufacturers catalog information. Submit
performance ratings, rough-in details, weights, support requirements, and piping connections.
C.Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
D.Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating
instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listings.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Manufacturer:
1.Company must specialize in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less
than three years of documented experience.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230523 - 2 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR
HVAC PIPING
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1.Minimize exposure of operable surfaces by setting plug and ball valves to open position.
2.Protect valve parts exposed to piped medium against rust and corrosion.
3.Protect valve piping connections such as grooves, weld ends, threads, and flange faces.
4.Secure check valves in either the closed position or open position.
B.Use the following precautions during storage:
1.Maintain valve end protection and protect flanges and specialties from dirt.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPLICATIONS
A.Provide the following valves for the applications if not indicated on Drawings:
1.Throttling (Hydronic): Butterfly and Ball.
2.Isolation (Shutoff): Butterfly and Ball.
3.Swing Check (Pump Outlet):
a.2 NPS and Smaller: Bronze with bronze disc.
b.2-1/2 NPS and Larger: Iron with lever and weight, lever and spring, center-guided
metal, or center-guided with resilient seat.
B.Chilled Water Valves:
1.2 NPS and Smaller, Brass and Bronze Valves:
a.Threaded ends.
b.Angle: Bronze disc, Class 125.
c.Ball: Full port, one piece, brass trim.
d.Swing Check: Bronze disc, Class.
e.Gate: NRS, Class 125.
2.2-1/2 NPS and Larger, Iron Valves:
a.2-1/2 NPS to 4 NPS: Threaded ends.
b.Ball: 2-1/2 NPS to 10 NPS, Class 150.
c.Single-Flange Butterfly: 2-1/2 NPS to 12 NPS, aluminum-bronze disc, EPDM seat,
200 CWP.
d.Swing Check with Closure Control: 2-1/2 NPS to 12 NPS, lever and spring, Class
125.
C.Heating Hot Water Valves:
1.2 NPS and Smaller, Brass and Bronze Valves:
a.Threaded ends.
b.Angle: Bronze disc, Class 125.
c.Ball: Full port, one piece, brass trim.
d.Swing Check: Bronze disc, Class 125.
2.2-1/2 NPS and Larger, Iron Valves:
a.2-1/2 NPS to 4 NPS: Threaded ends.
b.Ball: 2-1/2 NPS to 10 NPS, Class 150.
c.Single-Flange Butterfly: 2-1/2 NPS to 12 NPS, aluminum-bronze disc, EPDM seat,
200 CWP.
d.Swing Check: 2-1/2 NPS to 12 NPS, lever and spring closure control, Class 125.
2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: No less than rating indicated; as required for
system pressures and temperatures.
B.Valve Sizes: Match upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
C.Valve Actuator Types:
1.Handwheel: Valves other than quarter-turn types.
2.Hand Lever: Quarter-turn valves 6 NPS and smaller.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230523 - 3 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR
HVAC PIPING
D.Valves in Insulated Piping: Provide 2 NPS stem extensions and the following features:
1.Ball Valves: Extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and
protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or
disturbing insulation.
2.Butterfly Valves: Extended neck.
3.Memory Stops: Fully adjustable after insulation is installed.
E.Valve-End Connections:
1.Threaded End Valves: ASME B1.20.1.
2.Flanges on Iron Valves: ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves.
3.Solder Joint Connections: ASME B16.18.
F.General ASME Compliance:
1.Building Services Piping Valves: ASME B31.9.
2.03 BRONZE ANGLE VALVES
A.Class 125: CWP Rating: 200 psig:, and Class 150: CWP Rating: 300 psig:.
1.Comply with MSS SP-80, Type 1.
2.Body: Bronze; ASTM B62, with integral seat and screw in bonnet.
3.Ends: Threaded.
4.Stem: Bronze.
5.Disc: Bronze, PTFE, or TFE.
6.Packing: Asbestos free.
7.Handwheel: Bronze or aluminum.
2.04 BALL VALVES, GENERAL DUTY
A.For all water services, low pressure steam, low pressure condensate and all other normal
non-corrosive services, ball valves shall be as follows:
1.Body: Bronze
2.Body Style: Standard Port, Two-Piece
3.Trim: 316 Stainless Steel Ball and Stem
4.Seat: Reinforced Teflon (RTFE), 15% glass filled
5.double seal.
6.Seat Working P/T Rating: 300 psig @ 250 degrees F Minimum
7.Body Working P/T Rating: 300 psig @ 300 degrees F Minimum
8.WOG Rating: 300 psig Minimum
9.Saturated Steam Rating: 150 psig Minimum
10.Actuator: Lever Handle
B.Models approved by Cornell Facilities Engineering. Coordinate with Facilities Engineering if
other models are preferred. Valve Type V-1, HVAC service:
1.Apollo (Conbraco): 70-140, 70-240
2.Nibco: T-580-70-66, S-580-70-66
3.Watts: B6000-SS, B6001-SS
2.05 BUTTERFLY VALVES GENERAL
A.All lugged butterfly valves shall be fully bi-directional and bi-directionally dead-endable to the
full pressure rating of the seat. This is defined to mean that the seat rating is not reduced when
pressure is applied in either direction and the valve is capable of serving as a blank flange,
when bolted to the end of a line from either side of the valve body and no mating flange is
attached. The means of attaching the body to the pipe flange, and of attaching the seat ring to
the body shall meet the ANSI class rating of the valve without mechanical failure. This
requirement normally results in partially lugged butterfly valves not being acceptable.
B.Packing shall be able to be tightened without removing the insulation.
C.External disc position indicators shall be provided.
D.Valves must be fully factory assembled, set and tested.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230523 - 4 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR
HVAC PIPING
E.Gear operators on steam valves shall be spaced 4-inches above packing assembly.
F.Install all steam valves with the stem at least 30? off vertical to protect the bottom bearing from
debris.
G.On all butterfly valve actuators located greater than 5-feet above the floor, install chainwheels
to 5-feet above the floor when the design engineer determines valve service is critical.
H.Handwheel gear operators shall be provided on all butterfly valves for low and high pressure
steam and condensate service. This is to allow for slow opening, which minimizes the
hydraulic, thermal, flow shock, and differential shock stresses on the system due to water
hammer. The handwheel gear operator is slow acting. Proper warm-up procedures shall be
followed to prevent water hammer.
2.06 BUTTERFLY VALVES, GENERAL DUTY
A.For all water services and all other normal non-corrosive services, butterfly valves shall be
single offset, and have the following requirements:
1.Body: Ductile Iron or Cast Iron
2.Body Style: Fully lugged
3.Trim: 316 or 17-4 pH Stainless Steel
4.Disc: Stainless Steel
5.Seat: EPDM
6.Seat Working P/T Rating: 150 psig @ 250F Minimum
7.Body Working P/T Rating: ANSI 150
8.Actuator:
a.Under 4": Locking Lever Handle
b.4" and Above: Handwheel Gear Operator
B.Acceptable Models, Valve Type V-4:
1.Keystone: Series 60
2.Nibco: LD-3022
3.Watts: BF-03
C.Please note: In order to provide the standard required body/disc materials, it is often necessary
to exceed the ANSI 150 Body Working P/T rating.
2.07 BUTTERFLY VALVES, HIGH PERFORMANCE, CHILLED WATER BUILDING ENTRANCE
A.For the chilled water building entrance, butterfly valves shall be double offset, and have the
following requirements:
1.Body: Ductile Iron or Carbon Steel
2.Body Style: Tapped Lug (full flange)
3.Trim: 316 Stainless Steel
4.Disc: 316 Stainless Steel
5.Seat: PTFE
6.Seat Working P/T Rating: 100 psig @ 375?F Minimum
7.Body Working P/T Rating: ANSI 150
8.Actuator:
a.Under 4": Locking Lever Handle
b.4" and Above: Handwheel Gear Operator
B.Acceptable Models, Valve Type V-4:
1.Keystone: K-LOK F362
2.Nibco: 815L
3.Watts: QF-1151
2.08 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES
A.Class 125: CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa) and Class 150: CWP Rating: 300 psig (2070
kPa).
1.Comply with MSS SP-80, Type 3.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230523 - 5 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR
HVAC PIPING
2.Body Design: Horizontal flow.
3.Body Material: Bronze, ASTM B62.
4.Ends: Threaded.
5.Disc: Bronze.
2.09 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES WITH CLOSURE CONTROL
A.Class 125:
1.Comply with MSS SP-71, Type I.
2.Body Design: Clear or full waterway.
3.Body Material: ASTM A126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.
4.Ends: Flanged.
5.Trim: Bronze.
6.Gasket: Asbestos free.
7.Closer Control: Factory installed, exterior lever, and spring or weight.
2.10 IRON, CENTER-GUIDED CHECK VALVES
A.Class 125, Compact-Wafer:
1.Comply with MSS SP-125.
2.Body Material: ASTM A126, gray iron.
2.11 BRONZE GATE VALVES
A.Non-Rising Stem (NRS) or Rising Stem (RS):
1.Comply with MSS SP-80, Type I.
2.Body Material: Bronze with integral seat and union-ring bonnet.
3.Ends: Threaded or solder joint.
4.Stem: Bronze.
5.Disc: Solid wedge; bronze.
6.Packing: Asbestos free.
7.Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Discard all packing materials and verify that valve interior, including threads and flanges are
completely clean without signs of damage or degradation that could result in leakage.
B.Verify valve parts to be fully operational in all positions from closed to fully open.
C.Confirm gasket material to be suitable for the service, to be of correct size, and without defects
that could compromise effectiveness.
D.Should valve is determined to be defective, replace with new valve.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.Provide unions or flanges with valves to facilitate equipment removal and maintenance while
maintaining system operation and full accessibility for servicing.
B.Provide separate valve support as required and locate valve with stem at or above center of
piping, maintaining unimpeded stem movement.
C.Install check valves where necessary to maintain direction of flow as follows:
1.Lift Check: Install with stem plumb and vertical.
2.Swing Check: Install horizontal maintaining hinge pin level.
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230529 - 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR HVAC PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
SECTION 230529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Support and attachment components for equipment, piping, and other HVAC/hydronic work.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products; 2017.
B.ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2016a.
C.ASTM B633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel;
2015.
D.ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2017.
E.ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2016.
F.MFMA-4 - Metal Framing Standards Publication; 2004.
G.UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Coordination:
1.Coordinate sizes and arrangement of supports and bases with the actual equipment and
components to be installed.
2.Coordinate the work with other trades to provide additional framing and materials required
for installation.
3.Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mounting surfaces at
the installed locations.
4.Coordinate the arrangement of supports with ductwork, piping, equipment and other
potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.
5.Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain
direction before proceeding with work.
B.Sequencing:
1.Do not install products on or provide attachment to concrete surfaces until concrete has
fully cured in accordance with Section 033000.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for channel
(strut) framing systems, non-penetrating rooftop supports, post-installed concrete and masonry
anchors, and thermal insulated pipe supports.
C.Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by
product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,
preparation, and installation of product.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230529 - 2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR HVAC PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A.General Requirements:
1.Provide all required hangers, supports, anchors, fasteners, fittings, accessories, and
hardware as necessary for the complete installation of plumbing work.
2.Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended,
where applicable.
3.Where support and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated, select in
accordance with manufacturer's application criteria as required for the load to be
supported. Include consideration for vibration, equipment operation, and shock loads
where applicable.
4.Steel Components: Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the environment where
installed.
a.Indoor Dry Locations: Use zinc-plated steel or approved equivalent unless otherwise
indicated.
b.Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel, stainless steel, or
approved equivalent unless otherwise indicated.
c.Zinc-Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633.
d.Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM
A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M.
B. Metal Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot metal channel
(strut) and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field-assembly of
supports.
1. Provide factory-fabricated continuous-slot metal channel (strut) and associated fittings,
accessories, and hardware required for field-assembly of supports.
2. Comply with MFMA-4.
C. Hanger Rods: Threaded zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated.
1. Minimum Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required:
a. Equipment Supports: 1/2 inch diameter.
b. Piping up to 1 inch (27 mm) nominal: 1/4 inch diameter.
c. Piping larger than 1 inch (27 mm) nominal: 3/8 inch diameter.
d. Trapeze Support for Multiple Pipes: 3/8 inch diameter.
D. Thermal Insulated Pipe Supports:
1. General Construction and Requirements:
a. Insulated pipe supports to be provided at hanger, support, and guide locations on
pipe requiring insulation or additional support.
b. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index/smoke developed index of
5/30, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723.
c. Pipe supports to be provided for nominally sized, 1/2 inch to 30 inch iron pipes.
d. Insulation inserts to consist of polyisocyanurate (urethane) insulation surrounded by a
360 degree, PVC jacketing.
2. PVC Jacket:
a. Pipe insulation protection shields to be provided with a ball bearing hinge and locking
seam.
b. Moisture Vapor Transmission: 0.0071 perm inch, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E96/E96M.
c. Thickness: 60 mil.
E. Anchors and Fasteners:
1. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor and
fastener types indicated for the specified applications.
2. Concrete: Use preset concrete inserts, expansion anchors, or screw anchors.
3. Solid or Grout-Filled Masonry: Use expansion anchors or screw anchors.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230529 - 3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR HVAC PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
4. Hollow Masonry: Use toggle bolts.
5. Hollow Stud Walls: Use toggle bolts.
6. Steel: Use beam clamps, machine bolts, or welded threaded studs.
7. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.
8. Preset Concrete Inserts: Continuous metal channel (strut) and spot inserts specifically
designed to be cast in concrete ceilings, walls, and floors.
a. Comply with MFMA-4.
b. Channel Material: Use galvanized steel.
c. Minimum Channel Thickness: Steel sheet, 12 gage, 0.1046 inch minimum base
metal thickness.
d. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of metal channel (strut) framing system.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment components.
C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping,
ductwork, conduit, or other systems.
C. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from suspended
ceiling support system or ceiling grid.
D. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from roof deck.
E. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of Structural
Engineer.
F. Provide thermal insulated pipe supports complete with hangers and accessories. Install
thermal insulated pipe supports during the installation of the piping system.
G. Equipment Support and Attachment:
1. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut) to
support equipment as required.
2. Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface-mounted on
hollow stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out.
3. Use metal channel (strut) to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp locations
to provide space between equipment and mounting surface.
4. Unless otherwise indicated, mount floor-mounted equipment on properly sized 3 inch high
concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 033000.
5. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it relies on
its own weight for support.
H. Preset Concrete Inserts: Use manufacturer provided closure strips to inhibit concrete seepage
during concrete pour.
I. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.
J. Remove temporary supports.
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230553 - 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
SECTION 230553
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Nameplates.
B.Tags.
C.Adhesive-backed duct markers.
D.Stencils.
E.Pipe markers.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 099123 - Interior Painting: Identification painting.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; 2015.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
B.List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification.
C.Chart and Schedule: Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location,
function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number.
D.Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS
A.Air Handling Units: Nameplates.
B.Control Panels: Nameplates.
C.Ductwork: Nameplates.
D.Instrumentation: Tags.
E.Major Control Components: Nameplates.
F.Piping: Tags.
G.Pumps: Nameplates.
H.Thermostats: Nameplates.
2.02 NAMEPLATES
A.Letter Color: White.
B.Letter Height: 1/2 inch.
C.Background Color: Black.
2.03 TAGS
A.Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting
background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter.
B.Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth
edges.
2.04 ADHESIVE-BACKED DUCT MARKERS
A.Material: High gloss acrylic adhesive-backed vinyl film 0.0032 inch; printed with UV and
chemical resistant inks.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230553 - 2 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
2.05 STENCILS
A.Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:
1.1-1/2 to 2 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch long color field, 3/4 inch
high letters.
2.06 PIPE MARKERS
A.Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit around
pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of
fluid being conveyed.
B.Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing
and printed markings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.Install nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with
sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
B.Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.
C.Apply stencil painting in accordance with Section 099123.
D.Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E.Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
F.Install ductwork with stencilled painting. Identify with air handling unit identification number and
area served. Locate identification at air handling unit, at each side of penetration of structure or
enclosure, and at each obstruction.
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230593 - 1 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING FOR HVAC
SECTION 230593
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems.
B.Testing, adjustment, and balancing of hydronic systems.
C.Field quality-control testing of Laboratory fume hoods.
D.Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.
E.Sound measurement of equipment operating conditions.
F.Vibration measurement of equipment operating conditions.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.AABC (NSTSB) - AABC National Standards for Total System Balance, 7th Edition; 2016.
B.ASHRAE Std 110 - Methods of Testing Performance of Laboratory Fume Hoods; 2016.
C.ASHRAE Std 111 - Measurement, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Building HVAC
Systems; 2008.
D.NEBB (TAB) - Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental
Systems; 2015, with Errata (2017).
E.SMACNA (TAB) - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting and Balancing; 2002.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.TAB Plan: Submit a written plan indicating the testing, adjusting, and balancing standard to be
followed and the specific approach for each system and component.
1.Submit to Architect.
2.Include at least the following in the plan:
a.List of all air flow, water flow, sound level, system capacity and efficiency
measurements to be performed and a description of specific test procedures,
parameters, formulas to be used.
b.Copy of field checkout sheets and logs to be used, listing each piece of equipment to
be tested, adjusted and balanced with the data cells to be gathered for each.
c.Identification and types of measurement instruments to be used and their most recent
calibration date.
d.Discussion of what notations and markings will be made on the duct and piping
drawings during the process.
e.Final test report forms to be used.
f.Procedures for formal deficiency reports, including scope, frequency and distribution.
C.Final Report: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and
balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.
1.Revise TAB plan to reflect actual procedures and submit as part of final report.
2.Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final
copies for Architect and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.
3.Provide reports in digital format, complete with index page and indexing tabs, with cover
identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and
equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations.
4.Include actual instrument list, with manufacturer name, serial number, and date of
calibration.
5.Form of Test Reports: Where the TAB standard being followed recommends a report
format use that; otherwise, follow ASHRAE Std 111.
6.Units of Measure: Report data in both I-P (inch-pound) and SI (metric) units.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230593 - 2 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING FOR HVAC
7.Include the following on the title page of each report:
a.Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.
b.Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.
c.Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.
d.Project name.
e.Project location.
f.Project Architect.
g.Project Engineer.
h.Project Contractor.
i.Report date.
D.Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of flow measuring stations and balancing
valves and rough setting.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.Perform total system balance in accordance with one of the following:
1.AABC (NSTSB), AABC National Standards for Total System Balance.
2.ASHRAE Std 111, Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of
Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems.
3.SMACNA (TAB).
B.Begin work after completion of systems to be tested, adjusted, or balanced and complete work
prior to Substantial Completion of the project.
C.Where HVAC systems and/or components interface with life safety systems, including fire and
smoke detection, alarm, and control, coordinate scheduling and testing and inspection
procedures with the authorities having jurisdiction.
D.TAB Agency Qualifications:
1.Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this
section.
3.02 EXAMINATION
A.Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following
conditions:
1.Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition.
2.Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.
3.Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.
4.Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final
filters.
5.Duct systems are clean of debris.
6.Fans are rotating correctly.
7.Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.
8.Air coil fins are cleaned and combed.
9.Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.
10.Air outlets are installed and connected.
11.Duct system leakage is minimized.
12.Hydronic systems are flushed, filled, and vented.
13.Pumps are rotating correctly.
14.Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place.
15.Service and balance valves are open.
3.03 PREPARATION
A.Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make
instruments available to Architect to facilitate spot checks during testing.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230593 - 3 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING FOR HVAC
B.Provide additional balancing devices as required.
3.04 ADJUSTMENT TOLERANCES
A.Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply systems
and plus or minus 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems.
B.Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of design to
space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
C.Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
3.05 RECORDING AND ADJUSTING
A.Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.
B.Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings
to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.
C.Mark on drawings the locations where traverse and other critical measurements were taken
and cross reference the location in the final report.
D.After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such
disruption has been rectified.
E.Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing
doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.
3.06 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE
A.Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and
exhaust air quantities at site altitude.
B.Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of
duct.
C.Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.
D.Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts
and noise.
E.Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extend that adjustments do not
create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices
such as dampers and splitters.
F.Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required.
Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.
G.Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure
drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters.
H.Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design
conditions.
I.Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check
leakage.
J.Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme
conditions. Balance variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full cooling, and at
minimum air flow rate, full heating.
3.07 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE
A.Adjust water systems to provide required or design quantities.
B.Use calibrated Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered fittings and pressure gages to
determine flow rates for system balance. Where flow metering devices are not installed, base
flow balance on temperature difference across various heat transfer elements in the system.
C.Adjust systems to provide specified pressure drops and flows through heat transfer elements
prior to thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature differential in
conjunction with air balancing.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230593 - 4 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING FOR HVAC
D.Effect system balance with automatic control valves fully open to heat transfer elements.
E.Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks, valves, and
fittings. Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance point.
3.08 SCOPE
A.Test, adjust, and balance the following:
1.HVAC Pumps.
2.Air Coils.
3.Air Handling Units.
4.Fans.
5.Air Inlets and Outlets.
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230713 - 1 DUCT INSULATION
SECTION 230713
DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Duct insulation.
B.Duct liner.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by
Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2017.
B.ASTM C534/C534M - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular
Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2016.
C.ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for
Commercial and Industrial Applications; 2013.
D.ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation;
2014.
E.ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2017.
F.ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2016.
G.ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to
Fungi; 2015.
H.SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2005 (Revised
2009).
I.UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and
thickness for each service, and locations.
C.Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures necessary to ensure acceptable
workmanship and that installation standards will be achieved.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type
specified in this section with not less than three years of documented experience.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's
identification, including product density and thickness.
B.Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical
damage, by storing in original wrapping.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives,
mastics, and insulation cements.
B.Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230713 - 2 DUCT INSULATION
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index/Smoke developed index of 25/50,
maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723.
2.02 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE
A.Manufacturer:
1.Johns Manville: www.jm.com/#sle.
2.Knauf Insulation; Atmosphere Duct Wrap: www.knaufinsulation.com/#sle.
3.Owens Corning Corporation: www.ocbuildingspec.com/#sle.
4.CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com/#sle.
B.Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket.
1.'K' value: 0.36 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C518.
2.Maximum Service Temperature: 1200 degrees F.
3.Maximum Water Vapor Absorption: 5.0 percent by weight.
4.Minimum thickness 1 1/2".
C.Vapor Barrier Jacket:
1.Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.
2.Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.02 perm inch, when tested in accordance with ASTM
E96/E96M.
2.03 GLASS FIBER, RIGID
A. Manufacturer:
1. Johns Manville: www.jm.com/#sle.
2. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufinsulation.com/#sle.
3. Owens Corning Corporation; 700 Series FIBERGLAS Insulation:
www.ocbuildingspec.com/#sle.
4. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com/#sle.
B. Insulation: ASTM C612; rigid, noncombustible blanket.
1. 'K' Value: 0.24 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C518.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 450 degrees F.
C. Vapor Barrier Jacket:
1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.
2. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.02 perm inch, when tested in accordance with ASTM
E96/E96M.
2.04 DUCT LINER
A. Manufacturers:
1. Armacell LLC; AP Coilflex: www.armacell.us/#sle.
2. Johns Manville: www.jm.com/#sle.
3. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufinsulation.com/#sle.
4. Owens Corning Corporation: www.ocbuildingspec.com/#sle.
B. Elastomeric Foam Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation
complying with ASTM C534/C534M Grade 1, in sheet form.
1. Minimum Service Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 180 degrees F.
3. Fungal Resistance: No growth when tested according to ASTM G21.
4. Apparent Thermal Conductivity: Maximum of 0.28 at 75 degrees F.
5. Minimum Noise Reduction Coefficients:
a. 1 inch Thickness: 0.40.
b. 2 inch Thickness: 0.60.
6. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230713 - 3 DUCT INSULATION
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that ducts have been tested before applying insulation materials.
B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.
C. Insulated ducts conveying air below ambient temperature:
1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets.
2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket.
3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations.
D. Insulated ducts conveying air above ambient temperature:
1. Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket.
2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of
insulation.
E. Ducts Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (below 10 feet above
finished floor): Finish with canvas jacket sized for finish painting.
F. External Duct Insulation Application:
1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor barrier
adhesive or tape to match jacket.
2. Install without sag on underside of duct. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners where
necessary to prevent sagging. Lift duct off trapeze hangers and insert spacers.
3. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive.
4. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation
without disturbing wrapping.
G. Duct and Plenum Liner Application:
1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 90 percent coverage.
2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Refer to SMACNA (DCS) for spacing.
3. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse joints.
4. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive.
5. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow. Increase duct
size to allow for insulation thickness.
3.03 SCHEDULES
Interior Service
Above Ground
Operating
Temperature
Density
(pcf)
Minimum
R-Value
Type
Interior Supply &
Return, Exposed
> 15 °F
from ambient
3.0 6 Fiberglass, Rigid
Interior Supply &
Return, Concealed
> 15 °F
from ambient
0.75 6 Fiberglass, Blanket
Interior Dedicated
Outside Air Supply,
Concealed
All 0.75 6 Fiberglass, Blanket
Interior Outside Air
Intakes
All 6.0 8 Fiberglass, Rigid
Exterior Ducts All 6.0 8 Fiberglass, Rigid
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230716 - 1 HVAC EQUIPMENT
INSULATION
SECTION 230716
HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Equipment insulation.
B.Flexible removable and reusable blanket insulation.
C.Covering.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus; 2013.
B.ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by
Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2017.
C.ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for
Commercial and Industrial Applications; 2013.
D.ASTM C592 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket-Type
Pipe Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial Type); 2016.
E.ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation;
2014.
F.ASTM C1695 - Standard Specification for Fabrication of Flexible Removable and Reusable
Blanket Insulation for Hot Service; 2010 (Reapproved 2015).
G.ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2017.
H.ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2016.
I.UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and
thickness for equipment scheduled.
C.Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptable
workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with not less than three years of documented experience.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification,
including product density and thickness.
B.Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical
damage, by storing in original wrapping.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives,
mastics, and insulation cements.
B.Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230716 - 2 HVAC EQUIPMENT
INSULATION
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index/Smoke developed index of 25/50,
maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723.
2.02 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE
A.Manufacturers:
1.CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com/#sle.
2.Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com/#sle.
3.Knauf Insulation; Atmosphere Duct Wrap: www.knaufinsulation.com/#sle.
4.Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com/#sle.
B.Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible.
C.Vapor Barrier Jacket: Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized
film.
1.Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.02 perm inch, when tested in accordance with ASTM
E96/E96M.
2. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips.
2.03 FLEXIBLE REMOVABLE AND REUSABLE BLANKET INSULATION
A. Insulation: ASTM C553 Type V; flexible, noncombustible.
1. Comply with ASTM C1695.
2.04 GLASS FIBER, RIGID
A. Insulation: ASTM C612 or ASTM C592; rigid, noncombustible.
1. 'K' Value: 0.25 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C177 or ASTM
C518.
B. Vapor Barrier Jacket:
1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.
2.05 JACKETS
A. PVC Plastic:
1. Jacket: Sheet material, off-white color.
a. Minimum Service Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F.
b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F.
c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.02 perm inch, when tested in accordance with ASTM
E96/E96M.
d. Thickness: 10 mil.
e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.
2. Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation.
B. Canvas Jacket: UL listed 6 oz/sq yd plain weave cotton fabric treated with dilute fire retardant
lagging adhesive.
1. Lagging Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that equipment has been tested before applying insulation materials.
B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Factory Insulated Equipment: Do not insulate.
C. Exposed Equipment: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230716 - 3 HVAC EQUIPMENT
INSULATION
D. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation. Fasten
insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands.
E. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface.
On cold equipment, use vapor barrier cement.
F. Insulated equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature; insulate entire system.
G. Fiber glass insulated equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature; provide vapor
barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier
adhesive.
H. For hot equipment containing fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions,
but bevel and seal ends of insulation.
I. For hot equipment containing fluids over 140 degrees F, insulate flanges and unions with
removable sections and jackets.
J. Fiber glass insulated equipment containing fluids above ambient temperature; provide standard
jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied. Finish with glass cloth
and adhesive.
K. Inserts and Shields:
1. Application: Equipment 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger.
2. Shields: Galvanized steel between hangers and inserts.
L. Cover glass fiber insulation with metal mesh and finish with heavy coat of insulating cement.
3.03 SCHEDULE
A. Cooling Systems:
1. Pump Bodies:
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230719 - 1 HVAC PIPING INSULATION
SECTION 230719
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Piping insulation.
B.Flexible removable and reusable blanket insulation.
C.Jackets and accessories.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus; 2013.
B.ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2017.
C.ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic
Stainless Steel; 2008 (Reapproved 2013).
D.ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2017.
E.ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2016.
F.UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and
thickness for each service, and locations.
C.Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptable
workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in
this section with not less than three years of documented experience.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and
thickness.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product.
B.Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index/Smoke developed index of 25/50,
maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723.
2.02 GLASS FIBER
A.Manufacturers:
1.CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com/#sle.
2.Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com/#sle.
3.Knauf Insulation: www.knaufinsulation.com/#sle.
4.Owens Corning Corporation: www.ocbuildingspec.com/#sle.
B.Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, noncombustible.
1.'K' Value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230719 - 2 HVAC PIPING INSULATION
2.Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees F.
3.Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.
C.Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; semi-rigid, noncombustible, end grain adhered to
jacket.
1.Maximum Service Temperature: 650 degrees F.
2.Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.
D.Vapor Barrier Jacket: White kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film;
moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M of 0.02
perm-inches.
E.Heating Water:
1.Piping below 2", insulation thickness shall be 1.5".
2.Piping above 2", insulation thickness shall be 2".
F.Chilled Water:
1.Piping below 2", insulation thickness shall be 1".
2.Piping above 2", insulation thickness shall be 1.5".
2.03 JACKETS
A.PVC Plastic.
1.Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color.
a.Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F.
b.Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F.
c.Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch, maximum, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E96/E96M.
d.Thickness: 10 mil.
e.Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.
C.Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature; insulate entire system including
fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion
joints.
D.Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:
1.Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied; secure with self-sealing
longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward
clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.
2.Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as
adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
E.For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at
equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation.
3.02 SCHEDULE
Interior Service Above
Ground
Operating
Temperature
Pipe Size Insulation
Thickness
Type
Hydronic Heating 105-200 deg F Below 1-1/2"1.5"Fiberglass
1-1/2" & Above 2"Fiberglass
Chilled Water < 60 deg F Below 2"1"Fiberglass
Elastomeric
2" & Above 1.5"Fiberglass
Elastomeric
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230719 - 3 HVAC PIPING INSULATION
Cooling Coil
Condensate Drain n/a All Sizes 1"
Fiberglass
Elastomeric
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230913 - 1 INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC
SECTION 230913
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Control Valves.
B.Dampers.
C.Damper Operators (Actuators).
D.Input/Output Sensors.
E.Flow Sensors.
1.Airflow Sensors.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 260583 - Wiring Connections: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
B.Section 262726 - Wiring Devices: Elevation of exposed components.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide description and engineering data for each control system component.
Include sizing as requested. Provide data for each system component and software module.
C.Operation and Maintenance Data: Include inspection period, cleaning methods, recommended
cleaning materials, and calibration tolerances.
D.Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT - GENERAL
A.Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories
Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
2.02 CONTROL VALVES
A.General
1.Valves shall be applicable for the rated pressure and temperature service. Close off
pressures must be determined in concert with the actuators and valves shall be provided
to close off against extreme anticipated conditions. Valves shall be selected such that they
are not, as a practice, “oversized.”
2.2. Modulating valves shall be carefully selected to control in a smooth and stable fashion
across the range of anticipated conditions. “Split ranging” of heating and cooling valves
controlled by the BACS is not acceptable. A separate output from the BACS shall be
provided for all control valves. General guidelines are indicated below. When the selection
criteria indicated below are not met, flow characteristic analyses shall be submitted to
demonstrate reasonable correlation between stroke and flow. Valves with a CV greater
than 30 may be pneumatically actuated, but should only be used if a cost benefit analysis
shows they are preferred. Actuator positioning requirements are as follows for each type,
if used:
a.Electric Input: 4-20 mA or 0-10 VDC.
b.Pneumatic Input: 3-15 PSIG.
c.Electrically piloted valves shall have a pneumatic actuator with positioner.
d.Pilot positioners shall be required as necessary to keep the valve closed under the
maximum differential pressure.
B.Chilled Water Recirculating Loop Valve (two-way)
1.Type: Rotary-segmented ball ported industrial control valve.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230913 - 2 INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC
2.Body: Flanged carbon steel.
3.Seat: Composition or stainless/Teflon.
4.Leakage Class: ANSI Class IV, minimum.
5.Trim: 316 Stainless.
6.Actuator: Electric.
7.Flow Characteristic: Equal percentage or modified equal.
8.Fail Position: Normally Open spring return.
9.Typically CV shall be selected to give a 2 PSIG drop @ maximum building flow with the
valve at the 90% open CV. Verify the necessary pressure drop with Cornell. For buildings
located at extremities, check with Cornell since requirements may not be typical.
10.Valve shall seat against 40 PSI differential pressure (typical values; check with Cornell for
location-specific values).
11.Acceptable Manufacturers:
a.Fisher
b.Neles
c.Valve Solutions, Inc.
C.Coil Valves, Water
1.Modulating water valves will generally be ball valves with an equal percentage
characteristic. Modulating water valves shall typically be sized for 50-100% of the typical
controlled circuit pressure drop at 70% wide open CV. The minimum design CV shall be
no less than 1.9.
2.Water and glycol control valves shall be rated to remain closed (zero leakage) against
120% of the full shutoff head of the pumps, when the control signal is set to "fully closed".
3.Type: Two-way, V-port ball valve with characterizing disk, 1/4 turn.
4.Packing: EPDM O-rings, lubricated.
5.Ball & Stem: Stainless steel.
6.Seat: Fiberglass reinforced Teflon.
7.Actuator: Electric, one motor only; valves 4 inches and larger shall have single operator.
8.Flow Characteristic: Equal percentage.
9.Fail positions shall generally be as follows, contact Cornell for special circumstances
requiring deviation from these requirements:
a.Terminal hot water radiation: fail last
b.Duct mounted re-heat coils serving animal rooms: normally closed spring return
c.Duct mounted re-heat coils serving laboratories: fail last
d.Duct mounted re-heat coils serving offices: fail last
e.Fan Coil Unit cooling coils: normally closed spring return
f.Pre-heat coils in Air Handling Units: normally open spring return
g.Chilled water coils in Air Handling Units: normally closed spring return
h.Chilled Beam terminal cooling: normally closed spring return
10.Acceptable Manufacturers:
a.Belimo
2.03 DAMPERS
A.Dampers shall be applicable for the rated pressure and velocity service. Damper structural
rating shall exceed extreme anticipated conditions like fan deadhead.
B.Modulating dampers shall be carefully selected to control in a smooth and stable fashion
across the range of anticipated conditions. Except where size dictates a single blade, dampers
shall always be opposed blade. When a large section of damper is to be connected to a single
jackshaft, size limitations shall be followed. This will prevent excessive damper area or, more
importantly, length from being connected to a single jackshaft. Typically, the manufacturer’s
recommendation shall be sufficient for specifying a limit to the size of a damper bank that may
have field fabricated jackshaft connections.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230913 - 3 INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC
C.Whenever possible, dampers shall have external crankshafts to allow the connection of the
damper actuator outside of the air stream. This will allow for easier access to the actuators for
maintenance.
D.Outside air control dampers shall be low leakage dampers with damper seals.
E.Output to modulating control dampers shall be analog.
F.Acceptable Manufacturers:
1.Ruskin
2.Greenheck
3.Nailor
2.04 DAMPER OPERATORS (ACTUATORS)
A.General: Size actuators and linkages to operate their appropriate dampers or valves with
sufficient reserve torque or force to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action
and adequate close off rating as required.
B.For AHU/Duct mounted dampers:
1.Actuators shall be electronic.
2.Standard Electronic Actuators: Shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full cycles at
full torque and be UL 873 listed. Provide stroke indicator. Actuators shall have a positive
positioning circuit and selectable inputs. Full stroke shall be within 90 seconds. Where fail
positions are required, provide spring return on the actuator with adequate close off force.
C.Acceptable Manufacturers:
1.Belimo
2.05 INPUT/OUTPUT SENSORS
A.Temperature Sensors:
1.Sensor Resolution: When matched with A/D converter of the controller, sensor range shall
provide a resolution of no less than 0.4 °F (unless noted otherwise).
2.Room Temperature Sensor: These shall be an element contained within a ventilated
cover, suitable for wall mounting. Provide an insulated base.
a.Sensing element: RTD or thermistor, +/- 0.8 °F accuracy at calibration point.
b.Setpoint Adjustment: Provide where indicated. Public spaces shall not have setpoint
adjustment. The setpoint adjustment shall be a warmer/cooler indication that shall be
scalable via the BACS.
c.Occupancy Override: Provide a button on the room sensor enclosure where
indicated, generally in office spaces that do not have occupancy sensors. Public
spaces shall not have occupancy override. This shall be a momentary contact
closure.
d.Display: Alphanumeric.
e.Sensors shall be provided with communication jack and appropriate cabling for
connection to the BACS.
3.Single Point Duct Temperature Sensor: These shall consist of a sensing element, junction
box for wiring connections, and a gasket to prevent air leakage or vibration noise. The
sensor probe shall be stainless steel.
a.Sensing element: RTD or thermistor, +/- 0.5 °F accuracy at calibration point.
4.Averaging Duct Temperature Sensor: These shall consist of an averaging element,
junction box for wiring connections, and gasket to prevent air leakage. Provide sensor
lengths and quantities to result in one foot of sensing element for each, two square feet of
coil/duct face area.
a.Sensing element: RTD or thermistor, +/- 0.5 °F accuracy at calibration point.
5.Outside Air Temperature Sensor: These shall consist of a sensor, sun shield, utility box,
and watertight gasket to prevent water seepage. On major/critical systems, one outside air
temperature sensor shall be provided for each system; and one sensor shall be provided
per mechanical room, or building-level controller. Generally, these shall be located on a
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230913 - 4 INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC
north wall of the building and installed with stand-offs. On 100% outside air systems,
locate the sensor in the outside air plenum.
a.Sensing element: RTD, thermistor, or integrated circuit, +/- 0.4 °F accuracy at
calibration point.
B.Humidity Sensors:
1.Units shall be suitable for duct, wall (room), or outdoor mounting. Sensors shall be
two-wire transmitters utilizing bulk polymer resistance change or thin film capacitance
change. Units shall produce linear continuous output of 4-20 mA for % RH. Sensors shall
have the following minimum performance and application criteria:
a.Input Range: 0 to 100% RH.
b.Accuracy (% RH): +/- 2% (when used for enthalpy calculation, dewpoint calculation,
or humidifier control); or +/- 3% (when used for monitoring) between 20-90% RH at
77 °F, including hysteresis, linearity, and repeatability.
c.Operating Range: As required by the application.
d.Long Term Stability: Less than 1% drift per year.
2.Acceptable Manufacturers:
a.Vaisala
b.Mamac
c.Veris Industries
C.Dewpoint Sensors:
1.Units shall be suitable for duct, wall (room) or outdoor mounting with digital display.
Sensors shall be two-wire transmitters utilizing bulk polymer resistance change or thin film
capacitance change. Units shall produce linear continuous output of 4-20 mA for dewpoint
temperature (°F). Sensors shall have the following minimum performance and application
criteria:
a.Accuracy: +/- 1.8 °F.
b.Sensor Operating Range: As required by the application.
c.Long Term Stability: Less than 1% drift per year.
2.Acceptable Manufacturers:
a.Vaisala only.
D.Air Differential Pressure Sensors:
1.General: Pressure transducers shall be either diaphragm or strain gauge types.
2.Applications: Duct static pressure, filter DP, etc.
3.Provide the smallest range feasible for the application. Provide zero and span
adjustments.
4.Accuracy: Plus or minus 1% of full scale for static and 0.25% for air velocity.
5.Acceptable Manufacturers:
a.Filter DP: Dwyer
b.General and Static Pressure: Mamac, Setra, Veris Industries
E.Equipment Operation (Current) Sensors:
1.Application: Status indication on constant speed motors.
2.Sensor shall indicate loss of status when current falls below an adjustable trip point.
3.CS shall include LED indication of status.
4.Acceptable Manufacturer: Veris Industries.
F.Carbon Dioxide (CO2) Sensors:
1.Application: Demand controlled ventilation of high density occupancy spaces, such as
auditoriums, classrooms, lecture rooms, and conference rooms.
2.Acceptable Manufacturer: Vaisala
2.06 FLOW SENSORS
A.Airflow Sensors:
1.Flow sensors shall be carefully placed to ensure flow profiles that are required for
accurate flow sensing. Designs shall specifically indicate the location of the sensors and
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230913 - 5 INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC
indicate the length of unobstructed duct or pipe upstream and downstream from the
sensor.
2.2. Laboratory Air Terminal Flow Tracking: The standard manufacturer transducer typically
supplied with conventional air terminals are not acceptable for use in a wet laboratory
application requiring devices with a higher speed of response. The transducer shall be
upgraded to a device with the following specifications:
a.Accuracy: +/- 0.25%.
b.Stability: +/- 0.5% of full scale per year or less.
c.Auto-zero capability by venting ports to atmosphere.
d.Acceptable Manufacturers: Air Monitor, Paragon.
3.Air Handling Unit and Duct Airflow Monitoring: A pitot-tube averaging grid of a material
compatible with the environment is to be used. The use of fan inlet grids are preferable
where possible to measure fan flow. Fan inlet grids shall be provided by the fan vendor
and shall not block or affect fan efficiency. The transducer shall have the following
specifications:
a.Accuracy: +/- 0.25%.
b.Stability: +/- 0.5% of full scale per year or less.
c.Auto-zero capability by venting ports to atmosphere.
d.Acceptable Manufacturers: Air Monitor, Paragon.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.Verify that systems are ready to receive work.
C.Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.
D.Coordinate installation of system components with installation of mechanical systems
equipment such as air handling units and air terminal units.
E.Coordinate installation of system components with installation of mechanical systems
equipment such as air handling units and air terminal units.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.Check and verify location of thermostats with plans and room details before installation. Locate
60 inches above floor. Align with lighting switches and humidistats. Refer to Section 262726.
C.Provide conduit and electrical wiring in accordance with Section 260583. Electrical material
and installation shall be in accordance with appropriate requirements of Division 26.
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230923 - 1 DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL
SYSTEM FOR HVAC
SECTION 230923
DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.System description.
B.Operator interface.
C.Controllers.
D.Power supplies and line filtering.
E.System software.
F.Controller software.
G.HVAC control programs.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 230913 - Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC.
B.Section 230993 - Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls.
C.Section 260583 - Wiring Connections: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ASHRAE Std 135 - BACnet - A Data Communication Protocol for Building Automation and
Control Networks; 2016.
B.MIL-STD-810 - Environmental Engineering Considerations and Laboratory Tests; 2014g.
C.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide data for each system component and software module.
C.Shop Drawings:
1.Indicate trunk cable schematic showing programmable control unit locations, and trunk
data conductors.
2.Indicate system graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated)
point addresses, and operator notations. Provide demonstration diskette containing
graphics.
3.Show system configuration with peripheral devices, batteries, power supplies, diagrams,
modems, and interconnections.
4.Indicate description and sequence of operation of operating, user, and application
software.
D.Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate manufacturer's installation instructions for all
manufactured components.
E.Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including control
units, thermostats, and sensors.
F.Operation and Maintenance Data:
1.Include interconnection wiring diagrams complete field installed systems with identified
and numbered, system components and devices.
2.Include keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator
function.
3.Include inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and
calibration tolerances.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230923 - 2 DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL
SYSTEM FOR HVAC
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Perform work in accordance with NFPA 70.
B.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with
minimum three years of documented experience.
1.06 WARRANTY
A.See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE VENDORS
A.Automated Logic, Alerton.
2.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.The control system shall be an extension of the existing Automated Logic system currently
serving the building.
B.Automatic temperature control field monitoring and control system using field programmable
micro-processor based units.
C.Base system on distributed system of fully intelligent, stand-alone controllers, operating in a
multi-tasking, multi-user environment on token passing network, with central and remote
hardware, software, and interconnecting wire and conduit.
D.Include computer software and hardware, operator input/output devices, control units, local
area networks (LAN), sensors, control devices, actuators.
E.Controls for variable air volume terminals, radiation, reheat coils, unit heaters, fan coils, and the
like when directly connected to the control units. Individual terminal unit control is specified in
Section 230913.
F.Provide control systems consisting of thermostats, control valves, dampers and operators,
indicating devices, interface equipment and other apparatus and accessories required to
operate mechanical systems, and to perform functions specified.
G.Include installation and calibration, supervision, adjustments, and fine tuning necessary for
complete and fully operational system.
2.03 OPERATOR INTERFACE
A.PC Based Work Station:
B.Workstation, controllers, and control backbone to communicate using BACnet protocol and
addressing.
C.BACnet protocol to comply with ASHRAE Std 135.
2.04 CONTROLLERS
A.BUILDING CONTROLLERS
1.General:
a.Manage global strategies by one or more, independent, standalone, microprocessor
based controllers.
b.Provide sufficient memory to support controller's operating system, database, and
programming requirements.
c.Share data between networked controllers.
d.Controller operating system manages input and output communication signals
allowing distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and
allowing for central monitoring and alarms.
e.Utilize real-time clock for scheduling.
f.Continuously check processor status and memory circuits for abnormal operation.
g.Controller to assume predetermined failure mode and generate alarm notification
upon detection of abnormal operation.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230923 - 3 DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL
SYSTEM FOR HVAC
h.Communication with other network devices to be based on assigned protocol.
2.Communication:
a.Controller to reside on a BACnet network using ISO 8802-3 (ETHERNET) Data
Link/Physical layer protocol.
b.Perform routing when connected to a network of custom application and application
specific controllers.
c.Provide service communication port for connection to a portable operator's terminal
or hand held device with compatible protocol.
3.Anticipated Environmental Ambient Conditions:
a.Outdoors and/or in Wet Ambient Conditions:
1)Mount within waterproof enclosures.
2)Rated for operation at 40 to 150 degrees F.
b.Conditioned Space:
1)Mount within dustproof enclosures.
2)Rated for operation at 32 to 120 degrees F.
4.Provisions for Serviceability:
a.Diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor.
b.Make all wiring connections to field removable, modular terminal strips, or to a
termination card connected by a ribbon cable.
5.Memory: In the event of a power loss, maintain all BIOS and programming information for
a minimum of 72 hours.
6.Power and Noise Immunity:
a.Maintain operation at 90 to 110 percent of nominal voltage rating.
b.Perform orderly shutdown below 80 percent of nominal voltage.
c.Operation protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed radios up
to 5 W. at 3 feet.
B.CUSTOM APPLICATION CONTROLLERS
1.General:
a.Provide sufficient memory to support controller's operating system, database, and
programming requirements.
b.Share data between networked, microprocessor based controllers.
c.Controller operating system manages input and output communication signals
allowing distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and
allowing for central monitoring and alarms.
d.Utilize real-time clock for scheduling.
e.Continuously check processor status and memory circuits for abnormal operation.
f.Controller to assume predetermined failure mode and generate alarm notification
upon detection of abnormal operation.
g.Communication with other network devices to be based on assigned protocol.
2.Communication:
a.Controller to reside on a BACnet network using MS/TP Data Link/Physical layer
protocol.
b.Provide service communication port for connection to a portable operator's terminal
or hand held device with compatible protocol.
3.Anticipated Environmental Ambient Conditions:
a.Outdoors and/or in Wet Ambient Conditions:
1)Mount within waterproof enclosures.
2)Rated for operation at 40 to 150 degrees F.
b.Conditioned Space:
1)Mount within dustproof enclosures.
2)Rated for operation at 32 to 120 degrees F.
4.Provisions for Serviceability:
a.Diagnostic LED's for power, communication, and processor.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230923 - 4 DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL
SYSTEM FOR HVAC
b.Make all wiring connections to field removable, modular terminal strips, or to a
termination card connected by a ribbon cable.
5.Memory: In the event of a power loss, maintain all BIOS and programming information for
a minimum of 72 hours.
6.Power and Noise Immunity:
a.Maintain operation at 90 to 110 percent of nominal voltage rating.
b.Perform orderly shutdown below 80 percent of nominal voltage.
c.Operation protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed radios up
to 5 W. at 3 feet.
C.APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS
1.General:
a.Not fully user programmable, microprocessor based controllers dedicated to control
specific equipment.
b.Customized for operation within the confines of equipment served.
c.Communication with other network devices to be based on assigned protocol.
2.Communication:
a.Controller to reside on a BACnet network using MS/TP Data Link/Physical layer
protocol.
b.Provide service communication port for connection to a portable operator's terminal
or hand held device with compatible protocol.
3.Anticipated Environmental Ambient Conditions:
a.Outdoors and/or in Wet Ambient Conditions:
1)Mount within waterproof enclosures.
2)Rated for operation at 40 to 150 degrees F.
b.Conditioned Space:
1)Mount within dustproof enclosures.
2)Rated for operation at 32 to 120 degrees F.
4.Provisions for Serviceability:
a.Diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor.
b.Make all wiring connections to field removable, modular terminal strips, or to a
termination card connected by a ribbon cable.
5.Memory: In the event of a power loss, maintain all BIOS and programming information for
a minimum of 72 hours.
6.Power and Noise Immunity:
a.Maintain operation at 90 to 110 percent of nominal voltage rating.
b.Perform orderly shutdown below 80 percent of nominal voltage.
c.Operation protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed radios up
to 5 W at 3 feet.
D.INPUT/OUTPUT INTERFACE
1.Hardwired inputs and outputs tie into the DDC system through building, custom
application, or application specific controllers.
2.All Input/Output Points:
a.Protect controller from damage resulting from any point short-circuiting or grounding
and from voltage up to 24 volts of any duration.
b.Provide universal type for building and custom application controllers where input or
output is software designated as either binary or analog type with appropriate
properties.
3.Binary Inputs:
a.Allow monitoring of On/Off signals from remote devices.
b.Provide wetting current of 12 mA minimum, compatible with commonly available
control devices and protected against the effects of contact bounce and noise.
c.Sense dry contact closure with power provided only by the controller.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230923 - 5 DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL
SYSTEM FOR HVAC
4.Pulse Accumulation Input Objects: Conform to all requirements of binary input objects
and accept up to 10 pulses per second.
5.Analog Inputs:
a.Allow for monitoring of low voltage 0 to 10 VDC, 4 to 20 mA current, or resistance
signals (thermistor, RTD).
b.Compatible with and field configurable to commonly available sensing devices.
6.Binary Outputs:
a.Used for On/Off operation or a pulsed low-voltage signal for pulse width modulation
control.
b.Outputs provided with three position (On/Off/Auto) override switches.
c.Status lights for building and custom application controllers to be selectable for
normally open or normally closed operation.
7.Analog Outputs:
a.Monitoring signal provides a 0 to 10 VDC or a 4 to 20 mA output signal for end device
control.
b.Provide status lights and two position (AUTO/MANUAL) switch for building and
custom application controllers with manually adjustable potentiometer for manual
override on building and custom application controllers.
c.Drift to not exceed 0.4 percent of range per year.
8.Tri State Outputs:
a.Coordinate two binary outputs to control three point, floating type, electronic
actuators without feedback.
b.Limit the use of three point, floating devices to the following zone and terminal unit
control applications:
c.Control algorithms run the zone actuator to one end of its stroke once every 24 hours
for verification of operator tracking.
9.System Object Capacity:
a.System size to be expandable to twice the number of input output objects required by
providing additional controllers, including associated devices and wiring.
b.Hardware additions or software revisions for the installed operator interfaces are not
to be required for future, system expansions.
2.05 POWER SUPPLIES AND LINE FILTERING
A.Power Supplies:
1.Provide UL listed control transformers with Class 2 current limiting type or over-current
protection in both primary and secondary circuits for Class 2 service as required by the
NEC.
2.Limit connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity.
3.Match DC power supply to current output and voltage requirements.
4.Unit to be full wave rectifier type with output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak.
5.Regulation to be 1 percent combined line and load with 100 microsecond response time
for 50 percent load changes.
6.Provide over-voltage and over-current protection to withstand a 150 percent current
overload for 3 seconds minimum without trip-out or failure.
7.Operational Ambient Conditions: 32 to 120 degrees F.
8.EM/RF meets FCC Class B and VDE 0871 for Class B and MIL-STD 810 for shock and
vibration.
9.Line voltage units UL recognized and CSA approved.
B.Power Line Filtering:
1.Provide external or internal transient voltage and surge suppression component for all
workstations and controllers.
2.Minimum surge protection attributes:
a.Dielectric strength of 1000 volts minimum.
b.Response time of 10 nanoseconds or less.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
230923 - 6 DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL
SYSTEM FOR HVAC
c.Transverse mode noise attenuation of 65 dB or greater.
d.Common mode noise attenuation of 150 dB or greater at 40 to 100 Hz.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.Verify that conditioned power supply is available to the control units and to the operator work
station. Verify that field end devices, wiring, and pneumatic tubing is installed prior to
installation proceeding.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.Install control units and other hardware in position on permanent walls where not subject to
excessive vibration.
B.Install software in control units and in operator work station. Implement all features of
programs to specified requirements and appropriate to sequence of operation. Refer to
Section 230993.
C.Provide conduit and electrical wiring in accordance with Section 260583. Electrical material
and installation shall be in accordance with appropriate requirements of Division 26.
3.03 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
A.Demonstrate complete and operating system to Owner.
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
232113 - 1 HYDRONIC PIPING
SECTION 232113
HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Hydronic system requirements.
B.Heating water piping, above grade.
C.Chilled water piping, above grade.
D.Equipment drains and overflows.
E.Pipe hangers and supports.
F.Unions, flanges, mechanical couplings, and dielectric connections.
G.Valves:
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 232500 - HVAC Water Treatment: Pipe cleaning.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ASME BPVC-IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding, Brazing, and Fusing
Procedures; Welders; Brazers; and Welding, Brazing and Fusing Operators; 2017.
B.ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; 2012.
C.ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings; 2013.
D.ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; 2014.
E.ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008 (Reapproved 2014).
F.ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2016.
G.ASTM B88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric); 2016.
H.AWS A5.8M/A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding; 2011
(Amended 2012).
I.MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection,
Application, and Installation; 2009.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Welders Certificate: Include welders certification of compliance with ASME BPVC-IX.
C.Product Data:
1.Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories.
2.Provide manufacturers catalogue information.
3.Indicate valve data and ratings.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type
specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.
B.Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until
installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 HYDRONIC SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A.Comply with ASME B31.9 and applicable federal, state, and local regulations.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
232113 - 2 HYDRONIC PIPING
B.Piping: Provide piping, fittings, hangers and supports as required, as indicated, and as follows:
1.Where more than one piping system material is specified, provide joining fittings that are
compatible with piping materials and ensure that the integrity of the system is not
jeopardized.
2.Use non-conducting dielectric connections (flanges or nipples) whenever jointing
dissimilar metals.
3.Dielectric unions are not allowed.
4.Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.9 or MSS SP-58 unless
indicated otherwise.
C.Pipe-to-Valve and Pipe-to-Equipment Connections: Use flanges or unions to allow
disconnection of components for servicing; do not use direct welded, soldered, or threaded
connections.
D.Valves: Provide valves where indicated:
1.Provide drain valves where indicated, and if not indicated provide at least at main shut-off,
low points of piping, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment. Use 3/4 inch gate valves
with cap; pipe to nearest floor drain.
2.Isolate equipment using butterfly valves with lug end flanges or grooved mechanical
couplings.
2.02 HEATING WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A.Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type L (B), drawn, using one of the following joint
types:
1.Solder Joints: ASME B16.18 cast brass/bronze or ASME B16.22 solder wrought copper
fittings.
a.Solder: ASTM B32 lead-free solder, HB alloy (95-5 tin-antimony) or tin and silver.
b.Braze: AWS A5.8M/A5.8 BCuP copper/silver alloy.
2.Tee Connections: Mechanically extracted collars with notched and dimpled branch tube.
2.03 CHILLED WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A.Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type L (B), hard drawn; using one of the following
joint types:
1.Solder Joints: ASME B16.18 cast brass/bronze or ASME B16.22, solder wrought copper
fittings.
a.Solder: ASTM B32 lead-free solder, HB alloy (95-5 tin-antimony) or tin and silver.
2.Tee Connections: Mechanically extracted collars with notched and dimpled branch tube.
2.04 EQUIPMENT DRAINS AND OVERFLOWS
A.Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type M (C), drawn; using one of the following joint
types:
1.Solder Joints: ASME B16.18 cast brass/bronze or ASME B16.22 solder wrought copper
fittings; ASTM B32 lead-free solder, HB alloy (95-5 tin-antimony) or tin and silver.
B.Copper Tube (size 1.25" and above): ASTM B3026, Type DWV Copper; using one of the
following joint types:
1.Solder Joints: ASME B16.22 solder wrought copper fittings; ASTM B32 lead-free solder,
HB alloy (95-5 tin-antimony) or tin and silver.
2.05 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58.
1.If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriate
type using MSS SP-58 recommendations.
2.Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.
3.Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Greater: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
4.Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
232113 - 3 HYDRONIC PIPING
2.06 UNIONS, FLANGES, MECHANICAL COUPLINGS, AND DIELECTRIC CONNECTIONS
A.Unions for Pipe 2 Inches and Less:
1.Ferrous Piping: 150 psig malleable iron, threaded.
2.Copper Pipe: Bronze, soldered joints.
B.Flanges for Pipe 2 Inches and Greater:
1.Ferrous Piping: 150 psig forged steel, slip-on.
2.Copper Piping: Bronze.
3.Gaskets: 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene.
C.Dielectric Connections:
1.Flanges:
a.Dielectric flanges with same pressure ratings as standard flanges.
b.Water impervious insulation barrier capable of limiting galvanic current to 1 percent of
short circuit current in a corresponding bimetallic joint.
c.Dry insulation barrier able to withstand 600 volt breakdown test.
d.Construct of galvanized steel with threaded end connections to match connecting
piping.
e.Suitable for the required operating pressures and temperatures.
2.07 FLOW CONTROLS
A.Manufacturers:
1.Griswold Controls: www.griswoldcontrols.com/#sle.
2.ITT Bell & Gossett: www.bellgossett.com/#sle.
3.Taco, Inc: www.taco-hvac.com/#sle.
B.Construction: Class 125, Brass or bronze body with union on inlet and outlet, temperature and
pressure test plug on inlet and outlet, blowdown/backflush drain.
C.Calibration: Control flow within 5 percent of selected rating, over operating pressure range of
10 times minimum pressure required for control, maximum minimum pressure 3.5 psi.
D.Automatic Flow Control Valves are not allowed.
2.08 TREATMENT CHEMICALS
A.Chemicals shall not be used to treat chilled water systems connected to the campus chilled
water loop.
B.Chilled water systems connected to the campus chilled water loop shall be cleaned, inspected,
and filled with potable water. Notify The Central Energy Plant (CEP) for permission to begin
circulating water into the campus chilled water loop.
C.Treatment chemicals for hydronic heating and chilled water cooling systems, not connected to
the campus chilled water loop, shall be as follows:
1.Non-Glycol Systems (non-potable): After cleaning and inspection, immediately add a
molybdate based corrosion inhibitor. Acceptable corrosion inhibitors shall include a
combination of sodium molybdate, sodium hydroxide, tolytriazole and organic polymers.
Test for residual concentrations as follows:
a.Molybdate: 150 ppm (hot water systems)
b.pH: 8.3-9
c.Tolytriazole: 5 ppm
D.Arrange for inspection by a representative from the Facilities Management Water Treatment
Lab prior to final acceptance.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B.Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
232113 - 4 HYDRONIC PIPING
C.Prepare piping connections to equipment using jointing system specified.
D.Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or
caps.
E.After completion, fill, clean, and treat systems. Refer to Section 232500 for additional
requirements.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.Route piping in orderly manner, parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient.
C.Install piping to conserve building space and to avoid interfere with use of space.
D.Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
E.Slope piping and arrange to drain at low points.
3.03 CLEANING
A.Cleaning procedures for newly installed systems shall be as follows:
1.Step 1: Adjust all control valves and balancing valves to full open position during the
cleaning and treatment process.
2.Step 2: Fill system and add a general dispersant for iron, mud, silt, and microbiological
matter at a concentration recommended by the chemical manufacturer. Pay particular
attention to the type of material being cleaned (steel, copper, aluminum, etc.) Test for
concentration. Circulate solution for a minimum of eight hours. Flush system until system
water pH and iron levels are consistent with the feed domestic water levels. Clean
strainers and dead end piping legs. Provide test results to the Facilities Management
Water Treatment Lab.
3.Step 3: Arrange for inspection by a representative from the Facilities Management Water
Treatment Lab before proceeding to chemical treatment.
B.For extensions to existing building systems, the above cleaning procedures shall be followed.
Provide temporary piping, valving, and pumping system isolated from the existing building
system as needed to perform cleaning procedures prior to final connection to the existing
building system.
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
232123 - 1 HYDRONIC PUMPS
SECTION 232123
HYDRONIC PUMPS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Vertical in-line pumps.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.UL 778 - Standard for Motor-Operated Water Pumps; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide certified pump curves showing performance characteristics with pump
and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. Include electrical
characteristics and connection requirements.
C.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate hanging and support requirements and
recommendations.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacture, assembly, and field
performance of pumps, with minimum three years of documented experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 HVAC PUMPS - GENERAL
A.Provide pumps that operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and
cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent
of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.
B.Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL or testing agency
acceptable to Authority Having Jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
2.02 VERTICAL IN-LINE PUMPS
A.Type: Vertical, single stage, close coupled, radially or horizontally split casing, for in-line
mounting, for 175 psi working pressure.
B.Casing: Cast iron, with suction and discharge gage port, casing wear ring, seal flush
connection, drain plug, flanged suction and discharge.
C.Impeller: Bronze, fully enclosed, keyed directly to motor shaft or extension.
D.Shaft: Carbon steel with stainless steel impeller cap screw or nut and bronze sleeve.
E.Seal: Mechanical seal, 225 degrees F maximum continuous operating temperature.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.Provide access space around pumps for service. Provide no less than minimum space
recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
233100 - 1 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
SECTION 233100
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Metal ductwork.
B.Duct cleaning.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ASHRAE (FUND) - ASHRAE Handbook - Fundamentals; 2017.
B.ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.
C.ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2017.
D.ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2017.
E.NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 2018.
F.SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2005 (Revised
2009).
G.SMACNA (LEAK) - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual; 2012.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide data for duct materials.
C.Shop Drawings: Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gages, sizes, welds, and
configuration prior to start of work for all ducted systems.
D.Test Reports: Indicate pressure tests performed. Include date, section tested, test pressure,
and leakage rate, following SMACNA (LEAK).
E.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures for glass fiber ducts.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products
specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience, and approved
by manufacturer.
1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant
manufacturers.
B.Maintain temperatures within acceptable range during and after installation of duct sealants.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DUCT ASSEMBLIES
A.Regulatory Requirements: Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A standards.
B.Ducts: Galvanized steel, unless otherwise indicated.
C.Low Pressure Supply (Heating Systems): 1/2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel.
D.Low Pressure Supply (System with Cooling Coils): 1/2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized
steel.
E.Medium and High Pressure Supply: 1/2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel.
F.Return and Relief: 1/2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel.
G.General Exhaust: 1/2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel.
H.Outside Air Intake: 1/2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
233100 - 2 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
2.02 MATERIALS
A.Galvanized Steel for Ducts: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M FS Type
B, with G60/Z180 coating.
B.Joint Sealers and Sealants: Non-hardening, water resistant, mildew and mold resistant.
1.Type: Heavy mastic or liquid used alone or with tape, suitable for joint configuration and
compatible with substrates, and recommended by manufacturer for pressure class of
ducts.
2.Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of zero and smoke developed index
of zero, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
C.Hanger Rod: ASTM A36/A36M; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or
continuously threaded.
2.03 DUCTWORK FABRICATION
A.Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated.
B.Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.
C.Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible;
maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence
downstream.
D.Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings in accordance with SMACNA (DCS).
E.Where ducts are connected to exterior wall louvers and duct outlet is smaller than louver frame,
provide blank-out panels sealing louver area around duct. Use same material as duct, painted
black on exterior side; seal to louver frame and duct.
2.04 MANUFACTURED DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.Install, support, and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA (DCS):
1.Construct ducts and plenums to SMACNA “Seal Class A".
2.Seal all transverse joints, longitudinal seams and duct wall penetratons, regardless of
specified pressure class.
B.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open
ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.
D.Flexible Ducts: Connect to metal ducts with draw bands.
E.Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining.
F.Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers.
Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with
spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in
insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring.
G.Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and
maintenance activities.
3.02 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
A.Total system leakage (including ductwork, equipment, and accessories) shall be:
1.Interior supply, return, and general exhaust systems: 5% system leakage, tested at 1.25
times the expected operating static pressure.
2.Interior Laboratory exhaust systems: 2% system leakage, tested at 1.25 times the
expected operating static pressure.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
233100 - 3 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
3.03 LEAKAGE TESTING
A.Systems designed to operate at 3-inches w.c. and below: 25% percent of the ductwork shall be
leak tested. The Consultant/Owner shall randomly choose the sections of ductwork to be tested
during the Construction Phase. If any of the original sections fail the leakage test, another 25%
of the duct shall be chosen to be tested. If any section of the second 25% fails, the entire duct
system shall be leak tested. This exceeds current New York State Energy Code requirements
adopted on January 1, 2015 (see ASHRAE 90.1-2010, 6.4.4.2.2).
B.Systems designed to operate in excess of 3-inches w.c. and all ductwork located outdoors shall
be leak tested. This is a mandatory requirement of the current New York State Energy Code
adopted on January 1, 2015 (see ASHRAE 90.1-2010, 6.4.4.2.2).
C.The allowable leakage in the ductwork system shall be calculated per the procedures outlined
in the “SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual” as a function of specified seal class
and total surface area of the installed ductwork. If the calculated allowable duct leakage rate is
not in conformance with the specified system acceptance criteria, discuss the discrepancy with
Facilities Engineering before proceeding with testing.
D.Duct Leakage Testing shall be performed in accordance with the “SMACNA HVAC Air Duct
Leakage Test Manual”.
E.Leakage testing shall be witnessed by representatives from Cornell University, Project
Engineer of Record and Commissioning Agent (if used on the project).
3.04 CLEANING
A.Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. To
obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment that could be harmed
by excessive dirt with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning.
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
233300 - 1 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
SECTION 233300
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Backdraft dampers - metal.
B.Duct access doors.
C.Duct test holes.
D.Flexible duct connections.
E.Volume control dampers.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 233100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 2018.
B.NFPA 96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking
Operations; 2017.
C.SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2005 (Revised
2009).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers.
Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products
specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS - METAL
A.Gravity Backdraft Dampers, Size 18 by 18 inches or Smaller, Furnished with Air Moving
Equipment: Air moving equipment manufacturer's standard construction.
2.02 DUCT ACCESS DOORS
A.Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated.
2.03 DUCT TEST HOLES
A.Temporary Test Holes: Cut or drill in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene
plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps.
2.04 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS
A.Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated.
B.Flexible Duct Connections: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip.
2.05 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
A.Outside air and exhaust air dampers shall include seals to provide a tight closure. Dampers
shall not leak in excess of 4 CFM per square foot of damper area when closed against 1.0 in.
w.c. when tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500.
B.Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
233300 - 2 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
C.Splitter Dampers:
1.Material: Same gage as duct to 24 inches size in either direction, and two gages heavier
for sizes over 24 inches.
D.Single Blade Dampers:
1.Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 by 30 inch.
E.Multi-Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 by 72
inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame
with suitable hardware.
F.End Bearings: Except in round ducts 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On
multiple blade dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon, thermoplastic elastomer, or sintered
bronze bearings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow
SMACNA (DCS). Refer to Section 233100 for duct construction and pressure class.
B. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where
indicated.
C. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans,
automatic dampers, at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and elsewhere as
indicated. Provide for cleaning kitchen exhaust ducts in accordance with NFPA 96. Provide
minimum 8 by 8 inch size for hand access, size for shoulder access, and as indicated. Provide
4 by 4 inch for balancing dampers only. Review locations prior to fabrication.
D. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.
E. At fans and motorized equipment associated with ducts, provide flexible duct connections
immediately adjacent to the equipment.
F. At equipment supported by vibration isolators, provide flexible duct connections immediately
adjacent to the equipment.
G. Use splitter dampers only where indicated.
H. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, regardless of
whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly.
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
233423 - 1 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
SECTION 233423
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Inline centrifugal fans.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.AMCA (DIR) - (Directory of) Products Licensed Under AMCA International Certified Ratings
Program; 2015.
B.AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook; 2016.
C.AMCA 204 - Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans; 2005.
D.AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance
Rating; 2016.
E.AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans; 2014.
F.AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data; 2014.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide data on fans and accessories including fan curves with specified
operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels at rated capacity, and
electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
C.Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions.
D.Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare
parts list, and wiring diagrams.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products
specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.Greenheck Fan Corporation: www.greenheck.com/#sle.
B.Loren Cook Company: www.lorencook.com/#sle.
C.PennBarry, Division of Air System Components: www.pennbarry.com/#sle.
2.02 POWER VENTILATORS - GENERAL
A.Static and Dynamically Balanced: AMCA 204 - Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans.
B.Performance Ratings: Determined in accordance with AMCA 210 and bearing the AMCA
Certified Rating Seal.
C.Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300 and bearing AMCA Certified Sound Rating
Seal.
D.Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99.
E.Electrical Components: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for
the purpose specified and indicated.
2.03 INLINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A.Centrifugal Fan Unit: V-belt or direct driven with galvanized steel housing lined with acoustic
insulation, resilient mounted motor, gravity backdraft damper in discharge.
B.Disconnect Switch: Cord and plug in housing for thermal overload protected motor and wall
mounted switch.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
233423 - 2 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
C.Sheaves: Cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed; variable and
adjustable pitch motor sheaves selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at
mid-position; fan shaft with self-aligning pre-lubricated ball bearings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
233514 - 1 DUST COLLECTION
EQUIPMENT
SECTION 233514
DUST COLLECTION EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Ductwork and duct fittings.
B.Inlet fittings.
C.Dust elimination and collection devices.
D.Accessories.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ACGIH (IV) - Industrial Ventilation, A Manual of Recommended Practice; 2016, 29th edition.
B.ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2017.
C.NFPA 91 - Standard for Exhaust Systems for Air Conveying of Vapors, Gases, Mists, and
Particulate Solids; 2015.
D.SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2005 (Revised
2009).
E.SMACNA (ROUND) - Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards; 2013.
F.SMACNA (RIDC) - Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards; 2007.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, sizes, weights and point loadings, material thickness,
and locations and sizes of field connections. Submit construction layout and details for inlet
fittings.
C.Product Data: Provide manufacturers literature and data indicating rated capacities,
dimensions, weights and point loadings, accessories, electrical characteristics and connection
requirements, wiring diagrams, and location and sizes of field connections.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A.Wheel and Inlet:
1.Backward Inclined: Steel construction with smooth curved inlet flange, heavy back plate,
backwardly curved blades welded or riveted to flange and back plate; cast iron hub riveted
to back plate and keyed to shaft with set screws.
B.Motors and Drives:
C.Accessories:
1.Inlet/Outlet Screens: Galvanized steel welded grid.
2.02 DUCTWORK AND DUCT ACCESSORIES
A.Materials:
1.Galvanized Steel Ducts: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, FS
Type B, with G90/Z275 coating.
B.Ductwork:
1.Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on
centerline.
2.Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible;
maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence
downstream.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
233514 - 2 DUST COLLECTION
EQUIPMENT
3.Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than duct
gages indicated in SMACNA Standard. Prime coat welded joints.
2.03 INLET FITTINGS
A.Fabricate with hemmed edges, closed corners, and reinforced for span and attachment; with
duct connection; prime coated.
2.04 FILTER SEPARATOR
A.Indoor dust collector consisting of structural frame and casing, filters, fan and accessories.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.Install in accordance with NFPA 91, SMACNA (DCS), SMACNA (ROUND), SMACNA (RIDC),
and ACGIH (IV) except as indicated.
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
233700 - 1 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
SECTION 233700
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Diffusers.
B.Registers/grilles.
C.Louvers.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ASHRAE Std 70 - Method of Testing the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets; 2006
(Reaffirmed 2011).
B.SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; 2012.
C.SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2005 (Revised
2009).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets
as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and
inlets showing type, size, location, application, and noise level.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ASHRAE Std 70.
B.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products
specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.Hart & Cooley, Inc: www.hartandcooley.com/#sle.
B.Krueger-HVAC, Division of Air System Components; ______: www.krueger-hvac.com/#sle.
C.Price Industries: www.price-hvac.com/#sle.
D.Titus, a brand of Air Distribution Technologies: www.titus-hvac.com/#sle.
2.02 ROUND CEILING DIFFUSERS
A.Type: Round, adjustable pattern, stamped or spun, multi-core diffuser to discharge air in 360
degree pattern, with sectorizing baffles where indicated. Diffuser collar shall project not more
than 1 inch above ceiling. In plaster ceilings, provide plaster ring and ceiling plaque.
B.Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel finish.
C.Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
D.Accessories: Radial opposed blade damper and multi-louvered equalizing grid with damper
adjustable from diffuser face.
2.03 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS
A.Type: Provide square, stamped, multi-core, square, adjustable pattern, stamped, multi-core,
square and rectangular, multi-louvered, square and rectangular, adjustable pattern, and
multi-louvered diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree, one way, two way, three way, and four
way pattern with sectorizing baffles where indicated.
B.Frame: Provide surface mount type.
C.Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel finish.
D.Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
233700 - 2 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
E.Accessories: Provide radial opposed blade, butterfly, combination splitter, and _______
volume control damper; gaskets for surface mounted diffusers with damper adjustable from
diffuser face.
2.04 CEILING EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES
A.Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing, with blades
set at 45 degrees, vertical face.
B.Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting.
C.Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage, 0.0359 inch minimum frames and 22 gage, 0.0299 inch
minimum blades, steel and aluminum with 20 gage, 0.0359 inch minimum frame, or aluminum
extrusions, with factory baked enamel finish.
D.Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
2.05 WALL SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES
A.Type: Streamlined and individually adjustable blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch
maximum spacing with spring or other device to set blades, vertical face, single deflection.
B.Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket.
C.Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage, 0.0359 inch minimum frames and 22 gage, 0.0299 inch
minimum blades, steel and aluminum with 20 gage, 0.0359 inch minimum frame, or aluminum
extrusions, with factory baked enamel finish.
D.Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
E.Damper: Integral, gang-operated opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable
from face.
2.06 WALL GRID CORE EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES
A.Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
B.Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting.
2.07 LINEAR FLOOR SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES
A.Type: Streamlined blades with 0 degree deflection, 1/8 by 3/4 inch on 1/4 inch centers,
assembled on expanded tubes mandrel construction.
B.Fabrication: Aluminum extrusions with factory baked enamel finish.
2.08 LOUVERS
A.Type: 4 inch deep with blades on 45 degree slope with center baffle and return bend, heavy
channel frame, 1/2 inch square mesh screen over exhaust and 1/2 inch square mesh screen
over intake.
B.Fabrication: 16 gage, 0.0598 inch thick galvanized steel welded assembly, with factory
anodized finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform
with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
C.Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection.
D.Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, despite
whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly.
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
237313 - 1 MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION
AIR-HANDLING UNITS
SECTION 237313
MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Casing construction.
B.Fan section.
C.Filter and air cleaner section.
D.Damper section.
E.Airflow measurement.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ABMA STD 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings; 2015.
B.AMCA (DIR) - (Directory of) Products Licensed Under AMCA International Certified Ratings
Program; 2015.
C.AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook; 2016.
D.AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance
Rating; 2016.
E.AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans; 2014.
F.AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data; 2014.
G.AMCA 500-D - Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for Rating; 2012.
H.AMCA 611 - Certified Ratings Program for Airflow Measurement Stations; 2015.
I.ASHRAE Std 52.2 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal
Efficiency by Particle Size; 2017.
J.ASHRAE Std 62.1 - Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality; 2016.
K.ASHRAE Std 90.1 I-P - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings;
2013, Including All Amendments and Errata.
L.ASTM B177/B177M - Standard Guide for Engineering Chromium Electroplating; 2011
(Reapproved 2017).
M.NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 2018.
N.SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2005 (Revised
2009).
O.UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; Current Edition.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data:
1.Published Literature: Indicate dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, gages and
finishes of materials, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
2.Electrical Requirements: Power supply wiring including wiring diagrams for interlock and
control wiring, clearly indicating factory-installed and field-installed wiring.
C.Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, unit dimensions, weight loading, required clearances,
construction details, field connection details, and electrical characteristics and connection
requirements.
D.Specimen Warranty: Submit sample of manufacturer's warranty.
E.Executed Warranty: Submit documentation of final executed warranty completed in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer.
F.Manufacturer's Instructions: Include installation instructions.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
237313 - 2 MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION
AIR-HANDLING UNITS
G.Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive
replacement, spare parts lists, and wiring diagrams.
H.Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1.Extra Filters: One set for each unit.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products
specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.
1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL (DIR) as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Accept products on site in factory-fabricated protective containers, with factory-installed
shipping skids and lifting lugs. Inspect for damage.
B.Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to
avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish.
C.Do not operate units until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan
has been test run under observation.
1.07 WARRANTY
A.See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.Provide minimum one year manufacturer warranty covering repair or replacement due to
defective materials or workmanship.
1.08 COILS GENERAL
A.Coils for all air-handling units shall be selected to maximize temperature rise and subsequent
capacity while minimizing the waterside and airside pressure losses.
B.Maximum coil face air velocities shall be as follows:
1.Chilled water and Direct Expansion cooling coils – 475 fpm
2.Hot water or steam – 700 fpm
C.Heating coils shall be hot water (for heating and reheat). Steam coils shall not be used.
Temperature control shall be by a modulating control valve, not face and bypass dampers.
D.Coils shall incorporate an air-water counter flow piping arrangement.
E.Coils shall employ ½-inch minimum connections for ball valve air vents and drains at the top
and bottom of each header.
F.Cast iron headers are not acceptable on any coils.
G.All coils shall have copper tubes and return bends with a minimum thickness of 0.035-inches.
Standard tubing wall thickness of 0.020-inches is acceptable for the following:
1.Standard fan coil units in the 200-1200 cfm capacity range
2.Standard manufacturer provided reheat coils associated with Variable Air Volume boxes
H.All coils shall be certified by the manufacturer to comply with all requirements of ARI Standard
410.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.Carrier Corporation: www.carrier.com/#sle.
B.Trane Inc: www.trane.com/#sle.
C.York International Corporation / Johnson Controls Inc: www.york.com/#sle.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
237313 - 3 MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION
AIR-HANDLING UNITS
2.02 CASING CONSTRUCTION
A.Full Perimeter Base Rail:
1.Construct of galvanized steel.
2.Provide base rail of sufficient height to raise unit for external trapping of condensate drain
pans.
B.Casing:
1.Construct of one piece, insulated, double wall panels.
2.Provide mid-span, no through metal, internal thermal break.
3.Construct outer panels of galvanized steel and inner panels of galvanized steel.
4.Casing Air Pressure Performance Requirements:
a.Able to withstand up to 8 inches w.g. positive or negative static pressure.
b.Not to exceed 0.0042 inches per inch deflection at 1.5 times design static pressure
up to a maximum of plus 8 inches w.g. in positive pressure sections and minus 8
inches w.g. in negative pressure sections.
C.Access Doors:
1.Access Doors: Access doors shall be included between each air handler component, and
shall be of the same construction as the panels described above. The doors shall have
two continuous neoprene gasket seals around the entire periphery of the door. Each
access door shall have a minimum of two non-corrosive securing latches which are also
operable from inside the unit. Provide 1-inch dia. test ports with screwed caps on casing
upstream and downstream of all coils and filters for pressure and temperature
measurement. Positively pressurized sections shall have inwardly swinging doors, while
negatively pressurized doors shall swing outward. Doors shall incorporate thermopane
safety glass windows for every section.
D.Unit Flooring: Construct with sufficient strength to support expected people and equipment
loads associated with maintenance activities.
E.Casing Leakage: Seal joints and provide airtight access doors so that air leakage does not
exceed one percent of design flow at the specified casing pressure. Air handling unit
manufacturer shall conduct equipment leakage testing once the air handling unit is assembled
on site with all penetrations in place and properly sealed. That means the leak test shall be
performed only after all controls work has been completed. Providing any unit penetrations
after the leak test will result in a re-test. This test shall also be witnessed by representatives
from Cornell University and the Project Engineer of Record.
F.Insulation:
1.Provide minimum thermal thickness of 12 R throughout.
2.Completely fill panel cavities in each direction to prevent voids and settling.
3.Comply with NFPA 90A.
G.Drain Pan Construction:
1.Provide cooling coil sections with an insulated, double wall, 18 gauge, 304 stainless steel
drain pan complying with ASHRAE Std 62.1 for indoor air quality and sufficiently sized to
collect all condensate.
2.Drain pans shall extend the entire length of the coil section, and extend as far as possible
in the direction of airflow, far enough to catch condensate at the maximum recommended
coil air velocity.
3.Drain pans shall be insulated.
4.Slope in two planes to promote positive drainage and eliminate stagnate water conditions.
5.Locate outlet of sufficient diameter at lowest point of pan to prevent overflow at normal
operating conditions.
6.Provide threaded drain connections constructed of drain pan material, extended sufficient
distance beyond the base to accommodate field installed, condensate drain trapping.
H.Finish:
1.Indoor Units:
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
237313 - 4 MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION
AIR-HANDLING UNITS
a.Provide exterior, galvanized steel panels with painted surface complying with ASTM
B177/B177M.
b. Color: Manufacturer's standard color.
2.03 FAN SECTION
A. Type: Forward curved, single width, single inlet, centrifugal plug type fan, conforming to AMCA
99. Refer to Section 233413.
B. Performance Ratings: Determined in accordance with AMCA 210 and labeled with AMCA
Certified Rating Seal.
C. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301; tested to AMCA 300 and label with AMCA Certified Sound Rating
Seal.
D. Bearings: Self-aligning, grease lubricated, with lubrication fittings extended to exterior of
casing with plastic tube and grease fitting rigidly attached to casing.
E. External Motor Junction Box: Factory mount NEMA 4 external junction box and connect to
extended motor leads from internally mounted motors.
F. Motor Wiring Conduit: Factory wire fan motor wiring to the unit mounted external motor
junction box.
G. Fan Accessories:
1. Discharge dampers.
H. Flexible Duct Connections:
1. For separating fan, coil, and adjacent sections.
I. Drives:
1. Conform to AMCA 99.
2. Bearings: Heavy duty pillow block type, ball bearings, with ABMA STD 9, L-10 life at
50,000 hours.
3. Shafts: Solid, hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with key-way, and protectively coated
with lubricating oil.
4. V-Belt Drive: Cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts, and
keyed. Variable and adjustable pitch sheaves for motors 15 hp and under selected so
required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid-position; fixed sheave for 20 hp and
over, matched belts, and drive rated as recommended by manufacturer or minimum 1.5
times nameplate rating of the motor.
5. Belt Guard: Fabricate to SMACNA (DCS); 0.106 inch thick, 3/4 inch diamond mesh wire
screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime coated. Secure to fan or fan
supports without short circuiting vibration isolation, with provision for adjustment of belt
tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer with guard in place.
2.04 AIR HANDLING UNIT COILS
A.General:
1.Fins: Construct of continuous aluminum or copper configured plate-fin type with full fin
collars for accurate spacing and maximum fin-tube contact. Fin spacing shall be 12 fins
per inch maximum.
2.Casings: Construct of 16-ga. 304 stainless steel for coil heights 33-inches and smaller;
14-ga. stainless steel for coil heights over 33-inches. Provide formed end supports and
top and bottom channels. Provide 16-ga. stainless steel center tube support for coil
lengths 42 to 96 inches, two or more supports for coil lengths over 96".
3.Tubes: Construct of seamless copper tubing, expanded into fin collars for permanent
fin-tube bond and expanded into header for permanent leak-tight joint. Tubes shall be
arranged in staggered pattern with respect to airflow.
4.Connections: Grooved connections (i.e., Victaulic) are not acceptable on hot water and
steam coils.
5.Testing: All water, steam and DX coils shall meet or exceed ASME Requirements for burst
and maximum operating pressures.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
237313 - 5 MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION
AIR-HANDLING UNITS
6.U-Bends: Construct of copper tubes, machine die-formed on each end to provide an
accurate fit for silver brazed joints.
7.Air Bypass Barrier: Provide foam seals around the coil to prevent air bypass between
casing and coil.
8.Coil sections shall be separated by a minimum space of 18" (eighteen inches). Each coil
section shall have a full size access door. Coil casings shall be fabricated from 16 ga.
304 stainless steel. Removable panels shall be located on both sides of the air handler
unit, not just on the coil removal side.
B.Hot Water Heating Coils:
1.Tubes: Construct of minimum 5/8-inch thick tubing. Coils shall be drainable with
non-trapping circuits.
2.Headers: Non-ferrous construction, no exceptions.
C.Chilled Water Cooling Coils:
1.Chilled water coils are to be selected with an entering water temperature of 47 degrees F.
2.Tubes: Construct of minimum 5/8-inch thick copper tubing. Coils shall be drainable with
non-trapping circuits. All coils shall have non-ferrous tubing.
3.Header: Non-ferrous construction, no exceptions.
4.Frames and blank-off spacers between coil and frame housing shall be stainless steel.
Use stainless steel hardware to fasten blank-offs and frames.
2.05 AIR CLEANING DEVICES AND FILTERS
A.Acceptable Manufacturers:
1.Camfil-Farr
2.Filtration Group
3.Freudenberg Filter Division / Brand: Viledon
4.Tri-Dim Corporation
B.General:
1.Filter sections shall be equipped with access doors of adequate size to remove and
replace the filters.
2.Two access doors are required for slide filter applications.
3.A Dwyer Photohelic gauge shall be mounted on the outside of the cabinet with copper
probes measuring the pressure drop across the filter section. The purpose of the analog
output is for filter load trending over the life of the filter.
4.An upstream filter installation configuration is preferable, in that the fan suction will pull the
filters into the filter frame, thus providing a better seal between the filter and frame.
5.Pre-Filters: The minimum pre-filter rating shall be a Minimum Efficacy Reporting Value
(MERV) of 8 per ASHRAE 52.2 - 1999. Cornell’s successful pre-filter applications have
been obtained with Viledon F-50 and F-50S pocket filters.
6.Final Filters, Classroom/office Facilities, 65% dust spot efficiency, MERV 11, Rigid Pocket
or V-Cell.
C.Pleated Media Filters:
1.Media: 2 inch, 100 percent synthetic fibers, continuously laminated to a grid with water
repellent adhesive, and capable of operating up to a maximum of 625 fpm without loss of
efficiency and holding capacity.
2.Frame: Steel wire grid.
3.Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value: 5 MERV when tested in accordance with ASHRAE
Std 52.2.
D. Differential Pressure Gage:
1. Provide factory installed dial type differential pressure gage, flush mounted with casing
outer wall, and fully piped to both sides of each filter to indicate status.
2. Maintain plus/minus 5 percent accuracy within operating limits of 20 degrees F to 120
degrees F.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
237313 - 6 MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION
AIR-HANDLING UNITS
2.06 DAMPER SECTION
A. Mixing Section: Provide a functional section to support the damper assembly for modulating
the volume of outdoor and return air.
B. Damper Blades:
1. Double-skin airfoil design with metal, compressible jamb seals and extruded-vinyl
blade-edge seals on each blade.
2. Self-lubricating stainless steel or synthetic sleeve bearings.
3. Comply with ASHRAE Std 90.1 I-P for rated maximum leakage rate.
4. Provide leakage testing and pressure ratings in compliance with AMCA 500-D test
methods.
5. Arrange in parallel or opposed-blade configuration.
2.07 AIRFLOW MEASUREMENT
A. Air Flow Measurement Station:
1. Provide factory installed, airflow measurement station tested in accordance with AMCA
611 and bearing the AMCA Ratings Seal for Airflow Measurement Performance.
2. Station Location: Install in outdoor opening to measure airflow.
3. Damper Blades:
a. Galvanized steel or extruded aluminum construction.
b. Housed in galvanized steel or extruded aluminum frame and mechanically fastened
to a rotating axle rod.
c. Comply with ASHRAE Std 90.1 I-P for rated maximum leakage rate.
4. Measurement Range: Minimum of 15 percent to 100 percent of unit nominal flow.
5. Operation: Provide low voltage signal corresponding to actual airflow for controlling and
documenting airflow.
6. Accuracy: Plus/minus 5 percent.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Bolt sections together with gaskets.
C. Isolate fan section with flexible duct connections.
D. Install flexible duct connections between fan inlet and discharge ductwork and air handling unit
sections. Ensure that metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch flex
between ductwork and fan while running.
E. Provide fixed sheaves required for final air balance.
F. Make connections to coils with unions or flanges.
G. Cooling Coils:
1. Pipe drain and overflow to nearest floor drain.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Final Acceptance Requirements:
1. Use dial indicator gages to demonstrate fan and motor are aligned.
C. Coordination of Other Tests and Inspections:
1. Provide access and __________ as required to accommodate timely performance.
3.03 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. Provide manufacturer's field representative to perform systems startup.
B. Prepare and start equipment and systems in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and
recommendations.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
237313 - 7 MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION
AIR-HANDLING UNITS
C. Adjust for proper operation within manufacturer's published tolerances.
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260505 - 1 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR
ELECTRICAL
SECTION 260505
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Electrical demolition.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Division 1 Specifications for additional requirements for alterations work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A.Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual sections.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as indicated.
B.Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities.
C.Demolition drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents.
D.Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation.
E.Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings to be removed.
B.Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during
construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use
personnel experienced in such operations.
C.Provide dust covers for all existing fire alarm detection devices impacted by construction to
prevent nuisance alarms.
3.03 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK
A.Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.
B.Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply.
C.Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling
finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.
D.Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit
servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets that
are not removed.
E.Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other
accessories.
F.Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work.
G.Maintain access to existing electrical installations that remain active. Modify installation or
provide access panel as appropriate.
H.Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical
installations, or as specified.
3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIR
A.Clean and repair existing materials and equipment that remain or that are to be reused.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260505 - 2 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR
ELECTRICAL
B.Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace
damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed
circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement.
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260519 - 1 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES
SECTION 260519
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Single conductor building wire.
B.Metal-clad cable.
C.Wiring connectors.
D.Electrical tape.
E.Heat shrink tubing.
F.Wire pulling lubricant.
G.Cable ties.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Division 7 - Firestopping
B.Section 260505 - Selective Demolition for Electrical: Disconnection, removal, and/or extension
of existing electrical conductors and cables.
C.Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: Additional requirements for
grounding conductors and grounding connectors.
D.Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
E.Section 284600 - Fire Detection and Alarm: Fire alarm system conductors and cables.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ASTM B3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire; 2013.
B.ASTM B8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard,
Medium-Hard, or Soft; 2011 (Reapproved 2017).
C.ASTM B787/B787M - Standard Specification for 19 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded Copper
Conductors for Subsequent Insulation; 2004 (Reapproved 2014).
D.ASTM D3005 - Standard Specification for Low-Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic
Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape; 2017.
E.FS A-A-59544 - Cable and Wire, Electrical (Power, Fixed Installation); Federal Specification;
2008a (Validated 2013).
F.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.
G.NECA 120 - Standard for Installing Armored Cable (AC) and Metal-Clad Cable (MC); 2012.
H.NEMA WC 70 - Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical
Energy; 2009.
I.NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;
2017.
J.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
K.UL 44 - Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
L.UL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
M.UL 486A-486B - Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
N.UL 486C - Splicing Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
O.UL 486D - Sealed Wire Connector Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260519 - 2 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES
P.UL 510 - Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
Q.UL 1569 - Metal-Clad Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Coordination:
1.Coordinate sizes of raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures installed under other
sections with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor
sizes increased for voltage drop.
2.Coordinate with electrical equipment installed under other sections to provide
terminations suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.
3.Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain
direction before proceeding with work.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.See Division 1 Specifications for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conductors
and cables, including detailed information on materials, construction, ratings, listings, and
available sizes, configurations, and stranding.
C.Field Quality Control Test Reports.
D.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation, and installation of product.
E.Project Record Documents: Record actual installed circuiting arrangements. Record actual
routing for underground circuits.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
C.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
D.Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Receive, inspect, handle, and store conductors and cables in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.Do not install or otherwise handle thermoplastic-insulated conductors at temperatures lower
than 14 degrees F, unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer's instructions. When
installation below this temperature is unavoidable, notify Architect and obtain direction before
proceeding with work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS
A.Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and
product listing.
B.Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwise indicated,
permitted, or required.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260519 - 3 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES
C.Metal-clad cable is permitted only as follows:
1.Where not otherwise restricted, may be used:
a.Where concealed above accessible ceilings for final connections from junction boxes
to luminaires.
1)Maximum Length: 6 feet.
b.Where concealed in hollow stud walls, above accessible ceilings, and under raised
floors for branch circuits up to 20 A.
1)Exception: Provide single conductor building wire in raceway for circuit
homerun to panelboard.
2.02 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B.Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
C.Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring,
connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system.
D.Comply with NEMA WC 70.
E.Comply with FS A-A-59544 where applicable.
F.Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 83.
G.Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44.
H.Conductors for Grounding and Bonding: Also comply with Section 260526.
I.Conductor Material:
1.Provide copper conductors only. Aluminum conductors are not acceptable for this project.
Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper.
2.Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated copper
conductors complying with ASTM B3, ASTM B8, or ASTM B787/B787M unless otherwise
indicated.
J.Minimum Conductor Size:
1.Branch Circuits: 12 AWG.
a.Exceptions:
1)20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 75 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop.
2)20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 8 AWG, for voltage drop.
K.Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than
applicable minimum size requirements specified.
L.Conductor Color Coding:
1.Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority having
jurisdiction. Maintain consistent color coding throughout project.
2.Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation.
3.Color Code:
a.208Y/120 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System:
1)Phase A: Black.
2)Phase B: Red.
3)Phase C: Blue.
4)Neutral: White.
b.Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green.
c.For modifications or additions to existing wiring systems, comply with existing color
code when existing code complies with NFPA 70 and is approved by the authority
having jurisdiction.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260519 - 4 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES
2.03 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE
A.Manufacturers:
1.Copper Building Wire:
a.Cerro Wire LLC: www.cerrowire.com/#sle.
b.Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com/#sle.
c.General Cable Technologies Corporation: www.generalcable.com/#sle.
d.Southwire Company: www.southwire.com/#sle.
B.Description: Single conductor insulated wire.
C.Conductor Stranding:
1.Feeders and Branch Circuits:
a.Size 12 AWG and Smaller: Solid.
b.Size 10 AWG and Larger: Stranded.
D.Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.
E.Insulation:
1.Copper Building Wire: Type THHN/THWN-2.
2.04 METAL-CLAD CABLE
A.Manufacturers:
1.AFC Cable Systems Inc: www.afcweb.com/#sle.
2.Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com/#sle.
3.Southwire Company: www.southwire.com/#sle.
B.Description: NFPA 70, Type MC cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 1569, and
listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used.
C.Conductor Stranding:
1.Size 12 AWG and Smaller: Solid.
2.Size 10 AWG and Larger: Stranded.
D.Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.
E.Insulation: Type THHN/THWN-2.
F.Grounding: Full-size integral equipment grounding conductor.
G.Armor: Steel, interlocked tape.
H.Provide PVC jacket applied over cable armor where indicated or required for environment of
installed location.
2.05 WIRING CONNECTORS
A.Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the
conductors to be connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C as
applicable.
B.Connectors for Grounding and Bonding: Comply with Section 260526.
C.Wiring Connectors for Splices and Taps:
1.Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Smaller: Use twist-on insulated spring connectors.
2.Copper Conductors Size 6 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or
compression connectors.
D.Wiring Connectors for Terminations:
1.Provide terminal lugs for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with terminations
designed for terminal lugs.
2.Provide compression adapters for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with
mechanical lugs when only compression connectors are specified.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260519 - 5 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES
3.Where over-sized conductors are larger than the equipment terminations can
accommodate, provide connectors suitable for reducing to appropriate size, but not less
than required for the rating of the overcurrent protective device.
4.Provide motor pigtail connectors for connecting motor leads in order to facilitate
disconnection.
5.Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or
compression connectors where connectors are required.
6.Stranded Conductors Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Use crimped terminals for connections
to terminal screws.
E.Do not use insulation-piercing or insulation-displacement connectors designed for use with
conductors without stripping insulation.
F.Twist-on Insulated Spring Connectors: Rated 600 V, 221 degrees F for standard applications
and 302 degrees F for high temperature applications; pre-filled with sealant and listed as
complying with UL 486D for damp and wet locations.
1.Manufacturers:
a.3M: www.3m.com/#sle.
b.Ideal Industries, Inc: www.idealindustries.com/#sle.
c.NSI Industries LLC: www.nsiindustries.com/#sle.
G.Mechanical Connectors: Provide bolted type or set-screw type.
H.Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimp configuration.
I.Crimped Terminals: Nylon-insulated, with insulation grip and terminal configuration suitable for
connection to be made.
2.06 WIRING ACCESSORIES
A.Electrical Tape:
1.Manufacturers:
a.3M: www.3m.com/#sle.
b.Plymouth Rubber Europa: www.plymouthrubber.com/#sle.
2.Vinyl Insulating Electrical Tape: Complying with ASTM D3005 and listed as complying
with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight;
conformable for application down to 0 degrees F and suitable for continuous temperature
environment up to 221 degrees F.
B.Heat Shrink Tubing: Heavy-wall, split-resistant, with factory-applied adhesive; rated 600 V;
suitable for direct burial applications; listed as complying with UL 486D.
1.Manufacturers:
a.3M: www.3m.com/#sle.
b.Burndy LLC: www.burndy.com.
c.Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.
C.Wire Pulling Lubricant: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be installed
and suitable for use at the installation temperature.
1.Manufacturers:
a.3M: www.3m.com/#sle.
b.American Polywater Corporation: www.polywater.com/#sle.
c.Ideal Industries, Inc: www.idealindustries.com/#sle.
D.Cable Ties: Material and tensile strength rating suitable for application.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.
B.Verify that work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260519 - 6 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES
C.Verify that raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly sized to
accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70.
D.Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
E.Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and
cables.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.Circuiting Requirements:
1.Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic.
2.When circuit destination is indicated without specific routing, determine exact routing
required.
3.Arrange circuiting to minimize splices.
4.Include circuit lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft of location
indicated.
5.Maintain separation of Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control, signaling, and
power-limited circuits in accordance with NFPA 70.
6.Maintain separation of wiring for emergency systems in accordance with NFPA 70.
7.Circuiting Adjustments: Unless otherwise indicated, when branch circuits are indicated
as separate, combining them together in a single raceway is not permitted.
8.Common Neutrals: Unless otherwise indicated, sharing of neutral/grounded conductors
among up to three single phase branch circuits of different phases installed in the same
raceway is not permitted. Provide dedicated neutral/grounded conductor for each
individual branch circuit.
B.Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
D.Install metal-clad cable (Type MC) in accordance with NECA 120.
E.Installation in Raceway:
1.Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and other
contaminants.
2.Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time.
3.Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tension and sidewall pressure.
4.Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not
recommended by the manufacturer.
F.Paralleled Conductors: Install conductors of the same length and terminate in the same
manner.
G.Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable
supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provide independent
support from building structure. Do not provide support from raceways, piping, ductwork, or
other systems.
H.Terminate cables using suitable fittings.
1.Metal-Clad Cable (Type MC):
a.Use listed fittings.
b.Cut cable armor only using specialized tools to prevent damaging conductors or
insulation. Do not use hacksaw or wire cutters to cut armor.
I.Install conductors with a minimum of 12 inches of slack at each outlet.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260519 - 7 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES
J.Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and other equipment
enclosures.
K.Group or otherwise identify neutral/grounded conductors with associated ungrounded
conductors inside enclosures in accordance with NFPA 70.
L.Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors.
1.Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or
make splices in conduit bodies or wiring gutters.
2.Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without
cutting, nicking or damaging conductors.
3.Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector.
4.Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion,
oxides, and other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces.
5.Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended
torque settings.
6.Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools
and dies.
M.Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable
for the application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unspliced
conductors.
N.Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape.
O.Identify conductors and cables in accordance with Section 260553.
P.Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using
materials and methods specified in Section 078400.
Q.Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment and
devices, including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
B.Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.2. The insulation resistance
test is required for all conductors. The resistance test for parallel conductors listed as optional
is not required.
C.Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables.
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260526 - 1 GROUNDING AND BONDING
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 260526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Grounding and bonding requirements.
B.Conductors for grounding and bonding.
C.Connectors for grounding and bonding.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 260519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Additional
requirements for conductors for grounding and bonding, including conductor color coding.
B.Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.
B.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
C.UL 467 - Grounding and Bonding Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Coordination:
1.Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain
direction before proceeding with work.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
C.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
D.Installer Qualifications for Signal Reference Grids: Company with minimum five years
documented experience with high frequency grounding systems.
E.Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS
A.Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.
B.Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required components, conductors,
connectors, conduit, boxes, fittings, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete
grounding and bonding system.
C.Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than
applicable minimum size requirements specified.
D.Bonding and Equipment Grounding:
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260526 - 2 GROUNDING AND BONDING
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
1.Provide bonding for equipment grounding conductors, equipment ground busses, metallic
equipment enclosures, metallic raceways and boxes, device grounding terminals, and
other normally non-current-carrying conductive materials enclosing electrical
conductors/equipment or likely to become energized as indicated and in accordance with
NFPA 70.
2. Provide insulated equipment grounding conductor in each feeder and branch circuit
raceway. Do not use raceways as sole equipment grounding conductor.
3. Where circuit conductor sizes are increased for voltage drop, increase size of equipment
grounding conductor proportionally in accordance with NFPA 70.
4. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit
equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.
5. Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded equipment
ground bus only. Do not terminate on neutral (grounded) or isolated/insulated ground
bus.
6. Provide bonding jumper across expansion or expansion/deflection fittings provided to
accommodate conduit movement.
2.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTS
A. General Requirements:
1. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
2. Provide products listed and labeled as complying with UL 467 where applicable.
B. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding, in Addition to Requirements of Section 260526:
1. Use insulated copper conductors unless otherwise indicated.
C. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding:
1. Description: Connectors appropriate for the application and suitable for the conductors
and items to be connected; listed and labeled as complying with UL 467.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, use mechanical connectors, compression connectors, or
exothermic welded connections for accessible connections.
3. Manufacturers - Mechanical and Compression Connectors:
a. Advanced Lightning Technology (ALT): www.altfab.com.
b. Burndy LLC: www.burndy.com.
c. Harger Lightning & Grounding: www.harger.com.
d. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that work likely to damage grounding and bonding system components has been
completed.
B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
C. Make grounding and bonding connections using specified connectors.
1. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without
cutting, nicking or damaging conductors. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate
insertion into connector.
2. Remove nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating at threads, contact points, and
contact surfaces.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260526 - 3 GROUNDING AND BONDING
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
3. Exothermic Welds: Make connections using molds and weld material suitable for the
items to be connected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
4. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended
torque settings.
5. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools
and dies.
D. Identify grounding and bonding system components in accordance with Section 260553.
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260529 - 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 260529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Support and attachment components for equipment, conduit, cable, boxes, and other electrical
work.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads.
B.Section 260533.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems: Additional support and attachment
requirements for conduits.
C.Section 260533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems: Additional support and attachment
requirements for boxes.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ASTM B633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel;
2015.
B.MFMA-4 - Metal Framing Standards Publication; 2004.
C.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.
D.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
E.UL 5B - Strut-Type Channel Raceways and Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Coordination:
1.Coordinate sizes and arrangement of supports and bases with the actual equipment and
components to be installed.
2.Coordinate the work with other trades to provide additional framing and materials
required for installation.
3.Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mounting surfaces
at the installed locations.
4.Coordinate the arrangement of supports with ductwork, piping, equipment and other
potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.
5.Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain
direction before proceeding with work.
B.Sequencing:
1.Do not install products on or provide attachment to concrete surfaces until concrete has
fully cured in accordance with Section 033000.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.See Division 1 Specifications for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for metal
channel (strut) framing systems and post-installed concrete and masonry anchors.
C.Shop Drawings: Include details for fabricated hangers and supports where materials or
methods other than those indicated are proposed for substitution.
D.Installer's Qualifications: Include evidence of compliance with specified requirements.
E.Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by
product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,
preparation, and installation of product.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260529 - 2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Comply with NFPA 70.
B.Comply with applicable building code.
C.Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
D.Installer Qualifications for Powder-Actuated Fasteners (when specified): Certified by fastener
system manufacturer with current operator's license.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A.General Requirements:
1.Provide all required hangers, supports, anchors, fasteners, fittings, accessories, and
hardware as necessary for the complete installation of electrical work.
2.Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended,
where applicable.
3.Where support and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated, select in
accordance with manufacturer's application criteria as required for the load to be
supported. Include consideration for vibration, equipment operation, and shock loads
where applicable.
4.Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product
listing.
5.Do not use wire, chain, perforated pipe strap, or wood for permanent supports unless
specifically indicated or permitted.
6.Steel Components: Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the environment where
installed.
a.Indoor Dry Locations: Use zinc-plated steel or approved equivalent unless otherwise
indicated.
b.Zinc-Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633.
B.Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps, clamps, etc. suitable for the conduit or cable to be
supported.
1.Conduit Straps: One-hole or two-hole type; steel or malleable iron.
2.Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated.
3.Manufacturers:
a.Cooper Crouse-Hinds, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com.
b.Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com.
c.O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Electric Co: www.emerson.com/#sle.
d.Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.
C.Outlet Box Supports: Hangers, brackets, etc. suitable for the boxes to be supported.
1.Manufacturers:
a.Cooper Crouse-Hinds, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com.
b.Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com.
c.O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Electric Co: www.emerson.com/#sle.
d.Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.
D.Metal Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot metal channel
(strut) and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field-assembly of
supports.
1.Comply with MFMA-4.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260529 - 3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
2.Channel (Strut) Used as Raceway (only where specifically indicated): Listed and labeled
as complying with UL 5B.
3.Channel Material:
a.Indoor Dry Locations: Use painted steel, zinc-plated steel, or galvanized steel.
4.Minimum Channel Thickness: Steel sheet, 12 gage, 0.1046 inch.
5.Minimum Channel Dimensions: 1-5/8 inch width by 13/16 inch height.
6.Manufacturers:
a.Cooper B-Line, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com.
b.Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.
c.Unistrut, a brand of Atkore International Inc: www.unistrut.com.
d.Source Limitations: Furnish channels (struts) and associated fittings, accessories,
and hardware produced by a single manufacturer.
E.Hanger Rods: Threaded zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated.
1.Minimum Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required:
a.Equipment Supports: 1/2 inch diameter.
b.Busway Supports: 1/2 inch diameter.
c.Single Conduit up to 1 inch (27 mm) trade size: 1/4 inch diameter.
d.Single Conduit larger than 1 inch (27 mm) trade size: 3/8 inch diameter.
e.Trapeze Support for Multiple Conduits: 3/8 inch diameter.
f.Outlet Boxes: 1/4 inch diameter.
g.Luminaires: 1/4 inch diameter.
F.Anchors and Fasteners:
1.Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor and
fastener types indicated for the specified applications.
2.Concrete: Use preset concrete inserts, expansion anchors, or screw anchors.
3.Preset Concrete Inserts: Continuous metal channel (strut) and spot inserts specifically
designed to be cast in concrete ceilings, walls, and floors.
a.Comply with MFMA-4.
b.Channel Material: Use galvanized steel.
c.Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of metal channel (strut) framing system.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B.Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment components.
C.Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
C.Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping,
ductwork, or other systems.
D.Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from suspended
ceiling support system or ceiling grid.
E.Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from roof deck.
F.Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of Structural
Engineer.
G.Equipment Support and Attachment:
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260529 - 4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
1.Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut) to
support equipment as required.
2.Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface-mounted on
hollow stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out.
3.Use metal channel (strut) to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp
locations to provide space between equipment and mounting surface.
4.Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it relies on
its own weight for support.
H.Preset Concrete Inserts: Use manufacturer provided closure strips to inhibit concrete seepage
during concrete pour.
I.Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.
J.Remove temporary supports.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.See Division 1 Specifications for additional requirements.
B.Inspect support and attachment components for damage and defects.
C.Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.
D.Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective support and attachment components.
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260533.13 - 1 CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
SECTION 260533.13
CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC).
B.Flexible metal conduit (FMC).
C.Liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC).
D.Electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
E.Conduit fittings.
F.Accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Division 7 - Firestopping
B.Section 260519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.
C.Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
D.Section 260529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
E.Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC); 2015.
B.ANSI C80.3 - American National Standard for Electrical Metallic Tubing -- Steel (EMT-S);
2015.
C.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.
D.NECA 101 - Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT); 2013.
E.NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic
Tubing, and Cable; 2014.
F.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
G.UL 1 - Flexible Metal Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
H.UL 6 - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
I.UL 360 - Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
J.UL 514B - Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
K.UL 797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Coordination:
1.Coordinate minimum sizes of conduits with the actual conductors to be installed,
including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop.
2.Coordinate the arrangement of conduits with structural members, ductwork, piping,
equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.
3.Verify exact conduit termination locations required for boxes, enclosures, and equipment
installed under other sections or by others.
4.Coordinate the work with other trades to provide roof penetrations that preserve the
integrity of the roofing system and do not void the roof warranty.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260533.13 - 2 CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
5.Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain
direction before proceeding with work.
B.Sequencing:
1.Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of conduit is complete
between outlet, junction and splicing points.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.See Division 1 Specifications for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conduits.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
C.Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Receive, inspect, handle, and store conduit and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS
A.Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70
and product listing.
B.Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the conduit types indicated
for the specified applications. Where more than one listed application applies, comply with the
most restrictive requirements. Where conduit type for a particular application is not specified,
use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
C.Embedded Within Concrete:
1.Within Slab on Grade: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
D.Concealed Within Masonry Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or electrical
metallic tubing (EMT).
E.Concealed Within Hollow Stud Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or electrical
metallic tubing (EMT).
F.Interior, Damp or Wet Locations: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
G.Exposed, Interior, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit
or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
H.Exposed, Interior, Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
I.Connections to Vibrating Equipment:
1.Dry Locations: Use flexible metal conduit.
2.Damp, Wet, or Corrosive Locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
3.Maximum Length: 6 feet unless otherwise indicated.
4.Vibrating equipment includes, but is not limited to:
a.Motors.
2.02 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
A.Provide all conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway
system.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260533.13 - 3 CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
B.Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
C.Minimum Conduit Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated:
1.Branch Circuits: 1/2 inch (16 mm) trade size.
2.Branch Circuit Homeruns: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size.
3.Control Circuits: 1/2 inch (16 mm) trade size.
4.Flexible Connections to Luminaires: 3/8 inch (12 mm) trade size.
5.Underground, Interior: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size.
D.Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable
minimum size requirements specified.
2.03 GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)
A.Manufacturers:
1.Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedeg.com
2.Republic Conduit: www.republic-conduit.com
3.Wheatland Tube Company: www.wheatland.com
B.Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI
C80.1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6.
C. Fittings:
1. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled
as complying with UL 514B.
2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
3. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and
compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted.
2.04 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC)
A. Manufacturers:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc: www.afcweb.com.
2. Electri-Flex Company: www.electriflex.com.
3. International Metal Hose: www.metalhose.com.
B. Description: NFPA 70, Type FMC standard wall steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled
as complying with UL 1, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used.
C. Fittings:
1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with
UL 514B.
2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
2.05 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC)
A. Manufacturers:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc: www.afcweb.com.
2. Electri-Flex Company: www.electriflex.com.
3. International Metal Hose: www.metalhose.com.
B. Description: NFPA 70, Type LFMC polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketed steel flexible metal
conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 360.
C. Fittings:
1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with
UL 514B.
2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
2.06 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. Manufacturers:
1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedeg.com.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260533.13 - 4 CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
2. Republic Conduit: www.republic-conduit.com/#sle.
3. Wheatland Tube Company: www.wheatland.com.
B. Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI C80.3
and listed and labeled as complying with UL 797.
C.Fittings:
1.Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with
UL 514B.
2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
3. Connectors and Couplings: Use compression (gland) or set-screw type.
a. Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings.
4. Damp or Wet Locations (where permitted): Use fittings listed for use in wet locations.
2.07 ACCESSORIES
A. Conduit Joint Compound: Corrosion-resistant, electrically conductive; suitable for use with the
conduit to be installed.
B. Pull Strings: Use nylon cord with average breaking strength of not less than 200 pound-force.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits.
C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
C. Install galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 101.
D. Conduit Routing:
1. Unless dimensioned, conduit routing indicated is diagrammatic.
2. When conduit destination is indicated without specific routing, determine exact routing
required.
3. Conceal all conduits unless specifically indicated to be exposed.
4. Conduits in the following areas may be exposed, unless otherwise indicated:
a. Electrical rooms.
b. Mechanical equipment rooms.
c. Electrical homeruns.
5. Conduits installed underground or embedded in concrete may be routed in the shortest
possible manner unless otherwise indicated. Route all other conduits parallel or
perpendicular to building structure and surfaces, following surface contours where
practical.
6. Arrange conduit to maintain adequate headroom, clearances, and access.
7. Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent of four 90 degree bends between
pull points.
8. Arrange conduit to provide no more than 150 feet between pull points.
9. Route conduits above water and drain piping where possible.
10. Arrange conduit to prevent moisture traps. Provide drain fittings at low points and at
sealing fittings where moisture may collect.
11. Maintain minimum clearance of 6 inches between conduits and piping for other systems.
12. Maintain minimum clearance of 12 inches between conduits and hot surfaces. This
includes, but is not limited to:
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260533.13 - 5 CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
a. Heaters.
b. Hot water piping.
13. Group parallel conduits in the same area together on a common rack.
E. Conduit Support:
1. Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 260529 using
suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping,
ductwork, or other systems.
3. Use metal channel (strut) with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel
surface-mounted conduits.
4. Use conduit clamp to support single conduit from beam clamp or threaded rod.
5. Use trapeze hangers assembled from threaded rods and metal channel (strut) with
accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel suspended conduits.
6. Use of wire for support of conduits is not permitted.
7. Where conduit support intervals specified in NFPA 70 and NECA standards differ,
comply with the most stringent requirements.
F. Connections and Terminations:
1. Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduit joint compound on field-cut threads of galvanized
steel conduits prior to making connections.
2. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use three-piece
couplings or split couplings. Do not use running threads.
3. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to another.
4. Provide drip loops for liquidtight flexible conduit connections to prevent drainage of liquid
into connectors.
5. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double lock
nuts for dry locations and raintight hubs for wet locations.
6. Where spare conduits stub up through concrete floors and are not terminated in a box or
enclosure, provide threaded couplings equipped with threaded plugs set flush with
finished floor.
7. Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to protect
conductors.
8. Secure joints and connections to provide maximum mechanical strength and electrical
continuity.
G. Penetrations:
1. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings and
grade beams, without approval of Structural Engineer.
2. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
3. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation. Set
sleeves flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required.
4. Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground.
5. Seal interior of conduits entering the building from underground at first accessible point to
prevent entry of moisture and gases.
6. Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to maintain integrity of
membrane.
7. Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment openings
and curbs where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations. Where penetrations
are necessary, seal as indicated or as required to preserve integrity of roofing system
and maintain roof warranty. Include proposed locations of penetrations and methods for
sealing with submittals.
8. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements,
using materials and methods specified in Section 078400.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260533.13 - 6 CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
H. Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide expansion
and expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or connected
equipment. This includes, but is not limited to:
1. Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion, contraction, or deflection.
2. Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost.
I. Condensation Prevention: Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential
substantial temperature differential, provide sealing fitting or approved sealing compound at an
accessible point near the penetration to prevent condensation. This includes, but is not limited
to:
1. Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces.
2. Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior spaces.
J. Provide pull string in all empty conduits and in conduits where conductors and cables are to be
installed by others. Leave minimum slack of 12 inches at each end.
K. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 260526.
L. Identify conduits in accordance with Section 260553.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Division 1 Specifications for additional requirements.
B. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.
C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conduits.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of conduits to remove moisture and foreign matter.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Immediately after installation of conduit, use suitable manufactured plugs to provide protection
from entry of moisture and foreign material and do not remove until ready for installation of
conductors.
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260533.16 - 1 BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
SECTION 260533.16
BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Outlet and device boxes up to 100 cubic inches, including those used as junction and pull
boxes.
B.Cabinets and enclosures, including junction and pull boxes larger than 100 cubic inches.
C.Floor boxes.
D.In-Wall boxes
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
B.Section 260529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
C.Section 260533.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems:
1.Conduit bodies and other fittings.
2.Additional requirements for locating boxes to limit conduit length and/or number of bends
between pulling points.
D.Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
E.Section 262726 - Wiring Devices:
1.Wall plates.
2.Floor box service fittings.
3.Additional requirements for locating boxes for wiring devices.
F.Section 271005 - Structured Cabling for Voice and Data - Inside-Plant: Additional
requirements for communications systems outlet boxes.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.
B.NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; 2010.
C.NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports; 2013.
D.NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2014.
E.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
F.UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
G.UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
H.UL 508A - Industrial Control Panels; 2013.
I.UL 514A - Metallic Outlet Boxes; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Coordination:
1.Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment,
or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working
clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.
2.Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance
requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260533.16 - 2 BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
3.Coordinate minimum sizes of boxes with the actual installed arrangement of conductors,
clamps, support fittings, and devices, calculated according to NFPA 70.
4.Coordinate minimum sizes of pull boxes with the actual installed arrangement of
connected conduits, calculated according to NFPA 70.
5.Coordinate the placement of boxes with millwork, furniture, devices, equipment, etc.
installed under other sections or by others.
6.Coordinate the work with other trades to preserve insulation integrity.
7.Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of
flush-mounted boxes where indicated.
8.Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain
direction before proceeding with work.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.See Division 1 Specifications for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for cabinets
and enclosures, boxes for hazardous (classified) locations, floor boxes, and underground
boxes/enclosures.
C.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation, and installation of product.
D.Project Record Documents: Record actual locations for outlet and device boxes, pull boxes,
cabinets and enclosures, floor boxes, and underground boxes/enclosures.
E.Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1.See Division 1 Specifications for additional provisions.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
C.Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BOXES
A.General Requirements:
1.Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as permitted by
NFPA 70 and product listing.
2. Provide all boxes, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway
system and to accommodate devices and equipment to be installed.
3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
4. Where box size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable
minimum size requirements specified.
5. Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding conductors
terminate.
B. Outlet and Device Boxes Up to 100 cubic inches, Including Those Used as Junction and Pull
Boxes:
1. Use sheet-steel boxes for dry locations unless otherwise indicated or required.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260533.16 - 3 BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
2. Use suitable concrete type boxes where flush-mounted in concrete.
3. Use suitable masonry type boxes where flush-mounted in masonry walls.
4. Use raised covers suitable for the type of wall construction and device configuration
where required.
5. Use shallow boxes where required by the type of wall construction.
6. Do not use "through-wall" boxes designed for access from both sides of wall.
7. Sheet-Steel Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1, and list and label as complying with UL
514A.
8. Boxes for Supporting Luminaires and Ceiling Fans: Listed as suitable for the type and
weight of load to be supported; furnished with fixture stud to accommodate mounting of
luminaire where required.
9. Boxes for Ganged Devices: Use multigang boxes of single-piece construction. Do not
use field-connected gangable boxes unless specifically indicated or permitted.
10. Wall Plates: Comply with Section 262726.
C. Cabinets and Enclosures, Including Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches:
1. Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E, or UL
508A.
2. NEMA 250 Environment Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated:
3. Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches:
a. Provide screw-cover or hinged-cover enclosures unless otherwise indicated.
4. Manufacturers:
a. Cooper B-Line, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com.
b. Hoffman, a brand of Pentair Technical Products: www.hoffmanonline.com.
c. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiegmann Products: www.hubbell-wiegmann.com.
D. Floor Boxes:
1. Description: Floor boxes compatible with floor box service fittings provided in
accordance with Section 262726; with partitions to separate multiple services; furnished
with all components, adapters, and trims required for complete installation.
2. Metallic Floor Boxes: Fully adjustable (with integral means for leveling adjustment prior to
and after concrete pour).
3. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of floor box service fittings.
E. Audio-Visual Wall Box:
1. Description: Recessed, large storage in-wall box intended to serve flat-screen monitor
and all associated audio-visual equipment. Furnish with all components, brackets,
supporting hardware, trims, and all miscellaneous hardware for a complete installation.
2. Wall boxes to be Chief PAC526. No exceptions.
3. Refer to AV drawing set prepared by Tomei AV Consulting for additional installation
details
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive boxes.
C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install boxes in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and, where applicable, NECA
130, including mounting heights specified in those standards where mounting heights are not
indicated.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260533.16 - 4 BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and NFPA 70.
D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate boxes for line voltage and low voltage systems.
E. Flush-mount boxes in finished areas unless specifically indicated to be surface-mounted.
F. Box Locations:
1. Locate boxes to be accessible. Provide access panels in accordance with Section
083100 as required where approved by the Architect.
2. Unless dimensioned, box locations indicated are approximate.
3. Locate boxes as required for devices installed under other sections or by others.
a. Switches, Receptacles, and Other Wiring Devices: Comply with Section 262726.
b. Communications Systems Outlets: Comply with Section 271005.
4. Unless otherwise indicated, where multiple outlet boxes are installed at the same location
at different mounting heights, install along a common vertical center line.
5. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back. Provide
minimum 6 inches horizontal separation unless otherwise indicated.
6. Fire Resistance Rated Walls: Install flush-mounted boxes such that the required fire
resistance will not be reduced.
7. Locate junction and pull boxes as indicated, as required to facilitate installation of
conductors, and to limit conduit length and/or number of bends between pulling points in
accordance with Section 260533.13.
G. Box Supports:
1. Secure and support boxes in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 260529 using
suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
2. Provide independent support from building structure except for cast metal boxes (other
than boxes used for fixture support) supported by threaded conduit connections in
accordance with NFPA 70. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other
systems.
H. Install boxes plumb and level.
I. Flush-Mounted Boxes:
1. Install boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so
that front edge of box or associated raised cover is not set back from finished surface
more than 1/4 inch or does not project beyond finished surface.
2. Install boxes in combustible materials such as wood so that front edge of box or
associated raised cover is flush with finished surface.
3. Repair rough openings around boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile,
gypsum, plaster, etc. so that there are no gaps or open spaces greater than 1/8 inch at
the edge of the box.
J. Install boxes as required to preserve insulation integrity.
K. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent
devices exceeds 300 V.
L. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using
materials and methods specified in Section 078400.
M. Close unused box openings.
N. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no devices or equipment
installed or designated for future use.
O. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 260526.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dirt, debris, plaster and other foreign material.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260533.16 - 5 BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Immediately after installation, protect boxes from entry of moisture and foreign material until
ready for installation of conductors.
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260553 - 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 260553
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Electrical identification requirements.
B.Identification nameplates and labels.
C.Wire and cable markers.
D.Voltage markers.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Division 9 - Interior/Exterior Painting
B.Section 260519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Color coding for
power conductors and cables 600 V and less; vinyl color coding electrical tape.
C.Section 262726 - Wiring Devices: Device and wallplate finishes; factory pre-marked
wallplates.
D.Section 271005 - Structured Cabling for Voice and Data - Inside-Plant: Identification for
communications cabling and devices.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Coordination:
1.Verify final designations for equipment, systems, and components to be identified prior to
fabrication of identification products.
B.Sequencing:
1.Do not conceal items to be identified, in locations such as above suspended ceilings, until
identification products have been installed.
2.Do not install identification products until final surface finishes and painting are complete.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.Do not install adhesive products when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by
manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
A.Identification for Equipment:
1.Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and control
equipment and associated sections, compartments, and components.
a.Panelboards:
1)Identify ampere rating.
2)Identify voltage and phase.
3)Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight
of equipment.
4)Identify main overcurrent protective device. Use identification label for
panelboards with a door. For power distribution panelboards without a door, use
identification nameplate.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260553 - 2 IDENTIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
5)Use typewritten circuit directory to identify load(s) served for panelboards with a
door. Identify spares and spaces using pencil.
6)For power panelboards without a door, use identification nameplate to identify
load(s) served for each branch device. Do not identify spares and spaces.
b.Enclosed switches, circuit breakers, and motor controllers:
1)Identify voltage and phase.
2)Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight
of equipment.
3)Identify load(s) served. Include location when not within sight of equipment.
2.Use voltage marker to identify highest voltage present for each piece of electrical
equipment.
3.Use identification nameplate to identify equipment utilizing series ratings, where
permitted, in accordance with NFPA 70.
4.Use identification label on inside of door at each fused switch to identify required NEMA
fuse class and size.
B.Identification for Conductors and Cables:
1.Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 260519.
2.Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify color code for ungrounded
and grounded power conductors inside door or enclosure at each piece of feeder or
branch-circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch circuits
served by more than one nominal voltage system.
3.Use wire and cable markers to identify circuit number or other designation indicated for
power, control, and instrumentation conductors and cables at the following locations:
a.At each source and load connection.
C.Identification for Boxes:
1.Use voltage markers to identify highest voltage present.
2.Use voltage markers or color coded boxes to identify systems other than normal power
system.
a.Color-Coded Boxes: Field-painted in accordance with Section 099123 and 099113
per the same color code used for raceways.
1)Fire Alarm System: Red.
3.Use identification labels to identify circuits enclosed.
D.Identification for Devices:
1.Identification for Communications Devices: Comply with Section 271005.
2.Wiring Device and Wallplate Finishes: Comply with Section 262726.
3.Factory Pre-Marked Wallplates: Comply with Section 262726.
4.Use identification label to identify fire alarm system devices.
5.Use identification label or engraved wallplate to identify serving branch circuit for all
receptacles.
6.Use identification label or engraved wallplate to identify load controlled for wall-mounted
control devices controlling loads that are not visible from the control location and for
multiple wall-mounted control devices installed at one location.
2.02 IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
A.Identification Nameplates:
1.Manufacturers:
a.Brimar Industries, Inc: www.brimar.com/#sle.
b.Kolbi Pipe Marker Co: www.kolbipipemarkers.com.
c.Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com.
2.Materials:
a.Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Use plastic nameplates.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260553 - 3 IDENTIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
3.Plastic Nameplates: Two-layer or three-layer laminated acrylic or electrically
non-conductive phenolic with beveled edges; minimum thickness of 1/16 inch; engraved
text.
4.Mounting Holes for Mechanical Fasteners: Two, centered on sides for sizes up to 1 inch
high; Four, located at corners for larger sizes.
B.Identification Labels:
1.Manufacturers:
a.Brady Corporation: www.bradyid.com.
b.Brother International Corporation: www.brother-usa.com/#sle.
c.Panduit Corp: www.panduit.com/#sle.
2.Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and
abrasion resistant.
3.Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text. Do not use handwritten text unless
otherwise indicated.
C.Format for Equipment Identification:
1.Minimum Size: 1 inch by 2.5 inches.
2.Legend:
a.System designation where applicable:
1)Fire Alarm System: Identify with text "FIRE ALARM".
b.Equipment designation or other approved description.
3.Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.
4.Minimum Text Height:
a.System Designation: 1 inch.
b.Equipment Designation: 1/2 inch.
5.Color:
a.Normal Power System: White text on black background.
b.Fire Alarm System: White text on red background.
D.Format for General Information and Operating Instructions:
1.Minimum Size: 1 inch by 2.5 inches.
2.Legend: Include information or instructions indicated or as required for proper and safe
operation and maintenance.
3.Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.
4.Minimum Text Height: 1/4 inch.
5.Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated.
E.Format for Receptacle Identification:
1.Minimum Size: 3/8 inch by 1.5 inches.
2.Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated.
3.Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.
4.Minimum Text Height: 3/16 inch.
5.Color: Black text on clear background.
F.Format for Fire Alarm Device Identification:
1.Minimum Size: 3/8 inch by 1.5 inches.
2.Legend: Designation indicated and device zone or address.
3.Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.
4.Minimum Text Height: 3/16 inch.
5.Color: Red text on white background.
2.03 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS
A.Markers for Conductors and Cables: Use wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl cloth, wrap-around
self-adhesive vinyl self-laminating, heat-shrink sleeve, plastic sleeve, plastic clip-on, or vinyl
split sleeve type markers suitable for the conductor or cable to be identified.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260553 - 4 IDENTIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
B.Markers for Conductor and Cable Bundles: Use plastic marker tags secured by nylon cable
ties.
C.Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated.
D.Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text, all capitalized unless otherwise
indicated.
E.Minimum Text Height: 1/8 inch.
F.Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated.
2.04 VOLTAGE MARKERS
A.Markers for Boxes and Equipment Enclosures: Use factory pre-printed self-adhesive vinyl or
self-adhesive vinyl cloth type markers.
B.Minimum Size:
1.Markers for Equipment: 1 1/8 by 4 1/2 inches.
2.Markers for Pull Boxes: 1 1/8 by 4 1/2 inches.
3.Markers for Junction Boxes: 1/2 by 2 1/4 inches.
C.Legend:
1.Markers for Voltage Identification: Highest voltage present.
2.Markers for System Identification:
D.Color: Black text on orange background unless otherwise indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.Clean surfaces to receive adhesive products according to manufacturer's instructions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment, servicing, and
maintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows:
1.Surface-Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front.
2.Flush-Mounted Equipment: Inside of equipment door.
3.Free-Standing Equipment: Enclosure front; also enclosure rear for equipment with rear
access.
4.Elevated Equipment: Legible from the floor or working platform.
5.Branch Devices: Adjacent to device.
6.Interior Components: Legible from the point of access.
7.Boxes: Outside face of cover.
8.Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point of access.
9.Devices: Outside face of cover.
C.Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item being identified.
D.Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel screws and to
interior surfaces using self-adhesive backing or epoxy cement.
E.Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion, with no bubbles or
wrinkles and edges properly sealed.
F.Mark all handwritten text, where permitted, to be neat and legible.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B.See Division 1 Specifications for additional requirements.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260553 - 5 IDENTIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
C.Replace self-adhesive labels and markers that exhibit bubbles, wrinkles, curling or other signs
of improper adhesion.
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260583 - 1 WIRING CONNECTIONS
SECTION 260583
WIRING CONNECTIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Electrical connections to equipment.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 260519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.
B.Section 260533.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems.
C.Section 260533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.
D.Section 262726 - Wiring Devices.
E.Section 262816.16 - Enclosed Switches.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Coordination:
1.Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and
manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections.
2.Determine connection locations and requirements.
B.Sequencing:
1.Install rough-in of electrical connections before installation of equipment is required.
2.Make electrical connections before required start-up of equipment.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
C.Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.Disconnect Switches: As specified in Section 262816.16 and in individual equipment sections.
B.Flexible Conduit: As specified in Section 260533.13.
C.Wire and Cable: As specified in Section 260519.
D.Boxes: As specified in Section 260533.16.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization.
3.02 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A.Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions.
B.Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit
with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260583 - 2 WIRING CONNECTIONS
C.Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for
temperatures encountered.
D.Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug.
E.Provide cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is required.
F.Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and
equipment connection boxes.
G.Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete
equipment wiring requirements.
H.Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements.
I.Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete
equipment wiring requirements.
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260923 - 1 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
SECTION 260923
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Occupancy sensors.
B.Time switches.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
B.Section 262726 - Wiring Devices: Devices for manual control of lighting, including wall
switches and wall dimmers.
C.Section 265100 - Interior Lighting.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.
B.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Coordination:
1.Coordinate the placement of occupancy sensors with millwork, furniture, equipment or
other potential obstructions to motion detection coverage installed under other sections
or by others.
2.Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain
direction prior to proceeding with work.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.See Division 1 Specifications for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Include ratings, configurations, standard wiring diagrams, dimensions, colors,
service condition requirements, and installed features.
1.Vacancy Sensors: Include detailed motion detection coverage range diagrams.
C.Shop Drawings:
1.Vacancy Sensors: Provide lighting plan indicating location, model number, and
orientation of each occupancy sensor and associated system component.
D.Field Quality Control Reports.
E.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation, and installation of product.
F.Operation and Maintenance Data: Include detailed information on device programming and
setup.
G.Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1.See Division 1 Specifications for additional provisions.
H.Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations and settings for lighting control
devices.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260923 - 2 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
B.Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
C.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
D.Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A.Store products in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions until ready for installation.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after
installation.
1.09 WARRANTY
A.See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.See Division 1 Specifications for additional warranty requirements.
C.Provide five year manufacturer warranty for all vacancy sensors.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
B.Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, wiring, connectors,
hardware, components, accessories, etc. as required for a complete operating system.
2.02 VACANCY SENSORS
A.Manufacturers:
1.Lutron Electronics Company, Inc: www.lutron.com/sle.
2.Sensor Switch Inc: www.sensorswitch.com.
3.WattStopper: www.wattstopper.com.
4.Philips: www.usa.lighting.philips.com
5.Source Limitations: Furnish products produced by a single manufacturer and obtained
from a single supplier.
B.All Vacancy Sensors:
1.Description: Factory-assembled commercial specification grade devices for indoor use
capable of sensing both major motion, such as walking, and minor motion, such as small
desktop level movements, according to published coverage areas, for automatic control
of load indicated.
2.Sensor Technology:
a.Passive Infrared (PIR) Occupancy Sensors: Designed to detect occupancy by
sensing movement of thermal energy between zones.
3.Provide LED to visually indicate motion detection.
4.Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, vacancy sensor to turn load off when no
occupant presence is detected during an adjustable turn-off delay time interval.
5.Passive Infrared Lens Field of View: Field customizable by addition of factory masking
material, adjustment of integral blinders, or similar means to block motion detection in
selected areas.
6.Turn-Off Delay: Field adjustable, with time delay settings up to 30 minutes.
7.Sensitivity: Field adjustable.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260923 - 3 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
8.Adaptive Technology: Field selectable; capable of self-adjusting sensitivity and time
delay according to conditions.
9.Compatibility (Non-Dimming Sensors): Suitable for controlling incandescent lighting,
low-voltage lighting with electronic and magnetic transformers, fluorescent lighting with
electronic and magnetic ballasts, and fractional motor loads, with no minimum load
requirements.
10.Load Rating for Line Voltage Vacancy Sensors: As required to control the load indicated
on drawings.
C.Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:
1.All Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:
a.Description: Low profile occupancy sensors designed for ceiling installation.
b.Provide low voltage units, for use with separate compatible accessory power packs
or line voltage units with self contained relay as indicated per plans.
c.Provide field selectable setting for disabling LED motion detector visual indicator.
d.Sensor to be manual-on/automatic-off.
e.Finish: White unless otherwise indicated.
2.Passive Infrared (PIR) Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:
a.Standard Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 450 square
feet at a mounting height of 9 feet, with a field of view of 360 degrees.
1)Products:
(a)Acuity Controls CM Family.
D.Power Packs for Low Voltage Vacancy Sensors:
1.Description: Plenum rated, self-contained low voltage class 2 transformer and relay
compatible with specified low voltage occupancy sensors for switching of line voltage
loads.
2.Provide quantity and configuration of power and slave packs with all associated wiring
and accessories as required to control the load indicated on drawings.
3.Input Supply Voltage: Dual rated for 120/277 V ac.
4.Load Rating: As required to control the load indicated on drawings.
2.03 TIME SWITCHES
A.Manufacturers:
1.Intermatic, Inc: www.intermatic.com/#sle.
2.Tork, a division of NSI Industries LLC: www.tork.com/#sle.
B.Digital Electronic Time Switches:
1.Description: Factory-assembled solid state programmable controller with LCD display,
listed and labeled as complying with UL 916 or UL 917.
2.Program Capability:
a.Astronomic Time Switches: Single channel, capable of different schedule for each
day of the week with additional holiday schedule available to override normal
schedule for selected days and field-configurable astronomic feature to automatically
adjust for seasonal changes in sunrise and sunset times.
3.Schedule Capacity: Not less than 16 programmable on/off operations.
4.Provide automatic daylight savings time and leap year compensation.
5.Provide power outage backup to retain programming and maintain clock.
6.Manual override: Capable of overriding current schedule both permanently and
temporarily until next scheduled event.
7.Input Supply Voltage: As indicated on the drawings.
8.Output Switch Configuration: As required to control the load indicated on drawings.
9.Output Switch Configuration: SPST dry unpowered maintained contacts.
10.Output Switch Contact Ratings: As required to control the load indicated on drawings.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260923 - 4 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
11.Provide lockable enclosure; environmental type per NEMA 250 as specified for the
following installation locations:
a.Outdoor locations: Type 3R.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B.Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and
are properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.
C.Verify that openings for outlet boxes are neatly cut and will be completely covered by devices
or wall plates.
D.Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting.
E.Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to
lighting control devices.
F.Verify that the service voltage and ratings of lighting control devices are appropriate for the
service voltage and load requirements at the location to be installed.
G.Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
B.Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.Install lighting control devices in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and, where
applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless
otherwise indicated.
B.Install lighting control devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.Unless otherwise indicated, connect lighting control device grounding terminal or conductor to
branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.
D.Install lighting control devices plumb and level, and held securely in place.
E.Where required and not furnished with lighting control device, provide wall plate in accordance
with Section 262726.
F.Provide required supports in accordance with Section 260529.
G.Where applicable, install lighting control devices and associated wall plates to fit completely
flush to mounting surface with no gaps and rough opening completely covered without strain
on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized rough
openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement.
H.Identify lighting control devices in accordance with Section 260553.
I.Occupancy Sensor Locations:
1.Location Adjustments: Within the design intent, reasonably minor adjustments to
locations may be made in order to optimize coverage and avoid conflicts or problems
affecting coverage.
2.Location Adjustments: Locations indicated are diagrammatic and only intended to
indicate which rooms or areas require devices. Provide quantity and locations as required
for complete coverage of respective room or area based on manufacturer's
recommendations for installed devices.
J.Unless otherwise indicated, install switches on load side of power packs so that switch does
not turn off power pack.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
260923 - 5 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B.See Division 1 Specifications for additional requirements.
C.Inspect each lighting control device for damage and defects.
D.Test occupancy sensors to verify proper operation, including time delays and ambient light
thresholds where applicable. Verify optimal coverage for entire room or area. Record test
results in written report to be included with submittals.
E.Test time switches to verify proper operation.
F.Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective lighting control devices.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A.Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
B.Adjust occupancy sensor settings to minimize undesired activations while optimizing energy
savings, and to achieve desired function as indicated or as directed by Architect.
C.Where indicated or as directed by Architect, install factory masking material or adjust integral
blinders on passive infrared (PIR) and dual technology occupancy sensor lenses to block
undesired motion detection.
D.Adjust time switch settings to achieve desired operation schedule as indicated or as directed
by Architect. Record settings in written report to be included with submittals.
3.06 CLEANING
A.Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match
original factory finish.
3.07 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A.Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of lighting control devices to Architect, and
correct deficiencies or make adjustments as directed.
B.Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation, adjustment, programming, and maintenance
of lighting control devices.
1.Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with
additional training materials as required.
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
262416 - 1 PANELBOARDS
SECTION 262416
PANELBOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Lighting and appliance panelboards.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
B.Section 260529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
C.Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.
B.NECA 407 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards; 2015.
C.NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2014.
D.NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards; 2011.
E.NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of
Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less; 2013.
F.NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;
2017.
G.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
H.UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
I.UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
J.UL 67 - Panelboards; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
K.UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker
Enclosures; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Coordination:
1.Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment,
or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working
clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.
2.Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance
requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.
3.Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the
conductors to be installed.
4.Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain
direction before proceeding with work.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.See Division 1 Specifications for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for
panelboards, enclosures, overcurrent protective devices, and other installed components and
accessories.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
262416 - 2 PANELBOARDS
C.Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity,
overcurrent protective device arrangement and sizes, short circuit current ratings, conduit
entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories.
D.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation, and installation of product.
E.Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of panelboards and actual
installed circuiting arrangements.
F.Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1.See Section 016000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2.See Division 1 Specifications for additional provisions.
3.Panelboard Keys: Two of each different key.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
C.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
D.Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and NECA 407.
B.Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas
or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
C.Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to
panelboard internal components, enclosure, and finish.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.Maintain ambient temperature within the following limits during and after installation of
panelboards:
1.Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com.
B.General Electric Company: www.geindustrial.com.
C.Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us.
D.Source Limitations: Furnish panelboards and associated components produced by the same
manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for this project and obtained
from a single supplier.
2.02 PANELBOARDS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
B.Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the
following service conditions:
1.Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
262416 - 3 PANELBOARDS
2.Ambient Temperature:
a.Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees
F.
C.Short Circuit Current Rating:
1.Provide panelboards with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available fault
current at the installed location as indicated on the drawings.
D.Mains: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the
installation.
E.Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Replaceable without disturbing adjacent devices.
F.Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 67 temperature rise requirements.
1.Provide fully rated neutral bus unless otherwise indicated, with a suitable lug for each
feeder or branch circuit requiring a neutral connection.
2.Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each panelboard, with a suitable lug for
each feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
G.Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.
H.Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E.
1.Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the
following installation locations:
a.Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1.
2.Boxes: Galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated.
a.Provide wiring gutters sized to accommodate the conductors to be installed.
3.Fronts:
a.Fronts for Surface-Mounted Enclosures: Same dimensions as boxes.
4.Lockable Doors: All locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated.
I.Future Provisions: Prepare all unused spaces for future installation of devices including
bussing, connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions.
J.Load centers are not acceptable.
2.03 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS
A.Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch circuit
type, circuit breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings,
configurations and features as indicated on the drawings.
B.Conductor Terminations:
1.Main and Neutral Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper
conductors.
2.Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical.
C.Bussing:
1.Phase Bus Connections: Arranged for sequential phasing of overcurrent protective
devices.
2.Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Copper.
3.Ground Bus Material: Aluminum or copper.
D.Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic bolt-on type unless otherwise indicated.
E.Enclosures:
1.Provide surface-mounted enclosures as indicated.
2.Fronts: Provide door-in-door trim with hinged cover for access to load terminals and
wiring gutters, and separate lockable hinged door with concealed hinges for access to
overcurrent protective device handles without exposing live parts.
3.Provide clear plastic circuit directory holder mounted on inside of door.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
262416 - 4 PANELBOARDS
F.Additional Labeling:
1.Provide Manufacturer Arc Flash hazard warning label
2.04 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A.Molded Case Circuit Breakers:
1.Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating circuit
breakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FS W-C-375
where applicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.
2.Interrupting Capacity:
a.Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short
circuit current rating indicated.
b.Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less
than the short circuit current rating indicated.
3.Conductor Terminations:
a.Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors.
4.Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time tripping
element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element for short
circuit protection.
5.Do not use tandem circuit breakers.
6.Do not use handle ties in lieu of multi-pole circuit breakers.
2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.Factory test panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B.Verify that the ratings and configurations of the panelboards and associated components are
consistent with the indicated requirements.
C.Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive panelboards.
D.Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
B.Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.Install panelboards in accordance with NECA 407 and NEMA PB 1.1.
D.Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and NFPA 70.
E.Provide required supports in accordance with Section 260529.
F.Install panelboards plumb.
G.Mount panelboards such that the highest position of any operating handle for circuit breakers
or switches does not exceed 79 inches above the floor or working platform.
H.Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 260526.
I.Install all field-installed branch devices, components, and accessories.
J.Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in panelboards.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.See Division 1 Specifications for additional requirements.
B.Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
262416 - 5 PANELBOARDS
C.Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section
7.6.1.1 for all main circuit breakers and circuit breakers larger than _____ amperes. Tests
listed as optional are not required.
D.Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective panelboards or associated
components.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A.Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended
torque settings.
B.Adjust alignment of panelboard fronts.
3.05 CLEANING
A.Clean dirt and debris from panelboard enclosures and components according to
manufacturer's instructions.
B.Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
262726 - 1 WIRING DEVICES
SECTION 262726
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Wall switches.
B.Wall dimmers.
C.Receptacles.
D.Wall plates.
E.Floor box service fittings.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 260533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.
B.Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.FS W-C-596 - Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for; 2017h.
B.FS W-S-896 - Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush-mounted (General Specification);
2017g.
C.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.
D.NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; 2010.
E.NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2015).
F.NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Specifications; 2016.
G.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
H.UL 20 - General-Use Snap Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
I.UL 498 - Attachment Plugs and Receptacles; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
J.UL 514D - Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
K.UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
L.UL 1472 - Solid-State Dimming Controls; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Coordination:
1.Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc.
installed under other sections or by others.
2.Coordinate wiring device ratings and configurations with the electrical requirements of
actual equipment to be installed.
3.Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes for wall switches with actual installed door
swings.
4.Coordinate the installation and preparation of uneven surfaces, such as split face block,
to provide suitable surface for installation of wiring devices.
5.Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain
direction prior to proceeding with work.
B.Sequencing:
1.Do not install wiring devices until final surface finishes and painting are complete.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
262726 - 2 WIRING DEVICES
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.See Division 1 Specifications for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and
configurations.
C.Field Quality Control Test Reports.
D.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation, and installation of product.
E.Operation and Maintenance Data:
F.Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of wiring devices.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
C.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
D.Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
E.Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A.Store in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging until ready for installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WIRING DEVICE APPLICATIONS
A.Provide wiring devices suitable for intended use and with ratings adequate for load served.
B.For single receptacles installed on an individual branch circuit, provide receptacle with ampere
rating not less than that of the branch circuit.
C.Provide weather resistant GFCI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for receptacles
installed outdoors or in damp or wet locations.
D.Provide GFCI protection for receptacles installed within 6 feet of sinks.
E.Unless noted otherwise, do not use combination switch/receptacle devices.
2.02 WIRING DEVICE FINISHES
A.Provide wiring device finishes as described below unless otherwise indicated.
B.Wiring Devices Installed in Finished Spaces: White with white nylon wall plate.
C.Wiring Devices Installed in Unfinished Spaces: Gray with galvanized steel wall plate.
D.Flush Floor Box Service Fittings: Gray wiring devices with aluminum cover and ring/flange.
2.03 WALL SWITCHES
A.Manufacturers:
1.Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell.com/#sle.
2.Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com.
3.Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
262726 - 3 WIRING DEVICES
B.Wall Switches - General Requirements: AC only, quiet operating, general-use snap switches
with silver alloy contacts, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as
complying with UL 20 and where applicable, FS W-S-896; types as indicated on the drawings.
1.Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring and screw actuated binding clamp for
back wiring with separate ground terminal screw.
C.Standard Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with standard toggle
type switch actuator and maintained contacts; single pole single throw, double pole single
throw, three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings.
2.04 WALL DIMMERS
A.Manufacturers:
1.Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com.
2.Lutron Electronics Company, Inc: www.lutron.com/sle.
3.Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us
B.Wall Dimmers - General Requirements: Solid-state with continuous full-range even control
following square law dimming curve, integral radio frequency interference filtering, power
failure preset memory, air gap switch accessible without removing wall plate, complying with
NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 1472; types and ratings
suitable for load controlled as indicated on the drawings.
C. Control: Slide control type with separate on/off switch.
D. Power Rating, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required to Control the Load Indicated on the
Drawings:
2.05 RECEPTACLES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell.com/#sle.
2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com.
3. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc: www.lutron.com/sle.
4. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us
B. Receptacles - General Requirements: Self-grounding, complying with NEMA WD 1 and
NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 498, and where applicable, FS W-C-596; types
as indicated on the drawings.
1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring or screw actuated binding clamp for
back wiring with separate ground terminal screw.
2. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6.
C. Convenience Receptacles:
1. Standard Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA
5-20R; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.
D. GFCI Receptacles:
1. GFCI Receptacles - General Requirements: Self-testing, with feed-through protection
and light to indicate ground fault tripped condition and loss of protection; listed as
complying with UL 943, class A.
a. Provide test and reset buttons of same color as device.
2. Standard GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA
5-20R, rectangular decorator style.
2.06 WALL PLATES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com.
2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com.
3. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc: www.lutron.com/sle.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
262726 - 4 WIRING DEVICES
4. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us
B. Wall Plates: Comply with UL 514D.
1. Configuration: One piece cover as required for quantity and types of corresponding
wiring devices.
2. Size: Standard.
3. Screws: Metal with slotted heads finished to match wall plate finish.
C. Nylon Wall Plates: Smooth finish, high-impact thermoplastic.
D. Galvanized Steel Wall Plates: Rounded corners and edges, with corrosion resistant screws.
2.07 FLOOR BOX SERVICE FITTINGS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell.com/#sle.
2. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.
3. Wiremold, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us
B. Description: Service fittings compatible with floor boxes provided under Section 260533.16
with components, adapters, and trims required for complete installation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and
are properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.
C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.
D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting.
E. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to
wiring devices.
F. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and, where applicable,
NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 260533.16 as required for
installation of wiring devices provided under this section.
C. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent
devices exceeds 300 V.
E. Where required, connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 6 inches long. Do not
connect more than one conductor to wiring device terminals.
F. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screw terminal and
tightening to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use push-in
pressure terminals that do not rely on screw-actuated binding.
G. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit
equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
262726 - 5 WIRING DEVICES
H. Provide GFCI receptacles with integral GFCI protection at each location indicated. Do not use
feed-through wiring to protect downstream devices.
I. Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place.
J. Install wall switches with OFF position down.
K. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as
instructed by manufacturer.
L. Do not share neutral conductor on branch circuits utilizing wall dimmers.
M. Install vertically mounted receptacles with grounding pole on top and horizontally mounted
receptacles with grounding pole on left.
N. Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely
covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or
improperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this
requirement.
O. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed
or designated for future use.
P. Identify wiring devices in accordance with Section 260553.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Division 1 Specifications for additional requirements.
B. Inspect each wiring device for damage and defects.
C. Operate each wall switch, wall dimmer, and fan speed controller with circuit energized to verify
proper operation.
D. Test each receptacle to verify operation and proper polarity.
E. Test each GFCI receptacle for proper tripping operation according to manufacturer's
instructions.
F. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective wiring devices.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match
original factory finish.
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
262813 - 1 FUSES
SECTION 262813
FUSES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Fuses.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 262816.16 - Enclosed Switches: Fusible switches.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses; 2012.
B.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
C.UL 248-1 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 1: General Requirements; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
D.UL 248-12 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 12: Class R Fuses; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Coordination:
1.Coordinate fuse clips furnished in equipment provided under other sections for
compatibility with indicated fuses.
a.Fusible Enclosed Switches: See Section 262816.16.
2.Coordinate fuse requirements according to manufacturer's recommendations and
nameplate data for actual equipment to be installed.
3.Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain
direction before proceeding with work.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.See Division 1 Specifications for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard data sheets including voltage and current
ratings, interrupting ratings, time-current curves, and current limitation curves.
C.Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1.See Division 1 Specifications for additional provisions.
2.Extra Fuses: One set(s) of three for each type and size installed.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
C.Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.Bussmann, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com.
B.Littelfuse, Inc: www.littelfuse.com.
C.Mersen: ep-us.mersen.com.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
262813 - 2 FUSES
2.02 APPLICATIONS
A.Individual Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time-delay.
2.03 FUSES
A.Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
B.Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide fuses for all fusible equipment as required
for a complete operating system.
C.Provide fuses of the same type, rating, and manufacturer within the same switch.
D.Comply with UL 248-1.
E.Unless otherwise indicated, provide cartridge type fuses complying with NEMA FU 1, Class
and ratings as indicated.
F.Voltage Rating: Suitable for circuit voltage.
G.Class R Fuses: Comply with UL 248-12.
1.Class RK1, Time-Delay Fuses:
H.Provide the following accessories where indicated or where required to complete installation:
1.Fuseholders: Compatible with indicated fuses.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify that fuse ratings are consistent with circuit voltage and manufacturer's
recommendations and nameplate data for equipment.
B.Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.Do not install fuses until circuits are ready to be energized.
B.Install fuses with label oriented such that manufacturer, type, and size are easily read.
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
262913 - 1 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
SECTION 262913
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Enclosed NEMA controllers for low-voltage (600 V and less) applications:
1.Magnetic motor starters.
2.Manual motor starters.
B.Control accessories:
1.Pilot devices.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
B.Section 260529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
C.Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
D.Section 262813 - Fuses: Fuses for fusible switches.
1.Includes requirements for spare fuses and spare fuse cabinets.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.IEEE C57.13 - IEEE Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers; 2016.
B.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.
C.NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2014.
D.NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays
Rated 600 Volts; 2000, with Errata (2008).
E.NEMA ICS 5 - Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot Devices; 2017.
F.NEMA ICS 6 - Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures; 1993 (Reaffirmed 2016).
G.NEMA KS 1 - Heavy Duty Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches (600 Volts Maximum); 2013.
H.NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;
2017.
I.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
J.UL 98 - Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
K.UL 60947-1 - Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear - Part 1: General Rules; Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
L.UL 60947-4-1 - Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear - Part 4-1: Contactors and
Motor-starters - Electromechanical Contactors and Motor-starters; Current Edition, Including
All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Coordination:
1.Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment,
or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working
clearances required by NFPA 70.
2.Coordinate the work to provide motor controllers and associated overload relays suitable
for use with the actual motors to be installed.
3.Coordinate the work to provide controllers and associated wiring suitable for interface
with control devices to be installed.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
262913 - 2 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
4.Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance
requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.
5.Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the
conductors to be installed.
6.Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain
direction before proceeding with work.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.See Division 1 Specifications for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for motor
controllers, enclosures, overcurrent protective devices, and other installed components and
accessories.
C.Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, voltage, controller sizes, short circuit current ratings,
conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories.
1.Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of enclosed controllers and adjacent
equipment with all required clearances indicated.
2.Include wiring diagrams showing all factory and field connections.
3.Clearly indicate whether proposed short circuit current ratings are fully rated or, where
acceptable, series rated systems.
4.Include documentation of listed series ratings upon request.
D.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation, and installation of product.
E.Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of controllers and final
equipment settings.
1.Include nameplate data of actual installed motors and associated overload relay
selections and settings.
F.Maintenance Data: Include information on replacement parts and recommended maintenance
procedures and intervals.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
C.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
D.Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas
or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
B.Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to
internal components, enclosure, and finish.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.Maintain field conditions within required service conditions during and after installation.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
262913 - 3 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.ABB/GE: www.geindustrial.com/#sle.
B.Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com/#sle.
C.Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us/#sle.
2.02 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
A.Provide enclosed controller assemblies consisting of all required components, control power
transformers, instrumentation and control wiring, accessories, etc. as necessary for a
complete operating system.
B.Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
C.Description: Enclosed controllers complying with NEMA ICS 2, and listed and labeled as
complying with UL 60947-1 and UL 60947-4-1; ratings, configurations and features as
indicated on the drawings.
D.Service Conditions:
1.Provide controllers and associated components suitable for operation under the following
service conditions without derating:
a.Altitude:
1)Class 1 Km Equipment (devices utilizing power semiconductors, e.g. variable
frequency controllers): Less than 3,300 feet.
2)Class 2 Km Equipment (electromagnetic and manual devices): Less than 6,600
feet.
b.Ambient Temperature: Between 32 degrees F and 104 degrees F.
2.Provide controllers and associated components suitable for operation at indicated ratings
under the service conditions at the installed location.
E.Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.
F.Enclosures:
1.Comply with NEMA ICS 6.
2.Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the
following installation locations:
a.Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1 or Type 12.
b.Outdoor Locations: Type 3R or Type 4.
3.Finish: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.
G.Instrument Transformers:
1.Comply with IEEE C57.13.
2.Select suitable ratio, burden, and accuracy as required for connected devices.
3.Current Transformers: Connect secondaries to shorting terminal blocks.
4.Potential Transformers: Include primary and secondary fuses with disconnecting means.
H.Magnetic Motor Starters: Combination type unless otherwise indicated.
1.Combination Magnetic Motor Starters: NEMA ICS 2, Class A combination motor
controllers with magnetic contactor(s), externally operable disconnect and overload
relay(s).
2.Configuration: Full-voltage non-reversing unless otherwise indicated.
3.Minimum Starter Size: NEMA 0.
4.Use of non-standard starter sizes smaller than specified standard NEMA sizes is not
permitted.
5.Disconnects: Disconnect switch type.
a.Disconnect Switches: Fusible type unless otherwise indicated.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
262913 - 4 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
b.Provide externally operable handle with means for locking in the OFF position.
Provide safety interlock to prevent opening the cover with the disconnect in the ON
position with capability of overriding interlock for testing purposes.
c.Provide auxiliary interlock for disconnection of external control power sources where
applicable.
6.Overload Relays: Bimetallic thermal type unless otherwise indicated.
7.Pilot Devices Required:
a.Furnish local pilot devices for each unit as specified below unless otherwise
indicated on drawings.
b.Single-Speed, Non-Reversing Starters:
1)Pushbuttons: START-STOP.
2)Selector Switches: HAND/OFF/AUTO.
3)Indicating Lights: Red ON, Green OFF.
I.Manual Motor Starters:
1.Description: NEMA ICS 2, Class A manually-operated motor controllers with overload
relay(s).
2.Configuration: Non-reversing unless otherwise indicated.
3.Fractional-Horsepower Manual Motor Starters:
a.Furnish with toggle operator.
b.Overload Relays: Bimetallic or melting alloy thermal type.
2.03 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A.Overload Relays:
1.Provide overload relays and, where applicable, associated current elements/heaters,
selected according to actual installed motor nameplate data, in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations and NFPA 70; include consideration for motor service
factor and ambient temperature correction, where applicable.
2.Inverse-Time Trip Class Rating: Class 20 unless otherwise indicated or required.
3.Trip-free operation.
4.Visible trip indication.
5.Resettable.
a.Employ manual reset unless otherwise indicated.
b.Do not employ automatic reset with two-wire control.
6.Bimetallic Thermal Overload Relays:
a.Interchangeable current elements/heaters.
b.Adjustable trip; plus/minus 10 percent of nominal, minimum.
c.Trip test function.
7.Melting Alloy Thermal Overload Relays:
a.Interchangeable current elements/heaters.
B.Fusible Disconnect Switches:
1.Description: Quick-make, quick-break, dead-front fusible switch units complying with
NEMA KS 1, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 98; ratings, configurations, and
features as indicated on the drawings.
2. Fuse Clips: As required to accept indicated fuses.
a. Where NEMA Class R fuses are installed, provide rejection feature to prevent
installation of fuses other than Class R.
3. Provide externally operable handle with means for locking in the OFF position. Provide
means for locking switch cover in the closed position. Provide safety interlock to prevent
opening the cover with the switch in the ON position with capability of overriding interlock
for testing purposes.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
262913 - 5 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
2.04 CONTROL ACCESSORIES
A. Pilot Devices:
1. Comply with NEMA ICS 5; heavy-duty type.
2. Pushbuttons: Unless otherwise indicated, provide momentary, non-illuminated type with
flush button operator; normally open or normally closed as indicated or as required.
3. Selector Switches: Unless otherwise indicated, provide maintained, non-illuminated type
with knob operator; number of switch positions as indicated or as required.
4. Indicating Lights: Push-to-test type unless otherwise indicated.
5. Provide LED lamp source for indicating lights and illuminated devices.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that ratings of enclosed controllers are consistent with the indicated requirements.
B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive enclosed controllers.
C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install controllers in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and NFPA 70.
D. Provide required support and attachment components in accordance with Section 260529.
E. Install enclosed controllers plumb and level.
F. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 260526.
G. Install all field-installed devices, components, and accessories.
H. Provide fuses complying with Section 262813 for fusible switches as indicated.
I. Where accessories are not self-powered, provide control power source as indicated or as
required to complete installation.
J. Set field-adjustable controllers and associated components according to installed motor
requirements, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and NFPA 70.
K. Identify enclosed controllers in accordance with Section 260553.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Division 1 Specifications for additional requirements.
B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
C. Motor Starters: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.16.1.1. Tests
listed as optional are not required.
D. Fusible Switches: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5.1.1.
E. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective enclosed controllers or associated
components.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended
torque settings.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from controller enclosures and components according to manufacturer's
instructions.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
262913 - 6 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
262923 - 1 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY
MOTOR CONTROLLERS
SECTION 262923
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Variable frequency controllers.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 262813 - Fuses.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.NEMA ICS 7.1 - Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation, and
Operation of Adjustable-Speed Drive Systems; 2014.
B.NEMA ICS 7 - Industrial Control and Systems: Adjustable-Speed Drives; 2014.
C.NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2014.
D.NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;
2017.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.See Division 1 Specifications for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing voltage, controller size, ratings and size of
switching and overcurrent protective devices, short circuit ratings, dimensions, and enclosure
details.
C.Shop Drawings: Indicate front and side views of enclosures with overall dimensions and
weights shown; conduit entrance locations and requirements; and nameplate legends.
1.A list of all factory and field setpoint values.
2.Addressing, sequence of operations, number of I/O hardwire connections to BACS, to
Fire Alarm System, and the configuration that is loaded by keypad or PC
3.Power three-line and complete logic/controls drawings.
D.Test Reports: The drives shall be fully functionally tested before shipment. The test report is
not required unless specifically requested.
E.Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by
testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,
preparation, and installation of product.
F.Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate start-up inspection findings.
G.Operation Data: NEMA ICS 7.1. Include instructions for starting and operating controllers,
and describe operating limits that may result in hazardous or unsafe conditions.
H.Maintenance Data: NEMA ICS 7.1. Include routine preventive maintenance schedule.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience and with service facilities within
100 miles of Project.
B.Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
C.Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas
or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
262923 - 2 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY
MOTOR CONTROLLERS
B.Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for
the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosure, and finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.Variable Frequency Motor Controllers:
1.ABB/GE: www.geindustrial.com/#sle.
2.Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com/#sle.
3.Yaskawa: www.yaskawa.com
2.02 DESCRIPTION
A.Variable Frequency Controllers: Enclosed controllers suitable for operating the indicated
loads, in conformance with requirements of NEMA ICS 7. Select unspecified features and
options in accordance with NEMA ICS 3.1.
1.Employ pulse-width-modulated technology with diode bridge front ends and Insulated
Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBT) in the output section that utilize soft switching.
B.Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, suitable for equipment application in places restricted to
persons employed on the premises.
2.03 OPERATING REQUIREMENTS
A.Rated Input Voltage: 208 volts, three phase, 60 Hertz.
B.Displacement Power Factor: Between 1.0 and 0.95, lagging, over entire range of operating
speed and load.
C.Operating Ambient: 0 degrees C to 40 degrees C.
D.Adjustable Carrier Frequency: 0.75 to 15k Hz
E.Volts Per Hertz Adjustment: Plus or minus 10 percent.
F.Current Limit Adjustment: 60 to 110 percent of rated.
G.Acceleration Rate Adjustment: 0.5 to 30 seconds.
H.Deceleration Rate Adjustment: 1 to 30 seconds.
I.Input Signal: 4 to 20 mA DC.
J.Auto restart after a power line transient (over or under voltage, or power loss) when the power
line returns to normal.
K.Auto restart after selected drive faults. The number of restart attempts and time delay
between attempts shall be adjustable at the drive for zero, one or two restarts.
L.All drives shall be capable of accepting external, permissive contacts such as a freezestat,
static pressure safety, or damper end switch. One set of external contacts shall de-energize
the motor whether the drive is in automatic, manual drive, or bypass mode. All drives shall be
capable of issuing commands to all available digital output contacts.
M.All drives shall “on-the-fly” restart into a coasting load. Resynchronization shall not require
more than 150% current. Total time following a one second total power loss to reapply full
accelerating torque shall be one second or less. Process and critical load drives shall be
capable of reapplication of torque in less than 1/2 a second following a one second total power
loss.
2.04 COMPONENTS
A.Display: Provide integral digital display to indicate output voltage, output frequency, and
output current.
B.Status Indicators: Separate indicators for overcurrent, overvoltage, ground fault,
overtemperature, and input power ON.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
262923 - 3 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY
MOTOR CONTROLLERS
C.Furnish HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC selector switch and manual speed control.
D.Include undervoltage release.
E.An as-built drive control schematic (ladder diagram) and parts list (including spare parts) shall
be provided and taped to the inside of the drive cabinet.
F.All drive input and output parameters will be keypad accessible.
G.Keypad display shall be configurable and set up for hertz.
H.Front-of-panel-readable indication of fault type.
I.Auxiliary output dry contacts (2 N/O, 2 N/C each, rated at 10A inductive at 120 VAC) to
indicate: drive run, bypass run or to control devices such as damper open/close.
J.A test card or module for troubleshooting the drive(s) in a building.
K.Emergency Stop: Use dynamic brakes for emergency stop function.
L.Disconnecting Means: Include integral fused disconnect switch on the line side of each
controller.
M.Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes indicated.
2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.Shop inspect and perform standard productions tests for each controller.
B.Make completed controller available for inspection at manufacturer's factory prior to packaging
for shipment. Notify Owner at least 7 days before inspection is allowed.
C.Allow witnessing of factory inspections and tests at manufacturer's test facility. Notify Owner
at least 7 days before inspections and tests are scheduled.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify that surface is suitable for controller installation.
B.Do not install controller until building environment can be maintained within the service
conditions required by the manufacturer.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.Install in accordance with NEMA ICS 7.1 and manufacturer's instructions.
B.Tighten accessible connections and mechanical fasteners after placing controller.
C.Provide fuses in fusible switches; refer to Section 262813 for product requirements.
D.Provide a full set of spare fuses.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 014000.
B.Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Division 1 Specifications.
C.Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
D.Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.17.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A.Make final adjustments to installed controller to assure proper operation of load system.
Obtain performance requirements from installer of driven loads.
3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A.Demonstrate operation of controllers in automatic and manual modes.
B.Start-up services shall be performed by a factory trained service technician/engineer.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
262923 - 4 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY
MOTOR CONTROLLERS
C.Training shall be provided for the Owner’s service personnel at the Owner’s facilities by a
certified factory technician/engineer.
D.A complete as-built wiring diagram shall be permanently affixed to the inside of the drive
control section at the end of commissioning with all field setpoints identified.
E.The factory service technician/engineer shall demonstrate that the VFD unit performs as
designed and meets all required design metrics, including maximum allowable harmonic
distortion (for greater than 10 HP drives). This shall be demonstrated to the owner’s
satisfaction prior to the warranty period going into effect.
F.The local service office shall be staffed by factory trained service technician/engineers within a
100-mile radius of Ithaca.
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
265100 - 1 INTERIOR LIGHTING
SECTION 265100
INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Interior luminaires.
B.Exit signs.
C.Emergency power supply units.
D.Luminaire accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 260533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.
B.Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
C.Section 260923 - Lighting Control Devices: Automatic controls for lighting including
occupancy sensors and outdoor photo controls.
D.Section 262726 - Wiring Devices: Manual wall switches and wall dimmers.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.IES LM-79 - Approved Method: Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State
Lighting Products; 2008.
B.IES LM-80 - Approved Method: Measuring Luminous Flux and Color Maintenance of LED
Packages, Arrays, and Modules; 2015, with Errata (2017).
C.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.
D.NECA/IESNA 500 - Standard for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems; 2006.
E.NECA/IESNA 502 - Standard for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems; 2006.
F.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
G.NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; 2017.
H.UL 924 - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
I.UL 1598 - Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
J.UL 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Coordination:
1.Coordinate the installation of luminaires with mounting surfaces installed under other
sections or by others. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc.
required for mounting. Coordinate compatibility of luminaires and associated trims with
mounting surfaces at installed locations.
2.Coordinate the placement of luminaires with structural members, ductwork, piping,
equipment, diffusers, fire suppression system components, and other potential conflicts
installed under other sections or by others.
3.Coordinate the placement of exit signs with furniture, equipment, signage or other
potential obstructions to visibility installed under other sections or by others.
4.Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain
direction prior to proceeding with work.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
265100 - 2 INTERIOR LIGHTING
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.See Division 1 Specifications for submittal procedures.
B.Shop Drawings:
1.Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard product of
the manufacturer.
2.Provide photometric calculations where luminaires are proposed for substitution upon
request.
C.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including
detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting
requirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, installed accessories, and
ceiling compatibility; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposed
features.
1.LED Luminaires:
a.Include estimated useful life, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data.
D.Field quality control reports.
E.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation, and installation of product.
F.Operation and Maintenance Data: Instructions for each product including information on
replacement parts.
G.Project Record Documents: Record actual connections and locations of luminaires and any
associated remote components.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
C.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A.Receive, handle, and store products according to NECA/IESNA 500 (commercial lighting),
NECA/IESNA 502 (industrial lighting), and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect from damage until ready for
installation.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after
installation.
1.09 WARRANTY
A.See Division 1 Specifications for additional warranty requirements.
B.Provide three year manufacturer warranty for all LED luminaires, including drivers.
C.Provide five year pro-rata warranty for batteries for emergency lighting units.
D.Provide ten year pro-rata warranty for batteries for self-powered exit signs.
E.Provide three year full warranty for emergency power supply units.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
265100 - 3 INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 LUMINAIRE TYPES
A.Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings.
2.02 LUMINAIRES
A.Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B.Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable.
C.Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
D.Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets,
ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and
protect the lamp and distribute the light.
E.Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring,
connectors, hardware, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete
operating system.
F.Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any
damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc.
G.LED Luminaires:
1.Components: UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable.
2.Tested in accordance with IES LM-79 and IES LM-80.
3.LED Estimated Useful Life: Minimum of 50,000 hours at 70 percent lumen maintenance,
calculated based on IES LM-80 test data.
2.03 EXIT SIGNS
A.Manufacturers - Powered and Self-Luminous Signs:
1.Acuity Brands, Inc: www.acuitybrands.com.
2.Cooper Lighting, a division of Cooper Industries: www.cooperindustries.com.
3.Hubbell Lighting, Inc: www.hubbelllighting.com.
4.Philips Lighting North America Corporation; www.lightingproducts.philips.com/#sle.
B.Description: Internally illuminated exit signs with LEDs unless otherwise indicated; complying
with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complying
with UL 924.
1.Number of Faces: Single or double as indicated or as required for the installed location.
2.Directional Arrows: As indicated or as required for the installed location.
C.Self-Powered Exit Signs:
1.Operation: Upon interruption of normal power source or brownout condition exceeding
20 percent voltage drop from nominal, solid-state control automatically switches
connected lamps to integral battery power for minimum of 90 minutes of rated emergency
illumination, and automatically recharges battery upon restoration of normal power
source.
2.Battery: Sealed maintenance-free nickel cadmium unless otherwise indicated.
3.Diagnostics: Provide power status indicator light and accessible integral test switch to
manually activate emergency operation.
4.Provide low-voltage disconnect to prevent battery damage from deep discharge.
5.Self-Diagnostics: Provide units that self-monitor functionality and automatically perform
testing required by NFPA 101 where indicated; provide indicator light(s) to report test and
diagnostic status.
2.04 EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY UNITS
A.Manufacturers:
1.Hubbell Lighting; : www.hubbell.com
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
265100 - 4 INTERIOR LIGHTING
2.Lithonia Lighting; : www.lithonia.com
3.Philips Emergency Lighting/Bodine; : www.bodine.com
4.Manufacturer Limitations: Where possible, for each type of luminaire provide fluorescent
emergency power supply units produced by a single manufacturer.
B.Description: Self-contained LED emergency power supply units suitable for use with indicated
luminaires, complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and
labeled as complying with UL 924.
C.Compatibility:
1.Ballasts: Compatible with electronic, standard magnetic, energy saving, and dimming AC
ballasts, including those with end of lamp life shutdown circuits.
D.Operation: Upon interruption of normal power source, solid-state control automatically
switches connected fixture(s) to the emergency power supply for minimum of 90 minutes of
rated emergency illumination, and automatically recharges battery upon restoration of normal
power source.
E.Battery: Sealed maintenance-free unless otherwise indicated.
F.Diagnostics: Provide accessible and visible multi-chromatic combination test switch/indicator
light to display charge, test, and diagnostic status and to manually activate emergency
operation.
G.Self-Diagnostics: Provide units that self-monitor functionality and automatically perform testing
required by NFPA 101; provide indicator light(s) to report test and diagnostic status and field
selectable audible alert.
H.Operating Temperature: From 32 degrees F to 122 degrees F unless otherwise indicated or
required for the installed location.
I.Accessories:
1.Provide compatible accessory remote combination test switch/indicator light.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A.Stems for Suspended Luminaires: Steel tubing, minimum 1/2" size, factory finished to match
luminaire or field-painted as directed.
B.Threaded Rods for Suspended Luminaires: Zinc-plated steel, minimum 1/4" size, field-painted
as directed.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B.Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and
are properly sized to accommodate conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.
C.Verify that suitable support frames are installed where required.
D.Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to
luminaires.
E.Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
B.Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 260533.16 as required for
installation of luminaires provided under this section.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
265100 - 5 INTERIOR LIGHTING
B.Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
C.Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D.Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 500
(commercial lighting) and NECA 502 (industrial lighting).
E.Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent
luminaires.
F.Suspended Ceiling Mounted Luminaires:
1.Do not use ceiling support system to bear weight of luminaires unless ceiling support
system is certified as suitable to do so.
2.Secure surface-mounted and recessed luminaires to ceiling support channels or framing
members or to building structure.
3.Secure pendant-mounted luminaires to building structure.
4.Secure lay-in luminaires to ceiling support channels using listed safety clips at four
corners.
5.See appropriate Division 9 section where suspended grid ceiling is specified for
additional requirements.
G.Suspended Luminaires:
1.Install using the suspension method indicated, with support lengths and accessories as
required for specified mounting height.
2.Provide minimum of two supports for each luminaire equal to or exceeding 4 feet nominal
length, with no more than 4 feet between supports.
H.Wall-Mounted Luminaires: Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to
center of luminaire.
I.Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.
J.Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
K.Exit Signs:
1.Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to unswitched power from same circuit feeding
normal lighting in same room or area. Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lighting
controls.
2.Install lock-on device on branch circuit breaker serving units.
L.Emergency Power Supply Units:
1.For field-installed units, install inside luminaire unless otherwise indicated. Where
installation inside luminaire is not possible, install on top of luminaire or in remote location
not exceeding manufacturer's recommended maximum conductor length to luminaire.
Provide NEMA 1 enclosure sized as required to hold power supplies.
2.Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to unswitched power from same circuit feeding
normal ballast(s) in luminaire. Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lighting
controls.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B.See Division 1 Specifications for additional requirements.
C.Inspect each product for damage and defects.
D.Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation.
E.Test self-powered exit signs, emergency lighting units, and fluorescent emergency power
supply units to verify proper operation upon loss of normal power supply.
F.Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or
replace excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Architect.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
265100 - 6 INTERIOR LIGHTING
3.05 ADJUSTING
A.Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or as
directed by Architect. Secure locking fittings in place.
B.Exit Signs with Field-Selectable Directional Arrows: Set as indicated or as required to properly
designate egress path as directed by Architect or authority having jurisdiction.
3.06 CLEANING
A.Clean surfaces according to NECA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA 502 (industrial lighting),
and manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt, fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material and
restore finishes to match original factory finish.
3.07 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A.Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of luminaires to Architect, and correct
deficiencies or make adjustments as directed.
B.Just prior to Substantial Completion, replace all lamps that have failed.
3.08 PROTECTION
A.Protect installed luminaires from subsequent construction operations.
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
265600 - 1 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
SECTION 265600
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Exterior luminaires.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 260533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.
B.Section 260923 - Lighting Control Devices: Automatic controls for lighting including outdoor
motion sensors, time switches, and outdoor photo controls.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.IES LM-79 - Approved Method: Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State
Lighting Products; 2008.
B.IES LM-80 - Approved Method: Measuring Luminous Flux and Color Maintenance of LED
Packages, Arrays, and Modules; 2015, with Errata (2017).
C.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.
D.NECA/IESNA 501 - Standard for Installing Exterior Lighting Systems; 2006.
E.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
F.UL 1598 - Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
G.UL 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Coordination:
1.Coordinate placement of poles and associated foundations with utilities, curbs, sidewalks,
trees, walls, fences, striping, etc. installed under other sections or by others. Coordinate
elevation to obtain specified foundation height.
2.Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain
direction prior to proceeding with work.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.See Division 1 Specifications for submittal procedures.
B.Shop Drawings:
C.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including
detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting
requirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, weight, effective
projected area (EPA), and installed accessories; include model number nomenclature clearly
marked with all proposed features.
1.LED Luminaires:
a.Include estimated useful life, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data.
b.Include IES LM-79 test report upon request.
D.Field Quality Control Reports.
1.Include test report indicating measured illumination levels.
E.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation, installation, and starting of product.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
265600 - 2 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
F.Operation and Maintenance Data: Instructions for each product including information on
replacement parts.
G.Project Record Documents: Record actual connections and locations of pole foundations,
luminaires, and any pull or junction boxes.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
C.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
D.Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Receive, handle, and store products according to NECA/IESNA 501 and manufacturer's
written instructions.
B.Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect from damage until ready for
installation.
1.08 WARRANTY
A.Provide three year manufacturer warranty for all LED luminaires, including drivers.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 LUMINAIRE TYPES
A.Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings.
2.02 LUMINAIRES
A.Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B.Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable.
C.Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
D.Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets,
ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and
protect the lamp and distribute the light.
E.Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring,
connectors, hardware, poles, foundations, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for
a complete operating system.
F.Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any
damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc.
G.LED Luminaires:
1.Components: UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable.
2.Tested in accordance with IES LM-79 and IES LM-80.
3.LED Estimated Useful Life: Minimum of 50,000 hours at 70 percent lumen maintenance,
calculated based on IES LM-80 test data.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
265600 - 3 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
B.Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and
are properly sized to accommodate conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.
C.Verify that suitable support frames are installed where required.
D.Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to
luminaires.
E.Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
B.Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 260533.16 as required for
installation of luminaires provided under this section.
B.Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
C.Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D.Install luminaires in accordance with NECA/IESNA 501.
E.Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent
luminaires.
F.Wall-Mounted Luminaires: Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to
center of luminaire.
G.Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.
H.Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
I.Install lamps in each luminaire.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.See Division 1 Specifications for additional requirements.
B.Inspect each product for damage and defects.
C.Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation.
D.Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or
replace excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Architect.
E.Measure illumination levels at night with calibrated meters to verify conformance with
performance requirements. Record test results in written report to be included with submittals.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A.Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or as
directed by Architect. Secure locking fittings in place.
3.06 CLEANING
A.Clean surfaces according to NECA/IESNA 501 and manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt,
fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material and restore finishes to match original factory finish.
3.07 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A.Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of luminaires to Architect, and correct
deficiencies or make adjustments as directed.
B.Just prior to Substantial Completion, replace all lamps that have failed.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
265600 - 4 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
3.08 PROTECTION
A.Protect installed luminaires from subsequent construction operations.
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
271005 - 1 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR
VOICE AND DATA -
INSIDE-PLANT
SECTION 271005
STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND DATA - INSIDE-PLANT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Communications system design requirements.
B.Communications pathways.
C.Copper cable and terminations.
D.Communications outlets.
E.Communications identification.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 260533.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems.
B.Section 260533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.
C.Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.NECA/BICSI 568 - Standard for Installing Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling;
2006.
B.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
C.TIA-568.2 - Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standards;
2009c, with Addendum (2016).
D.TIA-607 - Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer
Premises; 2015c, with Addendum (2017).
E.TIA-607-C - Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer
Premises; 2015c, with Addendum (2017).
F.UL 444 - Communications Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
G.UL 514C - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Coordination:
1.Coordinate requirements for service entrance and entrance facilities with Communications
Service Provider.
2.Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of other utilities or obstructions
within the spaces dedicated for communications equipment.
3.Coordinate arrangement of communications equipment with the dimensions and clearance
requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.
4.Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain
direction before proceeding with work.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.See Division 1 Specifications for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each
product.
C.Shop Drawings: Show compliance with requirements on isometric schematic diagram of
network layout, showing cable routings, telecommunication closets, rack and enclosure layouts
and locations, service entrance, and grounding, prepared and approved by BICSI Registered
Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD).
D.Evidence of qualifications for installer.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
271005 - 2 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR
VOICE AND DATA -
INSIDE-PLANT
E.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation, installation, and operation of product.
F.Test Plan: Complete and detailed plan, with list of test equipment, procedures for inspection
and testing, and intended test date; submit at least 60 days prior to intended test date.
G.Field Test Reports.
H.Project Record Documents: Prepared and approved by BICSI Registered Communications
Distribution Designer (RCDD).
1.Record actual locations of outlet boxes and distribution frames.
2.Show as-installed color coding, pair assignment, polarization, and cross-connect layout.
3.Identify distribution frames and equipment rooms by room number on contract drawings.
I.Operation and Maintenance Data: List of all components with part numbers, sources of supply,
and operation and maintenance instructions; include copy of project record documents.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
B.Manufacturer Qualifications: At least 3 years experience manufacturing products of the type
specified.
C.Installer Qualifications: A company having at least 3 years experience in the installation and
testing of the type of system specified, and:
1.Employing a BICSI Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD).
2.Supervisors and installers factory certified by manufacturers of products to be installed.
D.Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
E.Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B.Keep stored products clean and dry.
1.08 WARRANTY
A.See Division 1 Specifications for additional warranty requirements.
B.Correct defective Work within a 2 year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SYSTEM DESIGN
A.Provide a complete permanent system of cabling and pathways for voice and data
communications, including cables, conduits and wireways, pull wires, support structures,
enclosures and cabinets, and outlets.
1.Provide fixed cables and pathways that comply with NFPA 70 and TIA-607 and are UL
listed or third party independent testing laboratory certified.
2.Provide connection devices that are rated for operation under conditions of 32 to 140
degrees F at relative humidity of 0 to 95 percent, noncondensing.
3.In this project, the term plenum is defined as return air spaces above ceilings, inside ducts,
under raised floors, and other air-handling spaces.
B.Cabling to Outlets: Specified horizontal cabling, wired in star topology to distribution frame
located at center hub of star; also referred to as "links".
2.02 PATHWAYS
A.Conduit: As specified in Section 260533.13; provide pull cords in all conduit.
1.1" minimum size conduit for all data cabling
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
271005 - 3 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR
VOICE AND DATA -
INSIDE-PLANT
2.03 COPPER CABLE AND TERMINATIONS
A.Provide cables with lead content less than 300 parts per million.
B.Copper Horizontal Cable:
1.Description: 100 ohm, balanced twisted pair cable complying with TIA-568.2 and listed
and labeled as complying with UL 444.
2.Cable Type - Data: TIA-568.2 Category 6 UTP (unshielded twisted pair); 23 AWG.
3.Cable Type - Wireless access point: TIA-568.2 Category 6A UTP (unshielded twisted
pair); 23 AWG..
4.Cable Capacity: 4-pair.
5.Cable Applications:
a.Plenum Applications: Use listed NFPA 70 Type CMP plenum cable.
b.Riser Applications: Use listed NFPA 70 Type CMR riser cable or Type CMP plenum
cable.
c.General Purpose Applications: Use listed NFPA 70 Type CM/CMG general purpose
cable, Type CMR riser cable, or Type CMP plenum cable.
6.Cable Jacket Color -Data Cable: Green.
7.Product(s):
a.Category 6:
1)CommScope-Systimax 1071E
2)Berk Tek Lanmark 1000
3)Panduit GenSPEED 6000
4)Superior Essex DataGain
b.Category 6a:
1)CommScope-Systimax 1091B
2)Berk Tek Lanmark 10G2
C.Cable Terminations:
1.Each Category 6 UTP cable shall be terminated with an 8 position 8 wire T568A coded
Category 6 modular jack.
a.Manufactured by Panduit. Model number CJ688TG modules. Substitutions not
allowed.
2.Each Category 6A UTP cable shall be terminated with an 8 position 8 wire T568A coded
Category 6A modular jack.
a.Manufactured by Panduit. Model number CJ6X88TG modules. Substitutions not
allowed.
2.04 COMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS
A.Outlet Boxes: Comply with Section 260533.16.
1.Provide depth as required to accommodate cable manufacturer's recommended minimum
conductor bend radius.
2.Minimum Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated:
a.Data Outlets: 4 inch square by 2-1/8 inch deep (100 by 54 mm) trade size.
B.Wireless Access Points:
1.Install a 4" x 4" x 2,25" back box with double gang plaster ring finished flush to wall.
2.Standard installation height of 90" AFF and 24" away from lighting fixtures
3.Provide 1" conduit to nearest cable tray to provide a pathway for up to two category 6A
cables.
4.Provide category 6A cabling to CIT room through existing cable tray
C.Wall Plates:
1.Comply with system design standards and UL 514C.
2.Accepts modular jacks/inserts.
3.Capacity:
a.Data Outlets: 2 ports unless otherwise noted on drawings
4.Manufacturer: Panduit
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
271005 - 4 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR
VOICE AND DATA -
INSIDE-PLANT
a.Accepts Mini-Com UTP Jack Modules
1)Category 6 Module: CJ688TG
b.Provide Panduit Mini-Com Executive series Faceplate and flat inserts
1)Match wiring device and wall plate finishes specified in Section 262726.
2)Exception: Where an executive series faceplate will not physically fit the
application, provide Mini-Com 2 Position "106" series frame with required duplex
faceplate and mounting hardware.
2.05 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A.Comply with Section 260553.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A.Comply with Communication Service Provider requirements.
B.Grounding and Bonding: Perform in accordance with TIA-607-C and NFPA 70.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS
A.Install pathways with the following minimum clearances:
1.36 inches from motors, generators, frequency converters, transformers, x-ray equipment,
and uninterruptible power systems.
2.6 inches from power conduits and cables and panelboards.
3.12 inches from fluorescent and high frequency lighting fixtures.
4.6 inches from flues, hot water pipes, and steam pipes.
B.Conduit, in Addition to Requirements of Section 260533.13:
1.Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent of two 90 degree bend(s) between
pull points.
2.Conduit Bends: Inside radius not less than 10 times conduit internal diameter.
3.Arrange conduit to provide no more than 100 feet between pull points.
C.Outlet Boxes:
1.Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 260533.16 as required for
installation of telecommunications outlets provided under this section.
a.Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows:
1)Data Outlets: 18 inches above finished floor.
b.Orient outlet boxes for vertical installation of wiring devices unless otherwise
indicated.
c.Provide minimum of 24 inches horizontal separation between flush mounted outlet
boxes installed on opposite sides of fire rated walls.
d.Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate outlet boxes for line voltage and low
voltage devices.
e.Locate outlet boxes so that wall plate does not span different building finishes.
f.Locate outlet boxes so that wall plate does not cross masonry joints.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND CABLING
A.Cabling:
1.Do not bend cable at radius less than manufacturer's recommended bend radius; for
unshielded twisted pair use bend radius of not less than 4 times cable diameter.
2.Do not over-cinch or crush cables.
3.Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended cable pull tension.
4.When installing in conduit, use only lubricants approved by cable manufacturer and do not
chafe or damage outer jacket.
5.Verify distance from each outlet to the farthest point of the CIT room does not exceed 295
feet. This distance must include the planned cable path as well as any vertical transitions.
B.Service Loops (Slack or Excess Length): Provide the following minimum extra length of cable,
looped neatly:
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
271005 - 5 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR
VOICE AND DATA -
INSIDE-PLANT
1.At Outlets - Copper: 12 inches.
C.Copper Cabling:
1.Category 6 and Above: Maintain cable geometry; do not untwist more than 1/2 inch from
point of termination.
2.For 4-pair cables in conduit, do not exceed 25 pounds pull tension.
3.Use T568A wiring configuration.
4.Provide cabling up to CIT room. Spool an additional 25 feet. All final terminations to
existing data racks to be by Owner.
D.Identification:
1.Entity providing final terminations shall provide identification.
2.CIT to provide all required identification.
3.Manufacturer- furnished label inserts, identification labels, engraved wallplates, etc. to be
furnished by contractor if required.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.See Division 1 Specifications for additional requirements.
B.Comply with inspection and testing requirements of specified installation standards.
C.Visual Inspection:
1.Inspect cable jackets for certification markings.
D.Testing - Copper Cabling and Associated Equipment:
1.Entity providing final terminations to perform testing. Cornell University CIT to perform all
final terminations in ITroom.
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
271501.23 - 1 AUDIO-VISUAL
COMMUNICATIONS
HORIZONTAL CABLING
SECTION 271501.23
AUDIO-VISUAL COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Audio-Visual cabling pathways
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Coordination:
1.Coordinate the work with Audio-Visual contractor.
2.Coordinate arrangement of communications equipment with the dimensions and clearance
requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.
3.Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain
direction before proceeding with work.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
2.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A.Audio-Visual contractor to furnish all audio visual low voltage cabling.
B.Install all cabling furnished by others.
C.Refer to drawing set prepared by Tomei AV Consulting LLC dated February 4, 2019 for
delineation of work between contractors.
2.02 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS
A.Install pathways with the following minimum clearances:
1.36 inches from motors, generators, frequency converters, transformers, x-ray equipment,
and uninterruptible power systems.
2.6 inches from power conduits and cables and panelboards.
3.12 inches from fluorescent and high frequency lighting fixtures.
4.6 inches from flues, hot water pipes, and steam pipes.
B.Conduit, in Addition to Requirements of Section 260533.13:
1.Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent of two 90 degree bend(s) between
pull points.
2.Conduit Bends: Inside radius not less than 10 times conduit internal diameter.
3.Arrange conduit to provide no more than 100 feet between pull points.
4.Do not use conduit bodies.
2.03 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND CABLING
A.Cabling:
1.Do not bend cable at radius less than manufacturer's recommended bend radius; for
unshielded twisted pair use bend radius of not less than 4 times cable diameter.
2.Do not over-cinch or crush cables.
3.Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended cable pull tension.
4.When installing in conduit, use only lubricants approved by cable manufacturer and do not
chafe or damage outer jacket.
B.Identification:
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
271501.23 - 2 AUDIO-VISUAL
COMMUNICATIONS
HORIZONTAL CABLING
1.Use wire and cable markers to identify cables at each end.
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
281000 - 1 ACCESS CONTROL
SECTION 281000
ACCESS CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Access control system requirements.
B.Access control point peripherals, including readers.
C.Accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 087100 - Door Hardware: Electrically operated door hardware, for interface with access
control system.
B.Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
C.Section 260533.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems.
D.Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.
E.Section 284600 - Fire Detection and Alarm: For interface with access control system.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.
B.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
C.UL 294 - Access Control System Units; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Coordination:
1.Coordinate the work with other installers to provide suitable door hardware as required for
both access control functionality and code compliance.
2.Coordinate the placement of readers with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc. installed
under other sections or by others.
3.Coordinate the work with other installers to provide power for equipment at required
locations.
4.Notify Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain
direction before proceeding with work.
B.Preinstallation Meetings:
1.Conduct meeting with facility representative to review reader and equipment locations.
2.Conduct meeting with facility representative and other related equipment manufacturers to
discuss access control system interface requirements.
3.Conduct meeting with facility representative from all University departments requiring
access to renovation space to coordinate programming of new access control points.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.See Division 1 Specifications for submittal procedures.
B.Shop Drawings: Include plan views indicating locations of system components and proposed
size, type, and routing of conduits and/or cables. Include elevations and details of proposed
equipment arrangements. Include system interconnection schematic diagrams. Include
requirements for interface with other systems.
C.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each system
component. Include ratings, configurations, standard wiring diagrams, dimensions, finishes,
service condition requirements, and installed features.
D.Certify that proposed system design and components meet or exceed specified requirements.
E.Evidence of qualifications for installer.
F.Evidence of qualifications for maintenance contractor (if different entity from installer).
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
281000 - 2 ACCESS CONTROL
G.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation, installation, and operation of product.
H.Manufacturer’s detailed field testing procedures.
I.Field quality control test reports.
J.Maintenance contracts.
K.Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of system components and installed wiring
arrangements and routing.
L.Operation and Maintenance Data: Include detailed information on system operation, equipment
programming and setup, replacement parts, and recommended maintenance procedures and
intervals.
1.Include contact information for entity that will be providing contract maintenance and
trouble call-back service.
M.Warranty: Submit sample of manufacturer's warranty and documentation of final executed
warranty completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
N.Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Comply with the following:
1.NFPA 70.
2.The requirements of the local authorities having jurisdiction.
3.Applicable TIA/EIA standards.
B.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
C.Installer Qualifications: The Contractor providing the security and/or access system must be
certified Lenel Level II (Lenel Silver Certification) or greater and licensed by New York State to
install security and access control systems.
D.Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging, keep dry and protect from damage until
ready for installation.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after
installation.
1.09 WARRANTY
A.See Division 1 Specifications for additional warranty requirements.
B.Provide minimum one year manufacturer warranty covering repair or replacement due to
defective materials or workmanship.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.Access Control System: Existing Lenel LNL-2220 Intelligent System Controller and
accompanying LNL-1320 Reader interface modules.
2.02 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A.Provide modifications and extensions to existing access control system consisting of all required
equipment, conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, hardware, supports, accessories, software,
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
281000 - 3 ACCESS CONTROL
system programming, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system that provides the
functional intent indicated. Provide LNL-1320 Dual Reader Interface Modules as required to
extend existing system.
B.Access Control Points:
1.Door Number 001:
a.Function: Emergency only.
b.Access: Controlled entry, free exit.
c.Peripherals on Secure Side:
1)Door position switch.
2)Alarm sounder.
2.Door Number [008]:
a.Function: Operational and emergency.
b.Access: Controlled entry, free exit.
c.Peripherals on Unsecure Side:
1)Reader/Keypad: Integrated access control device with REX, door position
switch, reader, and electric lock. Refer to Division 08 specifications.
d.Interface Requirements:
1)Provide interface with fire alarm system for fail secure operation upon alarm.
C.Interface with Other Systems:
1.Provide products compatible with other systems requiring interface with access control
system.
2.Interface with electrically operated door hardware as specified in Section 087100.
a.Capable of locking/unlocking/releasing controlled doors.
b.Capable of receiving input from integral door hardware switches.
3.Interface with fire alarm system as specified in Section 284600.
a.Capable of affecting access for designated doors for selected fire alarm system
events.
D.Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
1.Access Control Units and Readers: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 294.
2.03 ACCESS CONTROL UNITS AND SOFTWARE
A.Provide access control units and associated software compatible with readers to be connected.
B.Access Control Unit:
1.Basis of Design: LNL-1320.
2.Control Capability: 2 doors/ 2 readers.
2.04 ACCESS CONTROL POINT PERIPHERALS
A.Provide devices compatible with control units.
B.Provide devices suitable for operation under the service conditions at the installed location.
C.Provide readers compatible with credentials to be used.
D.Door Position Switches:
1.Magnetic Contacts: Encapsulated reed switch(es) and separate magnet; designed to
monitor opened/closed position of doors.
2.Contact Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's available standard colors.
3.Basis of Design Product(s):
a.GE 1076.
E.Door Locking Devices (Electric Strikes and Magnetic Locks): Comply with Section 087100.
F.Alarm Sounders:
1.Minimum Sound Output: 85 db.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A.Provide components as indicated or as required for connection of access control system to
devices and other systems indicated.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
281000 - 4 ACCESS CONTROL
B.Unless otherwise indicated, credentials to be provided by Contractor.
1.Provide credentials compatible with readers and control units/software to be used.
C.Provide cables as indicated or as required for connections between system components.
D.Provide end-of-line resistors (EOLR) as required for supervision of hardwired connections.
E.Provide accessory racks/cabinets as indicated or as required for equipment mounting.
F.Provide power supply capable of accepting a fire alarm input
1.115VAC / 60 Hz input
2.UL Listed for Access Control Systems (UL 294)
3.Conforms to NFPA 101 Life Safety codes.
4.Field selectable 12/24VDC
5.Short circuit and thermal overload protection
6.Basis of Design: Altronix AL175ULX2
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B.Verify that ratings and configurations of system components are consistent with the indicated
requirements.
C.Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive system components.
D.Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to
system.
E.Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.Install access control system in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
B.Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.Wiring Method: Unless otherwise indicated, use cables in conduit.
1.Use suitable listed cables in wet locations, including underground raceways.
2.Use suitable listed cables for vertical riser applications.
3.Cabling shall be run at least 18" away from electric or data lines. In the event that a cable
must cross over the path of an AC line, the cable must cross the path at a 90-degree angle
to the AC line, thus keeping EMF interference to a minimum.
4.Communication conductors shall be shielded twisted pairs; a minimum of 24 AWG/2-pair
stranded copper. Manufactured by Belden, model #9842 or equivalent
5.Low-voltage power conductors shall be unshielded twisted pairs; a minimum 18
AWG/4-conductor stranded copper between the power supplies and each downstream
device. Manufactured by Belden, model #9157 or equivalent.
6.Refer to drawings or manufacturer for additional cable model numbers.
7.Install wiring in conduit for the following:
a.Where required for rough-in.
b.Where required by authorities having jurisdiction.
c.Where exposed to damage.
d.Where installed outside the building.
e.For exposed connections from outlet boxes to devices.
8.Conduit: Comply with Section 260533.13.
9.Use power transfer hinges complying with Section 087100 for concealed connections to
door hardware.
10.Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum cable length between
components.
D.Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 260526.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
281000 - 5 ACCESS CONTROL
E.Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using
materials and methods specified in Division 7.
F.Identify system wiring and components in accordance with Section 260553.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.See Division 1 Specifications for additional requirements.
B.Provide services of a manufacturer's authorized representative to observe installation and assist
in inspection and testing. Include manufacturer's detailed testing procedures and field reports
with submittals.
C.Prepare and start system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D.Program system parameters according to requirements of Owner.
E.Test for proper interface with other systems.
F.Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire system complies with
contract documents.
G.Submit detailed reports indicating inspection and testing results and corrective actions taken.
H.A final test of the complete security installation shall be performed prior to considering the
installation complete. The installation's Construction Manager shall schedule a systems
commissioning with the Access Control Project Manager, Security Contractor/Installer, and
Electrical Contractor when applicable, two weeks prior to the completion of the installation of a
tentative testing date.
3.04 CLEANING
A.Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match
original factory finish.
3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A.Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of system to Owner, and correct deficiencies or
make adjustments as directed.
B.Provide a set of security system "as-built" drawings
3.06 PROTECTION
A.Protect installed system components from subsequent construction operations.
END OF SECTION
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
284600 - 1 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
SECTION 284600
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Fire alarm system design and installation, including all components, wiring, and conduit.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines; current edition.
B.ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.
C.IEEE C62.41.2 - IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage
(1000 V and less) AC Power Circuits; 2002 (Corrigendum 2012).
D.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
E.NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code; 2016.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.See Division 1 Specifications for submittal procedures.
B.Evidence of designer qualifications.
C.Design Documents: Submit all information required for plan review and permitting by authorities
having jurisdiction, including but not limited to floor plans, riser diagrams, and description of
operation:
1.Copy (if any) of list of data required by authority having jurisdiction.
2.NFPA 72 "Record of Completion", filled out to the extent known at the time.
3.Clear and concise description of operation, with input/output matrix similar to that shown in
NFPA 72 Appendix A-7-5-2.2(9), and complete listing of software required.
4. System zone boundaries and interfaces to fire safety systems.
5. Location of all components, circuits, and raceways; mark components with identifiers used
in control unit programming.
6. Circuit layouts; number, size, and type of raceways and conductors; conduit fill
calculations; spare capacity calculations; notification appliance circuit voltage drop
calculations.
7. List of all devices on each signaling line circuit, with spare capacity indicated.
8. Manufacturer's detailed data sheet for each component, including wiring diagrams,
installation instructions, and circuit length limitations.
9. Description of power supplies; if secondary power is by battery include calculations
demonstrating adequate battery power.
10. Certification by either the manufacturer of the control unit or by the manufacturer of each
other component that the components are compatible with the control unit.
11. Certification by the manufacturer of the control unit that the system design complies with
the contract documents.
12. Certification by Contractor that the system design complies with the contract documents.
13. Do not show existing components to be removed.
D. Evidence of installer qualifications.
E. Evidence of maintenance contractor qualifications, if different from installer.
F. Inspection and Test Reports:
1. Submit inspection and test plan prior to closeout demonstration.
2. Submit documentation of satisfactory inspections and tests.
3. Submit NFPA 72 "Inspection and Test Form," filled out.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
284600 - 2 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
G. Operating and Maintenance Data: See Division 1 for additional requirements; revise and
resubmit until acceptable; See Division 1 for additional requirements; revise and resubmit until
acceptable; have one set available during closeout demonstration:
1. Complete set of specified design documents, as approved by authority having jurisdiction.
2. Additional printed set of project record documents and closeout documents, bound or filed
in same manuals.
3. Contact information for firm that will be providing contract maintenance and trouble
call-back service.
4. List of recommended spare parts, tools, and instruments for testing.
5. Replacement parts list with current prices, and source of supply.
6. Detailed troubleshooting guide and large scale input/output matrix.
7. Preventive maintenance, inspection, and testing schedule complying with NFPA 72;
provide printed copy and computer format acceptable to Owner.
8. Detailed but easy to read explanation of procedures to be taken by non-technical
administrative personnel in the event of system trouble, when routine testing is being
conducted, for fire drills, and when entering into contracts for remodeling.
H. Closeout Documents:
1. Certification by manufacturer that the system has been installed in compliance with
manufacturer's installation requirements, is complete, and is in satisfactory operating
condition.
2. NFPA 72 "Record of Completion", filled out completely and signed by installer and
authorized representative of authority having jurisdiction.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Designer Qualifications: NICET Level III or IV (3 or 4) certified fire alarm technician or
registered fire protection engineer, employed by fire alarm control panel manufacturer,
Contractor, or installer, with experience designing fire alarm systems in the jurisdictional area of
the authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Installer Qualifications: Firm with minimum 3 years documented experience installing fire alarm
systems of the specified type and providing contract maintenance service as a regular part of
their business.
1. Authorized representative of control unit manufacturer; submit manufacturer's certification
that installer is authorized; include name and title of manufacturer's representative making
certification.
2. Installer Personnel: At least 2 years of experience installing fire alarm systems.
3. Supervisor: NICET level III or IV (3 or 4) certified fire alarm technician; furnish name and
address.
C. Maintenance Contractor Qualifications: Same entity as installer or different entity with specified
qualifications.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Provide control panel manufacturer's warranty that system components other than wire and
conduit are free from defects and will remain so for 1 year after date of Substantial Completion.
B. Provide installer's warranty that the installation is free from defects and will remain so for 1 year
after date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Existing Fire Alarm Control Units and Accessories - Basis of Design: Gamewell-FCI FC-72
Conventional FACP.
B. Initiating Devices and Notification Appliances:
1. Honeywell Security & Fire Solutions/Gamewell-FCI: www.gamewell-fci.com/#sle.
2. System Sensor: www.systemsensor.com .
3. Same manufacturer as control units.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
284600 - 3 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
4. Provide initiating devices and notification appliances made by the same manufacturer,
where possible.
2.02 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
A. Fire Alarm System: Provide modifications and extensions to the existing automatic fire
detection and alarm system:
1. Provide all components necessary, regardless of whether shown in the contract
documents or not.
2. Protected Premises: as shown per drawings.
3. Comply with the following; where requirements conflict, order of precedence of
requirements is as listed:
a. ADA Standards.
b. The requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction. Robert Fell-DeWalt, Senior
Code Inspector for the City of Ithaca Building Division.
c. Applicable local codes.
d. The contract documents (drawings and specifications).
e. NFPA 72; where the word "should" is used consider that provision mandatory; where
conflicts between requirements require deviation from NFPA 72, identify deviations
clearly on design documents.
B. Circuits:
1. Initiating Device Circuits (IDC): Class B, Style B.
2. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC): Class A, Style Z.
C. Spare Capacity:
1. Initiating Device Circuits: Minimum 25 percent spare capacity.
2. Notification Appliance Circuits: Minimum 25 percent spare capacity.
3. Fire Alarm Control Units: Capable of handling all circuits utilized to capacity without
requiring additional components other than plug-in control modules.
D. Power Sources:
1. Primary: Dedicated branch circuits of the facility power distribution system.
2. Secondary: Storage batteries.
3. Capacity: Sufficient to operate entire system for period specified by NFPA 72.
2.03 EXISTING COMPONENTS
A. Modify Existing Fire Alarm System
2.04 FIRE SAFETY SYSTEMS INTERFACES
A. HVAC:
1. Duct Smoke Detectors: Provide with remote LED indicator, test, and reset.
2. Unit Shutdown: Provide relays for HVAC unit shutdown as indicated per contract
documents.
B. Doors:
1. Electromagnetic Door Locks on Egress Doors: Fire alarm output to fire door for fail secure
operation of electric lock. Door to have integral exit hardware for free egress. Refer to
Section 087100.
2.05 COMPONENTS
A. General:
1. Provide flush mounted units where installed in finish areas; in unfinished areas, surface
mounted unit are acceptable.
2. Provide legible, permanent labels for each control device, using identification used in
operation and maintenance data.
B. Initiating Devices:
1. Manual Pull Stations:
a. Provide 1 extra.
2. Duct Smoke Detectors: .
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
284600 - 4 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
a. Provide 1 extra.
b. Provide remote testing, indicator, and reset. Mount in accessible location.
3. Heat Detectors: .
a. Temporarily replace existing smoke detectors in construction area with heat
detectors.
C. Notification Appliances:
1. Horn/Strobes: .
a. Provide 1 extra.
2. Strobes:
a. Provide 1 extra.
D. Circuit Conductors: Copper; provide 200 feet extra; color code and label.
1. Conductors shall be #18 AWG minimum stranded THHN unless otherwise recommended
by manufacturer for the application.
2. Conductors shall be #14 AWG minimum stranded THHN for notification appliance circuits
E. Surge Protection: In accordance with IEEE C62.41.2 category B combination waveform and
NFPA 70; except for optical fiber conductors.
F. Instruction Charts: Printed instruction chart for operators, showing steps to be taken when a
signal is received (normal, alarm, supervisory, and trouble); easily readable from normal
operator's station.
1. Frame: Stainless steel or aluminum with polycarbonate or glass cover.
2. Provide one for each control unit where operations are to be performed.
3. Obtain approval of Owner prior to mounting; mount in location acceptable to Owner.
4. Provide extra copy with operation and maintenance data submittal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with applicable codes, NFPA 72, NFPA 70, and the contract documents.
B. Conceal all wiring, conduit, boxes, and supports where installed in finished areas.
C. Obtain Owner's approval of locations of devices, before installation.
D. Provide lettered plate containing the equipment identification (custom panel number, area
served), as well as power circuit source and breaker number for Supplementary Notification
Appliance Circuit Panel. Label shall be plastic lamicoid engraved plated or approved equal. All
plates shall be reviewed and approved by CU EHS prior to installation.
E. Install instruction cards and labels.
1. Provide computer-generated adhesive labels and install on the bases of all initiating device
and notification appliances, as well as any remote test and monitoring station. The label
shall indicate the address and must be legible from a standing position below.
2. NAC labels: FACP/Board - Loop/cct #
3. Initiating Device circuit labels: Loop/cct #
3.02 INSPECTION AND TESTING FOR COMPLETION
A. Notify Owner 7 days prior to beginning completion inspections and tests.
B. Notify authorities having jurisdiction and comply with their requirements for scheduling
inspections and tests and for observation by their personnel.
C. Provide the services of the installer's supervisor or person with equivalent qualifications to
supervise inspection and testing, correction, and adjustments.
D. Prepare for testing by ensuring that all work is complete and correct; perform preliminary tests
as required.
E. Provide a complete set of As-builts within 15 days of final Acceptance Test.
F. Provide all tools, software, and supplies required to accomplish inspection and testing.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
284600 - 5 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
G. Perform inspection and testing in accordance with NFPA 72 and requirements of local
authorities; document each inspection and test.
H. Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire system complies with
contract documents.
I. Diagnostic Period: After successful completion of inspections and tests, Operate system in
normal mode for at least 14 days without any system or equipment malfunctions.
1. Record all system operations and malfunctions.
2. If a malfunction occurs, start diagnostic period over after correction of malfunction.
3. Owner will provide attendant operator personnel during diagnostic period; schedule
training to allow Owner personnel to perform normal duties.
4. At end of successful diagnostic period, fill out and submit NFPA 72 "Inspection and Testing
Form."
J. Fire Alarm program list to be provided to EH&S for review and approval prior to release to the
fire alarm vendor. This effort is to allow for the fire alarm device descriptors and room numbers
to be coordinated prior to entering into the fire alarm panel, as well as to verify the programming
and operational sequence.
K. Acceptance Testing
1. Provide minimum (72) hours prior notice to EH&S and AHJ
2. Complete and submit Program sheets to EH&S
3. Ensure that the system is pre-tested
L. Coordinate specified duration of fire alarm training based upon the final FACP selection.
M. Two reprograms of the system by the Manufacturer’s Representative after the panel has been
accepted by Cornell University’s Environmental Health & Safety at no additional cost, charge, or
fee to Cornell University.
3.03 CLOSEOUT
A. Closeout Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of all functions to Owner.
1. Be prepared to conduct any of the required tests.
2. Have authorized technical representative of control unit manufacturer present during
demonstration.
3. Demonstration may be combined with inspection and testing required by authority having
jurisdiction; notify authority having jurisdiction in time to schedule demonstration.
4. Repeat demonstration until successful.
B. Project as Builts:
1. Provide a complete set of fire alarm "As-built" drawings that include, but is not limited to:
a. Auxiliary panel locations (supplemental notification appliance circuit panels and power
supplies)
b. Initiation and notification device, relay module locations
c. Special system interface locations
d. Complete fire alarm riser diagram that depicts wiring between FACP and all fire alarm
system components. Such detail shall include all major equipment and their locations
(approved room number designation), zone/loop wiring connections to initiating
devices, SNAC wiring to notification appliances, and interconnections to other special
systems as designed per this standard.
e. Circuit breaker locations for all accessory panels that receive building power.
Locations shall include room number in which the power panel is located, as well as
the breaker number that serves the equipment. Circuit breakers to all fire alarm
equipment shall be labeled in red and have a lock out installed on them to prevent
accidental power shut off.
3.04 MAINTENANCE
A. See Division 1 Specifications for additional requirements relating to maintenance service.
18382.00 / 18382.00 Cornell
Carpenter Hall
284600 - 6 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
B. Perform routine inspection, testing, and preventive maintenance required by NFPA 72,
including:
1. Maintenance of fire safety interface and supervisory devices connected to fire alarm
system.
2. Repairs required, unless due to improper use, accidents, or negligence beyond the control
of the maintenance contractor.
3. Record keeping required by NFPA 72 and authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Provide trouble call-back service upon notification by Owner:
1. Provide on-site response within 2 hours of notification.
2. Include allowance for call-back service during normal working hours at no extra cost to
Owner.
3. Owner will pay for call-back service outside of normal working hours on an hourly basis,
based on actual time spent at site and not including travel time; include hourly rate and
definition of normal working hours in maintenance contract.
D. Provide a complete description of preventive maintenance, systematic examination, adjustment,
cleaning, inspection, and testing, with a detailed schedule.
E. Comply with Owner's requirements for access to facility and security.
END OF SECTION
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC EXCAVATIONS 312000
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Page 1 of 15
312000
EXCAVATIONS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. The Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services
necessary to complete the earthwork as shown on the drawings and/or specified
herein, including but not necessarily limited to the following:
1. La ying out and staking all lines and levels.
2. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, lawns, and
plantings.
3. Excavating and backfilling for footings, foundations and below-grade
construction.
4. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical
utilities and pits for buried utility structures.
5. Base course for asphalt pa ving, concrete walks and pavements.
6. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches.
7. Dewatering.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for temporary tree protection,
temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures, site stripping,
grubbing, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and
utilities.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation.
1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench,
including haunches to support sides of pipe.
2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
B. Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt
paving.
C. Bedding Course: Layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before
laying pipe.
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC EXCAVATIONS 312000
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Page 2 of 15
D. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
E. Drainage Course: Course supporting the slab-on -grade that also minimizes
upward capillary flow of pore water.
F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations.
1. Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations as
directed by Engineer. Additional excavation and replacement will be paid
for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.
2. Bulk Excavation: Excavations more than 10 feet (3 m) in width and pits
more than 30 feet (9 m) in either length or width.
3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or
be yond indicated dimensions without direction by Engineer.
Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Engineer,
shall be without additional compensation.
G. Fill: Soils materials used to raise existing grades.
H. Rock: Rock materials in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, and conglomerate
deposits and boulders of rock material exceeding 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) for bulk
excavation or ¾ cu. yd. (0.57 cu. m) for footing, trench, and pit excavation that
cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to the following in
si ze and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering,
ripping, or blasting, when permitted:
1. Excavation of Footings, Trenches, and Pits: Late-model, track-
mounted hydraulic excavator; equipped with a 42-inch (1065 mm) wide,
short-tip-radius rock bucket; rated at not less than 120-hp (89 kW)
flywheel power with bucket-curling force of not less than 25,000 lbf (111
kN) and stick-crowd force of not less than 18,700 lbf (83 kN); measured
according to SAE J-1179.
2. Bulk Excavation: Late -model, track-mounted loader; rated at not less
than 210 hp (157 kW) flywheel power and developing a minimum of
45,000 lbf (200 kN) breakout force; measured according to SAE J-732.
I. Structure s: Building, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs,
mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features
constructed above or below the ground surface.
J. Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and base course for
hot-mix asphalt pavement, or course placed between the subgrade and a cement
concrete pavement or setting bed for unit pavers.
K. Subgrade: Surface or ele vation remaining after completing excavation, or top
surface of a fill or backfill immediately below base, drainage fill, or topsoil
materials.
L. Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well
as underground services within buildings.
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC EXCAVATIONS 312000
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Page 3 of 15
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Each type of plastic warning tape.
2. Separation fabric.
3. Filter fabric.
4. Slab Subbase Material
5. Structural Fill
6. Material submittals shall include NYSDOT approved source numbers,
gradations, proctors and soundness test results.
B. Samples:
1. 12-b y-12 inch (300-by-300 mm) sample of separation fabric.
2. 12-b y-12 inch (300-by-300 mm) sample of filter fabric.
C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and
interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements
indicated:
1. Classification according to AST M D 2487 of each on-site or
borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill.
2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557 for each on-site or
borrow soil material proposed for subbase material, fill and backfill.
3. Laboratory sieve analysis test results according to ASTM C136 for all
imported granular materials.
D. Preexcavation Photographs or Videotape: Show exi sting conditions of
adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that
mi ght be misconstrued as dama ge caused by earthwork operations. Submit before
earthwork begins.
E. Excavations greater than or equal to 20 feet in depth require engineered
systems designed per OSHA requirements, si gned and sealed by a professional
engineer, and submitted for re view.
F. Plan for protection of persons passing excavations including diagram or
description of means and methods to protect Cornell Community from project
hazards through duration of the project shall be submitted for review.
1.05 QUALIT Y ASSURANCE
A. Preexcavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements in Division 1 Section “Project Meetings.”
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC EXCAVATIONS 312000
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Page 4 of 15
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities servicing facilities occupied by
Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Engineer and then only after
arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements
indicated:
1. Notify Engineer or Owner not less than two days in advance of
proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer’s written
permission.
3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before
excavating.
B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities
indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services
if lines are active.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 SOIL MATERIALS
A. General : Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil
materials are not available for excavations.
B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW,
SP, and SM or a combination of these groups symbols; free of rock or gravel
larger than 3 inches (75 mm) in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen material,
vegetation, and other deleterious matter.
C. Unsatisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH,
CL, CH, OL, OH, and PT, or a combination of these group symbols.
1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained
within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.
D. On Site Material: All on-site material to be used as fill shall be soil or soil-rock
mixture which is free from organic matter and other deleterious substances. It
shall contain no rocks or lumps over 4 inches in greatest dimension.
E. Imported Fill Material (non-structural): Imported fill material shall consist of
clean, well-graded sand and/or gravel containing less than 15 percent by weight
of materials passing a No. 200 sieve and a maximum particle size of 4 inches.
F. Slab Subbase and Structural Fill: NYS DOT T ype 2 or T ype 4 subbase course
complyin g with the requi rements of NYS DOT 304-2.
G. Backfill and Fill: Satisfactory soil materials.
H. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed
gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC EXCAVATIONS 312000
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Page 5 of 15
90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent
passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
I. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed
gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least
95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent
passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
J. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed
gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least
90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent
passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
K. Bedding Stone: Clean, sound, durable, sharp-angles fragments of rock of
uniform quality and conforming to NYSDOT Material Desi gnation 703-0201,
Size Designation No. 1 or 1A.
L. Drainage Stone - #57 Stone: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone,
or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Si ze
57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2 -inch (37.5-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent
passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve.
M. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or
crushed stone and natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Si ze
67; with 100 percent passing a 1- inch (25-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing
a No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve.
N. Cushion Sand: Clean, hard, durable, uncoated particles, free from lumps of
clay and all deleterious substances conforming to the following limits of
gradation when dry:
Percent Passing by Weight Sieve Size
100 1/4 inch
0 to 35 No. 50
0 to 10 No. 100
2.02 GEOT EXTILES
A. Filter Fa bric: The nonwoven filter fabric should be Mirafi 160n as
manufactured by Mirafi, Geotex 601 by Propex, GT -160 by Industrial
Fabrics, Inc., or approved equal. Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile,
manufactured for subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or
polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; complying with
AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced:
Minimum Average Value Test Method
1. Grab Tensile Strength: 160 lbs (712 N) AST M D 4632
2. Tear Strength: 60 lbf (267 N) AST M D 4533
3. Puncture Resistance: 410 lbf (1825 N) AST M D 4833
4. Apparent Opening Size: No. 70 (0.212-mm)
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC EXCAVATIONS 312000
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Page 6 of 15
5. Permittivity: 1.5 per second, min. AST M D 4491
6. UV Stability: 70 percent after 500 hours' exposure AST M D 4355
B. Separation Geotextile: The geotextile fabric for pavement stabilization shall be
Mirafi 500X as manufactured by Mirafi, AMOCO 2002, Synthetic Industries
200ST or approved equal. The geotextile fabric shall be woven fabric of onl y
continuous chain polymeric filaments or yarns of polyester. The fabric shall be
inert to commonly encountered chemicals, hydrocarbons, mildew, and rot
resistant. The fabric shall be UV stabilized with the following properties:
Minimum Average Value Test Method
1. Grab Tensile Strength: 200 lbs (890 N) ASTM D
4632 2. Tear Strength: 75 lbf (334 N) ASTM D
4533 3. Puncture Resistance: 700 lbf (3115 N) ASTM D
4833 4. Apparent Opening Size: No. 40 (0.43-mm)
5. Permittivity: 0.5 per second, min. ASTM D
4491 6. UV Stability: 70 percent after 500 hours'
exposure
ASTM D
4355
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape
manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches (150
mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuousl y inscribed with a description
of the utilit y; colored as follows:
B. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film
warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6
inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a
description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for
corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30
inches (750 mm) deep; colored as follows:
1. Red: Electric.
2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.
3. Orange: Telephone and other communications.
4. Blue: Water systems.
5. Green: Sewer systems.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 UNDERGROUND UTILITY SURVEY
An underground utility survey must be conducted prior to the start of any excavation.
Call 811.
3.02 INSPECT ION
A. Examine the areas and conditions where earthwork is to be installed and correct
any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC EXCAVATIONS 312000
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Page 7 of 15
Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to
permit proper installation of the work.
3.03 PREPARAT IO N
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from
damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and
other hazards created by earthwork operations.
B. Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of
vege tation, topsoil, debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground
surface is specified in Division 31 Section "Site Clearing."
C. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified
in Division 31 Section "Site Clearing," during earthwork operations.
D. Provide protective insulating materials to protect subgrades and foundation
soils against freezing temperatures or frost.
3.04 DEW ATERING
A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from
ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding
area.
1. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to
prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil
changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide
and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and
other dewatering system components necessary to convey water from
excavations. Maintain water levels below base of excavation to control
hydrostatic pressure on subgrade soils.
2. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversion
outside excavation limits to convey rain water and water removed from
excavations to collecting or run-off areas. Do not use trench excavations
as temporary drainage ditches.
B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by
rain or water accumulation.
1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow
water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as
temporary drainage ditches.
2. Install a dewatering system as needed to keep subgrades dry and
convey ground water away from excavations. Maintain until dewatering
is no longer required.
3.05 EXPLOSIVES
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC EXCAVATIONS 312000
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Page 8 of 15
A. Explosi ves: Do not use explosives.
3.06 EXCAVAT ION, GENERAL
A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the
character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified
excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No
changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock
excavation or removal of obstructions.
1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include
unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil
materials.
B. Stability of Excavations: Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes
and ordinances having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible
because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated. Maintain sides
and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling.
C. Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory exca vated materials where directed
until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper
drainage.
1. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not
store within drip line of trees indicated to remain.
2. Dispose of excess soil material and waste materials not re-used.
3.07 EXCAVAT ION FOR STRUCTURES
A. Excavate to indicate elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or
minus 1 inch (25 mm). Extend excavations a sufficient distance from
structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services
and other construction, and for inspections.
1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of
excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade j ust before placing
concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to
leave solid base to receive other work.
2. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical
Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions within a
tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). Do not disturb bottom of
excavations intended for bearing surface.
3.08 EXCAVAT ION FOR W ALKS AND PAVE MENTS
A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections,
elevations, and subgrades.
3.09 EXCAVAT ION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC EXCAVATIONS 312000
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Page 9 of 15
A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.
1. Trench excavations shall be carried to the lines and pipe subgrades shown
on the Contract Drawings, or as otherwise stated in the specifications.
2. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top
of pipe below frost line.
3. The Contractor is responsible for excavation of all material
encountered, and trench widths for pipes shall be held within the
minimum and maximum limits shown on the Contract Drawings except
where safety standards dictate a modification in trench side slopes.
4. Contractor is solely responsible for meeting all applicable safety standards.
5. Excavation shall be such that a flat bottom trench of allowable width is
established at the required subgrade elevation for subsequent installation
of pipe foundation material.
6. If indicated on the Contract Drawings or when required as a result of
unsuitable soil conditions, trench excavation shall be carried below the
required subgrade and a special pipe foundation installed. In an y event,
the Contractor's operations shall result in st able trench walls and a stable
base, free from standing water, in accordance with trench width
requirements.
7. Bedrock, boulders and cobbles greater than 6 inches shall be trimmed
back or removed on all faces of the trench so that no rock protrudes within
6 inches of any installed pipe.
8. In general, trenches shall not be opened for more than 50 feet in
advance of installed pipe. Excavation of the trench shall be fully
completed at least 10 feet in advance of pipe laying operation.
9. No trenches shall be left unsecured overnight.
B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each
side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom
to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Clearance: 12 inches (300 mm) on each side of pipe or conduit.
2. Clearance: As indicated.
C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing
and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support
from bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of
conduit. Remove projecting stones and sharp obj ects along trench subgrade.
1. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in
rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.
D. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches (100 mm) deeper than bottom of
pipe elevation to allow for bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe. .
1. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in
rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.
3.10 APPROVAL O F SUBGRADE
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC EXCAVATIONS 312000
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Page 10 of 15
A. When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, notify Engineer
and/or Landscape Architect who will make an inspection of conditions.
B. If Engineer and/or Landscape Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present,
continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.
C. Additional Excavation:
1. If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at required subgrade
elevations, carry excavations deeper and replace excavated material
as directed by the Engineer. Excavation of unsuitable material must
extend laterally beyond the edge of the footing or slab for a distance equal
to or greater than the required depth of the excavation.
D. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for
according to Contract provisions change s in the work.
1. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain,
accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect,
without additional compensation.
3.11 UNAUT HORIZED EXCAVATION
A. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated
subgrade elevations or dimension without specific direction of Engineer.
Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Engineer, shall be
at Contractor’s expense.
B. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending
bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom,
without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used when approved by
Engineer.
1. Fill unauthorized excavation under other construction or utility pipe
as directed by Engineer.
3.12 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A. Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory excavated soil materials. Stockpile
soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to
drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store
within drip line of remaining trees.
3.13 BACKFILL
A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the
following:
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC EXCAVATIONS 312000
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Page 11 of 15
1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable,
subdrainage, dampproofing, Waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.
2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents.
3. Inspecting and testing underground utilities.
4. Removing concrete formwork.
5. Removing trash and debris.
6. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing or horizontally
supported walls. 7. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.
8. Under base course for walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil
material. 9. Under building slabs, use Struct ural Fill.
3.14 UT ILIT Y TRENCH BACKFILL
A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated.
Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and
barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.
C. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches (450 mm)
of bottom of footings with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete
is specified in Division 03
Section "Cast-in -Place Concrete."
D. Place and compact initial backfill or bedding material to a height shown on
drawings over the utility pipe or conduit.1. Carefully compact initial backfill
under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full
length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of
piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.
E. Backfill voids with engineered fill while installing and removing shoring and
bracing.
F. Backfill excavated areas under existing and proposed pavements, including
driveways to subgrade elevations with engineered fill. Place backfill from top
of bedding material to pavement subgrade in maximum 8 inch lifts, each lift
compacted at or above 95 percent maximum density.
G. Backfill excavated areas adjoining structures up to subgrade elevation with
engeineered fill unless shown otherwise on Drawings. Place backfill in
maximum 6 inch lifts, each lift compacted at or above 95 percent maximum
density.
H. Backfill excavated areas under lawns or improved areas to topsoil subgrade
with on site material. Place backfill from top of bedding material to topsoil
subgrade in maximum 12 inch lifts, each lift compacted at or above 92 percent
maximum density.
I. Employ placement and compaction methods that do not disturb or damage
adjacent work.
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC EXCAVATIONS 312000
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Page 12 of 15
J. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill material to attain required
compaction density.
K. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished
grade, except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
3.15 FILL
A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials,
obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface before placing fills.
B. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4
horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material.
C. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:
1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.
2. Under base course for walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.
3. Under building slabs, use structural fill.
4. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.
3.16 MOISTURE CONT ROL
A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill
layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen,
or contain frost or ice.
2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dr y, otherwise satisfactory soil
material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too
wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.
3.17 COMPACTION OF BACKFILLS AND FILLS
A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in
loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not
more than 4 inches (100 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by hand-
operated tampers.
B. Place backfill and fill materials evenl y on all sides of structures to required
elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure.
C. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit
weight according to ASTM D 1557:
1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and
recompact top 12 inches (300 mm) of existing subgrade and each laye r of
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC EXCAVATIONS 312000
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Page 13 of 15
backfill or fill material at 95 percent of Modified Proctor at +/- 2% of
optimum moisture content.
2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below
subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 92 percent.
3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches
(150 mm) below subgrade and compact each la yer of backfill or fill
material at 85 percent.
3.18 GRADING
A. General : Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular
surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross
sections, lines, and elevations indicated.
1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new
grades.
2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with
required surface tolerances.
B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent
ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:
1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
2. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (13 mm).
3.19 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES
A. Place subbase and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course under pavements and walks as
follows:
1. Install separation geotextile on prepared subgrade according to
manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends.
2. Shape subbase course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.
3. Place subbase course 6 inches (150 mm) or less in compacted thickness in
a single layer.
4. Place subbase course that exceeds 6 i nches (150 mm) in compacted
thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than
6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than 3 inches (75 mm) thick.
5. Compact subbase course at optimum moisture content to required
grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of
maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557.
C. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to
prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches (300 mm) wide,
of satisfactory soil materials and compact simultaneously with each subbase and
base layer to not less than 95
3.20 PREPARAT IO N OF SOFT SUBGRADE AREAS
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC EXCAVATIONS 312000
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Page 14 of 15
A. For isolated sections where, due to variable soil conditions or deeper fills, it is
not feasible to obtain 85 percent of Standard Proctor density by proof-rolling,
excavate the unstable areas and replace with 8" compacted lifts of fill complying
with NYSDOT 304-1 T ype 1. Onsite soils may be used if accepted as
equivalent by Engineer. Fill to elevations, lines and grades as per subgrade
design, in preparation for ba se courses.
3.21 FIELD QUALIT Y CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical
engineering testing agency to perform field qualit y-control testing.
B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill la yer.
Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously
completed work comply with requirements.
C. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D
1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable.
Tests will be performed as the following locations and frequencies:
1. Paved Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at
least one test for every 200 sq. ft. (186 sq. m) or less of paved area, but
in no case fewer than three tests.
2. T rench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at
least one test for each 150 feet (46 m) or less of trench length, but no fewer
than two tests.
D. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not
achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or
remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified
compaction is obtained.
3.22 PROT ECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly grades areas from traffic, freezing, and
erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.
B. Repair and reestablish grades to specify tolerances where completed or
partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose
compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.
1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by
Engineer; reshape and recompact.
C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove
finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct
surfacing.
1. Restore appearance, qualit y, and condition of finished surfacing to match
adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent
REVIEWED BY: JEC REVISED BY: JEC EXCAVATIONS 312000
DATE: 1/28/19 DATE: 1/28/19 Page 15 of 15
possible.
3.23 SHORING AND BRACING OF EXCAVATIONS
A. Contractors are advised that they are re quired to comply with Occupational
Safety and Health Administration’s (OSHA) standards pertaining to excavations.
3.24 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND W ASTE MATERIALS
A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including
unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner’s
property.
END OF SECTION 312000